SITRAIN:

Training for Industry

Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Gleiwitzer Str. 555
90475 NÜRNBERG SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES - Maintenance
DEUTSCHLAND Course DR-MD-IH

siemens.com/sitrain
 1 Safety for personnel and equipment

2 Product info

SITRAIN
Training for Automation
and Industrial Solutions 3 Basic knowledge

SIMOVERT
4 Software-Tool DriveMonitor
MASTERDRIVES
Maintenance

Course DR-MD-IH 5 Checking and maintenance

6 Practical exercises

Name:
Vector Control,
7
Course from: to: Extract from Compendium

Trainer:

Training site:
Vector Control,
8
Extract from Operating Instructions
This document was produced for training purposes.
SIEMENS assumes no responsibility for its contents. The
reproduction, transmission, communication or use exploitation
of this document or its contents is not permitted without
express written consent authority. Offenders will be liable to
damages. Non-compliances with this prohibition make the
offender inter alia liable for damages. Vector Control,
9
Copyright © Siemens AG 2013. All rights, including Extract from Circuit-Diagrams
particularly the rights created by to file a by patent and/or
other industrial property right application and/or cause the
patent and/or other industrial property right to be granted
grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

Vector Control,
SITRAIN courses on the internet: www.siemens.com/sitrain 10
Faults and Alarms
Course folder Version: V3.4.1
SITRAIN

Safety for personnel

and equipment

© Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved.

Table of contents

Contents Page
Safety rules.....…....……………………....……………………....……………………....………………... 3
Warnings………………....……………………....……………………..................................................... 4
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD).……....……………………....……………………....………….... 5

SITRAIN
Safety for personnel and equipment Page 2 Siemens AG © 2013
The five safety rules

The following rules must always be followed before

starting work:

• Isolate the equipment (on input and output side)

• Protect against re-energizing
• Make sure that the equipment is de-energized
• Ground and short-circuit
• Cover or place guards around adjacent live parts

SITRAIN
Safety for personnel and equipment Page 3 Siemens AG © 2013
Warning notices

When these devices are operated, it is inevitable that certain components will be subject to
dangerous electrical voltage levels. Touching these components may lead to serious physical
injury or even death. The following precautions must be taken in order to reduce the risk to life
and limb.

• Only qualified personnel who are familiar with this device and the information supplied with it should be charged
with work on the device involving troubleshooting and fault correction or repair.
• The device must be installed, operated, and repaired in accordance with safety regulations (e.g. EN, DIN, or VDE)
as well as all other applicable national or local regulations.
• Following repair, the device must be operated with all covers supplied. During operation, all covers and doors shall
be kept closed.
• Before carrying out visual inspections and repair work, ensure that the device is de-energized and locked. Before
the AC power supply is shut down, both the converter equipment and the motor are at dangerous voltage levels.
These may be present even when the converter equipment's line contactor is disabled. After disconnection of the
drive converters from the supply, live appliance parts and power terminals must not be touched immediately
because of possibly energized capacitors >>> check zero-potential!!!
• If measurements need to be taken while the power supply is switched on, under absolutely no circumstances
touch the electrical connection points. Remove all jewelry from the wrists, fingers, and neck. Make sure that the
measuring and test equipment is in good condition and is safe to operate.
• When working on a device that is switched on, stand on an insulated surface, i.e. make sure that you have no
connection to ground.
• Operating the device in the immediate vicinity (< 1.5 m) of mobile radio equipment with a transmitter power
of > 1 W may lead to incorrect operation of the device.

SITRAIN
Safety for personnel and equipment Page 4 Siemens AG © 2013
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

The electronic modules contain electrostatic sensitive devices. These devices/components

are referred to by the acronym ESD, which is also the international abbreviation for such
devices. These components can be easily destroyed if not handled correctly. Where work
on electronic modules is unavoidable, the following precautions should be observed:

• You should only touch electronic modules if absolutely necessary.

• If you do have to touch modules (the control cabinet housing, for example), your body must be electrically
discharged immediately prior to touching them.
• Modules must not be brought into contact with highly insulating materials, e.g. plastic parts, insulating tabletops,
or clothing made from synthetic fibers.
• Modules may be set down only on conductive work surfaces. If no suitable work surface is available,
the original metalized plastic bag in which the module was packed or an old newspaper will do.

• If you hand the module over to another person, you should first greet that individual with a handshake.
This will equalize the potential between you and the module can then be passed on at no risk.

• Modules and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging, such as metalized plastic
boxes or metal containers.
• If the packaging is not conductive, the modules must be wrapped in a conductive packaging material, such as
conductive foam rubber or household aluminum foil, prior to placing them in the packaging.

SITRAIN
Safety for personnel and equipment Page 5 Siemens AG © 2013
SITRAIN

Overview and
Product info

© Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved.

Table of contents

Contents Page
Product replacement and innovation .................................................................................................. 4
One converter series for all types of motors....................................................................................... 5
Power ratings and hardware design SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.................................................. 6
One converter series for all requirements .......................................................................................... 7
Converter (AC-AC-units) and inverter (DC-AC-units)......................................................................... 8
DC-busbar Interconnection………………………………………..…..................................................... 9
Multi-Drive system / Free-wheeling diode on the DC link.................................................................. 10
Compact PLUS unit............................................................................................................................ 13
Compact unit...................................................................................................................................... 17
Chassis I unit...................................................................................................................................... 21
Range of units / Pulsefrequency / Power-“Derating”.......................................................................... 22
Modular intelligence …....................................................................................................................... 23
Electronic box.............................................................…..................................................................... 24
Option boards..................................................…............................................................................... 26
Memory for operating system and user parameters ….…................................................................. 29
Common operator control philosophy ............................................................................................... 30
Superposed intelligence / integrated and on technology boards……................................................. 31
Concept of communication………………........................................................................................... 32
SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 2 Siemens AG © 2013
Table of contents

Contents Page
Linking drive- and automation-level …………………….…................................................................. 34
SIMOLINK…………..…….................................................................................................................. 35

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 3 Siemens AG © 2013
 Product replacement and innovation

End of 1997

(CU1 board) Main application

with induction
FC Frequency Control motors.
Everything new,
V/f control
with BICO
technology
(CU2 board) (CUCV board / Compact Plus VC)

VC Vector Control VC (new)

V/f control and vector control

(CU3 board) (CUMC board / Compact Plus MC)

SC Servo Control MC
Use for controlling AC servo motors
Main application with
compact induction
motors or servo
motors.
Everything new,
with BICO technology
and F01 technology
package
SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 4 Siemens AG © 2013
 One converter series for all types of motors

SIMOVERT VC
Standard induction motors 1LA1, 1LA5, 1LA6,
1LA7, 1LA8

Reluctanz motors 1FU8

Compact induction motors 1PA6, 1PL6,

1PH4, 1PH7,
Built-in asynchronous 1PH2
motor

SIMOVERT MC
Synchron-Servomotors 1FT6, 1FK6

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 5 Siemens AG © 2013
Power ratings and hardware design /
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

Compact Chassis Cabinet

PLUS Compact unit unit

0.5 - 18.5 kW 2.2 - 37 kW 45 - 2300 kW 45 - 8600 kW

VC (Vector Control) 8600KW

MC (Motion Control) 750KW

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 6 Siemens AG © 2013
One converter series for all requirements

Power rating / kW : 0.5 2.2 15 45 55 250 750 1300 1700 2300

3-ph.
660V AC - 15%
690V AC +15% VC
50/60Hz +6%

3-ph.
500V AC - 15%
575V AC +15% VC
50/60Hz +6%

3-ph.
MC
380V AC - 15%
480V AC +10%
50/60Hz +6% VC

3-ph.
208V AC - 15% with single- or four-quadrant rectifier and
230V AC +10% VC multiparallel-inverter up to 7500kW
50/60Hz +6%

Compact

Compact PLUS Chassis I, II

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 7 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter (AC-AC-units) and
inverter (DC-AC-units)

Umrichter AC-AC units

Converter Inverter DC-AC units
Wechselrichter
(3ph.-supply)
(3 AC - Netzanschluß) (DC-bus)
(Gleichspannungsschiene)

= = =
6x
6x =
or
12x
or
M M M M M M M
3 AC 3 AC 3 AC T 6x 3 AC 3 AC 3 AC 3 AC T

UDC = Usupply * 1,35 = 400V * 1,35 = 540V (with load) Exception:

Infeed unit Infeed unit UDC = Usupply* 2 = 400V * 1,414 = 565V (without load) AFE

DC-link

Inverter Inverter

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 8 Siemens AG © 2013
DC-busbar Interconnection,
Compact PLUS, Compact PLUS  Compact
AC unit AC unit AC unit
0.55 kW / 1.5 A 1.1 kW / 3 A 1.5 kW / 5 A

oder
AC DC AC DC AC DC DC AC DC AC DC DC
1,5 A 2A 3A 4A oder 3A 2A 2A 5A 6A 5A 4A 2A
oder
2A

AC unit Overall current of inverters exceeding 8A or

3 kW / 8 A more than two inverters on DC-link
DC-link

AC DC DC AC DC DC LM DC DC DC
8A 4A 4A
oder 8A 6A 2A
RU DC DC DC DC RU DC DC
8A 4A 4A 2A RR
(2 A) (2 A) (2 A) (2 A)

M ...
...
Notice: The following must be observed for multi-motor systems. M

- Infeed power of the converter

- Power of the electronic power supply
- Pre-charging of all DC link capacities

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 9 Siemens AG © 2013
Multi-Drive system /
Free-wheeling diode on the DC link

1.
DC link
connection
Infeed:
Diode rectifier
Inverter
or transistor unit

2.

M M M
3-ph. 400V AC
Example:
3. Unwinding/winding unit
Advantages:
1. Energy exchange between drives (braking/driving)
Typical: Machine tools with multiple axes
Typical: Unwinding unit (regenerative) and winding unit (motorized) combined
2. Joint use of DC link components (braking resistors, capacitor modules)
3. Only one connection to the line: lower costs for line-side components and their installation
4. Designs supported for controlled deceleration and retraction motions in the event of power failure
SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 10 Siemens AG © 2013
Multi-Drive system /
Free-wheeling diode on the DC link

In a fault scenario, the fuses

disconnect the faulty power unit from
the rest of the system.
If this were not the case, all of the
DC-link energy would be discharged
in the failed transistors.

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 11 Siemens AG © 2013
Multi-Drive system /
Free-wheeling diode on the DC link
DC-link
Common rectifier unit, 200 kW DC link + free-wheeling-diode
chassis-type, size E (intermediate circuit)

DC-link fuses

Braking unit

Inverter, 2.2 to 37 kW
sizes B to D
Power switch with
fuse switch- Line-side Inverter, 90 kW
disconnector commutation reactor Output reactors
chassis-type, size F

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 12 Siemens AG © 2013
Compact PLUS,
AC-AC and DC-AC unit location of connection terminal

mains supply –X1 DC-link busbar -X3

braking resistor, –X6 PE
capacitor modul DC –

external DC 24V input –X9 DC+

Display
24 V = output
RS485 (USS) -X100

Bus terminating slot A

resistor (USS) S1 for option boards

terminal strip
input and outputs -X101 slot A
for option boards

serial interface for terminal strip -X102 For Motion Control,

commissioning -X103
slot C is reserved for the
puls encoder connection evaluation module of the
-X104 motor encoder.

motor connection -X2

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 13 Siemens AG © 2013
 Compact PLUS,
AC-AC unit block diagram

24 V External power
option supply

PMU
Terminal strip
Option
boards
P
Measured
Internal values
power UDC, IL1,IL3
supply
24 V
UDC link
Control
signals

U1/L1
U2/T1
V1/L2 V2/T2 M
W1/L3 W2/T3 3 AC

Rectifier Precharging circuit Inverter

C/L+ G

D/L-
H
UDC link DC link must be
100% precharged within 3 s,
80%
Bypass contactors ON: or else F02 Braking resistor
- UDC link > 80% t Chopper
option
PE1 PE2
- Inverter ON signal

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 14 Siemens AG © 2013
Compact PLUS,
rectifier-unit block diagram

C/L+
U1/L1

V1/L2 DC-link
treminals
W1/L3 D/L-

rectifire
precharging circuit

power supply 24V 24V for

24V UZK chopper
option
C´ G
precharging
capacitor-modul D´
H

braking resistor
option
chopper

PE1 PE2

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 15 Siemens AG © 2013
Compact PLUS,
DC-AC unit block diagram

Mandatory! 24V External power

option supply

PMU

options- terminal strip

boards
P
measuring
values
UDC, IL1,IL3 option!
safe
OFF

control-
signals
C/L+
U2/T1
V2/T2 M
D/L-
W2/T3 3~

Wechselrichter

PE1 PE2

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 16 Siemens AG © 2013
 Compact,
AC-AC and DC-AC unit location of connection terminal

DC link -X3 Main contactor control,

ext. 24 V voltage supply (input)
-X9Mains supply -X1
(only AC-AC units)

Electronics box:
Display (PMU)

Connection terminals for

programmable digital USS serial
and analog input and interface -X300
output signals; terminals for servicing or
for the serial interface commissioning
USS2.
With VC control:
Pulse encoder terminal

+ slots for
2 large or 6 small
option boards

Motor connection -X2

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 17 Siemens AG © 2013
Compact,
AC-AC unit block diagram

External power
24V supply
option
PMU
+ -
-X9:1 2
terminal strips I
options-
boards Control electronic 0 P
serial
(boards. CUVC; CUMC) interface
flatcable

measuring
e.g. +24V X9: 7 internal values
power UDC, IL1,IL3
supply
9 24V
UZK
control-
signals

U1/L1
U2/T1
V1/L2 V2/T2 M
W1/L3 W2/T3 3~

rectifier precharging circuit inverter

C/L+

D/L-

PE1 PE2

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 18 Siemens AG © 2013
Compact,
DC-AC unit block diagram

24V External power

option supply
PMU

terminal strips I
options-
boards Control electronic 0 P
serial
(boards. CUVC; CUMC) interface
flatcable

measuring
internal values
power UDC, IL1,IL3
supply safe
option!
OFF
24V
UZK
control-
signals
C/L+
U2/T1
V2/T2 M
D/L-
W2/T3 3~

inverter

PE1 PE2

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 19 Siemens AG © 2013
Compact,
DC-AC unit - special features

Note the following with respect to AC-AC concerter devices:

A 230V fan is installed in drive converters, type of construction D.
The fan is supplied via the fan transformer. To supply the fan with
230V, the primary side of the fan transformer must be adjusted to the
existing line voltage via the plug connector (Connection 2). (For
supply voltage range, see terminal).

Note the following with respect to DC-AC inverter devices:

An extrernal aux. voltage of 230V AC must connected to F101 and
F102 in the case of construction D. The aux. voltage is needed for
the fan in the unit.

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 20 Siemens AG © 2013
 Chassis I,
AC-AC unit block diagram
external
24V power
option supply

terminal strips PMU

option-
Note: boards I
control electronics (boards CUVC, CUMC)
Select external fan O P
rating suitable for serial
interface
actual line voltage!!! IVI

-X9:4 measuring
values
M U.DC
3ph i.L1, i.L3
internal control-
-X9:5 power signals
supply

24V
PSU PCC PSU IGD
U.DC

U1/L1 U2/T1
U1/L1 U2/T1
mains V1/L2
supply V1/L2
α180° = blocking V2/T2
V2/T2
motor M
α 0° = operation terminals
W1/L3
W1/L3
W2/T3 3 AC
operation-rect. W2/T3
inverter
DC-link
Note the following with respect
PCU
to DC-AC inverter devices: C/L+
The 230 V fan must be supplied I precharge DC-link
with 230 V AC externally via the terminals
terminal strip -X18:1/5 on the
D/L-
PSU. precharging-rect.

PE1 PE2

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 21 Siemens AG © 2013
Range of units / Pulsefrequency / Power-“Derating”

range of setting the (1) rated-pulse- (2)

line voltage type
pulse frequency frequency

3 AC 208 - 230 V A-D 1 - 16 kHz 6 kHz (1) Apart from the range of
setting reactors and filters
used in the output circuit
3 AC 380 - 480 V A-D 1 - 16 kHz 6 kHz have to be considered
E 1 - 9 kHz 6 kHz
(2) Setting a pulse-frequency
F 1 - 7.5 kHz 6 kHz (P340) larger than the rated
pulse-frequency may result
G 1 - 6 kHz 3 kHz
in a limiting (derating) of the
H, J 1 - 6 kHz 3 kHz maximum unit current (P128)

>K 1 - 3 kHz 3 kHz

3 AC 500 - 575 V A-C 1 - 16 kHz 6 kHz

D, E 1 - 9 kHz 3 kHz
F 1 - 7.5 kHz 3 kHz
G, H 1 - 6 kHz 3 kHz

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 22 Siemens AG © 2013
Modular intelligence

Basic electronics
 Drive-related open-loop and closed-loop
control
 Binector/ connector technology
 Self-optimization
 Diagnostic- and tracefunction

Technology software (F01, MC only)

 Angular synchronous operation
 Cam disks
 Positioning
 Automatic operation
 Synchronization
 Customized solutions

Communications
 PC- and external control coupling
(USS protocol)
 PROFIBUS DP
 Direct drive-to-drive coupling
(SIMOLINK)

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 23 Siemens AG © 2013
Electronic box,
Position- and slot-designation

Elektronics-box

CUVC
CUMC

Local Bus Adapter

(LBA)

Adapter board
(ADB)

CUVC / CUMC Compact / Chassis

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 24 Siemens AG © 2013
Electronic box,
Installing option-boards

Mounting position 1 for

CUVC or CUMC
Mounting position 3
Mounting position 2

or or
Local Bus Adapter Technology board Adapter board Interface board Adapter board
LBA T100 EB1 SCB1 EB1
T300 EB2 SCB2 EB2
T400 CBP2 CBP2
SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 25 Siemens AG © 2013
Option boards,
sensor boards, Communication boards and Expansion boards

Option boards
Encoders (sensor boards)
A - SBR1/2 Resolver
- SBM2 Multiturn Encoder (EnDat,SSI)
B
Sin/Cos Encoder
- SBP Pulse encoder

Field bus (Communication boards)

- CBP2 PROFIBUS DP
- CBC CAN
- CBD DeviceNET
- CBL CC-Link
A FF D
Fast technology link
Slot
Slot
- SLB SIMOLINK
C G E I/O-boards (Expansion boards)
- EB1/2 Analog-, Digital I/O

position 1 3 2

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 26 Siemens AG © 2013
Option boards,
Technology board T100

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 27 Siemens AG © 2013
Option boards,
Technology board T300 / T400

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 28 Siemens AG © 2013
 Memory for operating system and user parameters

Current firmware User data

version VC FW 3.4 Operating Parameter e.g. motor data,
program logic operations Software tool: DriveMonitor
with factory settings values
up to approx. 2002
Simovis
FLASH EEPROM
Parameter changes
made via the PMU are
always stored in the
EEPROM 2nd step

1st step
PMU RAM RAM

Processor Processor
for administration for high-speed
measurements
DPR

ASIC ASIC
Note: Data transfer
Data are always uploaded RAM to EEPROM
from the RAM IGBTs P971 = 1 UDC
IL1,IL3

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 29 Siemens AG © 2013
Common operator control philosophy

PMU

Vector Control

Motion Control

DC-Master

E/R-unit

AFE

Techn .-boards.

OP1 S
PC

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 30 Siemens AG © 2013
 Superposed intelligence / integrated and on
technology boards

PC/PG SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC S7/ M7 SIMADYN D

Technology
centralized

A B C D E F G H
/ 7 8 9
I J K L M N O P
F1 F2 * 4 5 6
Q R S T U V W X
F3 F4 - 1 2 3
Y Z : \ = , ( )
F5 F6 + . 0 +/-
TAB INS
F7 F8 DEL

ALT
F9 F10

4 4
A -Z
A -Z
CTRL
F11 F12
SHIFT

SIMADYN
F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20

K H
SIMATIC 1 SIMATIC D
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 S7 M7
K9 K10 K 11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 1
6 7

PROFIBUS DP

Technology
decentralized
SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIMOLINK
SIMOVERT SC SIMOVERT SC
6SE7016- 1EA30 6SE7016- 1EA30
WR 2,2 kW WR 2,2 kW
Nr. 467321 Nr. 467321

CNC

MICRO MASTER COMBI MASTER SIMOREG MASTERDRIVES VC MASTERDRIVES MC SIMODRIVE

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 31 Siemens AG © 2013
Concept of communication,
“older” units

PC/PG
PLC- Control-
system system

SIMATIC SIMADYN D Standardized

field bus for all
PROFIBUS DP automation
tasks
USS-Protokoll - for diagnosis &
 service
- basic automation
 tasks
Communication Communication PC
MICRO Technologie
Technology Technologie
Technology
MASTER DriveMon.
Commu-

Commu-

Commu-
nication

MASTER DC-
nication

nication
SIMOVIS
DRIVES Master Tools für
 Service, diagnosis
 Commissioning
 Engineering
 Operation,
Drive-to-drive coupling Monitoring
SIMOLINK for fast signal cascading

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 32 Siemens AG © 2013
Concept of communication,
“today”

Control / Monitoring Engineering DriveMonitor / SIMOVIS

Automation Tools for
 Service, diagnosis
PC PC/PG  Commissioning
- PLC  Parameterization
- IPC
- Control-
system
PROFIBUS DP Standardized
field bus for all
- automation tasks
- engineering
- Control &
Monitoring

MICRO/ Technologie Technologie

MIDI
MASTER MASTER SIMOREG
DRIVES

SIMOLINK Fiber-optic cable ring for high performance

synchronized drive-to-drive coupling

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 33 Siemens AG © 2013
 Linking drive- and automation-level

PC/PG SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC S7/ M7 SIMADYN D

A B C D E F G H
/ 7 8 9
I J K L M N O P
F1 F2 * 4 5 6
Q R S T U V W X
F3 F4 - 1 2 3
Y Z : = , ( )
F5 F6 + .\ 0 +/-
TAB INS
F7 F8 DEL

ALT
F9 F10 A -Z

4 4
A -Z
CTRL
F11 F12
SHIFT

SIMADYN
F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20

K H
SIMATIC 1 SIMATIC D
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 S7 M7
K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 1
6 7

PROFIBUS DP

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIMOVERT SC SIMOVERT SC
SIMOLINK
6SE7016- 1EA30 6SE7016- 1EA30
WR 2,2 kW WR 2,2 kW
Nr. 467321 Nr. 467321

MICRO MASTER COMBI MASTER SIMOREG MASTERDRIVES VC MASTERDRIVES MC

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 34 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
features

 Fiber-optic cable ring for data transfer; each node acts as signal amplifier

 Maximum of 200 nodes

 Node functions: Transceiver, Dispatcher

 Extremely high net data flow: i. e. one hundred 32-bit-data in 630 µs

 Jitter-free synchronization (quarz clock accuracy)

 Large data transmission distances (30m / 300m)

 Net data transfer:

- "Master-Slave"-functionality
- "Peer-to-Peer"-functionality
SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 35 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
Peer-to-peer functionality, Master-Slave functionality

SIMADYN or SIMATIC
SIMADYN D

Master

SIMOLINK SIMOLINK Adr. 0

Transceiver

Transceiver
Transceiver

Transceiver
Transceiver
Dispatcher

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIMOVERT SC
SIMOVERT SC SIMOVERT SC SIMOVERT SC SIMOVERT SC SIMOVERT SC
6SE7016- 1EA30
WR 2,2 kW 6SE7016- 1EA30 6SE7016- 1EA30 6SE7016- 1EA30 6SE7016- 1EA30 6SE7016- 1EA30
Nr. 467321 WR 2,2 kW WR 2,2 kW WR 2,2 kW WR 2,2 kW WR 2,2 kW
Nr. 467321 Nr. 467321 Nr. 467321 Nr. 467321 Nr. 467321

Source address principle Target address principle

Principle: each node can send (write) and/or Principle: master sends up to eight 32-bit data to
receive (read) any eight 32-bit data each transceiver ; each transceiver
sends up tp eight 32-bit data to master

SITRAIN
Overview and Product info Page 36 Siemens AG © 2013
SITRAIN

Basic knowledge

© Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved.

Table of contents

Contents Page
Operation of an induction motor (via fixed mains / via converter)…................................................... 4
Principle function of a converter……………....................................................................................... 6
Overload operation……….................................................................................................................. 7
Four-quadrant operation……………………………………………….................................................... 9
Line-side components ……………………………............................................................................... 18
Load-side components …………………………….……….................................................................. 19
Principle of a Converter…………………………………….................................................................... 26
Pulse Width Modulation…………………………………….................................................................... 27
Parameterization…………………………………………………………………...................................... 38
Binector and Connector technique..................................................................................................... 41
Data sets…………………………………….......................................................................................... 43
Control- and Status-Words................................................................................................................. 44
Analog inputs and outputs…………………………………………………………................................... 45
Time slots…………………………………………………....................................................................... 48
Number systems………………………………………………............................................................... 49
SIMOLINK…………………………………........................................................................................... 54
Generation of torque …………........................................................................................................... 61
Principle of vector control………………………………………............................................................. 62
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 2 Siemens AG © 2013
Table of contents

Contents Page
Automatic optimization……………………........................................................................................... 63
Speed control……………………………………………….................................................................... 72
Comparison: Speed control < ---- > Frequency control…………….................................................... 79
Frequency control ………………………………………….................................................................... 80
V/f- control……………………………………….................................................................................... 81
Conversion of energy / electrical < -- > mechanical …………………….…….................................... 89
Converter functions…………………………………………………........................................................ 90

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 3 Siemens AG © 2013
Operation of an induction motor
(via fixed mains / via converter)

Advantags:
Advantage: - Adjustable speed
- Inexpensive drive - Speeds > nsynchronous
AC
AC
- No starting current

Disadvantage:
400 V Disadvantages: 0 ... U.line
50 Hz
- High purchase costs
- High starting current 0 ... f.line ... f.max
- Not controllable
400 V - Max. synchronous speed 400 V
IND 50 Hz IND 50 Hz
1450 rpm 1450 rpm

f.stator = f.line
f.rotor = f.stator - f.slip
f.slip = function [ type of motor, load ]
no load operation : slip = 0
rated load : slip = rated slip (for the given example : 50 1/min)

s.synchronous = ( f.stator x 60 ) / number of pole pairs

(for the given example : 1500 1/min)
s.rotor = ( f.rotor x 60 ) / number of pole pairs

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 4 Siemens AG © 2013
Operation of an induction motor
(via fixed mains / via converter)

Mains operation: Converter operation:

M M

Mbreak
down 1
M Kipp 
n2

1
Mn Mn Mn 
Typical n
operating point

nn n nn n

n (Slip) Constant flux area Field weakening area

• Any speed can be selected

• Full torque is still available at standstill without requiring more current than at the
Advantages of
rated speed
converter operation:
• Speeds of more than 3000 rpm can be reached with field weakening

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 5 Siemens AG © 2013
Principle function of a converter

motor

1/8 rated converter current < rated motor current

voltage torque (current)

inverter rectifier generator motor

operation operation operation operation

current speed

rectifier inverter motor generator

operation operation operation operation

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 6 Siemens AG © 2013
Overload operation,
load cycle

I.inv.
I.inv. > I.12 t.1 + I.2 2 t.2
I.11 peak current
t.1 + t.2

I.1 short time overload current

I.2
base load current

t/s
t.1 t.2
T

limit conditions limit conditions limit conditions

VC > 200kW (400VAC) MC Compact, MC chassis MC Compact Plus
VC up to 200kW (400VAC)

I.1 < 1.36 I / I.rated (t.1 = 60 s) I.1 < 1.6 I / I.rated (t.1 = 30 s) I.1 < 1.6 I / I.rated (t.1 = 30 s)

I.11 : not available I.11 : not available I.11 < 3.0 I / I.rated (t.1 = 0.25s)

T = 300 s T = 300 s T = 300 s

on exceeding t.1 the current is reduced to 0.91 I.rated

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 7 Siemens AG © 2013
Overload operation,
load cycle

I.inv. / I.inv.rated
Overload: Baisic load:
1.60
1.1
1.50 base load current = 0%
1.2
1.40 0.91
1.3
1.30 base load current = 70% 1.4
0.80
1.20 1.5
0.60
1.10 1.6
base load current = 91% 0.40
1.00
0.20
overload ( >100%) not in combination with sine- rsp. dv/dt-filter
t1 / s t2 / s

30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 t/s 60 40 20 20 40 60 80

Load cycle:

40s x 1,6 Irated + 60s x 0,2 Irated

40s x 1,4 Irated + 40s x 0,8 Irated

Attention: Drive is overloaded

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 8 Siemens AG © 2013
Four-quadrant operation,
with Braking units and braking resistors

Note:
U Converter
Umrichter
Connection of ballast resistor With multi-drive systems,
W Inverter
Wechselrichter
at UDC link= 673 V or 774 V fuses must be fitted in the
positive and negative branches E Einspeiseeinheit
Infeed unit
(threshold switch located P Pulswiderstand
Braking resistor
to protect against catastrophic
behind front plate). damage.

U E

P W W W

AC AC AC AC

Compact PLUS type unit:

The connection threshold for the ballast resistor can be set in P74.
Note:
P74 must never be set lower than the peak rectification value at
the maximum possible line voltage.
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 9 Siemens AG © 2013
Four-quadrant operation,
with option Rectifier/Regenerative unit (RR) or Active Front End (AFE)

Inverter shoot-through (if regen.

feedback voltage is higher than
line voltage). The IGBT firing cycle is 5 kHz; the IGBTs
can be blocked at any time (200 µs).

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 10 Siemens AG © 2013
Four-quadrant operation,
Rectifier/Regenerative Unit

Thyristor Thyristor
energy flow
rectifier rectifier,
feeding: Inverter
(motive) (regenerative)
Commutation
reactor

Autotransformer
ca. 1,2 · UNetz

energy flow
regenerating:

Autotransformer

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 11 Siemens AG © 2013
 Four-quadrant operation,
Line-side with thyristor bridge and Inverter shoot-through

• Low-cost
• Possibility of
inverter shoot-through
• Harmonics,
Auto-
particularly when feeding back
trans-
former
approx. 1.2 · Usupply
Inverter operation Inverter shoot-through
= feeding back on system voltage dip

Ûphase = 1.2 · 570 V = 680 V

U U
UDC = 570 V

t t

Thyristor is fired. As Uphase > UDC I = 0: Thyristor is Thyristor Current rises in

Time in accordance with the Thyristor is inhibited again. fired remains the manner of a
required current flow conductive short-circuit
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 12 Siemens AG © 2013
Four-quadrant operation,
Schematic diagram / 6-pulse and 12-pulse rectifier bridge

rect.1
motor
I.line
I.line inv.1

rect.1

I.1
y inv.1
D i.e. Dy5d0
motor
or Dy11d0
I.line d

rect.2
I.line M
I.2
t inv.2

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 13 Siemens AG © 2013
Four-quadrant operation,
Harmonics of 6/12 –pulse rectifier bridge compared to Active Front End

6,0%

5,0%

Harmonic Voltage Level

4,0%
Active Front End
12 pulse
6 pulse
3,0%

2,0%

1,0%

0,0%
2

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25
Harmonic Order

VSB CUA CUVC

C+ C+

U2 U2
V2 V2
W2 D - D -
CPF
W2

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 14 Siemens AG © 2013
Four-quadrant operation,
Operating principle of a Active Front end

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2

i(t)

W = 0.5 L i(t)2
t

u.DC(t)

sqrt (2) u.Netz U = sqrt (2 W / C)

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 15 Siemens AG © 2013
 Four-quadrant operation,
Voltage Boost with Active Front End

The principle: Advantages of an AFE

IL - Feeding brake energy back into the mains
- No blown fuses when line power fails during brake mode
ULoad - Feeding in- and out with sinus shaped current
+ - Reactive power compensation possible
U S1 -Self clocked converter with IGBTs
- - Application for 4-quadrant-drives with frequent braking
- DC-Link voltage stabilizer at weak power lines

- The capacitor C becomes charged up to the voltage level U.

- Switch S1 closes and the current IL rises. The magnetizing of the inductivity L increases, L stores energy
(the content of energy of the inductivity L increases. ).
- Switch S1 opens. The current through an inductivity cannot change abruptly, but continues to flow via the diode and the
capacitor. By that the capacitor becomes even charged more. The magnetic energy from inductivity L will be stored as
electrical energy in the capacitor C .

Controlled switching of S1 keeps the voltage ULoad independent from input voltage and independent from the load.

- The more often S1 gets switched, the better ULoad becomes controlled and the more continuous the current IL will be.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 16 Siemens AG © 2013
Four-quadrant operation,
Operating principle of the cos φ controller

I.supply
I.Netz

U.Netz
U.supply U.AFE

U.supply
U.Netz
U.AFE
U.AFE U.Netz
U.supply U.Supply
U.Netz
U.AFE U.supply
U.Netz
U.AFE
ZZ i.supply
i.Netz U.AFE

u.Netz
u.supply
u.AFE
I.Netz
I.supply ZZi.supply
i.Netz
I.Netz
I.supply

u.Netz
u.supply
u.AFE
U.supply
U.Netz 
U.AFE ind. U.Netz
U.supply
U.AFE U.AFE
I.Netz
U.AFE U.Netz
U.supply
Z Z i.Netz
i.supply i.Netz
i.supply
U.Netz
U.supply I.Netz
I.supply

u.AFE

u.Netz
u.supply I.Netz
I.supply
I.supply 
ind.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 17 Siemens AG © 2013
Line-side components (options)

Line fuses Main switch

Line
• For protection of the supply line • This switch disconnects the voltage to the converter
• Always required • Depending on the system, this can also be achieved
• If connection cables are long, arrange it close to via the main switch for the entire machine
the branch to the supply system • Can be designed as a switch disconnector with or
• Alternatively, semiconductor fuses as additional without fuses
protection for line rectifier (SITOR 3NE1...),
particularly with thyristor-based units
Main contactor
• Not essential
• For remotely-controlled disconnection, e.g. from a
control room
• Used if the converter is to be disconnected from the
Line reactors supply system when a fault occurs

• Reduce the harmonic effects on the supply

• Protect the converter against high harmonic RFI suppression filters
currents • Reduce the harmonic effects
• Necessary for supply systems with high short- on the supply
circuit power, i.e. with low impedance • Required if limit values have
to be observed for industrial
areas (A) or residential areas
(B) in accordance with the
EMC law
MASTER
DRIVES
Note universal residual current protection !

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 18 Siemens AG © 2013
 Load-side components (options)

Output filters, output reactors

• Required if long motor cables are used. If multiple MASTER
motors are connected to the inverter (group drives), DRIVES
the lengths of the individual cables must be added
together!
• Limit charge/discharge currents due to the parasitic
capacitances of the cable.
• Reduce the stress on the motor insulation due to the
sharp voltage rise of the pulse-width modulation.
• Depending on cable length: Output reactors or filters
or a combination of both (not for MD MC !)
• Output reactors: Sine-wave filter
- Inexpensive solution
dv/dt filter

Output contactor, maintenance switch

• Not an essential requirement, but if installed,
leading opening auxiliary contacts should be looped
into the pulse enable circuit.
• In the event of an EMERGENCY-OFF, the motor
can be de-energized.
• If several motors are to be switched on selectively
• If a bypass circuit is to be implemented
Motor
M
Output ferrite-cored reactor Output iron-cored reactor

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 19 Siemens AG © 2013
 Load-side components,
Additional current load due to long cables

M U

Equivalent circuit diagram of the cable with t

parasitic inductances and capacitances Converter output voltage:

t
Cable not shielded Cable shielded
Converter output current:
The longer the motor cables, the higher their cable capacitance.
The commutation processes involved in pulse-width modulation result in charge/
discharge currents (caused by cable capacitance), which are superimposed on the
actual motor current and place a load on the converter. Iron-cored reactor with: f.Pulse < 3 kHz
Even with unshielded cables, a capacitance must be taken into account in fMotor ≤ 120Hz
accordance with cable installation. Ferrite core reactor with: f.Pulse > 3 kHz
fMotor ≥ 120Hz
In order to prevent tripping of the inverter with fault message "Overcurrent" when
long cables are used, output reactors must be installed for cable lengths in up to four series-connected reactors
excess of the limits prescribed in catalog DA65.10.

No reactors and therefore no long motor cables can be installed for

MASTERDRIVES MC. However, a maximum permissible distance limit between
the inverter and motor often applies anyway due to the encoder cables.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 20 Siemens AG © 2013
Load-side components,
Maximum cable lengths

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 21 Siemens AG © 2013
 Load-side components,
Voltage stress on motor by Converter operation

UPulse UPulse
ZConverter = ZCable = ZMotor
bis zu 3 U.Netz
UPulse U.ZK
ZConverter ≠ ZCable ≠ ZMotor 1 s

U
Reflection
of the wave
t on the motor
dv/dt = 5 to 10 kV/µs
Motor voltage characteristic:
Reflection of the 2·UDC link develops briefly as a result of
wave on the superimposition of wave crestsThe wave is
converter The voltage rise can be cleared by the cable's ohmic resistance after
considered in the same terms as approximately 1s.
a wave motion
(physical: traveling wave)

Causes problems for: Countermeasure:

• Third-party motors with poor insulation or an unknown withstand voltage • Voltage limitation filter (output dv/dt filter)
• 1LA motors are voltage-proof up to ULine = 500 V. --> dv/dt < 500V/µs
For 690 V, 1LA motors with reinforced insulation are provided. • Sine-wave filter --> sinusoidal current and voltage
• Applications in hazardous areas due to the high voltage at the motor with 5% distortion factor
terminal plate.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 22 Siemens AG © 2013
Load-side components,
Impact of the voltage – gradient filter (dv/dt-filter)

dV / dt ~ 5kV /µs dV / dt ~ 500V /µs

~ 500V ~ 500V

100ns 1µs
Dv/dt filters reduce the voltage rate-of-rise to values of dv/dt ≤ 500V/µs. Further,
the voltage spikes occurring at the motor are reduced to a maximum of
approximately. 1,35 * UZK.

The maximum permissible pulse frequency is limited to 3 kHz, so that the dv/dt
filter is not overloaded. For the same reasons, the motor feeder cable should not
exceed a specific length.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 23 Siemens AG © 2013
Load-side components,
Impact of the sine filter

• Operation with a sinusoidal filter is only permissible for motor feeder

cable lengths, specified in Catalog DA 65.10 (250m up to and
exceeding 1000m depending on the power and cable type). Otherwse,
undesirable reonance effects could occur and the sinusoidal filter could
be overloaded.
• Sinusoidal filters are suitable for supplying Ex(d) motors. They limit the
voltage stessing in the motor terminal.
• Sinusoidal filters are tuned for a pulse frequency of 6 kHz (230V to
460V supply voltage) or 3 kHz (500V to 575V supply voltage) and can
be used at these pulse frequencies..
• Sine-wave filters available only for converter outputs up to maximum
132 kW and supply voltages up to maximum 575 V.
• When using sinusoidal filters, the drive conveters or inverters are only
operated with sinusoidal modulation space vector modulation. This
means that the drive converter output voltage, and therefore the motor
voltage, are limited to a maximum of 85% (90% at 500V) of the line
supply
• Relative expensive

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 24 Siemens AG © 2013
 Load-side components,
Impact of the sine-wave filter

Output voltage upstream of the sine-wave filter

Note:
• Overmodulated space
vector or edge modulation
cannot be deployed in
conjunction with sine-wave
filters.
• The pulse frequency must
be set to 6kHz or 3kHz

Output voltage downstream of the sine-wave filter

As a consequence, the
maximum output current is
reduced by 25% with
converters or inverters.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 25 Siemens AG © 2013
Principle of a Converter

Converte

Rectifier DC link Inverter

Motor

U U
t
t
U
t
Mains connection: e.g. Capacitors with rectified mains voltage
t
3 AC, 400V Approx. 1.35 x 400V = 540V

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 26 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Principle

Transistors operate
as switches
DC-Link Output voltage Motor current (value
voltage to the motor determined by load)
UA IA

t t t t

UA IA

t t t t

UA IA

t t t t

Pulse frequency: fPuls = 2 ... 16 kHz

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 27 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Output Current

A sinusoidal mean voltage value can be

produced by constantly changing the
pulse width modulation

= Output voltage
= Output current
Phase U
t

Phase V
t

Phase W

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 28 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Phase sequencing and voltage level control

1 2 3
L1
DC-link L2
motor
L3

4 5 6

switching transistor nr. voltage potentials at the input resulting

condition (X = closed) voltage pointer
1 2 3 4 5 6
- L1
1 X X X Z1 Z1

L2 + + L3 Z2
-
Z6
2 X X X
Z2
- +
+ Z3
3 X X X Z3 Z5
- +
Z4
X
+ - UA
special X X
conditions Z0
X X X
+ + - -
t
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 29 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Space Vector Modulation / Position of the Voltage Pointer

t.P
t.P Z1
Z1
t
t Z2
Z0
t t
effektive Effective
effektive pointer position:
Zeigerlage : 1515 degree
Grad
rmsZeigerlänge : i.e.75%
voltage value: Z.eff = 75%

t.P
t.P Z1
Z1
t
t Z2
Z0
t t

effektive effektive pointer

Effective Zeigerlage : 3030
position: Grad
degree
rmsZeigerlänge : Z.eff
voltage value: = 25%
i.e.25%

t.P
Z1
Z.eff = Z1 + Z2
Z1 t

Z1 Z2

t
Z2 effektive pointer
Zeigerlage : 4545
Grad
Effective position: degree

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 30 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Instantaneous Value Voltage Pointer Control
u(t)

Z1 Z1

Z2 Z6 Z2

Z3 Z5

Z4

t.P t.P t.P

Z1 Z1 Z1

t t t
Z2 Z2 Z2

t t t

Effective
effektiv pointer Zeigerlage
wirksame position: 45: degree
45 Grad Effective
effektiv pointer position:
wirksame Zeigerlage:30 degree
30 Grad Effective
effektiv pointer Zeigerlage
wirksame position: 15: degree
15 Grad
rms voltage
effektive value::i.e.40%
Spannung i.e. 40% effektive Spannung
rms voltage : i.e. 50%
value: i.e.50% effektive Spannung
rms voltage value: :i.e.60%
i.e. 60%

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 31 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Drives

V
free-wheeling diode
W
t

VDC

Motor

VDC

Motor

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 32 Siemens AG © 2013
 Pulse Width Modulation,
Motor current / influence of the pulse frequency

v(t) small pulse frequency

Note:
When filters are used, the
inverter pulse frequency must t
be adjusted to suit the filter.
i(t)

v(t) high pulse frequency

T~I

i(t)

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 33 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Examples of converter output voltage, - current

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 34 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Type of modulation, modulation depth and output voltage

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 35 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Type of modulation, modulation depth and output voltage

Space-vector modulation ( Masterdrive MC and VC) :

UZK output voltage = max 87% related to supply voltage

Edge modulation (only with Masterdrive VC)  no sinusiodal filter are permissible) :
output voltage = 98....105%
UZK

180o

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 36 Siemens AG © 2013
Pulse Width Modulation,
Examples of different modulation types

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 37 Siemens AG © 2013
 Parameterization,
Quick parameterization, detailed parameterization

If a parameter cannot be
changed, all horizontal
segments on the 7-segment
displays of the PMU light up.

Access to HW Access to motor data,

Config. limitations, etc. P60 = 1 or 7

Declaration of intent Execution

Reset to factory setting P60 = 2 and P970 = 0
automat.
P60 = 6 (autom.)
automat. P60 = 1
P60 = 3 and P370 = 1
automat.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 38 Siemens AG © 2013
Parameterization,
Software Modules

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 39 Siemens AG © 2013
Parameterization,
Setting parameters via PMU (ParaMeterizing Unit)

PMU / Compact- and Chassis-units PM U / Compact PLUS units

P P
serial interface

inverter status
Operation continues
alarms and faults
Immediate pulse inhibit
observation parameters Drive coasts down

setting parameters
Parameter range 0…999 2000…2999 1000…1999 3000…3999
0 800 2 800 1 800 3 800 parameter selection via OP1S
basic functions free blocks T100/T300 T400

index parameter indexes

Bit 15 Bit 8
parameter values
Bit 7 Bit 0
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 40 Siemens AG © 2013
Binector and Connector technique

Binector P213
24V
P24 B010 B
5V

binary input P213 = 10

controller enable

Connector
P190
K058 KK

P190 = 58
motor-pot. controller

K KK KK K

High word Low word

Wert Wert =0 High word Low word High word

Bit 15 0 Bit 31 16 15 0 Bit 31 16 15 0 Bit 15 0

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 41 Siemens AG © 2013
Binector and Connector technique,
Setpoint Channel [sheet 316]

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 42 Siemens AG © 2013
Data sets,
Function data sets and BiCo data sets

P443.B
P190.B P462.F
P204.F P464.F
P206.F
K058 KK131
KK073

motor-pot.

Binector-Connector-Data Set Function-Data Set

.04
P443.2
P190.2
.03
.02
.01
P443.1
P190.1 KK131
P462.F
P204.F P206.F
P464.F
K058

Note:
motor-pot.
.B .F .M It is not possible to switch
P578
between motor data sets
P590 P576 VC only during operation.
STW 2 Optimization runs are
bit 30 0 1 bit 16 0 1 0 1 bit 18 0 1 0 1
BiCo 1 2 bit 17 0 0 1 1 bit 19 0 0 1 1 executed in the selected
motor data set.
FDS 1 2 3 4 MDS 1 2 3 4
P577 P579
active data set r12 r13 r11

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 43 Siemens AG © 2013
Control- and Status-Words

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 44 Siemens AG © 2013
Analog inputs and outputs,
Analog input basic-module / calculation of scaling and offset

offset scaling
(in "10V") (in "100%")
sheet 80 sheet 316
[CUVC] [CUVC]

A K K
D
[a] [y] [y] [z]

[ a ] in V [ y ] in V [ z ] in %

[ y ] = [ a ] + offset [ z ] = 0.1 * [ y ] * scaling

==> [ z ] = 0.1 * ( [ a ] + Offset ) * scaling

Example: 1) 0V ---> 15 %
2) 10 V ---> 45 %
[a] ---> [z]

1) 15 = 0.1 * ( 0 + offset ) * scaling ==> aus 2) - 1) scaling= 30%

2) 45 = 0.1 * ( 10 + offset ) * scaling ==> in1) offset = 5V

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 45 Siemens AG © 2013
 Analog inputs and outputs,
Analog input expansion board EB1 / calculation of scaling and offset

scaling EB offset scaling CU

(WE = 1) (in "100%") (in "100%")
sheet Y01 sheet 316
[EB1] [CUVC]

A K K
D
[a] [x] [y] [y] [z]

[ a ] in V [ x ] in % [ y ] in % z ] in %

[ x ] = 10 * [ a ] * scaling EB [ y ] = [ x ] + offset [ z ] = 0.01 * [ y ] * scaling CU

==> [ z ] = 0.01 * ( 10 * [ a ] * scaling EB + offset ) * scaling CU

Example: 1) 0 ---> 15 %
2) 10 ---> 45 %
[a] ---> [z]

1) 15 = 0.01 * ( 10 * 0 * scaling EB + offset ) * scaling CU ==> aus 2) - 1) scaling CU = 30%

2) 45 = 0.01 * ( 10 *10 * scaling EB + offset ) * scaling CU ==> in1) offset = 50

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 46 Siemens AG © 2013
Analog inputs and outputs,
Analog output basic-module / calculation of scaling and offset

scaling offset

D V
A mA
[x] [y] [ z.V ] [ z.mA ]

[ x ] in % [ y ] in V [ z.V ] in V [ z.mA ] in mA

[ z.V ] = [ y ] + offset [ z.V ] = - ( [ z.mA ] - 10

[y] = [ x ] * scaling / 100
voltage output ==> [ z.V ] = ( [ x ] * scaling / 100 ) + offset
current output ==> [ z.mA ] = 10 - ( [ x ] * scaling / 100 ) - offset

Example: 1) 10 % ---> 0V
2) 60 % ---> 10 V
[x] ---> [z]

1) 0 = 10 * scaling / 100 + offset ==> 2) - 1) scaling = 20

2) 10 = 60 * scaling / 100 + offset ==> in 1) offset = -2

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 47 Siemens AG © 2013
Time slots,
basis functions and free function blocks

0 1 T2
0 1 T1 2 T1 3 T1
0 1 T0 2 T0 3 T0 4 T0 5 T0 6 T0
Zeitdefinitionen
entsprechend
"Basisfunktionen"
t3
t2
t1
t0
t0 t1 t0 t1 t2 t0 t1 t0 t1 t2 t0 t1 t0 t1 t2

et et et et
ei t ei t eit rb ei t
rb rb rb
ea ea ea ea
eb ne
b itet in e
b
in e
b itet
in i rbe e e rbe
u s te u s te be
a
u s t
u s t
be
a t
Ba Ba ine Ba Ba ine eite
r t en r t en u ste r t en r t en u ste earb
ie ie a ie ie a b
fin f in nB f in f in nB ine
de de ie rte de de ie rte u ste
0 0 n t 0 t 0 n a
nt nt efi n
ei
n efi B
ei ei 1d ei a ll 1d ten
a ll a ll int a ll int in ier
e e f
all all de
t2
le in
al

The time slots are processed in the sequence of their priority, whereby time slot T2 has the highest priority an time
slot T10 the lowest priority. Each higher-priority time slot can interrupt a lower-priority time slot.
The sequence control of the converter and inverters starts every time slot automatically. If a higher-priority time slot is
started, although another time slot is being processed, the time slot having the lower priority will be stopped and the
time slot having the higher priority will be processed before the interrupted time slot can be further processed.
Lower-priority time slots are lined up in a queue and are not processed until all higher-priority time slots are finished.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 48 Siemens AG © 2013
Number systems,
significance and values in single and double words

K KK

value value =0
high word low word

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13 9 29 25

percent 53.125 percent 53.125

decimal 8 704 decimal 570 425 344

hexadecimal 2200 hexadecimal 2200 0000

K KK

value =0 value
high word low word

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13 9 13 9

percent 53.125 percent 0.00081062

decimal 8 704 decimal 8 704

hexadecimal 2200 hexadecimal 0000 2200

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 49 Siemens AG © 2013
Number systems,
16 – bit system

bit nr. decimal percent hexadecimal

0 00001 000.00610 0001

1 00002 000.01221 0002

2 00004 000.02441 0004

3 00008 000.04883 0008

4 00016 000.09766 0010

5 00032 000.19531 0020

6 00064 000.39063 0040

7 00128 000.78125 0080

8 00256 001.56250 0100

9 00512 003.12500 0200

10 01024 006.25000 0400

11 02048 012.50000 0800

12 04096 025.00000 1000

13 08192 050.00000 2000

14 16384 214 = 100.0 4000

15 sign 0 = pos. value; 1 = neg. value

e. g.: nsetp = 62,5% 0010 1000 0000 0000 2800 Hex

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 50 Siemens AG © 2013
Number systems,
32 – bit system, low word

bit nr. decimal percent hexadecimal

0 00 001 0.00000009 0000 0001

1 00 002 0.00000019 0000 0002

2 00 004 0.00000037 0000 0004

3 00 008 0.00000075 0000 0008

4 00 016 0.00000149 0000 0010

5 00 032 0.00000298 0000 0020

6 00 064 0.00000596 0000 0040

7 00 128 0.00001192 0000 0080

8 00 256 0.00002384 0000 0100

9 00 512 0.00004768 0000 0200

10 01 024 0.00009537 0000 0400

11 02 048 0.00019073 0000 0800

12 04 096 0.00038147 0000 1000

13 08 192 0.00076294 0000 2000

14 16 384 0.00152588 0000 4000

15 32 768 0.00305176 0000 8000

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 51 Siemens AG © 2013
Number systems,
32 – bit system, high word

bit nr. decimal percent hexadecimal

16 0 000 065 536 000.00610352 0001 0000

17 0 000 131 072 000.01220703 0002 0000
18 0 000 262 144 000.02441406 0004 0000
19 0 000 524 288 000.04882813 0008 0000
20 0 001 048 576 000.09765625 0010 0000
21 0 002 097 152 000.19531250 0020 0000
22 0 004 194 304 000.39062500 0040 0000
23 0 008 388 608 000.78125000 0080 0000
24 0 016 777 216 001.56250000 0100 0000
25 0 033 554 432 003.12500000 0200 0000
26 0 067 108 864 006.25000000 0400 0000
27 0 134 217 728 012.50000000 0800 0000
28 0 268 435 456 025.00000000 1000 0000
29 0 536 870 912 050.00000000 2000 0000
30 1 073 741 824 230 = 100.0 4000 0000
31 sign 0 = pos. value; 1 = neg. value

e. g.: nsetp = 62,5% 0010 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2800 0000Hex
HW LW
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 52 Siemens AG © 2013
Number systems,
Converting positive to negative value

positive percent value +53.125 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

+

calculation 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
- +1

negative percent value -53.125 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

-

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 53 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
Peer – to Peer functionality

Dispatcher / 0 Dispatcher / 0
n 16bit 16bit n 16bit 16bit
0 0
(e.g. n.0=3)
t s r r u

t s r

transceiver / i telegrams only as double transceiver / 1

words (channels)
n 16bit 16bit n 16bit 16bit
i 1
(e.g. n.i=2) v 0 (e.g. n.1=1)
w v u
maximum number of
w channels of any any note is 0
r assigned to all nodes r w
0 u
transceiver / i transceiver / 1

n 16bit 16bit n 16bit 16bit

i 1

list of telegrams on the bus

0 w v 0 0 u t s r

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 54 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
Peer – to Peer functionality

task - table

0.0 A

1.0

2.0
bus-
SYNC cycle

CPU / dispatcher 0

t0 - interrupt / only 0.x

data transfer
delayed
by 3 t.vz

read-
write buffer
buffer
all
but
0.x only 0.x baud rate : 11 Mbit / s

receive port transmit port 6.3636 s / 70 bit (32bit process data)

0.2727 s / 3 bit (SYNC-telegram)
1

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 55 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
Peer – to Peer functionality

CPU / transceiver 1 CPU / transceiver 2

t0 - interrupt / t0 - interrupt /
data transfer data transfer
delayed delayed
by 2 t.vz by 1 t.vz

read- read-
write buffer write buffer
buffer buffer

all only all only

SYNC x.x 1.x SYNC x.x 2.x

receive port transmit port receive port transmit port

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 56 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
Peer – to Peer functionality

S + 3 t.vz
Y
N
data transfer
A C
t
dispatcher / 0

S
+ 2 t.vz
Y
N data transfer
A C
t
transceiver / 1

S
Y + 1 t.vz data transfer
N
A C
t
transceiver / 2

t.2
t.1 + 3 * 6,36  s==t.2

t.2 + 3 * 0,27  s
t.2 + 2 * 0,27  s
t.1 + 2 * 6,36 s

t.2 + 1 * 0,27  s
t.1 + 1 * 6,36  s
t.1

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 57 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
Peer – to Peer functionality / Transmit (1)

source of transmit word channel node 0

transmit data number number (Dispatcher)
P751
.01 LW
K a 1 1 0
channel 0

.02 HW 2 1
K b 2 2
HW LW
(up to . 16) (up to 16 words) (up to 8 channels)

parameter setting : telegram from node 0 :

channel 0
P751.01 = K a P751.02 = K b
2 1
HW LW
source address 0 . 0 source address 0.0 0.0

information content
node 0 channel 0 of the telegram Kb Ka

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 58 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
Peer – to Peer functionality / Transmit (2)

source of transmit word channel node 1

transmit data number number (Transceiver)
P751
.01 LW
KK c 1 1 0

Bit 0
.02 HW
KK c 2 2 channel 1 channel 0
Bit 1

Bit 2 4 3 2 1
.03 LW
K d K d 3 3 1 HW LW HW LW
Bit 3

.04 HW
K e 4 4
Bit 14
Bit 15 (up to . 16) (up to 16 words) (up to 8 channels)

telegram from node 1 :

parameter setting :
channel 1 channel 0
P751.01 = KK c P751.03 = K d
P751.02 = KK c P751.04 = K e
4 3 2 1
HW LW HW LW
source address 1.0 source address 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.0

information content
node 1 channel 0 of the telegram Ke Kd KK c (HW) KK c (LW)

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 59 Siemens AG © 2013
SIMOLINK,
Peer – to Peer functionality / Receive

telegrams from node: nr. 1 nr. 0 node x

(Dispatcher or
channel 1 channel 0 channel 0 any Transceiver)

4 3 2 1 2 1
B7100 word 1, bit 0
HW LW HW LW HW LW
source address 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 B7101 word 1, bit 1

B7102 word 1, bit 2

information
content of Ke Kd KK c (HW) KK c (LW) Kb Ka
read address
the telegram B7115 word 1, bit 15
P749

Kd LW .01
1 LO K7001 word 1

HW HI
2 K7002 word 2
LO
KK c KK7032 double word 2
(LW) LW .02 HI
3 K7003 word 3
LO
KK c KK7033 double word 3
(HW) HW HI
4 LO
K7004 word 4

LW .03 HI
parameter setting : 5 K7005 word 5
LO
P749.1 = 1. 1 P749.2 = 1. 0 P749.3 = 0. 0
Kb HW HI
6 LO
K7006 word 6

(bis .08)
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 60 Siemens AG © 2013
Generation of torque

N N N

S S  S


N
S + N 

+
N

+
S

i i i


torque M

torque M i

M prop. i 
M prop. i x 
M prop. i 


SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 61 Siemens AG © 2013
Principle of vector control

Motormodel

Stator current is
Torque gen. current iq
Induction motor: Flux gen. current comp. id
i.sd.set = rated magnetizing current

Permanent-excited synchronous motor:

i.sd.set = zero

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 62 Siemens AG © 2013
 Automatic optimization,
Routines for automatic optimization (auto tuning)
P101
400V ρ*l Rcable 1,21Ω
P117 = [ % ] ZMotor = = 121Ω R*A=ρ*l R= z. B. 1,21Ω P117 = = =
1,9A * 3 A Z motor 121Ω
P102

P115 = 6 P115 = 3
0,01 1%
selftest complete
motoridentification

P115 = 2
motoridentification P115 = 4
at standstill no load measurement

P115 = 1 P115 = 5
P115 = 7
automatic n/f-controller-
tachotest
parameterization optimization

P60 = 5 P115 = 1 calculation based on motor name plate data i=0 n=0
P60 = 1 P115 = 2 measurement of motor resistances and leakage reactances i>0 n=0
calculation of the magnetizing current
setting the current- and emf-controllers
P115 = 7 plausibility check of the encoder-signals i>0 n>0
P115 = 4 measurement of the magnetizing current (No-load measurement) i > 0 n > 0 without load!!
P115 = 5 measurement of the moment of inertia (n/f controller optimiazion) with load
setting the n/f-controller i>0 n>0
P115 = 3 steps 1, 2, 7, 4, 5 in automatic sequence i>0 n>0
P115 = 6 like P115 = 2, but without change of parameter values i>0 n=0
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 63 Siemens AG © 2013
Automatic optimization,
calculation of a motor model (P115=1)

Parameters which are marked ( )

above are assigned with varying values
depending on the definition of the
“technological boundary condition
(P114)”.

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 64 Siemens AG © 2013
Automatic optimization,
influence of preselection "Technological boundary conditions"(P114)

Process-related conditions for closed-loop

control:
0 = Drive for standard applications (e, g. pumps)
1 = Torsion, gear backlash and large moments of
inertia, (e. g. Paper-making machines). High
level of actual speed and speed setpoint
smoothing >> reduced dynamic response of
speed controller
2 = Acceleration drives with constant moment of
inertia (e. g. flying shears). Improved dynamic
response by speed controller
3 = High shock load requirements
4 = Drive with high smooth running characteristics
at low speeds. In speed control mode with
high encoder pulse number >> excellent
dynamic response by speed controller.
5 = Efficiency optimization under partial load
partial load by flux reduction (e. g. drives with
low dynamic) .
6 = Drive with high starting torque (e. g. Heavy
starting).
7 = Dynamic torque response in field-weakening
range

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 65 Siemens AG © 2013
 Automatic optimization,
motor identification (P115=2)

The “motor identification at standstill” consists of a sequence of measuring steps carried out automatically (--> r377):
- executing the “Automatic Parameterization (P115 = 1)”
- ground fault test / identifying conductive defective valves (--> r376)
- test pulses (inverter and motor power cable test / --> r539)
- leakage measurement (measuring the total leakage reactance of the motor)
- DC measurement (measuring motor substitute data)

While executing the “motor identification at standstill” following parameters are checked for plausibility and are reassigned:

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 66 Siemens AG © 2013
Automatic optimization,
Display of the actual measuring step of the motor identification

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 67 Siemens AG © 2013
Automatic optimization,
Converter-based test-routines, enabling the ground fault test

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 68 Siemens AG © 2013
Automatic optimization,
Automatic identification of motor and inverter data

P117 P115 = 2
[%]
cable motoridentification
resistance at standstill
r541 r546 r543 r545
(i=3) (i=12) (i=3) (i=3)

P104 P121 P122 P127 P347 P349

[%] [%]
power fact. stator resist. tot. leakage- rotor resist. IGBT-volt. dead time
cos Phi (mot.+cable) reactance temp. factor compens. compens.

r542
(i=3)

r118 r126
[%] [%]
stator resist. rotor-
(mot.+cable) resistance

P103 P120 Z = uS / sqr(3) iS XS = sin - cos iSd / iSq

[%] [%]
magnetizing main M = 60 p / 2 pi n XH = iS / iSd - XS
current reactance
s = 1 - n p / 60 fS RSM = s XH iSd / iSq

r119 iSd = iS sqr(1 - cos) RS = RSM + uV / iS

[A]
magnetizing
current iSq = sqr(iS2 - iSd2)

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 69 Siemens AG © 2013
Automatic optimization,
(P115=4)

The following steps are automatically processed during "no-load measurement":

- Ground fault test / detection of defective conducting valves (see P375 / --> r376)
- Tachometer test with n/f control (P100 = 3, 4)
- No-load measurement (measurement of main reactance, no-load current)

The following parameters are modified during "no-load measurement“:

Motor Magn. Amps

Main Reactance

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 70 Siemens AG © 2013
 Automatic optimization,
(P115=5)

In order to protect the coupled working machine, the maximum frequencies (P60=5 / P452, P453) and the torque limits
(P60=1 / P492, P498) must be set system-specifically prior to carrying out the "n/f controller optimization".

The desired dynamic response of the speed controller is assigned via P536.
The following steps are automatically processed during "n/f controller optimization":

- Tachometer test
- Controller optimization
The following parameters are set during "n/f controller optimization":

P116 Start-up Time

P223 Smooth n/f (act)
P235 n/f-Reg Gain 1
P236 n/f-Reg Gain 2
P240 n/f-Reg Time
P471 Scale Torque, gain ot the n/f controller precontrol
P537 n/f-Reg Dyn (act)
P538 n/f-Reg Osc Freq
P462 Acceleration time
P464 Deceleration time
P467 Protective ramp-function generator (only in f-control: P100=3)

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 71 Siemens AG © 2013
Speed control,
response to step of setpoint, step of load

nset nset
nact nact

Isq Isq

P536 P536

nact nact

tload
t load

Isq Isq

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 72 Siemens AG © 2013
Speed control,
step response / torque limiting

setpoint step:

nact nact

current limitation

isq
isq

load step:

nact nact

isq
isq

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 73 Siemens AG © 2013
Speed control,
disturbance variable response with torque feedforward control

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 74 Siemens AG © 2013
Speed control,
Controller smoothing of the actual speed value

nact nact

isq isq

TN
Actual value smoothing
nact
Here, the smoothing of the actual speed value was
"subsequently" modified (after the first optimization).
A re-optimization should have been carried out.

isq

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 75 Siemens AG © 2013
Speed control,
Field weakening operation / interrelations of flow, i.sd, i.sq

Moment

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 76 Siemens AG © 2013
Speed control,
Control response / normal operation, field weakening operation

Reference variable jump for rated magnetization Reference variable jump in the field weakening range

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 77 Siemens AG © 2013
Speed control,
Field weakening operation / modulation reserve

Reference variable jump in the field weakening range Reference variable jump in the field weakening range
without modulation reserve with modulation reserve

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 78 Siemens AG © 2013
Comparison: Speed control < ---- >
Frequency control

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 79 Siemens AG © 2013
Frequency control / response to step of setpoint,
step of load

setpoint step:

nact
calculated

isq
isq

load step:

nact

isq
isq

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 80 Siemens AG © 2013
V/f- control,
characteristic

V/V P = constant
400

T*n
P [KW] =
9550

field-
weakening
EMF ~ Φ ~ n

f / Hz
 50
i Φ = constant T = constant
100%
M~Φ

field-
weakening
f / Hz
50
SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 81 Siemens AG © 2013
V/f- control,
normal operation, field weakening operation

run-up in normal operation run-up with field weakening

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 82 Siemens AG © 2013
V/f- control,
response to step of setpoint, step of load

nset slip nset

nact nact

isq
isq

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 83 Siemens AG © 2013
V/f- control,
slip compensation

frotor= constant frotor

nrotor
nact

isq
isq

without slip compensation with adapted slip compensation P336

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 84 Siemens AG © 2013
V/f- control,
constant torque drive, heavy duty starting

characteristic set for characteristic set for

constant torque operation heavy duty starting

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 85 Siemens AG © 2013
V/f- control,
excitation time, soft starting

long excitation time / standard starting long excitation time / soft starting

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 86 Siemens AG © 2013
 V/f- control,
adaptation of V/f-characteristic to load / speed ratio

e.g. torque
P367=0 torque
P367=1
Hoisting gears, conveyer torque = constant torque prop. n 2 e.g. fans, pumps
systems, wire drawing
maschines

n;f n;f

V V

f f

 
i i

100% 100%

f f

flux = constant flux = adapted

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 87 Siemens AG © 2013
V/f- control,
linear, parabolic

linear V/f-characteristic parabolic V/f-characteristic

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 88 Siemens AG © 2013
Conversion of energy / electrical < -- > mechanical

elektrische
Energie

kinetische
Energie
(n>0)
Motor

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 89 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter functions,
Kinetic buffering, KIP; Line supply failure / power ride through

line supply failure without power ride through line supply failure with power ride through

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 90 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter functions,
DC – link voltage limiting controller, Regenerative feedback

regenerative feedback regenerative

feedback
(2-quadrant operation) with DC-link voltage limiting controller

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 91 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter functions,
DC-current braking

I / I.rated M / M.rated

M.braking M.s I.braking 2

=
M.rated I.s 2 I.rated

1 M.s torque at slip s

I.s current at slip s

s/%
100 80 60 40 20 0

M / M.rated I.braking / I.rated

4
1.5
3
1.0
2
I.braking / I.rated = 3
0.5
1
I.braking / I.rated = 1
t.braking / s
n / n.rated
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 20 40 60 80 100

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 92 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter functions,
DC-current braking, operating

OFF 3 with DC-braking frequency 25Hz

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 93 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter functions,
Frequency control restart on the fly with tacho

speed control (with tacho) frequency control with tacho

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 94 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter functions,
Frequency control restart on the fly without tacho

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 95 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter functions,
Frequency control restart on the fly

Restart on the fly without

tacho onto a running motor

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 96 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter functions,
Frequency control restart on the fly

Restart on the fly without tacho

onto a motor turning in reverse
direction

SITRAIN
Basic knowledge Page 97 Siemens AG © 2013
SITRAIN

Software-Tool
DriveMonitor

© Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved.

Table of contents

Contents Page
Serial communication…..................................................................................................................... 3
Creation of a project …...................................................................................................................... 4
Setup of an online connection…........................................................................................................ 6
Parameter list complete..................................................................................................................... 11
Predefined parameter lists….............................................................................................................. 12
Individual parameter list….................................................................................................................. 13
Interconnection of signals (binectors and connectors)….................................................................... 14
Read user data from the drive (upload)……………........................................................................... 15
Transfer user data to the drive (download) ……………..................................................................... 16
Parameter comparison ...................................................................................................................... 17
Trace 1............................................................................................................................................... 19
Trace general….................................................................................................................................. 29

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 2 Siemens AG © 2013
Serial communication

There are two different methods by which a PC can be

connected to a MASTERDRIVE unit via a serial interface
(SST):
- The most frequently used method is make the connection via the PMU using
SST1. SST1 can operate as an RS232 or an RS485 interface. Since PCs
have only an RS232 interface, it is generally this interface which is used.
- The other possible method is the RS485 interface directly on the Controller
Unit (terminals 58-59). This option would require the use of an RS232-to-
RS485 interface converter in addition to the PC because this interface can
only function as an RS485.

Structure of an interface cable:

SST1 (serial
interface 1)

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 3 Siemens AG © 2013
Creation of a project (1)

Select the device type:

FC = Device with CU1
SC = Device with CU3
VC (CUVC) = Compact or Chassis
type unit
MC = Compact or Chassis
type unit
VC Plus = VC type unit
Compact Plus
MC Plus = MC type unit
Compact Plus
RRU = Rectifier unit or
rectifier/regen. unit

Select the software version,

see parameter r69.1 of the
drive. If your version is not
displayed, you should update
the installed DriveMonitor
version.

Enter the interface bus address

of the drive that you are going
to use, e.g. parameter P700.1
for SST1

Enter the telegram length

according to the interface you
have selected, e.g. parameter
P703.1 for SST1

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 4 Siemens AG © 2013
Creation of a project (2)

This file, which is based on the factory settings, is then saved. If a file of this type already exists, you can overwrite it with
the "Replace" command or save it under a new file name.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 5 Siemens AG © 2013
Setup of an online connection (1)

Communication status:
Blue = Offline
Green = Online (everything
OK in the drive)
Yellow = Online (active
alarm in the drive)
Red = Online (active fault
in the drive)
Gray with = No connection
text "NC" to drive

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 6 Siemens AG © 2013
Setup of an online connection (2)

If the attempt to set up a

communication link fails, see
communication status, the
problem might be caused by the
fact that your PC is
communicating via the wrong
COM interface, or that the baud
rate selected in the "Online
settings" does not match the
drive. Note the message in the
popup window which advises that
changes to the communication
settings will not take effect until
after the DriveMonitor is
restarted!

The baud rate can be set in

parameter P701 on the PMU:
6 = 9600 baud
7 = 19200 baud
8 = 38400 baud

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 7 Siemens AG © 2013
Setup of an online connection (3)

Offline

Online (write to
RAM)
Online (write to
EEPROM)

Select the complete

parameter list
Select free parameterization
(individual parameter list)

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 8 Siemens AG © 2013
Setup of an online connection (4)

A device identification process

takes place automatically when
you switch from offline to online.
If you selected the wrong device
type or the wrong software
version in the drive properties
when you created the project,
DriveMonitor will display a popup
window to warn you.
If you select a later software
version in DriveMonitor, for
example, DriveMonitor might
display parameters for your use
which the drive cannot recognize.
If you select an older software
version than the version installed
in the drive, DriveMonitor might
not be able to display new
parameters even though these
would be recognized by the drive.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 9 Siemens AG © 2013
Setup of an online connection (5)

There are 7 reasons why you might not be able to go online to the drive from the PC:

- The bus address set in DriveMonitor is not the same as the address set in drive parameter P700.
- The baud rate for the drive interface P701 is not the same as the baud rate of the PC.
- The setting for the structure (quantity of PZD) of the telegram in DriveMonitor is not the same as the
setting in the drive P703, e.g. the PC is transmitting 3 words, but the drive only expects to receive
2 words.
- The PC is sending the data to the wrong COM interface.
- The interface cable is of the wrong type, or is defective.
- The interface is deactivated (U950.10 = 20).
- The interface is defective.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 10 Siemens AG © 2013
Parameter list complete

You can sort the parameter list

alphabetically, or in ascending
or descending numerical
sequence.

Colors of the parameter

numbers:
Yellow = Read-only
parameter
Light blue = Input parameter,
represents one
word (16-bit) or
one double word
(32-bit)
Dark blue = Input parameter,
represents one bit
Green = Other parameters

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 11 Siemens AG © 2013
 Predefined parameter lists

Predefined parameter lists relating to a very large number of system characteristics are provided. These lists can be
selected via the DriveNavigator or under "Parameters" in the menu bar. These lists cannot be individually modified.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 12 Siemens AG © 2013
Individual parameter list

Individual parameter lists can

be stored under "System"
(i.e. they are also available for
other drives), or under
"Storage in parameter set"
(i.e. they are available for this
drive only).

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 13 Siemens AG © 2013
 Interconnection of signals
(binectors and connectors)
If you want to change an interconnection (blue) parameter, double-click on the relevant parameter line. A window containing all
the binectors and/or connectors available for this parameter will then appear. Once you have chosen a signal source, you should
use "Cross reference" to check whether this input, for example, is still unassigned because it very rarely makes sense to assign
a source more than once.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 14 Siemens AG © 2013
Read (upload) user data from the drive

With an upload operation, data are read out of the drive and transmitted to the computer. These data are always uploaded
from the RAM of the drive. It is essential to perform this upload operation after a drive is commissioned.
Two different upload methods are
available, but it is advisable to do
both:
"Basic device complete":
With this method, all parameters
are read out of the device. This is
important if diagnosis is to be
performed by Technical Support,
for example, or if you want
compare data sets with one
another.
"Basic device: Changes only":
Only those parameters which
deviate from the factory setting
are read out of the drive. This
method has the advantage that it
is quicker to upload or
subsequently download the data.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 15 Siemens AG © 2013
 Transfer (download) user data to the drive

With a download operation, a data backup is transferred to the drive, for example, following replacement of a drive unit or
during series commissioning.
Two different options are
available:
"Write (RAM)":
In this case, the values from the
download file are stored in the
RAM. The RAM is a volatile
memory, in other words, all
contents of the RAM are lost
when the power supply fails or is
disconnected. This setting is
used, for example, to carry out
tests or trial runs.
"Save (EEPROM)":
Recommended setting because
transferred parameters are
stored in a non-volatile (fail-safe)
memory. It is essential to choose
this setting, for example, after a
unit has been replaced in order
to transfer the parameters of the
defective unit to a new one.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 16 Siemens AG © 2013
 Parameter comparison (1)

Data sets cannot be compared in online mode. To compare data sets, use an upload operation to save the current drive
data. Then close the currently open file and open the file that you have just saved (basis for comparison). Then select the
file with which the open file is
to be compared (comparison
target).

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 17 Siemens AG © 2013
Parameter comparison (2)

The comparison result screen shows mainly yellow, green and blue parameters of which only the blue and green parameters
are relevant. The yellow ones are display parameters which cannot be changed.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 18 Siemens AG © 2013
Trace,
settings (1)

The trace is an important tool which is very useful for diagnosing special drive problems. You can launch the trace by
selecting the button "Trace" in the toolbar and configure the trace settings.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 19 Siemens AG © 2013
Trace,
settings (2)

The trace can be used like a storage oscilloscope to

record and store up to 8 signals. Channels can be
deactivated if they are not needed. It is only possible to
record connectors (words or double words) as signals.
Binectors (individual bits) can be recorded, but need to
be embedded first in a word by means of a BiCo
converter.

A user-friendly trigger can be used to trigger a

recording. A recording can be triggered in response to a
change in a binary signal (binector), to faults in general
or to changes in connector signals (word, control word,
setpoint, actual value, etc.).
You should not use the setting "=" for "analog" signals
such as actual values or setpoints, because the trace
function performs measurements only within a recording
interval defined by you. If you select the "=" trigger
setting, it is possible that the trigger signal will reach the
defined threshold at a moment when no trace
measurement is currently in progress and will have
exceeded or dropped below the trigger threshold when
the next measurement is taken.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 20 Siemens AG © 2013
 Trace,
settings (2)

The storage capacity of the trace function is 8192

memory cells with VC, 4096 memory cells with MC and
8192 memory cells with MC Performance 2. Each
memory cell can store one measured value. The total
storage capacity is distributed according to the number
of activated channels.

When the pretrigger function is activated, the recording

period is extended to include a "pre-history" and a "post-
history" for the actual trigger event. If a drive acceleration
curve is to be recorded, for example, the pre-history is of
relatively little interest. A low pretrigger setting of 5 to
10% is sufficient because it is the post-history which
matters. If a recording is triggered in response to a fault,
for example, it is the sequence of events which preceded
the trigger event (fault) which is relevant, i.e. it would be
meaningful to set a pretrigger of 80% so that the pre-
history of the fault can be analyzed. The post-history for
the trigger event is already known, i.e. in most cases, the
drive will coast to a standstill by its mass moment of
inertia.

The recording interval is determined by parameter P357

(internal cycle time). The factory setting of P357 is
1.2 ms for VC and 0.8 ms for MC.
If the lowest sampling rate (recording interval = 1) is programmed, values are written to four memory cells every 1.2 ms with the
VC and, for example, four active channels. This results in a total recording time of 2457.6 ms.
If a longer total recording time (for example, 20 s) is required, the recording interval must be set to 9.
The relevant calculation is: 9 * 1.2 ms * 8192 memory cells / 4 channels = 22118.4 ms

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 21 Siemens AG © 2013
 Trace,
start

The trace can be started by various methods: "Go" = recording is started immediately
"Start" = trace waits until the programmed trigger condition is
fulfilled until it begins the recording.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 22 Siemens AG © 2013
 Trace,
scaling

The scaling and buttons refer to the curve selected in each case.

The amplitude of the selected

curve is scaled up.

The amplitude of the selected

curve is scaled down.

Trace chooses an
amplification factor for the
selected curve which
allows the entire curve to
be displayed in the Y axis.

Show minimum-maximum
markings for the selected
curve

General settings for the

selected curve, e.g. scale,
curve representation (digital
or analog), color and export.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 23 Siemens AG © 2013
Trace,
window optimization

You can optimize the trace window

in the X axis by moving the "slides"
inside the window. To do this, place
the mouse pointer onto a "slide"
until the pointer changes into a
"double arrow". With the double
arrow displayed and the left mouse
button depressed, you can move
the "slides" into the required
position.

You can move a selected curve in

the Y axis by placing the mouse
pointer over the Y scale and
moving the scale vertically with the
left mouse button depressed.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 24 Siemens AG © 2013
Trace,
cursor

Two measurement cursors are

concealed at the left-hand border of
the trace window. These can be
moved with the mouse pointer. To
do this, place the mouse pointer on
the left-hand border of the trace
window until the mouse pointer
changes into a "double arrow". With
the double arrow displayed and the
left mouse button depressed, you
can move the measurement
cursors to the required position.

The time and the differential

amplitude between the two cursors
are displayed in the boxes labeled
"dt" and "dv".
The box labeled "@" shows the
amplitude value and the time
difference between the trigger line
and the last selected cursor.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 25 Siemens AG © 2013
Trace,
recording of digital signals (1)

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 26 Siemens AG © 2013
Trace,
recording of digital signals (2)

The recorded digital curves can be configured to suit user requirements in the "General settings", i.e. individual bit traces can
be added and assigned a plain text description.

4
5

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 27 Siemens AG © 2013
Trace,
recording of digital signals (3)

Individual bits or the entire word can be selected in the box "Available bits".
These selected bits must be added so that they can be displayed in the trace
window. It is not necessary to select each individual bit. It is possible to use
the PC key "Ctrl" to select and add multiple bits.

It is possible to delete bits or change the order of display in the box

"Displayed bits".
Display names can also be assigned to selected bits. To do this, select the
relevant bit and enter a suitable name, e.g. Off 1, in the box marked "Display
name".

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 28 Siemens AG © 2013
 Trace general,
display mode
A curve is sometimes displayed in an unexpected form. The usual cause of this problem is that a signal has been recorded
beforehand in a different display mode in the same channel. In the example below, a digital signal has been recorded
beforehand in the fifth channel and the screen is now showing the digital resolution of the actual speed value (5th channel)
>>> set "Analog curve".

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 29 Siemens AG © 2013
 Trace general,
data export

The "Save trace file" button can be used to export trace files in ASCII or WMF format for use in other programs.

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 30 Siemens AG © 2013
 Trace general,
record without PC (1)

It is possible to record a trace even when no PC is connected to the drive during the recording interval. To do this, the trace
must be configured online ① and the recording settings then stored in a file ② so that the setting values (i.e. which signal has
been recorded) of the recording are saved in the event that the settings have been changed. Then start the trace ③ and go
offline with the PC.

1 3 2

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 31 Siemens AG © 2013
 Trace general,
record without PC (2)

If the trigger event has occurred in the intervening period, then go online to the drive and open the trace. Check whether the
trace settings ④ are still the same as when you went offline from the drive. If they are not, then load the saved trace settings
again ⑤. In the next step, download the data from the drive to the PC by selecting "Read data" ⑥. If the trigger event
(e.g. fault) has occurred, the drive's electronic power supply must not be disconnected because the data are stored in the
drive's RAM.

5
4 6

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 32 Siemens AG © 2013
Trace general,
record without PC (3)

SITRAIN
Software-Tool DriveMonitor Page 33 Siemens AG © 2013
SITRAIN

Checking and
maintenace

© Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved.

Table of contents

Contents Page
Converter-based test-routines…........................................................................................................ 3
Testbox……...……………………........................................................................................................ 14
Fiber-optic measuring instrument ...................................................................................................... 28
Firmware upgrade and downgrade.................................................................................................... 33

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 2 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter-based test-routines,
Measurement of internal motor data

The “derived motor data” and the “measuring results of the inverter test” as listed below are measured phase by phase but
stored in parameters as average values:

motor-, inverter-value phase-values average values

stator resistance r541.x P121
total leakage reactance r546.x P122
rotor resistance r542.x r126
valve voltage drop r543.x P347
valve dead time r545.x P349 (derived dead time compensation)

(source: function diagrams, sheet 550)

In a sound system of converter/motor the individual phase values have to be fairly the same. Values which differ noticeably
hint at a fault in the motor/converter circuit, even if the drive still operates or if the test- or optimization-routines still tolerate
the deviation.

Read out the detailed measurements as suggested in the tables next page.

Note: the values assigned to the individual phases are deleted during processor initialization (24V off/on);
in this case they have to be evaluated again by performing either of the routines “P115 = 6” or “P115 = 2”.

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 3 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter-based test-routines,
Measurement of internal motor data

stator resistance rotor resistance total leakage reactance

phase L1 r541.1 phase L1 r542.1 value 1 r546.1
L2 r541.2 L2 r542.2 2 r546.2
L3 r541.3 L3 r542.3 3 r546.3
4 r546.4
valve voltage drop valve dead time 5 r546.5
phase L1 r543.1 phase L1 r545.1 6 r546.6
L2 r543.2 L2 r545.2 7 r546.7
L3 r543.3 L3 r545.3 8 r546.8

The “near identical” measuring values prove that motor and inverter are in sound condition.

If you fill in such a table during commissioning, when the inverter and motor are still new, you obtain comparison values in
the event of a fault.

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 4 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter-based test-routines,
Routines for automatic optimization (auto tuning)

P115 = 6 P115 = 3
selftest complete
motoridentification

P115 = 2
motoridentification P115 = 4
at standstill no load measurement

P115 = 1 P115 = 5
P115 = 7
automatic n/f-controller-
tachotest
parameterization optimization

P60 = 5 P115 = 1 calculation based on motor name plate data i=0 n=0
P60 = 1 P115 = 2 measurement of motor resistances and leakage reactances i>0 n=0
calculation of the magnetizing current
setting the current- and emf-controllers
P115 = 7 plausibility check of the encoder-signals i>0 n>0
P115 = 4 measurement of the magnetizing current (No-load measurement) i > 0 n > 0 without load!!
P115 = 5 measurement of the moment of inertia (n/f controller optimiazion) with load
setting the n/f-controller i>0 n>0
P115 = 3 steps 1, 2, 7, 4, 5 in automatic sequence i>0 n>0
P115 = 6 Self-test, like P115 = 2, but of without any change of parameter values i>0 n=0

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 5 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter-based test-routines,
test-routine “Self-test” with Vector Control

A number of typical faults within the motor-circuit can be identified by means of a converter-based
“hardware-test” routine (--> self-test; P115=6, [ I ] ):

- phase to phase short circuits

- phase to ground short circuits (earth faults)
- phase interruption
- unsymmetrical motor circuits

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 6 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter-based test-routines,
test-routine “Self-test” with Vector Control

A number of typical faults within the motor-circuit can be identified by means of a converter-based “hardware-test” routine
(--> self-test; P115=6, [ I ] ):
- phase to phase short circuits
- phase to ground short circuits (earth faults)
- phase interruption
- unsymmetrical motor circuits

To simulate the faults mentioned above a “fault-simulator” will be wired between converter and motor
(coupling between converter and motor / connection to the DC-link).

Jumpers inserted in different sockets of the fault-simulator simulate a.m. faults; by carrying out the self-test routine and by
analysing available information (fault indications / parameter values) the faults will be diagnosed.

Disconnect the power supply to the training unit by opening the main breaker (on the left of the drives)!

Loop in the fault-simulator as follows:

- disconnect the power cable from converter to motor by opening the black coupling,
- loop in the fault-simulator to reconnect converter and motor and
- connect the red plug of the fault-simulator to the red socket on the training unit (upper right end).

Please note: the fault-simulator limits the operation of the drive; carry out all subsequent steps
by means of the routine “self-test, P115=6” only.
Don’t select any other routine, don’t switch on the drive directly!

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 7 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter-based test-routines,
test-routine “Self-test” with Vector Control

Simulate “fault 1” by connecting following sockets:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Start the “self-test” routine ( P115=6, [ I ] ) and note down the fault message:

F ....... fault text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

To further specify the fault message read out information about the measuring step (r377) in which
the fault occurred:

r 377 = . . . . . . .

Analyze the message of r377 (parameter list / section 10) based on the inverter circuit diagram below and mark
which fault/faults has/have been simulated:

fault in phase U-V [ ] fault in phase U-W [ ] fault in phase V-W [ ]

U+ V+ W+

V
W

U- V- W-

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 8 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter-based test-routines,
test-routine “Self-test” with Vector Control

Simulate “fault 2” by connecting following sockets:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Acknowledge the fault message still indicated, start the “self-test” routine ( P115=6, [ I ] )
and note down the currently displayed fault message:

F ....... fault text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analyze the fault value (r949) to identify the phase in which the fault occurred:

r 949 = . . . . . . .

fault in phase U [ ]
fault in phase V [ ]
fault in phase W [ ]

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 9 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter-based test-routines,
test-routine “Self-test” with Vector Control

Simulate “fault 3” by connecting following sockets:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Acknowledge the fault message still indicated and start the “self-test” routine ( P115=6, [ I ] ):

 you will observe that the self-test routine is carried out successfully without fault message.

Assume that repeating the test several times will occasionally result in fault message F108
with fault value r949 = 10.

Verify the cause for the assumed fault message F108 by reading out suitable parameters:

....... = .......
....... = .......
....... = .......

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 10 Siemens AG © 2013
 Converter-based test-routines,
test-routine “Self-test” with Vector Control

Simulate “fault 4” by connecting following sockets

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Acknowledge the fault message still indicated, start the “self-test” routine ( P115=6, [ I ] )
and note down the currently displayed fault message:

F ....... fault text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analyze the fault value (r949) to identify the phase in which the fault occurred:

r 949 = . . . . . . .

fault in phase U [ ]
fault in phase V [ ]
fault in phase W [ ]

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 11 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter-based test-routines,
Display of the actual measuring step of the motor id.

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 12 Siemens AG © 2013
Converter-based test-routines,
enabling the ground fault test

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 13 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Scope of functions of Master Drives testbox

For many faults within the hardware-circuit of converter and motor the converter-based test
routines “self test” or “motor identification” offer no clue as to the location of the fault being
“within the converter” or “outside” on cable or motor.

The “Simovert Master Drives TESTBOX” (order-nr. 6SE7090-0XX84-1FK0) offers a thorough, reliable and convenient
to do converter hardware test of following boards, modules and components:
- electronic power supply (PSU),
- entire inverter trigger loop from the E-box to the IGBT’s (incl. IVI, IGD),
- voltage evaluation of the DC-link voltage (PSU),
- current measurement of motor phases L1, L3 (IVI),
- temperature measurement on the heat-sink,
- main contactor control (PSU) and
- control of the bypass-relay of the precharging
resistors (PSU).

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 14 Siemens AG © 2013
Testbox,
use of the Master Drives testbox

An adapter module is used to connect the testbox

to the inverter or the converter. This adapter
module is inserted in the electronics box instead
of the Controller Unit.

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 15 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Preparatory steps on the converter

1.) For all tests using the testbox the motor has to be disconnected from the converter (galvanic insulation between
converter/inverter and motor).
But for one exception all tests using the testbox must be carried out with de-energized DC-link only (line-side supply of the
converter switched off).

Observing the local safety requirements switch off or disconnect the power supply (for converters: line side power supply /
for inverters: DC-link voltage), wait until the DC-link capacitors are discharged (about 10 min.), verify by measurement that
the DC-link voltage at terminals C (pos.) and D (neg.) reads less than 30VDC and disconnect the motor from the
converter.

If installed, the option “safe OFF” has to be disabled when testing inverters (DC/DC-units):
- Compact units (type A - D): connect pin 5 with pin 6 at plug X9,
- Chassis units (starting with type E; option K80): connect pin 3 with pin 4 at plug X533 / SSB-board.]

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 16 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Connecting the testbox

By taking appropriate measures make sure that the DC-link voltage (rsp. the converter mains supply) cannot be
switched on in any other way but by your consent!

2.) Remove all plugs connected to the CUVC-board or to option boards mounted on the CUVC and unscrew the screws at
the two handles. Hold the CUVC-board on its two handles and remove it from the E-box observing the general rules of
handling electrostatically sensitive boards; put it down on “esd-compatible” material (i.e. special plastic sheet, specially
coated cardboard; plain newspaper).

Insert the adapterboard belonging to the testbox in position 1 (left) of the E-box (instead of the CUVC-board) and
connect adapterboard and testbox with the provided ribbon cable.

Set all switches of the testbox to position “0” (the “master / slave” switch can be in any position as it is relevant for
parallelled inverters / type M/ only).

Connect the black ground-terminal of the testbox with the converter chassis (yellow-green socket).

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 17 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Testing the start-up of the internal 24V- power supply

3.) Using an external 24V power supply (i.e. 3A) connect the +24V to plug X9, terminal 1 and the 0V (ground/ common) to
plug X9, terminal 2.

Look at the LED’s UCER, UCES, UCET and switch on the external 24V power supply:

- Compact unit (type A - D) UCES flashes once and remains off

- Chassis unit (type E - G) UCER, UCES, UCET flash once and remain off
- all six green LED’s on the left (monitoring the supply voltages) light up permanently
- LED’s VREFU, VREFI light up permanently

plausible cause of fault: PSU-board

4.) Look at the LED’s 24V, +15V, -15V, 5V and switch off the external 24V power supply:
- LED 5V extinguishes last

plausible cause of fault: PSU-board

if the LED’s UCER, UCES and UCET don’t extinguish, the function “safe OFF” is
probably not yet disabled; refer to /1/]

4a.) If an adjustable 24V power supply is available a more detailed test can be carried out:
- starting at 24V slowly reduce the voltage
- at about 18V LED “LDSAVE” extinguishes; LED “UCES” (compact unit) rsp.
LED’s “UCER”, “UCES” and “UCET” (chassis units) begin to light up
- at 12V all LED’s excluded LED “5V” are off
SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 18 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Measuring the internal supply voltages

5.) Switch on the external 24V power supply and measure the internal supply voltages at the assigned yellow sockets with
reference to ground (ground/common: black socket at lower left):

24V (permissive range: +20 to +28V) * ............

5V (permissive range: +4.90 to +5.30V) ............
+15V (permissive range: +14.25 to +15.75V) ............
-15V (permissive range: -15.75 to -14.25V) ............

* the value originates from the external 24V power supply and has to be within the permissive range!

plausible cause of fault: PSU-board

6.) Verify that the DC-link voltage at converter terminals C, D reads approximately zero.
Check the voltage at socket UZKN with reference to ground (as the DC-link voltage reads about zero volt, voltage UZKN
corresponds to the offset-error of the DC-link voltage evaluation):

- UZKN (permissive range: -50mV to +50mV) ............

plausible cause of fault: PSU-board

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 19 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Measuring the current transformers offset-error

7.) Check the voltages IRN, ISN and ITN representing the output current in phases U, V, W (as the output current is zero,
voltages IRN, ISN and ITN correspond to the offset-error of the current evaluation):

- IRN (permissive range: -50mV to +50mV) ............

- ISN (permissive range: -50mV to +50mV) ............
- ITN (permissive range: -50mV to +50mV) ............

plausible cause of fault: current transformers / IVI-board

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 20 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Connecting the DC-link to the external 24V power supply

8.) Switch off the external 24V power supply and connect DC-link terminals C, D to the same external
24V power supply. Please mind the correct assignment of polarity:

+24V (red socket at the mcb) to terminal C (red socket)

0V (black socket at the mcb) to terminal D (black socket)

X9
PEU
24V power- 24V power-
supply supply
mains CD mains CD
+ - + - + - + -
X9
PSU

Simovert Simovert
Master Drives Master Drives

motor motor
compact units chassis units

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 21 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Test of trigger PCB and function of the inverter transistors

9.) Switch on the external 24V power supply (--> the DC-link capacitors are charged to 24V).
Check the voltage at terminals C, D (ground/common on D):

- U.C-D (permissive range: +20V bis +28V) * ............

* the value originates from the external 24V power supply and has to be within the permissive range!

10.) For the test coming up it is absolutely necessary that the motor is disconnected!
Using the three switches within the inverter section of the testbox the power transistors can be triggered
(the “master/slave” switch is relevant for parallelled inverters / type M / only).

Select the switch position as shown below, verify the indication of the LED’s and measure the voltage at the converter
output terminals U, V (ground/common on U):

U+ V+ W+

1 1 1
0 0 0
1 1 1

U- V- W-

- U.V-U (expected voltage: negative 24V) ............

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 22 Siemens AG © 2013
Testbox,
Test of trigger PCB and function of the inverter transistors

Now select the new switch position as shown below, verify the indication of the LED’s and measure the voltage at the
converter output terminals U, V (ground/common on U) again:

U+ V+ W+

1 1 1
0 0 0
1 1 1

U- V- W-

- U.V-U (expected voltage: positive 24V) ............

Following the same routine check the remaining four combinations of

inverter switching state ( U.U-W, U.V-W ).

plausible cause of fault: IVI-board / IGD-board / power transistors

Of course, you will also measure the other four combinations at the phases U - W and V- W

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 23 Siemens AG © 2013
Testbox,
Checking the heat-sink temperature evaluation

11.) The correct function of the temperature sensor rsp. sensors on the heat sink is verified by a voltage measurement on
socket TWRN.
(Compact units, type A - D and chassis units, type E - H have one temperature sensor only; pushbuttons I, II and III
serve to select one of The correct function of the temperature sensor rsp. sensors on the heat sink is verified by a
voltage measurement on socket TWRN. (Compact units, type A - D and chassis units, type E – H have one
temperature sensor only; pushbuttons I, II and III serve to select one of the three temperature sensors available
in units starting with type J.) the three temperature sensors available in units starting with type J.)

Measure the voltage on socket TWRN with reference to ground:

- TWRN = ............

Compare your reading with the values in the table below

(for units of larger power ratings refer to next page):

temperature (heat-sink) compact units, A - D chassis units, E - H

permissive range permissive range

10°C 5.64 ... 6.24 4.75 ... 5.55
20°C 5.37 ... 5.97 4.53 ... 5.29
30°C 5.02 ... 5.56 4.23 ... 4.94
40°C 4.59 ... 5.09 3.86 ... 4.51

plausible cause of fault: temperature-sensor / PSU-board

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 24 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Checking the heat-sink temperature evaluation

measuring point 1 measuring point 2 measuring point 3

temperature permissive range
(heat-sink on left) (heat-sink on right) (air temp. if watercooled)
pushbutton I II III pushbutton I II III pushbutton I II III

100C 4.75 ... 5.55

20°C 4.53 ... 5.29 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
30°C 4.23 ... 4.94
40°C 3.86 ... 4.51
0 = pushbutton not pressed / 1 = pushbutton pressed

parallelled inverters, type M

measuring point 1 measuring point 2 measuring point 3 measuring point 4
temperature permissive range slave slave
(heat-sink on left) (heat-sink on right) (heat-sink on left) (heat-sink on right)
pushbutton I II III pushbutton I II III pushbutton I II III pushbutton I II III
10°C 4.75 ... 5.55
20°C 4.53 ... 5.29
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
30°C 4.23 ... 4.94
40°C 3.86 ... 4.51
0 = pushbutton not pressed / 1 = pushbutton pressed

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 25 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Checking the DC-link voltage evaluation

12.) For the last two tests it is absolutely necessary that the external 24V power supply is removed from the
DC-link terminals C, D and that the motor is disconnected!

Switch off the external 24V power supply, remove the connection to the DC-link terminals C, D and again switch
on the external 24V power supply.
Verify by measurement that the DC-link voltage at terminals C, D reads about zero volt.

Set all switches to position “0” (switch “master/slave” any position).

To measure the DC-link voltage, select the measuring range “1000VDC” at the voltmeter.

Restore the power supply to the converter rsp. inverter (for converters: restore the line-side supply / for inverters:
restore the DC-link supply via appropriate “precharging”) and measure the DC-link voltage
at terminals C, D:

- U.C-D (expected voltage: about U.D-C = 1.4 x U.ph-ph ) = . . . . . . . . . . . .

Note down the voltage at socket UZKN with reference to ground:

- UZKN = ............

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 26 Siemens AG © 2013
 Testbox,
Checking the DC-link voltage evaluation

If the DC-link voltage evaluation works correctly the reading for UZKN has to match with the value calculated with the
formulae below (DC-link voltage U.C-D as currently valid; see page A10):

3 AC 208 – 230 V rsp. DC 280 – 310 V : UZKN = 0.010750 x U.C-D

3 AC 380 – 460 V rsp. DC 510 – 620 V : UZKN = 0.005467 x U.C-D
3 AC 500 – 575 V rsp. DC 675 – 780 V : UZKN = 0.004400 x U.C-D
3 AC 660 – 690 V rsp. DC 890 – 930 V : UZKN = 0.003667 x U.C-D

plausible cause of fault: PSU-board

13.) For compact units only (type A - D)!

Select the measuring range “1000VDC” at the voltmeter, measure the DC-link voltage at terminals C, D and close
switch “bypass” to switch on the bypass-relay of the precharging resistors:

the DC-link voltage has to increase by about 10V

14.) Switch off the converter power supply (AC rsp. DC), switch off the external 24V power supply, disconnect the
external 24V from plug X9 and take out the adapterboard.

Insert the CUVC-board in the E-box (position 1, left), tighten the two screws of the CUVC-board (both to fix the
board mechanically and to provide emc-specific earthing) and reconnect all plugs as found prior to the tests.

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 27 Siemens AG © 2013
Fiber-optic measuring instrument

On MASTERDRIVE Chassis units with a line voltage of 660 V or higher, the firing signals for the IGBTs and the UCE
monitoring signals are exchanged via fiber-optic cables in order to ensure electrical isolation and compliance with EMC
standards. The Inverter Interface (IVI) sends the firing signals for the IGBTs to the IGBT Drive Board (IGD) while the IGD
transmits the feedback signals from the UCE monitoring system of the three phases to the IVI.

E-Box

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 28 Siemens AG © 2013
Fiber-optic measuring instrument

The optical output of the transmitter diodes on the Inverter-Interface (IVI), the IGBT-Gate-Drive-Board (IGD), the Inverter-
Multi-Parallel-Interface (IMPI) and the Inverter-Parallel-Interface (IPI) unfortunately diminishes as a result of air humidity or
chemical action.
This ageing process also depends on the "burn time" of the transmitter LEDs. Empirical evidence indicates that the
transmitter LEDs on the IGD board age faster than those on the IVI. This is because the IGD transmits the UCE feedback
signals to the IVI as a continuous signal, while the IVI transmits the IGBT firing signals to the IGD as pulsed signals.
When these transmitter diodes age, a fault signal is generally sent from the IGD to the IVI. This is inconvenient but does not
result in any major damage to the power unit. However, if the IGBTs are no longer correctly fired owing to ageing of the IVI
transmitter diodes, there is a risk of major internal damage to the power unit.
For this reason, the IVI must also be replaced whenever it is necessary to replace the IGD owing to a loss of optical output
from the transmitter diodes.
This problem affects only the transmitter diodes of types SFH 752 and 756. It does not affect transmitter diodes of type
SFH 757.

Reference component Aged component Current component type

Effects:
U13 >>> UCE feedback signal from transmitter diode on IGD board (with fault message F025 UCE)
U23 >>> UCE feedback signal from transmitter diode on IGD board (with fault message F026 UCE)
U33 >>> UCE feedback signal from transmitter diode on IGD board (with fault message F027 UCE)

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 29 Siemens AG © 2013
Fiber-optic measuring instrument

Affected devices:
All Chassis units with a supply voltage of 660 V 3AC or higher.
All Chassis units with a supply voltage of 380 to 480 V 3AC with power rating of 110 kW or higher
All Chassis units with a supply voltage of 500 to 600 V 3AC with power rating of 90 kW or higher

6SE70xx-xHExx Designation for Chassis I Frame size 5 (E) for 660 V AC

6SE70xx-xWExx Designation for Chassis I Frame size 5 (E) for 890 V DC
6SE70xx-xHFxx Designation for Chassis I Frame size 6 (F) for 660 V AC
6SE70xx-xWFxx Designation for Chassis I Frame size 6 (E) for 890V DC
6SE70xx-xxGxx Designation for Chassis I Frame size 7 (G) for all voltages
6SE70xx-xxHxx Designation for Chassis I Frame size 8 (H) for all voltages
6SE70xx-xxJxx Designation for Chassis II Frame size 9 (J) for all voltages
6SE70xx-xxKxx Designation for Chassis II Frame size 10 (K) for all voltages
6SE70xx-xxMxx Designation for Chassis II Frame size 12 (M) for all voltages
6SE70xx-xxK86-3xxx Designation for Chassis II Master
6SE70xx-xxK86-4xxx Designation for Chassis II Slave 1, 2, 3, …
6SE70xx-xxK86-7xxx Designation for Chassis II last slave

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 30 Siemens AG © 2013
Fiber-optic measuring instrument

The fiber-optic cable check must be carried out as described below:

Before any work commences, the converter or inverter must be disconnected and isolated from all voltages, power
supplies, DC infeed and control voltages (possibly supply electronic circuits with 24 V DC from the auxiliary power
supply). Safely lock out and tag out the unit and carefully follow the 5 safety rules!
Before removing the fiber-optic cable, use a permanent marker pen (e.g. Edding white) to mark the existing insertion
depth of the cable so that it can be correctly inserted again after the measurement has been taken. Undo the screw
connection at the receiver diode and pull out the fiber-optic cable. There is a small opening in the front face of the fiber-
optic measuring instrument into which the fiber-optic cable is inserted. The affected IGBT must now be fired using the
textbox. The display of the fiber-optic measuring instrument will now show the optical power in µW received at the
receiver diode. If it displays less than 5 µW, then action needs to be taken. There are a variety of possible causes for a
display of less than 5 µW:
- Ageing transmitter diode
- Transmissivity of fiber-optic cable is impaired (as a result of chemical influences, e.g. in the paper or chemical
industry), use reference fiber-optic cable if appropriate.
- Fiber-optic cable is not correctly connected to the transmitter diode (cable must be inserted up to the marking in the
transmitter or receiver diode).
- Particles of dirt on the transmitter or receiver diode

Marking

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 31 Siemens AG © 2013
Fiber-optic measuring instrument

Actions:
The problem can be solved as described below.
- Order replacement boards as spare parts, stating the correct device data (order number and serial number) in the order
and replace defective components.
- Order the repair service and have the LEDs replaced on site (interesting option only if a large number of devices need
to be replaced).
- It is not economical to replace the transmitter LEDs on varnished boards, i.e. the boards themselves need to be
replaced.

The transmitter LEDs must always be replaced by authorized personnel and are not available to order as spare
parts.

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 32 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
interface cable

How to determine the current firmware version in the drive

Software version Parameter r069.1 e.g. 4.4

Firmware version 4.42
Software identifier Parameter r828.1 e.g. 0.2

If a specific firmware version is installed in a drive, it is not possible to load the same firmware version again into the
drive because this process requires erasure of the contents from the flash EPROM. The flash EPROM erasure process
works only if the firmware to be loaded is different from the firmware which is already installed in the drive. In this case,
the existing firmware is automatically deleted.

Design of an interface combi-cable with BOOT function:

Close switch
before boot

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 33 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware up.- and downgrade,
Firmware from the internet (1)

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 34 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware up.- and downgrade,
Firmware from the internet (2)

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 35 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware up.- and downgrade,
Firmware from the internet (3)

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 36 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware up.- and downgrade,
Firmware from the internet (4)

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 37 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (1)

Unpack ZIP file

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 38 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (2)

2.) Run file

1.) Extract file

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 39 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (3)

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 40 Siemens AG © 2013
 Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (4)

1. Before you start the update process, you must save the user data and close the DriveMonitor
(interface must be made available).
2. The inverter needs to be prepared to receive the new software. The pins 9, 1 and 4 at the interface cable (at device end) must
be interconnected and the device then rebooted (switch 24 V supply off and then on again).
With a Compact type unit or larger, the PMU displays an "E",
with CompactPlus type unit, the PMU display is blacked out.

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 41 Siemens AG © 2013
 Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (5)

1. Set the interface (COM2 at Power Field PG)

2. Set the baud rate (57,600 baud)

Note: The COM2 interface is not included

in the selection list, but can be typed
directly into the selection box!

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 42 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (6)

1.) Select configuration file

2.) Start the update

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 43 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (7)

Data transfer in progress

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 44 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (8)

Data transfer complete

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 45 Siemens AG © 2013
Firmware upgrade and downgrade,
procedure (9)

When the update is complete, the following actions need to be taken:

1. Power unit definition

2. Download user data
3. Drive ready for operation

SITRAIN
Checking and maintenace Page 46 Siemens AG © 2013
SITRAIN

Practical
exercises

© Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved.

Table of contents

Contents Page
Parameter assignment on the PMU...................................................................................................... 3
Power section definition...…………..................................................................................................... 4
Parameter reset to factory setting...................................................................................................................... 5
DriveMonitor................................................................................................................................................ 6
Data backup.............................................................................................................................................. 11
Download......................................................................................................................................................... 12
Script file...................................................................................................................................................... 18
Quick parameter setting ..................................................................................................................... 24
Detailed parameter assignment .............................................................................................................. 28
BICO technology.......................................................................................................................................... 31
Datasets....................................................................................................................................................... 39
Free display parameters.............................................................................................................................. 41
Fault memory.............................................................................................................................................. 42
User parameters........................................................................................................................................ 51
Slots…………................................................................................................................................................ 53
SIMOLINK.................................................................................................................................................... 54

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 2 Siemens AG © 2013
Parameter assignment on the PMU

PMU for compact PLUS devices PMU for compact and built-in devices

Press P + ▲ to permanently switch to parameter r000.

Press P + ▼ to switch to parameter r000

But if P is pressed again,
the display switches back to the previous parameter.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 3 Siemens AG © 2013
 Power section definition

Based on the order number (MLFB) of the converter, determine the associated value for P070. Compendium Chapter 6

Carry out a power section definition on the PMU.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 4 Siemens AG © 2013
 Parameter reset to factory setting

Reset the CUVC parameters to the factory setting and observe the sequence on the PMU.

select P366 = 0

Note: Resetting to the factory setting (FS) on the PMU sets the bus address P700 = 0 and baud rate P701 = 6.
Resetting to FS with DriveMonitor - /-X300 retains the set values of P700 and P701.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 5 Siemens AG © 2013
DriveMonitor,
Serial interface connection (1)

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 6 Siemens AG © 2013
DriveMonitor,
Serial interface connection (2)

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 7 Siemens AG © 2013
 DriveMonitor,
Serial interface connection (3)

DriveMonitor can be operated at a

maximum of 38,400 baud.

P701 = 8 must be set on the

MASTERDRIVE to permit this baud
rate.

Please also note:

The manual control and
programming device
OP1S only works with
9,600 baud or 19,200
baud. This requires P701
= 6 or = 7 on the
Masterdrive.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 8 Siemens AG © 2013
DriveMonitor,
Defining a drive (1)

Neither the selection "Based on factory setting"

nor the selection "Empty parameter set"
result in any change in the MASTERDRIVE.

This file is only required as a basis for

communication with the selected drive type.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 9 Siemens AG © 2013
 DriveMonitor,
Defining a drive (2)

Hinwei
s

Hinwei
s

Communication between a PC and SIMOVERT

requires the same settings in the DriveMonitor and
on the SIMOVERT drive for the parameters

P700 (bus address) and P701 (baud rate).

Addresses from 0 to 31 are possible for P700.

The address 0 is set at the factory.

The DriveMonitor can only communicate using the

baud rates 9,600, 19,200 and 38,400 baud.

P701 = 6 is factory-set for 9,600 baud.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 10 Siemens AG © 2013
Data backup,
Backing up parameter settings (upload)

Perform backups in both ways in the directory

D:\Kurse\DriveMonitor using the designation "IBN":

- Basic Device: Changes Only

This is sufficient for setting a new or replaced drive in the
same way.
- Basic Device Complete
Can likewise be used for a new or replaced drive and can
additionally be used to compare datasets.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 11 Siemens AG © 2013
 Download,
Transferring a file (1)

Commission the converter by downloading file "D64s_1_DRIVEMON.dnl" which you can find in directory D:\Kurse\DriveMonitor

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 12 Siemens AG © 2013
 Download,
Transferring a file (2)

After downloading the converter features essential operational characteristics as listed below; verify by suitable tests that the
converter function matches to the specification.

- emergency stop (OFF2): active with: switch DI5=off (switch in middle position)
- ON/OFF: via switch DI6=on/off (switch in upper/middle position)
- indication "operation": at LED DS1 = on (switch in lower position)
- setpoints (additive): + via function motorpot / value set with PMU-keys [ /\ ] / [ \/ ]
+ via fixed setpoints 0Hz / 10Hz selected by switch DS4=off / on
- indication "fixed setpoint = 10Hz": at LED DS2 = on (switch in lower position)
- converter frequency limits: +62.5Hz / -32.5Hz
- actual stator frequency: at PMU in r000 [Hz]

- bus address: 5
- baud rate: 38.4kBaud

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 13 Siemens AG © 2013
 Download,
Write-protected parameters (1)

Note down the currently valid values of the parameters listed in the table below in the left-hand column "D64s_1.dnl" (if
you should read the values by means of "Free Parameterization", assign any name e.g. test1 to this list so it can be
called up again for further use):

D64s_1_.dnl test1 test1.dnl

P053 parameter access no entry

P060 menu select 2

P070 order no. 6SE70.... 52

P448 jog setpoint 1 50

P700.1 SST bus address 12

P742 transm. power SLB 1

P918.1 CB bus address 7

Now click OFFLINE in the DriveMonitor menu.

Create your own download file of the type: "Empty parameter set", file name: "test1.dnl"
using the parameters and values suggested in the column "test1" above:
Save the file test1.dnl on the hard drive of the PC while still in the status OFFLINE.
Switch to ONLINE and transfer the file "test1.dnl" to the converter.
Then, after the file test1.dnl has been downloaded, check the parameters from the list and then write the current values
(ONLINE) in the right-hand column. An explanation for this is provided on the next page.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 14 Siemens AG © 2013
Download,
Write-protected parameters (2)

Supplement the right column "test1.dnl" with the currently valid parameter values:

parameters P060, P070, P700 and P918 have not been changed by downloading file "test1".

These parameters belong to a group of parameters which are not overwritten by downloading any file;
the entire group of "write-protected parameters" is listed below:

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 15 Siemens AG © 2013
 Download,
Indication of "parameters which failed to be downloaded"

Download file "test2.dnl" to the converter:

You will observe that of the seven parameters of file "test2.dnl" only five parameters
have successfully been downloaded.

Read out the parameter numbers of the parameters which "failed to be downloaded" via button "Details":

[In "DriveMonitor" the "list of faults" pops up immediately. After acknowledging it (button "OK") an empty window
is shown for about 20s before the message "Communications error" appears.

ERROR: Download Value Failure PNR . . . . . . . . . . PNR . . . . . . . . . .

Acknowledge with button "OK".]

Change to OFFLINE-mode and edit file "test2.dnl" to enable the downloading of all parameters of file "test2":

required change of setting: P....... = .......

[Using."DriveMonitor" the selection to change the parameter value has to be confirmed by a "double-click left" prior to
acknowledging the setting.]

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 16 Siemens AG © 2013
Download,
Indication of "parameters which failed to be downloaded"

Download the thus edited file "test2.dnl" once more to the converter.

Read out the parameter numbers of the parameters which "failed to be downloaded":

ERROR: Download Value Failure PNR . . . . . . PNR . . . . . .

PNR . . . . . . PNR . . . . . .

Explanation: downloading the "correctly" programmed parameter P053 enabled the download of parameters from P053
onward; parameters with smaller parameter numbers still failed to be downloaded.
Since parameter P053 is now set "correctly" by the previous download, a renewed download has to transfer all
parameters.

Acknowledge the window still open with button "OK".

Again download file "test2.dnl" to the converter.

All parameters are downloaded successfully.

By downloading file "test2" following converter features have been redefined:

- the function "emergency-off" is removed from switch DI5 (P555=1),
- additional setpoint 1 is set to a constant zero (P433=0).

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 17 Siemens AG © 2013
Script file,
Commissioning (1)

Change to \Explorer\ to call up the text-file "Basic.txt" in C:\DriveMonitor:

Open the text-file "Basic.txt" and edit converter and motor data:
//
// select file "Basic.txt"
// File [File]
// Open [Open]
// fill in drive-specific data in replacement of the "????"

Save the edited text file as a script file with the name "Basic.ssc":
//
// File [File]
// Save as [Save As]
// Save in: C:\DriveMonitor
// assign file name "Basic.ssc"
// Save [Save]
// File [File]
// Exit [Exit]
// directory C:\DriveMonitor now also includes file "Basic.ssc"

(A printout of the script file can be found at the end of the current section)

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 18 Siemens AG © 2013
Script file,
Commissioning (2)

Change back to DriveMonitor and initiate the download of script-file "Basic.ssc" to the converter.

During the download routine observe the messages in the pop-up menu "Script" and
carry out the requests in pop-up menu "DriveMon".

Wait till the downloading of the script file data is finished and terminate the function "downloading a script file" by pressing the
"OK" button.

For information only:

The routine as triggered by the requests in the pop-up menu of the script file corresponds to the steps
listed below:

- when the PMU indication reads "A078" the converter is switched on

to start the optimization routine "motoridentification at standstill",

- when the PMU indication reads "A080" the converter is switched on

to start the optimization routine "no-load measurement",

- when the PMU indication reads "A080" again the converter is switched on
to start the optimization routine "speed controller optimization".

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 19 Siemens AG © 2013
 Script file,
Commissioning (3)

After successful downloading the converter features following essential operational characteristics:

- ON/OFF: via PMU-keys [ I ] / [ 0 ]

- main setpoint: via MOP without memory / PMU-keys [ /\ ] / [ \/ ]
- frequency limits: 0Hz / 50Hz
- indication "operation": LED DS2 = on (switch in lower position)
- indication "no fault": LED DS1 = on (switch in lower position)
- bus address: 5
- baud rate: 38.4kBaud

Save this parameter assignment status with UPLOAD, Basic Device: Changes Only

in a file and assign a file name such as "IBN_after_Script.dnl".

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 20 Siemens AG © 2013
 Script file,
Commissioning (4)

REM ************************************************************ REM ---Changeover to menu "fixed settings"

REM Filename: 1_Scriptfile_BasicCommissioning.txt WRITE 60 0 2
REM Scriptfile for MASTERDRIVES Vector Control CUVC WRITE 366 0 0
REM After you have typed in the required parameter values REM ---Execute the default-routine
REM instead of ???? store this textfile by the name WRITE 970 0 0
REM Basic.ssc . For commissioning this file will later be REM ---Wait till the default-routine has been completed
REM downloaded to the converter via Simovis or DriveMonitor. TIME 20
REM ************************************************************ WAIT 60 0 1
REM ************************************************************ REM ************************************************************
REM ** A) Converter data ** REM ************************************************************
REM ************************************************************ REM ** C) Motor data **
REM ---Changeover to menu "power section definition" REM ************************************************************
WRITE 60 0 8 REM ---Changeover to menu "drive settings"
REM ---Definition of the inverter order number 6SE7016-1EA61 WRITE 60 0 5
PARAMDIALOG 70 0 REM ---Entry of type of control and motor data as per name plate
REM ---Changeover to menu "general parameter access" WRITE 100 1 4 REM speed contr..
PARAMDIALOG 101 1 REM voltage
WRITE 60 0 1 PARAMDIALOG 102 1 REM current
REM ---Wait till condition P60=1 is reached WRITE 104 1 ???? REM Cosinus Phi
TIME 5 WRITE 107 1 ???? REM frequency
WAIT 60 0 1 WRITE 108 1 ???? REM speed
REM ************************************************************ WRITE 130 1 11 REM encoder
REM ************************************************************
WRITE 151 1 1024 REM pulses/rev..
REM ** B) Default ** WRITE 383 1 600 REM therm. time
REM ************************************************************ REM ---Changeover to menu "general parameter access"
WRITE 60 0 1
REM ************************************************************
SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 21 Siemens AG © 2013
 Script file,
Commissioning (5)

REM ************************************************************ REM ---Request of "speed controller optimization"

REM ** D) Automatic Optimization ** WRITE 115 0 5
REM ************************************************************ REM ---This command generates the alarm "A080". The converter
REM ---Request of "motor identification at standstill" REM has to be switched on within 20s!
WRITE 115 0 2 REM The request to switch on is displayed in the pop-up menu
REM ---This command generates the alarm "A078". The converter REM "script" with the message as follows
REM has to be switched on within 20s! REM
REM The request to switch on is displayed in the pop-up menu MSG Please give ON-command via PMU-key within 20s !
REM "script" with the message as follows REM
REM REM ---Wait till "speed controller optimization" is finished
MSG Please give ON-command via PMU-key within 20s ! TIME 70
REM REM ************************************************************
REM ---Wait till "motor ident. at standstill" is finished
TIME 60
REM ---Request of "no-load measurement"
WRITE 115 0 4
REM This command generates the alarm "A080". The converter
REM has to be switched on within 20s!
REM The request to switch on is displayed in the pop-up menu
REM "script" with the message as follows
REM
MSG Please give ON-command via PMU-key within 20s !
REM
REM ---Wait till "no-load measurement" is finished
TIME 70

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 22 Siemens AG © 2013
 Script file,
Commissioning (6)

REM ************************************************************
REM ** E) Linking out option boards **
REM ************************************************************
REM ---Changeover to menu "hardware configuration"
WRITE 60 0 4
REM ---Linking out option board SLB
WRITE 2910 4 1
REM ---Changeover to menu "general parameter access"
WRITE 60 0 1
REM ---Wait till condition P60=1 is reached
TIME 5
WAIT 60 0 1
REM ---Application-specific settings
WRITE 651 2 0
WRITE 590 0 0
REM ************************************************************
REM ** End Scriptfile

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 23 Siemens AG © 2013
 Quick parameter setting (1)

For an easy function test of the converter and motor (uncoupled, if necessary), the Quick Parameter Setting is available.
Within the parameter groups for
- Motor,
- Type of control and
- Sources for controller and setpoints,
the necessary parameters are shown in a list prepared in the program.
Additional parameters are automatically set according to these parameter values to be specified.
Reset all parameters to the factory setting beforehand in order to have a defined status of the drive.
Then select the following in the DriveMonitor program:

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 24 Siemens AG © 2013
 Quick parameter setting (2)

If you click on Quick Parameter Setting, this screen will appear. Note: Parameter P060=3 was set automatically.

This procedure is also described in the Compendium, Section 6.2, as a flow chart.
SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 25 Siemens AG © 2013
 Quick parameter setting (3)

Enter the correct motor data according to the rating plate: Check especially: P102 = 1.9 A !!!
and define the desired functions as described below :
- Type of control :
Vector control: P100 = 4
with speed control using a tachometer
- Technical system conditions :
Standard drive: P114 = 0
- Sources for setpoints and commands:
Analog input and terminal strip : P368 = 1
- Thermal motor protection, Yes,:
Time constant, motor type 1LA7073.... P383 = 600 s

After all the values have been entered, the quick parameter setting must still
be started: Set P370 = 1 for this purpose

Monitor the PMU and wait until the process has finished.

You will notice: Parameter P060 = 1, was changed automatically.

After the "quick parameter setting" has been completed, the function block diagram shown on the next page applies!
Note:
The motor data as per the type plate is now known to the converter, but the current and speed controllers are not yet
optimized.
This is done later.
SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 26 Siemens AG © 2013
Quick parameter setting (4)

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 27 Siemens AG © 2013
 Detailed parameter assignment (1)

Many additional functions can be selected in the MASTERDRIVE, but they are not yet activated via "quick commissioning".
Reset the converter to the factory settings, this time via DriveMonitor with the PC.
(This will retain the settings for communication with the computer.)
Select the menu "Free parameter assignment"
P053=6, P060=2, P366=0, P970=0.

1) Open the "Drive settings" menu for the converter (Converter 1)

Click on Parameters, Drive settings
This sets the parameter P60 = 5 and opens a list of parameters
as shown in the flow chart of the Compendium, Section 6.3.3.

2) Also use the flow chart from the Compendium, (see Course folder Chapter 7 Page 6-58 )
and program as follows:
- No output filter P068 = 0
- Motor type P095 = 10
- Speed control P100 = 4
(with pulse encoder P130 = 11; no zero track, no monitoring track; P151 = 1024 pulses/revolution)
- Motor data as specified on the rating plate:
- Motor, rated torque: P113 = 5 Nm
- Technical conditions P114 = 0 (standard drive)
- All modulation types P339 = 0
- Pulse frequency: P340 = 10 kHz (limits max. current to 7.7 A; derating!)

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 28 Siemens AG © 2013
 Detailed parameter assignment (2)

- Reference current : P350 = Rated motor current

- Reference voltage: P351 = Rated motor voltage
- Reference frequency: P352 = Rated motor frequency
- Reference speed: P353 = Synchronous speed
- Reference torque : P354 = 5 Nm
- Basic sampling time on: P357 = 1.2 ms
- Thermal motor protection: Yes, Warning P380 = 0 / cutoff P381 = 0 (values >1 only possible
if KTY84 installed! Not available in the test device.)
- Thermal time constant : as for motor type 1LA7073 (--> 600s)
- Motor load limit / warning: P384.1 = 100%
- Motor load limit / cutoff : P384.2 = 125%
- Maximum frequency for clockwise rotating field: P452 = 60 Hz (value in [%])
- Maximum frequency for counter-clockwise rotating field : P453 = -60 Hz (value in [%])
- Maximum output current: P128 = 4.0 A
- Ramp-up time: P462 = 3 s
- Ramp-down time: P464 = 6 s
- "Dynamic response" of speed controller (dynamic factor): P536 = 50%

Follow the steps from the flow chart for a detailed parameterization.
You are also guided through the automatic optimization processes (P115).
The individual values for P115 are explained in Section 3 of this course folder.
The motor will only run optimally if the optimization processes have been successfully carried out.
Then back-up the set parameter values with "Upload": e.g. as "Detail_Para.dnl".

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 29 Siemens AG © 2013
 Detailed parameter assignment (3)

Current status of the drive: (current param.: = Detail_Para.dnl)

During the parameter reset (already carried out), the frequency setpoint was "wired" to the output of the motor potentiometer
(KK058, Sheet 300) via the ramp-function generator (Sheet 316-318) and the actual speed value was "wired" to the speed
controller input (Sheet 360) via the pulse encoder (KK091, Sheet 250) and speed processing (Sheet 350).
In addition, the torque setpoint is connected through to the gating unit (Sheet 420) and further to the power unit via the torque
limiting (Sheet 370) and the current controller (Sheet 390).

As a result of the "wiring" carried out via the parameter reset, the converter already offers the following functions:
- ON/OFF1 command via the PMU keys [ I ], [ 0 ]
- Motor pot. control via the PMU keys [ /\ ], [ \/ ]
- Alarm message "0" active to LED DS1
- System status message "1" active to LED DS2
- Selection of the BiCo datasets via switch DS3 (BiCo dataset 1 with DS3=switched off "0")

Set the switches of the "converter 1, AC/AC-unit" simulator connected to the converter (Converter 1) as recommended and
check the following functions:
- Switches DS3, DS4, DI5, DI6 in middle position (no binary output selected, all binary input signals to "0")
- Switches DS1, DS2 in lower position (binary outputs selected)
--> LED DS1 illuminates in the "No fault" status
- The converter is switched on and off using the PMU keys [ I ], [ 0 ]
--> LED DS2 illuminates in the "Operation" status
- The frequency can be set between 0 Hz and 50 Hz using the PMU keys [ /\ ], [ \/ ].

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 30 Siemens AG © 2013
 BICO technology,
Binary inputs/motor potentiometer

Modify or extend the parameterization so that the converter will be switched on and off by switch DS1
(middle pos. = off, upper pos. = on):

- 90, 180 -
P554.1 = . . . . . . . P651.1 = . . . . . . .

Adapt the parameterization of the "motorpot." to allow for testing of the frequency limits
set above ( +10 Hz up to 40 Hz):

- 300 -
P421 = . . . . . . . P422 = . . . . . . .

- The ramp generator is always effective

P425 =

- MOP output is stored after OFF

P425 =

- The ramp generator works without initial rounding

P425=

parameterization of parameter P425 =

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 31 Siemens AG © 2013
 BICO technology,
Manual/automatic mode

In addition to the "main setpoint via motorpot." a frequency of 20Hz is to be defined as "fixed
setpoint 1 (set)" and is to be added as "additional setpoint 1": KK041
P....... = ....... - 290 -

Check the setpoint at the terminal KK041 displayed as percentage, as frequency, and as speed value:

"Percent" P . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . Display on .......=.......

"Frequency" P . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . Display on .......=....... - 30 -

"Speed" P . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . Display on .......=.......

Parameterize DI5 for the switchover "Manual/Automatic": off by switch DS1 (middle pos. = off, upper pos. = on):

DI5 = ON (switch in upper pos.) Setpoint via motorpot. function / PMU

DI5 = OFF (switch in middle pos.) Automatic setpoint = fixed setpoint 1

- 300 -
P429 = . . . . . . . P430 = . . . . . . .

Check the "Manual/Automatic" function.

Then set the motor potentiometer permanently back to manual mode: P430 = 0

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 32 Siemens AG © 2013
 BICO technology,
Jog mode / fixed setpoints

Program in such a way that the Jog function is activated with a jog setpoint of 5 Hz
if the switch DS4 = High/On.

P568.1 = . . . . .. - 180, 316 -

P448 = ....... Test of the Jog function!

Finish selecting the Jog function with DS4: P568.1 = 0 or P569.1 = 0

Parameterize the switches DS4 and DI5 to select the fixed setpoints FSP 9 to FSP 12 as follows:

[ FSP = fixed setpoint ]

DS4 DI5 FSP Parameterization - 90 -

0 0 + 10 Hz FSP 9: P . . . . . . . = . . . . . . .
0 1 -50 Hz FSP 10: P . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . Observe
r419 !
1 0 +25 Hz FSP 11: P . . . . . . . = . . . . . . .

1 1 -12.5 Hz FSP 12: P . . . . . . . = . . . . . . .

P580 = . . . . . . . P581 = . . . . . . . - 190, 290 -

P417 = . . . . . . . P418 = . . . . . . .

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 33 Siemens AG © 2013
 BICO technology,
Fixed setpoints / binary outputs
Wire the fixed setpoints as "main setpoint":

P443.1 = . . . . . . . - 290, 316 -

Check the selected settings at r419.

Switch on the drive (DI6) and check the speed which is reached
according to the switch positions of DS4 and DI5.

Output the signal "Ramp-function generator is active " at the binary output DS1.

DS1 LED should be on if the ramp-function generator is active (switch DS1 in lower switch position):

- 317, 200, 90 -
P651.1 = . . . . . . .

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 34 Siemens AG © 2013
 BICO technology,
Analog inputs / response to OFF1

At the Analog input 1 the voltage can be set between -10 V and +10 V using the potentiometer.

Please do not yet switch on the drive.

Test "Analog input 1" by measuring the signal at parameter r637.1

- Rotate the potentiometer to the right endstop, i.e. the "10V" position; r637.1 = 100%
- Using the switch to the right of the potentiometer, you can change the polarity of the setpoint
(switch position up +100%, down -100%)
Set an analog setpoint at the potentiometer of approximately + 1V => r637.1 = approx. +10%.

Connect this analog signal in such a way that it acts as a frequency setpoint and is introduced behind the ramp-function
generator :

Q.Additionalsetpt. 2* P438.1 = . . . . . . . - 318 -

Put the switches DS4 and DI5 in the lower position (setpoint = + 10Hz ) and switch the drive ON (DI6).
Wait until the motor has reached a constant speed.

Now switch the drive OFF (DI6).

The motor slows down, but the drive does not switch off because the analog input signal is connected
behind the ramp-function generator and remains active as a setpoint for the drive.

Explanation:
Parameter P800 defines the OFF threshold value.
- 480 -
As long as the actual speed/frequency is above this value, the drive remains ON.

* = Source for additional setpoint 2

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 35 Siemens AG © 2013
 BICO technology,
Analog inputs / response to OFF1

Modify the parameter assignment so that the drive switches off under the following conditions:

- OFF1 command was given;

- Additional setpoint 2 = is less than 5% ZSW2 (r442) P800 =....... - 480 -

- for longer than 3 seconds P801 =.......

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 36 Siemens AG © 2013
 BICO technology,
Analog inputs

Scaling of the analog input: This exercise only as needed

To perform this test, you do not need to run the motor.

Parameterize analog input 1 (setpoint 1) and the additional setpoint ZSW2

(displayed in % at r442):

(1) 0V --> +10% (voltage measured at the CUVC -X102: 15,16)

(2) +5 V --> -10% (or check it on the spiral potentiometer scale)

0
Calculation: 0 Volt =
0

5
5 Volt =
0

P.......=....... P.......=....... - 80, 318 -

Reset the parameters of the analog input to the default values:

AE1 Offset P631.1 = 0, Scaling ZSW2 P439.1 = 100

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 37 Siemens AG © 2013
 BICO technology,
Analog outputs

Testing the analog output:

To perform this test, you do not need to switch on the motor.

Connect fixed setpoint 1 to the analog output 1. P640.1 = . . . . . . . . - 81, 290 -

Set the required parameters so that

P401 = (1) 0% should result in - 2 V

P401 = (2) +10% should result in + 8 V

Calculation:

P640.1 = . . . . . . .

Scaling: P643.1 = . . . . . . . Offset: P644.1 = . . . . . . .

Check the settings on the analog instrument or measure the voltage on the AO1 simulator.

Reset the values of the analog output to the initial values:

P640.1 = 0, P643.1 = 10, P644.1 = 0.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 38 Siemens AG © 2013
 Datasets (1)

Separate the analog setpoint 1 from additional setpoint 2 P438.1 = 0

Copy BICO dataset 1 to BICO dataset 2:

- 540 -
P363 = . . . . . . .

In the factory setting, switch DS3 was connected to P590 = 14 and switches/modifies the active index of all
parameters of the BICO dataset. Pxyz.B

Check if the BICO datasets can be selected as follows:

DS3 = Low/OFF BICO dataset 1 active r012 = 1 - 190 -

DS3 = High/ON BICO dataset 2 active r012 = 2

Check whether the drive functions uniformly with BICO dataset 1 and BICO dataset 2.

(ON/OFF1 command from DI6, speed setpoint from fixed setpoints).

Why does the main contactor not immediately switch off,

after the OFF command has been issued and the motor is no longer running?

Modify the respective parameters in such a way that the contactor opens when the motor stops.

P800 = ……. P801 =……………..

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 39 Siemens AG © 2013
 Datasets (2)

Modify the parameters in the corresponding indices to satisfy the following conditions:

DS3 = OFF BICO dataset Index 1 active Main setpoint = zero

Additional setpoint 1 with DS4 and DI5 fixed setpoints 9-12
Additional setpoint 2 Zero

DS3 = EIN BICO dataset Index 2 active Main setpoint from motor potentionmeter via PMU keys
Additional setpoint 1 =0
Additional setpoint 2 via analog input setpoint 1

Main setpoint Additional setpoint 1 Additional setpoint 1

P443.1 = . . . . . . . P433.1 = . . . . . . . P438.1 = . . . . . . . - 316, 318 -

P443.2 = . . . . . . . P433.2 = . . . . . . . P438.2 = . . . . . . .

Note:
The settings of analog input 1 can still be different than in the factory settings due to the previous exercise.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 40 Siemens AG © 2013
 Free display parameters

Current, voltage, torque, speed, frequency and output can be displayed as scale values.

Parameterize the sources of the display as follows.

Parameter Expected display Actual display

- 30 -
P036.1 = 1 r037.1 = %

P034.1 = 5 r035.1 = Volt

P042.1 = 8 r043.1 = Hz

Consider which display is expected and compare it with the values that you see.

Now "upload":
Back up the current parameter assignment in a file with the name Converter.dnl.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 41 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Handling the fault-memory (1)

The converter identifies a large number of external and internal faults both on hardware and software. These faults
are monitored as "Fxyz" and stored in a fault memory for (later) diagnosis.

The fault memory operates as shift-register (FIFO) with a memory for eight fault events (possibly with multiple faults
to one event); on storing the 9. fault event the first (oldest) fault event is deleted.

An overview of the fault memory is shown in the function diagrams, sheet 510;
via Diagnostics / Faults, Alarms all relevant parameters can be called up in DriveMonitor.

If a fault occurs it is stored as "fault event 1"; if the fault is acknowledged (CTW1, bit7 i.e. via PMU, [ P ] ) it is shifted
to position "fault event 2", position "fault event 1" reads "no fault"!

Each fault (fault memory, r947) evaluated by the converter is stored with assignment of the trip time (operating time,
r782, NOT real time) and occasionally with more detailed information (fault value, r949).

For following signals the values vaild at the moment of fault are stored:
- speed / frequency (static value) r783
- speed / frequency (gradient) r784
- torque generating current component r785
- converter output voltage (setpoint) r786
- control status r787

The practical training as follows serves to familiarize with the application of the fault memory.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 42 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Handling the fault-memory (2)

To provide a known basis for the "application of the fault memory", default the converter (left) via PC:

// Parameter
// Fixed Settings
// P970 = 0
// ok

Select the lower switch position (binary output / LED) for switches DS1 and DS2 and the middle switch
position ("0"-signal) for switches DS3, DS4, DI5 and DI6 on the simulator "converter 1".

Download file "test5.dnl" to the converter on the left.

 the converter is ready for operation as follows:

- On/Off via PMU-keys
- automatic accelleration to 20Hz
- status message "converter in operation" at LED DS2
- "Fault message" at LED DS1

Switch on the drive (PMU) and keep it operating for some "tens" of seconds.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 43 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Handling the fault-memory (3)

Simulate a first fault by closing switch DI5:

 the converter signals alarm A042, A034 and trips with a fault message after short delay.

fault message F....... fault text ..............................

Discontinue the simulation of the fault (DI5 = off), acknowledge the fault message (PMU-key [ P ] )
and switch the drive on again.

As a second fault simulate "power supply failure" by opening the mcb on your training unit:
 the converter is de-energized

Re-energize the drive by closing the mcb and note down the fault message:

fault message F....... fault text ..............................

Acknowledge the fault message (PMU-key [ P ] ), switch the drive on again and keep it operating for
some "tens" of seconds.

Switch off the drive, simulate a third fault by closing switch DS4 and switch the drive on again:
 the converter trips after short delay.

fault message F....... fault text ..............................

Discontinue the simulation of the fault (DS4 = off), acknowledge the fault message (PMU-key [ P ] ),
switch the drive on again and keep it operating for some "tens" of seconds.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 44 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Handling the fault-memory (4)

Switch off the drive, simulate a fourth fault by closing switch DS3 and switch the drive on again:
 the converter trips after short delay

fault message F....... fault text ..............................

Discontinue the simulation of the fault (DS3 = off), acknowledge the fault message (PMU-key [ P ] ),
switch the drive on again and keep it operating for some "tens" of seconds.

Simulate a last fault by closing switch DI6 (this time DON’T acknowledge the fault after noting it down):
 after a delay of 5s the converter trips with a fault message.

fault message F....... fault text ..............................

For a selection of signals the values vaild at the moment of fault are stored (for the latest fault).
Call up the diagnostic menu in DriveMonitor (Diagnostics / Faults, Alarms) and note down
the values stored for the latest fault:

r 783 = . . . . . . . r 784 = . . . . . . .

r 785 = . . . . . . . r 786 = . . . . . . .

r 787 = . . . . . . . ....... ....... .......

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 45 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Handling the fault-memory (5)

Analyse the "control status" (r787) at the moment of fault based on the excerpt of the parameter list:

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 46 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Handling the fault-memory (6)

Enter the trip time (r782) at which the five simulated faults occurred in the in the trip time table below:

by defaulting all entries in the fault memory have been deleted; trip times are counted in operating hours only)

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 47 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Handling the fault-memory (7)

Note down the fault events (r947) and the (occasionally) assigned fault values (r949) as stored in the fault memory
in the table below (the table structure is adapted to the "trip time table"); the fault text of the indicated fault values
can be looked up in the "faults list" (Compendium).

fault event fault value fault text

r947.01 r949.01

r947.09 r949.09

r947.17 r949.17

r947.25 r949.25

r947.33 r949.33

r947.41 r949.41

Discontinue the simulation of the fault (DI6 = off) and acknowledge the still persisting fault message.

 the stored fault events, fault values and trip times are shifted "towards the back" by "one position",
 the "latest fault" is shown as "fault event 2", "fault event 1" reads "no fault" ( 0 ).

Delete all entries in the fault memory by defining "number of stored faults = 0", P952 = 0:
 all fault events, fault values and trip times are deleted

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 48 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Trouble shooting by adapting parameters to application specifications

Adaptation to main contactor checkback delay:

Once more simulate the fault "main contactor checkback" by closing switch DS4 and switch on the drive:

 the converter trips after short delay with fault message "F001, main contactor checkback".

Suppose that a main contactor actually exists and an auxiliary contact is both wired and programmed as checkback signal
(P591 = 663; binector of the auxiliary contact).

Adapt the parameterisation so that the drive can be switched on for the setup as supposed (maintaining the simulation,
DS4 = on; NOT by cancelling the main contactor checkback signal):
- 190 -
P....... = .......

Adaptation to blocking time:

Switch the drive on again and simulate once more the fault "motor stalled" by closing switch DI5:

 the converter trips after a few seconds’ delay with fault message "F015, motor stalled".

Suppose that the motor is mechanically blocked for 3.5s by means of its application.

Adapt the parameterisation so that the drive resumes operation immediately after release of the
mechanical blocking
- 485 -
P....... = .......

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 49 Siemens AG © 2013
 Fault-memory,
Trouble shooting by adapting parameters to application specifications

Reaction on identifying of a fault:

Cancel the "fault delay" for the "external fault" simulated by switch DI6: P781 = 0.

Adapt the parameterisation so that the drive no longer switches off by blocking the inverter pulses (OFF2) on
identifying "external fault", but responds by decellerating with the ramp as set in the ramp function generator and
switches off at near standstill (n < 0.5%; DEF) only (OFF1):

P 834.1 = . . . . . . .

Masking a fault:
Mask-out the fault event "external fault" so that the drive continues to operate even though an "external fault" is
triggered:

P 830.1 = . . . . . . .

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 50 Siemens AG © 2013
 User parameters,
Lock and key (1)

With the setting on parameter P060 = 0 you only have access to the "user parameters".
These are entered as "list" in the indices of parameter P360.1 ….. P360.100.

In the default setting, P360.1 = 60 and P360.2 = 53 are already entered.

All of the other 98 indices can be freely assigned with parameter numbers, to which you will then also have
access if P060 = 0

(Note: After "quick commissioning" has been carried out, many other indices are automatically assigned in P360.ii).

Most important step:

Enter the value 358 in parameter P360.3 (P360.3 = 358). P358 is the "key parameter".

Now the "key parameter (P358)" belongs to the user parameters.

Without this entry you have no access to the "key" if the "lock" is closed!

Now enter some existing parameters of your choice in the "User parameters" list:
P360.1 = 060 (fixed) P360.4 = . . . . . . .
P360.2 = 053 (fixed) P360.5 = . . . . . . .
P360.3 = 358 (must be entered by you) P360.6 = . . . . . . .

Select the "User parameter" Menu (P060=0) and use the PMU keys
to scroll through the parameters.

You will notice that parameters that are not in the list P360.ii are not displayed.

These are simply "skipped" in order to simplify access to selected parameters.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 51 Siemens AG © 2013
 User parameters,
Lock and key (2)

In order to protect the parameter assignment from unauthorized access,

read and write accesses can be blocked with a user-selected password
for all parameter settings.

Only P053 and P060 and the parameters that are entered in the indices of P360.ii
can then be accessed.

Program the "lock", parameter (P359.x), in both indices with a password (decimal number or hexadecimal number).
(different passwords per index are possible):

P359.1 = . . . . . . . (for example 1234)

P359.2 = . . . . . . . (for example AbCd)

Switch to the "User parameter" menu (P060 = 0):

If a drive is blocked, you can

--> read and write the user parameters that you defined in P360.ii

--> select the "Fixed settings" menu (P060 = 2) to restore the factory setting if applicable

--> "Read access" and "write access" to all other parameters is denied!

It will only be possible again to gain access to all parameters after

you have entered the correct passwords in the "key" parameter indices.

P358.1 = P359.1 and P358.2 = P359.2

If you "UPLOAD"/read-out of the parameters with the PC on a blocked drive, only the "user parameters" are read out.

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 52 Siemens AG © 2013
 Slots,
Installation of optional PCBs

Hardware configuration and slot selection/de-selection in the electronic box

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 53 Siemens AG © 2013
 SIMOLINK ,
Configuration

The following exercise requires at least two training kits, each with a SIMOLINK board (SLB) mounted on an adapter board
(ADB) and installed in the electronic box.
The function diagrams - 140, 150, 160 - show the necessary SIMOLINK parameters.

Program the following functions:

Drive 2 shall be turned ON at its PMU and its setpoint shall be from the analog input, setpoint 1.
Drive 1 shall turn on with the ON-command via SIMOLINK from drive 2, and shall receive its setpoint also via SIMOLINK from
drive 2.
The "RUN" status from drive 1, as feedback, shall energize the DOUT1 LED at drive 2.

P554 = ………. P443 = ………. P554 = ………. P443 = ………. - 180, 316 -

Drive 1 ON-Command Drive 2

(left) Setpoint (right)
Drive 1 = running

+10V

-10V

M
3~

P740 = ......… P741 = ……... P651.1 = …….. P740 = ……… P741 = ……... - 140, 160 -
P742 = …….. P743 = ……... P742 = ……… P743 = ………
P745 = …….. P749 = ……… P745 = …….. P749 = ………
P751.1 = …….. P751.2 = ……… P751.1 = …….. P751.2 = ………
SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 54 Siemens AG © 2013
 SIMOLINK ,
Hardware test on the assembly

Note:
A single SIMOLINK board can be tested for proper operation by setting P740 = 0 ( Dispatcher) and a fiber optical
cable connected from its sending diode to its own receiving photo transistor (Optical "short circuit").

As a result all the three LEDs on the SLB should be flashing (red, yellow and green)

SITRAIN
Practical exercises Page 55 Siemens AG © 2013
 7
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE70 Vector Control

Extract from Compendium

Section Topic Page

2 Configuration and Connection 2-1 to 2-23

3 Conformance with EMC-Regulations 3-13 to 3-15

5 Parameterization 5-1 to 5-41

6 Parameterizing Steps 6-1 to 6-76

7 Umrichterfunktionen 7-6 to 7-18

9 Control- and Statusword 9-1 to 9-14

10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

2 Configuration and Connection

Examples

DANGER The device must be disconnected from its voltage supplies (24 V DC
electronics supply and DC link / mains voltage) before the control and
encoder leads are connected or disconnected!

2.1 Compact PLUS type units

2.1.1 Single-axis drive
The single-axis drive (see Fig. 2-1) is used if only single-drive tasks
need to be accomplished or if power equalization through several axes
is either undesired or not possible.
For this purpose, a converter is used that is directly connected to the 3-
phase supply via an external main contactor, a line filter and a line
reactor as necessary. Any regenerative energy is stored in the
capacitor module or reduced in the braking resistor.

2.1.2 Multi-axis drive up to 3 axes

In the case of multi-axis drives (see Fig. 2-2) a converter (AC-AC) can
be combined with inverters (DC-AC). The converter rectifies the line
voltage and supplies the inverters with direct voltage via the DC link
bus module. The power supply integrated in the converter further
provides the 24 V supply voltage for the electronics of a maximum of 2
inverters.

CAUTION If more than 2 inverters are connected, the 24 V supply for the
electronics must be provided by an external power supply.
The total rated output currents of the inverters supplied by a converter
must not exceed the rated output current of the feeding converter (in
the case of 6SE7021-0EP60 only half the rated output current).
The regenerative energy generated in one axis can either be used up
by the other motors, stored in the capacitor module or reduced in the
braking resistor.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-1
Configuration and Connection Examples 10.2001

2.1.3 Multi-axis drive

In the case of multi-axis drives (see Fig. 2-3) with more than 3 axes,
several inverters are connected to the line voltage via a common
rectifier unit.
An external power supply is required for the 24 V supply voltage for the
inverter electronics.
The regenerative energy originating in one axis can be used by the
other motors, stored in the capacitor module or dissipated in the
braking resistor.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

2-2 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
 X9 Internal 24 V-SNT
1
External 24 V 24V 2
supply ON OFF
10.2001

- +
P24V
33 S1 Switch for
24 V output USS bus termination

Siemens AG
M24 Serial interface 2 PE
34 3AC 50 - 60 Hz
PMU X103 L1
35 380 - 480 V
RS485P L2
Serial interface 2 UART L3
RS485N
(RS485) Main switch
36 Micro- Fault
Run
X100 controller 5 2
I
X101 Controller O P A1
1 Jog 7 8 9
ON/OFF
P24 1
Aux. power 4 5 6
A2 Q1
supply 2 1 2 3

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
M24
60 mA Reset
Braking
0 +/- Control
resistor
3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 voltage 14 Line filter
Out OP1S AC 230 V
Out In In

n.c.

P5V
Out

Fig. 2-1
BOOT
4 Out
Bidirectional Out/In
12 3

RS485P.
In

RS485N.
digital inputs 5V In

RS232 TxD
RS232 RxD
and outputs 5 Out
Iout ≤ 20 mA 24V In
BOOT X7 D' C' X6 X1 X6
6 Out DC link bus

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

In module D' C' U V W PE1 H G
4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs X3 PE3 510 - 650 V X3 PE3
Outputs
7 5V D D
24V In
Digital inputs C C
Ri = 3.4 kΩ 8 5V
24V In X9.2
Inputs
.1
9 X103
Analog input 1 A X100.33 11
(non-floating) In +
D .34
11 bit + sign AI 1 Serial interface 1 24 V .35

Compendium Vector Control

Fault
Rin = 60 kΩ 10 (RS232) == ~ 4 .36 Run
230 V I
D X104 X101 X102 USS bus
Analog output 1 11 -10...+10 V O P
10 bit + sign A .23 .1 .13
Jog 7 8 9
U: I ≤ 5 mA .24
12 M AO 1 .25
Slot A 4 5 6
.26 9 1 2 3
Slot B .27
Reset
.28 0 +/-
X102
Control .29
Reference voltage P10 OP1S
13 voltage .30 .12 .21
P10 V / N10 V
X104 AC 230 V
I ≤ 5 mA N10 S4
14 Capacitor module AC-AC converter
1 Tacho M Compact PLUS type Compact PLUS type
-10...+10 V 23
Analog output 2 D 2
10 bit + sign 15 Track A Pulse
A 3 U2 V2 W2 PE2
0...+20 mA 24
U: I ≤ 5 mA AO 2 encoder
I: 0...+20 mA
16 M A Track B I≤190 mA 15
X2
S 25
Analog input 2 17 zero
S3 A I 13
(non-floating) In 26
D Options are shaded in gray
11 bit + sign C Control
4 5 AI 2
U: Rin = 60 kΩ 27
I: Rin = 250 Ω (close S3) 18
Tacho P24
5V 28
Digital input 19 In
24V Mottemp BS M
Ri = 3.4 kΩ 29 Motor G
Out temperature 3~
20 HS1 Mottemp
30 sensor
Floating contact switch KTY84 or 18
30 V / 0.5 A HS2 PTC thermistor
21

Configuration example of a single-axis drive of the Compact PLUS type

Configuration and Connection Examples

2-3
 X9 Internal 24 V-SNT
1

2-4
External 24 V 24V 2
supply ON OFF
- +
P24V
33 S1 Switch for
24 V output USS bus termination
M24 Serial interface 2 3AC 50 - 60 Hz PE
34 L1
PMU X103 380 - 480 V
35 RS485P L2 Options are shaded in gray
L3
Serial interface 2 UART
RS485N Main switch
(RS485) Micro- Fault
36 2
Run 5
X100 controller I A1
X101 O P ON/OFF
Controller 1
1 Jog 7 8 9
P24 A2 Q1
Aux. power 4 5 6
supply 2 M24 1 2 3 Control voltage
60 mA "Safe STOP"
0 +/- Reset AC 230 V 14 Line filter
Checkback Control
3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Braking
Out OP1S resistor 0 V: open:
Out In In "Safe STOP" "Safe STOP"

n.c.
12 3

P5V
Out
16

BOOT
4 Out
Bidirectional Out/In

RS485P.

RS485N.
digital inputs 5V In
In X7 D' C' X6 X1 X6 X533.1 .2 .3 .4

RS232 TxD
DC link bus

RS232 RxD
and outputs 5 Out
Iout ≤ 20 mA In D' C' U1 V1 W1PE1 H G module
24V 510 - 650 V
BOOT PE3 X3 PE3 X3 PE3 X3 PE3
6 Out X3
D D D D

Fig. 2-2
In
4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs C C C C
Outputs
Configuration and Connection Examples

7 5V X9.2 Supply
24V In
Digital inputs .1 voltage
+24 V X100.33 X100.33
Ri = 3.4 kΩ 8 5V X100.33
In + 0V .34 .34
Inputs 24V .34
24 V .35 .35
.35
~ 4 .36 .36
9 == .36
Analog input 1 A 230 V X104 X104 X103 X104 X103
In USS bus 11
(non-floating) D .23 X101 X101 X101
8 .23 .23
11 bit + sign AI 1 Serial interface 1 .24 .1
X102 X103 .24 .1 .24 .1 11
Rin = 60 kΩ (RS232) .25 X102 X102
10 .13 11 .25 .25
.13 .13
.26 .26 .26
D .27 9 .27 .27
Analog output 1 11 -10...+10 V .28 Fault 9 9
A Run
.28 .28
10 bit + sign Control .29 I .29 .29
U: I ≤ 5 mA 12 M AO 1 voltage .30 .30 .30
Slot A .12 .21 O P .12 .12
.21 .21
AC 230 V Jog 7 8 9
Slot B Capacitor modulel AC-AC converter DC-AC inverter DC-AC inverter
4 5 6
X102 Compact PLUS type Compact PLUS type Compact PLUS type Compact PLUS type
1 2 3
Reference voltage P10
U2 V2 W2 PE2 0 +/- Re set U2 V2 W2 PE2 U2 V2 W2 PE2
P10 V / N10 V 13
I ≤ 5 mA N10 X104 X2 X2 X2
S4 OP1S
14 15 15 15
1 Tacho M
-10...+10 V 23

Compact PLUS type

Analog output 2 D 2
10 bit + sign 15 Track A Pulse 13 13 13
A 3 0...+20 mA 24
U: I ≤ 5 mA AO 2 encoder
I: 0...+20 mA
16 M A Track B I≤190 mA
S 25
Analog input 2 17 zero
S3 A I
(non-floating) In 26 M M M
D G G G
11 bit + sign C Control 3~ 3~ 3~
4 5 AI 2
U: Rin = 60 kΩ 27
I: Rin = 250 Ω (close S3) 18 Tacho P24 18 18 18
5V 28
Digital input 19 In
24V Mottemp BS
Ri = 3.4 kΩ 29 Motor
Out temperature
20 HS1 Mottemp
30 sensor
Floating contact switch KTY84 or

Compendium Vector Control

30 V / 0.5 A HS2 PTC thermistor
21

Configuration example of a multi-axis drive with up to 3 axes of the

10.2001

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
 X9 Internal 24 V-SNT
1
External 24 V 24V 2
supply ON OFF
- +
P24V
33 S1 Switch for
10.2001

24 V output USS bus termination

M24 Serial interface 2
34
PMU X103
35 RS485P

Siemens AG
"Safe STOP"
Serial interface 2 UART Options are shaded in gray
RS485N Checkback Control
(RS485) Micro- Fault Braking resistor
36 12
Run 0 V: open:
X100 controller I "Safe STOP" "Safe STOP"
X101 O P 16
Controller
1 Jog 7 8 9
P24
Aux. power 4 5 6 To further X7 D' C' X6 D' C' H G X533.1 .2 .3 .4
X91.2 DC link bus
supply 2 M24 1 2 3 capacitor module
60 mA 0 +/- Reset modules 7 .1 510 - 650 V
3 X3 PE3 X3 PE3 X3 PE3 X3.3 PE3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OP1S
Out D D D D
Out In In C C C C

n.c.

P5V
Out

BOOT
4 Out To further
Bidirectional Out/In .1 X9 Supply inverters

RS485P.
In

RS485N.
digital inputs 5V In

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
.2 voltage Compact PLUS

RS232 TxD
RS232 RxD
and outputs 5 +24 V X100.33 X100.33
Out X100.33 DC-AC
Iout ≤ 20 mA In 0V .34 .34
24V .34
BOOT .35 .35
6 Out .35
.36 .36
In .36
4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs X103 X103
Outputs USS bus 8 X104 X101 11 X104 X101
7 5V .23 .1 .23 .1
11

Fig. 2-3
24V In .24 .24
Digital inputs X320 X102 X102
.25 .25
Ri = 3.4 kΩ 8 5V .13 .13
In .26 .26
Inputs 24V .27 9 .27 9
Fault
Run
.28 .28
10
Analog input 1 9 A I .29 .29
In .30 .12 .30 .12
(non-floating) D O P .21 .21

0V

+24 V
11 bit + sign AI 1 Serial interface 1 Jog 7 8 9
Rectifier unit + DC-AC inverter DC-AC inverter

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

Rin = 60 kΩ 10 (RS232) Capacitor module 4 5 6
Compact PLUS type Compact PLUS type Compact PLUS type Compact PLUS type
DC24 V- 1 2 3
Analog output 1 D
-10...+10 V X1 U1 V1 W1 PE supply 0 +/- Reset U2 V2 W2 PE2 U2 V2 W2 PE2
11
10 bit + sign A
U: I ≤ 5 mA OP1S X2 X2
12 M AO 1
Slot A 4
3 15 15
Slot B
X102 17
Reference voltage P10 6 OFF ON 5
P10 V / N10 V 13 13 13
I ≤ 5 mA N10 X104 Line filter 14
14 S4
1 Tacho M
-10...+10 V 23
Analog output 2 D 2 Control A1
15

Compendium Vector Control

10 bit + sign A Track A Pulse 1
3 0...+20 mA 24 voltage
U: I ≤ 5 mA AO 2 encoder AC 230 V
16 M A A2 Q1
I: 0...+20 mA Track B I≤190 mA
S 25

Compact PLUS type

Analog input 2 17 zero 2 M M
S3 A I G G
(non-floating) In 26 Main switch
D 3~ 3~
11 bit + sign C Control
4 5 AI 2 L1
U: Rin = 60 kΩ 27
I: Rin = 250 Ω (close S3) 18 18 18
Tacho P24 3AC 50 - 60 Hz L2
5V 28 380 - 480 V
Digital input 19 L3
24V In
Mottemp BS
Ri = 3.4 kΩ 29 Motor PE
Out temperature
20 HS1 Mottemp
30 sensor
Floating contact switch KTY84 or
30 V / 0.5 A HS2 PTC thermistor
21

Configuration example of a multi-axis drive with rectifier unit of the

Configuration and Connection Examples

2-5
Configuration and Connection Examples 10.2001

2.1.4 Configuration and connection examples (Compact PLUS)

NOTE The following explanations refer to the numbered gray triangles in Figs.
2-1 to 2-3. These figures are just examples of possible configurations of
drives. The necessary individual components have to be clarified
according to the specific task.
The information and notes required for dimensioning the individual
components and the respective order numbers can be found in the
Catalog.

1) Line contactor All the equipment is connected to the line via the line contactor, which
Q1 is used to separate it from the line if required or in the event of a fault.
The size of the line contactor depends on the power rating of the
connected converter or inverter.
If the line contactor is controlled from the converter, the main contactor
checkback time P600 should be set to at least 120 ms.
2) Line fuses According to their response characteristic and to suit the requirements,
the line fuses protect the connected cables and also the input rectifier
of the unit.
3) Line The line commutating reactor limits current spikes, reduces harmonics
commutating and is necessary for keeping system perturbations to within the limits
reactor laid down by VDE 0160.
4) 24 V power The external 24 V supply is used to maintain the communication and
supply diagnostics of the connected-up units even with powered-down line
voltage.
The following criteria apply regarding dimensioning:
♦ A current of 1 A must be provided for the rectifier unit, and a current
of 2 A for each inverter connected.
♦ When the 24 V supply is powered up, an increased inrush current
will be generated that has to be mastered by the power supply.
♦ No controlled power supply unit has to be used; the voltage must be
between 20 V and 30 V.
5) ON/OFF In the case of a single drive and a multi-axis drive without a rectifier
unit, a switch is used to energize or de-energize the line contactor.
When they are switched off, the drives are not brought to a controlled
standstill, but are braked only by the load.
In the case of a multi-axis drive with a rectifier unit, a pushbutton is
used to energize the line contactor. The line contactor is kept energized
by means of a lock-type contact connected to the fault signaling relay of
the rectifier unit, as long as no fault is detected at the rectifier unit.
6) OFF switch Operating the OFF switch causes the line contactor to open
immediately.
The drives are not brought to a controlled standstill, but are braked only
by the load.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

2-6 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

7) Fault signaling If a fault occurs in the rectifier unit, a fault message is output via the
relay connecting contacts of the signaling relay.
When the 24 V supply is connected, the relay closes as long as no fault
is present.
In the event of a fault, the lock of the line contactor is opened, the
contactor drops out and the drives coast down.
8) Internal USS bus The USS bus is used for the internal communication of the units and
only has to be connected if it is required.
9) X101 The digital inputs and outputs and the analog input and output have to
be assigned according to the requirements of the drives.
CAUTION: Terminal X101.1 may not be connected with the
external 24V supply.
10) X320 interface of The X320 interface of the rectifier unit serves only for permanently
the rectifier unit connecting the user-friendly OP1S operator control panel and for
connection to the on-line inverters.
Please refer to the relevant operating instructions for the applicable
measures and notes for correct operation.
11) X103 serial The serial interface is used to connect the user-friendly OP1S operator
interface control panel or a PC. It can be operated either according to the RS232
or the RS485 protocol.
Please refer to the relevant operating instructions for the applicable
measures and notes for correct operation.
12) Precharging the When a capacitor module is used, the terminals for precharging the
capacitor capacitors must be connected.
module
13) Output contactor The use of an output contactor is purposeful if a motor needs to be
electrically isolated from the converter/inverter with the DC link
charged.
14) Line filter Use of a line filter is necessary if the radio interference voltages
generated by the converters or rectifier units need to be reduced.
15) Motor supply The Siemens cables described in the catalog should be used for
line connecting the converter and the motor to each other.
16) Safe STOP The "Safe Stop" option enables the power supply for the transmission
(Option) of pulses into the power section to be interrupted by a safety relay. This
ensures that the unit will not generate a rotating field in the connected
motor.
17) Auxiliary The auxiliary contactor is used to interrupt the self-holding condition of
contactor the main contactor in the event of a fault signal. It must be used if the
control voltage for line contactor Q1 is 230 V AC.
The auxiliary contactor is not required if a line contactor with a control
voltage of 24 V DC is used.
18) Pulse generator Used to acquire the motor speed and allows speed-controlled operation
with the highest degree of dynamic response and precision.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-7
Configuration and Connection Examples 10.2001

Braking resistor The brake choppers are already included in the Compact PLUS rectifier
units and converters. Only a suitable external braking resistor has to be
connected up, if required.
See also Chapter 11.7.
Encoder cable You will find preassembled encoder cables in Catalog DA65.10,
chapter 3. Please note that different encoder cables are required for
encoders and multiturn encoders. If the wrong encoder cable is used
for one or the other, fault F051 (during operation) or alarm A018 or
A019 is generated.

DANGER The encoder cable must only be connected and plugged in when the
converter is disconnected from the supply (24 V and DC link). Damage
to the encoder could result if this advice is not heeded.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

2-8 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

2.2 Compact and chassis-type units

2.2.1 Water-cooled units
If you are using water-cooled MASTERDRIVES please note that the
permissible operating pressure depends on the construction type.
Type B to G Operating pressure ≤ 1 bar. Operating pressures above 1 bar not
permitted! If the system is to be operated at higher pressure, the
pressure on each unit must be reduced to 1 bar initial pressure.
Type ≥ J Operating pressure ≤ 2.5 bar. Operating pressures above 2.5 bar not
permitted! If the system is to be operated at higher pressure, the
pressure on each unit must be reduced to 2.5 bar initial pressure.

2.2.2 Single units

The following two configuration examples show the wiring of a
converter (AC-AC) and an inverter (DC-AC).
The mains and motor connections and the connection to the braking
unit and fan can be seen on the right-hand side of the diagram.
The control terminal strips of the CUVC control board (Vector Control)
are shown enlarged for clarity on the left-hand side of the diagram.
Fig. 2-2 shows wiring examples for analog and digital inputs and
outputs.
You will also find descriptions of the terminals in the operating
instructions in the chapter entitled "Connecting-up".

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-9
 3AC 50 - 60 Hz PE
200 - 690 V L1
L2

2-10
X101 L3
Controller Slot A
Micro- Q1 Line circuit breaker
1 P24V Slot C
Auxiliary controller Control 1
Slot D
power supply 2 M24 voltage A1 K1
150 mA Slot E AC 230 V
Slot F 2
3 ON/OFF
Out Slot G S1 A2
Out In In
Out PMU X300
4 Out
Bidirectional Out/In
digital inputs 5V In 3 Mains filter
In
and outputs 5 Out
Iout ≤ 20 mA In Fault
24V Run 5
Out re 4 12
6 X108 I
In For converters
O P
4 bidirectional digital inputs/ outputs 3AC 200 - 230 V
Jog 7 8 9
Outputs P sizes A - D
7 5V 4 5 6 and
In
24V 1 2 3 chassis-type units 5 X3 C D
U1 V1 W1 PE1 C D
8 5V 0 +/- Reset from size E: X1 L1 L2 L3 L+ L- X3
Digital inputs In terminal 4/5 (1kVA)
24V 9
Ri = 3,4 kΩ

Fig. 2-4
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OP1S instead of 7/9 (1kVA)
9 5V 7
In
Configuration and Connection Examples

n.c.

P5V
Inputs 24V

BOOT
RS485P 6

RS485P

RS485N
10
Serial interface 2 5 X9

RS232 TxD
RS232 RxD
USS (RS485) UART BOOT 4
RS485N
11 3
Control 0V
230 V 2
Ref. potential RS485 12 voltage + 24 V
AC 230 V 24 V 1
S2
10
+5V
X102 Switch for USS bus termination X38
X103 X101
Reference voltage 4
P10 AUX 1
P10 V / N10 V 13 23
≥1 24 Standard 5 14
I ≤ 5 mA N10 AUX 25
14 connections 5
26
27 see left of
S1 28 diagram
15 29
S3 A
In 30
Analog input 1 D 12
+5V
(non-floating) 1 2 AI 1 Switch for USS bus termination
11 bits + sign AC-AC converter Braking unitt
16
U: Rin = 60 kΩ X103 compact or chassis
I: Rin = 250 Ω
17 Tacho M G H X6
(close S3) S3 A 23 X2 U2 V2 W2 PE2
In
Analog input 2 D
Track A External
(non-floating) 3 4 AI 2 24 braking
18 A Track B 15 resistor
S4 S 25
AO 1 Pulse encoder
1 ϑ
D 3 -10...+10 V I Zero pulse I ≤ 190 mA 16 Filter 13
19 26

Compendium Vector Control

A 0...+20 mA
Analog output 1 2 C Control
20 M 27
10 bis + sign 17
AO 2 S4 Tacho P15
U: I ≤ 5 mA 4 28
6 -10...+10 V
I: R ≤ 500 Ω 21 D
A 0...+20 mA Mottemp BS
Analog output 2 5 29
Motor temperature sensor PTC/KTY84
22 M Mottemp KTY84 or PTC resistor
30
G M
M
3~

18 19

Options on gray background

Configuration example for compact or chassis-type unit (AC-AC)

10.2001

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
 PE
Example: DC 270 - 930 V C L1
Terminal assignment D L2
for factory setting with P366 = 0 X101 L3
Regulator Slot A Fault
10.2001

Micro- Run
1 P24V Slot C I
controller 1
Slot D O P
Outputs 2 M24

Siemens AG
Slot E Jog 7 8 9

4 5 6
3 Slot F
Message Out 1 2 3
"No fault" Slot G
Out In In 0 +/- Reset

Out PMU X300 X9 depends

4 Out
Message Out/In OP1S 5 on unit size
"Operation" 5V In
In
5 Out
(Jumper 1-5) BICO data set 2 In For sizes A to D and DC ≥ 510 V only
24V
Out 12
6 X108 Checkback NC contact Main contactor activation
Free In "Safe stop" "Safe stop" DC 30 V, 0.5 A
4 bidirectional digital inputs/ outputs

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
7 5V
P
Acknowledge fault In
24V 5 X3 C D
8
X1 U1 V1 W1 PE1 C D X3
5V In L1 L2 L3 L+ L-
OFF2
24V 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Fig. 2-5
9 5V 7
ON / OFF In

n.c.
6

P5V
Inputs 24V
P24

BOOT
RS485P 5

RS485P

RS485N
for BICO data set 2 10 X9
4

RS232 TxD
RS232 RxD
UART BOOT DC 30 V / 2 A
RS485N
11 3
0V

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

Control voltage 230 V 2
Ref. potential RS485 12 + 24 V
AC 230 V 24 V 1
S2 5
10
X18
1
+5V Fan voltage
X102 Switch for USS bus termination X38
1/2~ AC 230 V X103 X101
Reference voltage (for chassis-type units) 4
13 P10 AUX 1
P10 V / N10 V F101 23
≥1 Compact unit 24 Standard 14
I ≤ 5 mA N10 AUX 6 5
14 25 5
Size D: connections

Compendium Vector Control

26
F102 27 see left of
15 S1 Pay attention to 28
29
diagram
Analog input 1 S3 A transformer connection!
In 30
(non-floating) D 12
+5V
1 2 AI 1 Switch for USS bus termination
Set P443.2 = 11 for 16 DC-AC inverter Braking unit
fsetp from analog input 1 X103 compact or chassis
in BICO data set 2 17 Tacho M G H X6
S3 A 23 X2 U2 V2 W2 PE2
In
Analog input 2 D
Track A External
(non-floating) 3 4 AI 2 24 braking
18 A Track B 15 resistor
S4 S 25
AO 1 Pulse encoder
1
19 D 3 -10...+10 V I Zero pulse I ≤ 190 mA 16 Filter
ϑ 13
26
A 0...+20 mA
Analog output 1 f 2 C Control
fact 20 27
M 17
AO 2 S4 Tacho P15
4 -10...+10 V 28
21 D 6
A 0...+20 mA Mottemp BS
Analog output 2 I 5 29
22 Motor temperature sensor PTC/KTY84
IA M Mottemp KTY84 or PTC resistor
30
G M
M
3~

18 19

Options on gray background

Configuration example for compact or chassis-type unit (DC-AC)

Configuration and Connection Examples

2-11
2-12
2.2.3
20
X1 C D PE X104 5 U1 V1 W1 PE1 C D 5 U1 V1 W1 PE1 C D
17 X1 L1 L2 L3 L+ L- X1 L1 L2 L3 L+ L-
1 X19 Main contactor control unit 9 9
18 30 V DC/0.5 A
AC 230 V 2 6 7 7
19 6 6
X300 NC contact P24 P24
20 "safe stop" 5 X9 5 X9
Checkback signal 4 4
11 "safe stop" DC 30 V/2 A DC 30 V/2 A
X101 3 3
0V 0V
6 230 V 2 2
P24
7 + 24 V 1 + 24 V 1
M 24 V
10
X9 8 5 5
M AC 230 V AC 230 V
+ 24 V 9 X18 X18
Control 230 V 1 10 1 1

Fig. 2-6
voltage 0V 10 24 6 6
Configuration and Connection Examples

230 V AC 24 V 2 5
11 X300 X300
4 12 P557.001/002 OFF2 or 11 11
13 P561.001/002 pulse blocking
5 Fault
Run X103 X102 X101 X103 X102 X101
I 1 1
R ectifier/regenerative 23 13 23 13
fe edback unit O P 24 24
X1 X2 Jog 7 8 9
25 25
26 26
U1 V1 W1 PE1 U2 V2 W2 4 5 6 27 27
1 2 3 28 28
29 29
0 +/- Reset
30 22 30 22
12 12
OP1S
DC-AC inverter DC-AC inverter
compact or chassis compact or chassis
4 21 22
X2 U2 V2 W2 PE2 X2 U2 V2 W2 PE2
L1
23 L2
L3 15 15

Line filter 3 16 Filter 16 Filter

A2

Compendium Vector Control

Control 17 17
voltage 2
230 V AC A1 Q1
1
PTC/KTY84 PTC/KTY84
Main switch 50 - 60 Hz 3 AC
L3 380 - 480 V M M
500 - 600 V G G
L2
660 - 690 V 3~ 3~
L1
Configuration example with rectifier/regen. feedback unit

PE Options are shown with a grey background

18 18

Configuration example with rectifier/regenerative feedback unit

10.2001

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

2.2.4 Explanations relating to the configuration examples

(Compact and chassis-type units)

NOTE The following explanations refer to the numbered gray triangles in Figs.
2-1 to 2-3. These diagrams each show a drive configuration example.
The need for the individual components must be clarified according to
the given application.
In the catalog you will find the necessary information and notes
concerning the ratings of the individual components and the pertinent
order numbers.

1) Line fuses The line fuses afford protection against short circuit and, depending on
their utilization category (gL, gR or aR), also protect the connected
conductors and rectifier or input rectifier of the unit.
2) Line contactor K1 The converter or rectifier units, or infeed/regenerative feedback unit is
connected to the power supply via the line contactor and disconnected
in case of need or in the event of a fault.
The system is dimensioned according to the output of the connected
converter, rectifier unit or rectifier/regenerative feedback unit.
3) Radio A radio interference suppression filter is required whenever the radio
interference interference voltages originating from converters or rectifier units must
suppression filter be reduced according to EN 61800-3.
4) Line The line commutating reactor limits current peaks and reduces
commutating harmonics. It is also required, among other things, for compliance with
reactor the permissible system perturbations according to EN 50178 and
compliance with the radio interference suppression voltages.
5) Control terminal The X9 1/2 control terminals are provided with a connection for
strip X9 supplying devices requiring an external 24 V DC control voltage.
Terminals X9 7/9 on the compact units (inverters) and X9 4/5 on the
chassis units (converter and inverter) allow the output of an isolated
digital signal, e.g. to control a main contactor.
Function "SAFE STOP" on compact inverters and input units
(converters and inverters) with option K80
With the "SAFE STOP" function, a safety relay can be used to interrupt
the power supply for pulse transmission in the power section. This
ensures that the inverter cannot operate the connected motor.
6) Fan power supply On all chassis and compact units of type D, a supply voltage of 230 V
for inverter AC 50/60 Hz is required for the fans. The chassis units are connected
devices via X18:1.5 and the compact units are connected directly to fan fuses
F101 and F102.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-13
Configuration and Connection Examples 10.2001

10) 24 V auxiliary The external 24 V power supply serves to back up the communications
power supply and diagnostics functions of the connected devices when the line
voltage is switched off. Rectifier units always require an external 24 V
power supply.
The following criteria apply to dimensioning:
♦ Currents (see Catalog DA65.10)
♦ When the 24 V supply is switched in, an inrush current has to be
dealt with by the power supply.
♦ There is no need to install a stabilized power supply; the voltage
range must be kept between 20 V and 30 V.
11) X300 serial The serial interface is used for connecting the OP1S operator pane or a
interface PC. It can be operated according to the RS232 or the RS485 protocol,
as desired.
Please refer to the operating instruction for information concerning
proper operation.
15) Output reactors Limit the capacitive currents arising from long motor cables and make it
possible to operate motors situated a long way from the
converter/inverter.
(See Catalog DA65.10 Chapter 6).
16) Sine wave filter Limit the rate of voltage rise occurring at the motor terminals and the
du/dt-Filter voltage peak (du/dt-Filter) or generate a sinusoidal voltage
characteristic (sine wave filter) at the motor terminals (see Catalog
DA65.10, Chapter 6).
17) Output An output contactor serves a useful purpose wherever, with charged
contactor DC link, a motor has to be electrically isolated from the convert/rectifier
unit.
18) Pulse generator Used to acquire the motor speed and allows speed-controlled operation
with the highest degree of dynamic response and precision.
19) Motor fan Is to be operated in the case of separately ventilated motors.
20) Freewheeling For protection of the connected inverters against commutation failure.
diode
21) Fuse To protect the signal cables of a phase failure relay.
22) Phase failure Types suitable for a system voltage of 400 V 3 AC:
relays ♦ Siemens 5TT3407 suitable for TN systems
♦ Dold IL9079001 suitable for TN, TT and IT systems
Address: E. Dold & Söhne KG, PF 1251, D 78114 Furtwangen
Tel.: +49 7723/6540, Fax.: +49 7723/654356
The maximum response delay time is 20 ms.
The phase failure relays must be connected according to their
construction type.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

2-14 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

23) Voltage If the supply voltage deviates from 400 V, voltage transformers with a
transformer primary voltage corresponding to supply voltage U1 and U2 = 400 V on
the secondary side must be used.
The voltage transformers should correspond to class 0.5 or 1; size 3 VA
Transformers available on request from:
Ritz Messwandler GmbH & Co.
Salomon-Heine-Weg 72
D-20251 Hamburg
Tel.: +49 40/51123-0, Fax.: +49 40/51123-111
ELGE Elektro-Apparate GmbH
Grenzweg 3
D-91233 Neunkirchen
Tel.: +49 9123/6833
24) The output of the phase failure relay controls a digital input of the
rectifier/regenerative feedback unit on the CUR. Depending on the
requirements of the system, this input is assigned function AUS2 (trip
command with direct pulse disable P557.i) and disables the thyristors to
avoid a commutation failure very effectively.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-15
Configuration and Connection Examples 10.2001

2.3 Examples of motor junction wiring

2.3.1 Shielded cabling meeting EMC requirements to maintain EMC limit
values
The limit values of class A for industrial plants are met with the cabling
as shown in Fig. 2-7 and Fig. 2-8.
The limit values of class B1 for public networks are met with the cabling
as shown in Fig. 2-8.

e.g. NYCWY
L1

L3 L2

PE / concentric CU shield
A(PE) ≥ ½ A(Lx)

Transfor- SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

mer/
supply Cabinet PE busbar
PE1 PE2 U2 V2 W2
PE

Plant/factory ground

U V
W
PE
M 3~

Fig. 2-7 Protodur power cable:

NYCY -0.6/1kV
NYCWY -0.6/1kV

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

2-16 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

1/3 PE 1/3 PE
e.g. e.g. PE

Protoflex L1 Protoflex L1
EMV 3 plus EMV
L3 L2 L3 L2

1/3 PE
concentric CU shield concentric CU shield

Transfor- SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Transfor- SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

mer/ mer/
supply Cabinet PE busbar supply Cabinet PE busbar
PE1 PE2 U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2 U2 V2 W2
PE PE

Plant / factory ground Plant / factory ground

U V U V
W W
PE PE
M 3~ M 3~

Fig. 2-8 Protoflex power cable 2YSLCY-J -0.6/1kV

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-17
Configuration and Connection Examples 10.2001

2.3.2 Unshielded cabling

Cabling installed according to the following figure is sufficient for
technical operation of the drive.

e.g. NYY-J
L1
PE

L3 L2

Transfor- SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

mer/
supply Cabinet PE busbar
PE1 PE2 U2 V2 W2
PE

Plant / factory ground

U V
W
PE
M 3~

Fig. 2-9 Protodur power cable NYY-J -0.6/1kV

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

2-18 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

2.4 "Safe STOP" function

NOTICE The "SAFE STOP" function of SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES (also

known as "Starting lockout" in SIMODRIVE 611) satisfies
EN 60 204-1/DIN VDE 0113 Part 1 Section 5.4, "Devices for switching
off and preventing unexpected starting", but does not satisfy Section
5.3, Main switch function (isolating from the power supply). The main
switch function can be performed only by the use of an electrically
isolating switching element. The "SAFE STOP" function is also suitable
for implementing the stop function according to Category 0 and 1 as
defined by EN 60 204-1 / VDE 0113 Part 1, Section 9.2.2.
The requirements for the behavior of the control functions in the case of
a fault (EN 60204-1, Section 9.4) are met by fulfillment of the
requirements of EN 954-1 acc. to Category 3.

Purpose of the The SAFE STOP function is supplied as standard with SIMOVERT
"SAFE STOP" MASTERDRIVES of the compact series of inverter units in sizes A to D
function (with the exception of converters and inverters for 270 V DC to 310 V
DC). In the case of chassis units and Compact PLUS units, this function
is obtainable in the form of the K80 option.
The "SAFE STOP" function prevents unexpected starting from standstill
of the connected motor. The "SAFE STOP" function should not be
activated until after the drive is at standstill, because otherwise no
further braking is possible. That is why the drive must be brought to
standstill and secured by means of an external machine control. The
"SAFE STOP" function interrupts the power supply used to drive the
IGBT modules.

NOTICE A residual risk remains in the event of two faults occurring at the same
Residual risk time. The drive can then turn through a small angle (permanent-field
synchronous servomotors, e. g. 1FT6, 1FK6: 4-pole 90°, 6-pole 60°,
8-pole 45°; asynchronous motors: in the remanence range max. 1 slot
division, or about 5° to15°).
The "SAFE STOP" function does not electrically isolate the equipment
and therefore gives not protection from "electric shock".
The whole machine must be isolated from the supply system by
opening the main switch (EN 60204/5.3) in the event of production
shutdowns or for maintenance, repair and cleaning work on the
machine or plant.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-19
Configuration and Connection Examples 10.2001

When used with the positively-driven signal contacts of the compact

inverter units, the "SAFE STOP" function has to be connected to
terminal strip X9: 3/4 (chassis units: terminal strip X533: 1/2) in the line
contactor circuit or EMERGENCY OFF circuit. If there is any doubt as
to whether the SAFE STOP relay is functioning correctly with respect to
the operating mode of the machine, the drive concerned must be
electrically isolated from the power supply, e. g. by means of a line
contactor. The "SAFE STOP" function and the associated mode of
operation must not be used again until after the fault has been
remedied.

NOTICE When the "SAFE STOP" function is activated, it is possible in some

cases for the "Operating" status signal to be generated at the
converter/inverter. But the pulses are not released and so the motor
cannot turn. A hazard is therefore ruled out.
From the control, with the aid of 'Checkback SAFE STOP' (X9 Pin 3/4;
X533 Pin 1/2), make sure that the SAFE STOP function cannot be
deactivated in converter statuses other than 'READY FOR
OPERATION' or 'READY FOR SWITCHING ON'.
In order that the converter/inverter control recognizes the 'SAFE STOP'
status and proceeds to process this status in the sequencing control, a
binary input of the CUVC control unit must be activated, thereby
generating the OFF2 command (cf. P555...P557) and hence a starting
lockout.
When the OFF2 command is activated via "SAFE STOP", the converter
status changes to 'Starting lockout'.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

2-20 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

U1 V1 W1

X9 X 533 (Option K 80)

3 1

4 2 PV
5 4 P 24 V
6 3

X101
C
U

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

U2 V2 W2

X: Digital input, with OFF2 P556i001 and i002

Fig. 2-10 Configuration of the "Safe STOP" function in a SIMOVERT

MASTERDRIVES unit

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-21
Configuration and Connection Examples 10.2001

Operating principle The power supply to the individual motor windings is controlled by
of "SAFE STOP" means of the inverter power sections. A pulse formation logic drives the
6 IGBT power transistors in a rotating-field-oriented pattern.
In each transistor arm, an optocoupler/fiber optic cable is connected
between the control logic and the control amplifier of the power section
for potential isolation.
As it cannot be ruled out that the inverter electronics will generate a
pulse pattern capable of producing a rotating field (without a start
command being present), a method was found of safely preventing the
pulse pattern from reaching the ignition and control inputs of the IGBTs.
The "SAFE STOP" ACTIVE function implements an electrical
separation (interrupt) between the power supply and the driver
electronics of the IGBT inverter, thereby preventing the motor from
turning. The "SAFE STOP" function is activated by an external NO
contact and is active when the "SAFE STOP relay" has dropped out. In
the event of failure of the "SAFE STOP" function, the "SAFE STOP"
checkback contacts must separate the drive from the power supply by
means of a line contactor or the EMERGENCY STOP circuit.
No rotating-field-oriented operation of the power transistors is possible
while the "SAFE STOP" function is active. Simultaneous welding of two
IGBTs is the worst case leading to the residual risk described in the
above.

NOTICE • The motor can no longer develop torque while the "SAFE STOP"
function is activated. Non-self-locking drives must be secured by
means of a mechanical brake.
• The "SAFE STOP" function is not suitable for bringing a running
motor to a standstill as quickly as possible, because this function
turns off the control pulses and so the motor is braked only by the
load.

Advantage: The "SAFE STOP" function makes it unnecessary to

provide motor contactors.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

2-22 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2001 Configuration and Connection Examples

Connection of the In the case of compact inverter units, the "SAFE STOP" function is
"SAFE STOP" addressed via terminal strip X9:5/6, while in the case of chassis units it
function is addressed via terminal strip X533:3/4. When dropped out, the SAFE
STOP relay activates the "SAFE STOP" function.
Closure of terminals X9:3/4, or terminals X533:1/2 signifies that the
"SAFE STOP" function is active. These terminals provide a potential-
free signal of the status of the "SAFE STOP" function.

Terminal Designation Description Range

X9 1 +24 V (in) 24 V voltage supply DC 24 V ≤ 2.5 A
1 2 0V Reference potential 0V
2
3 Contact 1 "Safe STOP" checkback 2A
3
4 4 Contact 2 "Safe STOP" checkback DC30 V
5 5 P24 DC "Safe STOP" supply 10...30 mA
6 voltage
7
6 Switched signal "Safe STOP" control input DC 30 V
8
9 7 HV control Main contactor control
8 Not connected Not used
9 HV control Main contactor control DC30 V, 0.5 A

Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)

Table 2-1 Terminal connections of external aux. voltage supply DC 24 V, Safe
STOP, main contactor control for compact units

Terminal Designation Description Range

X533 4 P24 DC "Safe STOP" supply voltage DC24 V
4 3 Switched signal "Safe STOP" control input 30 mA
3
2 Contact 2 "Safe STOP" checkback DC 30 V
2
1 1 Contact 1 "Safe STOP" checkback 2 A 1)

Connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)

Table 2-2 Terminal connections of the K80 Option "Safe STOP" on chassis units

1) Compact PLUS tpye: 1 A

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 2-23
05.2003 Instructions for Design of Drives in Conformance with EMC Regulations

3.5 Design of drives in conformance with EMC regulations

3.5.1 Basic EMC rules

Rules 1 to 13 are generally applicable. Rules 14 to 20 are particularly

important for limiting noise emission.
Rule 1 All of the metal cabinet parts must be connected through the largest
possible surface areas (not paint on paint). If required, use serrated
washers. The cabinet door must be connected to the cabinet through
grounding straps which must be kept as short as possible.

NOTE Grounding installations/machines is essentially a protective measure.

However, in the case of drive systems, this also has an influence on the
noise emission and noise immunity. A system can either be grounded
in a star configuration or each component grounded separately.
Preference should be given to the latter grounding system in the case
of drive systems, i.e. all parts of the installation to be grounded are
connected through their surface or in a mesh pattern.
Rule 2 Signal cables and power cables must be routed separately (to eliminate
coupled-in noise). Minimum clearance: 20 cm. Provide partitions
between power cables and signal cables. The partitions must be
grounded at several points along their length.
Rule 3 Contactors, relays, solenoid valves, electromechanical operating hours
counters, etc. in the cabinet must be provided with quenching elements,
for example, RC elements, diodes, varistors. These quenching devices
must be connected directly at the coil.
Rule 4 Non-shielded cables associated with the same circuit (outgoing and
incoming conductor) must be twisted, or the surface between the
outgoing and incoming conductors kept as small as possible in order to
prevent unnecessary coupling effects.
Rule 5 Eliminate any unnecessary cable lengths to keep coupling
capacitances and inductances low.
Rule 6 Connect the reserve cables/conductors to ground at both ends to
achieve an additional shielding effect.
Rule 7 In general, it is possible to reduce the noise being coupled-in by routing
cables close to grounded cabinet panels. Therefore, wiring should be
routed as close as possible to the cabinet housing and the mounting
panels and not freely through the cabinet. The same applies for reserve
cables/conductors.
Rule 8 Tachometers, encoders or resolvers must be connected through a
shielded cable. The shield must be connected to the tachometer,
encoder or resolver and at the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES through a
large surface area. The shield must not be interrupted, e.g. using
intermediate terminals. Pre-assembled cables with multiple shields
should be used for encoders and resolvers (see Catalog DA65.10).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 3-13
Instructions for Design of Drives in Conformance with EMC Regulations 05.2003

Rule 9 The cable shields of digital signal cables must be connected to ground
at both ends (transmitter and receiver) through the largest possible
surface area. If the equipotential bonding is poor between the shield
connections, an additional equipotential bonding conductor with at least
10 mm² must be connected in parallel to the shield, to reduce the shield
current. Generally, the shields can be connected to ground (= cabinet
housing) in several places. The shields can also be connected to
ground at several locations, even outside the cabinet.
Foil-type shields are not to be favoured. They do not shield as well as
braided shields; they are poorer by a factor of at least 5.
Rule 10 The cable shields of analog signal cables can be connected to ground
at both ends if the equipotential bonding is good. Good equipotential
bonding is achieved if Rule 1 is observed.
If low-frequency noise occurs on analog cables, for example:
speed/measured value fluctuations as a result of equalizing currents
(hum), the shields are only connected for analog signals at one end at
the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES. The other end of the shield should
be grounded through a capacitor (e.g. 10 nF/100 V type MKT).
However, the shield is still connected at both ends to ground for high
frequency as a result of the capacitor.
Rule 11 If possible, the signal cables should only enter the cabinet at one side.
Rule 12 If SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are operated from an external 24 V
power supply, this power supply must not feed several consumers
separately installed in various cabinets (hum can be coupled-in!). The
optimum solution is for each SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVE to have its
own power supply.
Rule 13 Prevent noise from being coupled-in through the supply.
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES and automation units/control electronics
should be connected-up to different supply networks. If there is only
one common network, the automation units/control electronics have to
be de-coupled from the supply using an isolating transformer.
Rule 14 The use of a radio interference suppression filter is obligatory to
maintain limit value class "First environment" or "Second environment",
even if sinusoidal filters or dv/dt filters are installed between the motor
and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
Whether an additional filter has to be installed for further consumers,
depends on the control used and the wiring of the remaining cabinet.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

3-14 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2003 Instructions for Design of Drives in Conformance with EMC Regulations

Rule 15 A noise suppression filter should always be placed close to the fault
source. The filter must be connected to the cabinet housing, mounting
panel, etc. through a large surface area. A bare metal mounting panel
(e.g. manufactured from stainless steel, galvanized steel) is best, as
electrical contact is established through the entire mounting surface. If
the mounting panel is painted, the paint has to be removed at the screw
mounting points for the frequency converter and the noise suppression
filter to ensure good electrical contact.
The incoming and outgoing cables of the radio interference suppression
filter have to be spatially separated/isolated.
Rule 16 In order to limit the noise emitted, all variable-speed motors have to be
connected-up using shielded cables, with the shields being connected
to the respective housings at both ends in a low-inductive manner
(through the largest possible surface area). The motor feeder cables
also have to be shielded inside the cabinet or at least shielded using
grounded partitions. Suitable motor feeder cable e.g. Siemens
PROTOFLEX-EMV-CY (4 x 1.5 mm2 ... 4 x 120 mm2) with Cu shield.
Cables with steel shields are unsuitable.
A suitable PG gland with shield connection can be used at the motor to
connect the shield. It should also be ensured that there is a low-
impedance connection between the motor terminal box and the motor
housing. If required, connect-up using an additional grounding
conductor. Do not use plastic motor terminal boxes!
Rule 17 A line reactor has to be installed between the radio interference
suppression filter and the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
Rule 18 The line supply cable has to be spatially separated from the motor
feeder cables, e.g. by grounded partitions.
Rule 19 The shield between the motor and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES must
not be interrupted by the installation of components such as output
reactors, sinusoidal filters, dv/dt filters, fuses, contactors. The
components must be mounted on a mounting panel which
simultaneously serves as the shield connection for the incoming and
outgoing motor cables. Grounded partitions may be necessary to shield
the components.
Rule 20 In order to limit the radio interference (especially for limit value class
"First environment "), in addition to the line supply cable, all cables
externally connected to the cabinet must be shielded.
Examples of these basic rules:

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 3-15
10.2004 Parameterization

5 Parameterization

5.1 Parameter menus

Parameters with related functions are compiled in menus for structuring
the parameter set stored in the units. A menu thus represents a
selection out of the entire supply of parameters of the unit.
It is possible for one parameter to belong to several menus. The
parameter list indicates which individual menus a parameter belongs to.
Assignment is effected via the menu number allocated to each menu.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-1
Parameterization 10.2004

Menu level 1
Select via Menu level 2 Menu level 3
P60 Menu Select (only on OP1S) (only on OP1S)

User parameters General parameters SCom1/SCom2

Terminals Field bus interfaces

Communication SIMOLINK
P60 Parameter menu
Control and status word SCB/SCI

Setpoint channel

Motor/encoder Motor data

Fixed settings
Encoder data

Control/gating unit without function

Quick
parameterization Speed control

Current control
Sequence control
Board
V/f open-loop control
configuration
Gating unit
Drive setting
Diagnostics Faults/alarms

Download Messages/displays
Functions
Trace
Upread/free access
Releases

Power section
definition Free blocks

without function

Lifts

By entering a password in P359,

access to the menus in the gray
shaded area can be prohibited to
unauthorized persons.

P358 Key P359 Lock

Fig. 5-1 Parameter menus

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-2 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

Menu levels The parameter menus have several menu levels. The first level
contains the main menus. These are effective for all sources of
parameter inputs (PMU, OP1S, DriveMonitor, field bus interfaces).
The main menus are selected in parameter P60 Menu Selection.
Examples:
P060 = 0 "User parameters" menu selected
P060 = 1 "Parameter menu" selected
...
P060 = 8 "Power section definition" menu selected
Menu levels 2 and 3 enable the parameter set to be more extensively
structured. They are used for parameterizing the units with the OP1S
operator control panel.
Main menus

P060 Menu Description

0 User parameters • Freely configurable menu

1 Parameter menu • Contains complete parameter set
• More extensive structure of the functions achieved by
using an OP1S operator control panel
2 Fixed settings • Used to perform a parameter reset to a factory or user
setting
3 Quick parameterization • Used for quick parameterization with parameter modules
• When selected, the unit switches to status 5 "Drive
setting"
4 Board configuration • Used for configuring the optional boards
• When selected, the unit switches to status 4 "Board
configuration"
5 Drive setting • Used for detailed parameterization of important motor,
encoder and control data
• When selected, the unit switches to status 5 "Drive
setting"
6 Download • Used to download parameters from an OP1S, a PC or an
automation unit
• When selected, the unit switches to status 21 "Download"
7 Upread/free access • Contains the complete parameter set and is used for free
access to all parameters without being restricted by further
menus
• Enables all parameters to be upread/upload by an OP1S,
PC or automation unit
8 Power section definition • Used to define the power section (only necessary for units
of the Compact and chassis type)
• When selected, the unit switches to status 0 "Power
section definition"

Table 5-1 Main menus

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-3
Parameterization 10.2004

User parameters In principle, parameters are firmly assigned to the menus. However, the
"User parameters" menu has a special status. Parameters assigned to
this menu are not fixed, but can be changed. You are thus able to put
together the parameters required for your application in this menu and
structure them according to your needs.
The parameters to be included in the "User parameters" menu are
selected in parameter P360 (Select UserParam). This parameter is
indexed and permits the input of 100 parameter numbers. The
sequence in which the parameter numbers are entered also determines
the sequence in which they appear in the "User parameters" menu. If
parameters with parameter numbers greater than 999 are to be
included in the menu, they have to be input in the usual notation for the
OP1S (replacing letters by figures).

Example Parameterization Contained in "User parameters" menu:

of P360
P360.1 = 053 P053 Parameter access (always contained)
P360.2 = 060 P060 Menu select (always contained)
P360.3 = 462 P462 Accel Time
P360.4 = 464 P464 Decel Time
P360.5 = 235 P235 n-Reg Gain1
P360.6 = 240 P240 n-Reg Time
P360.7 = 2306 U306 Timer5 Time_s

Table 5-2 Example: Parameterizing a user menu

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-4 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

Lock and key In order to prevent undesired parameterization of the units and to
protect your know-how stored in the parameterization, it is possible to
restrict access to the parameters by defining your own passwords with
the parameters:
♦ P358 key and
♦ P359 lock.
If P358 and P359 do not have the same parameterization, only the
"User parameters" and the "Fixed settings" menus can be selected in
parameter P60 (Menu selection). This means that only the enabled
parameters in the "User parameters" menu and the parameters of the
"Fixed settings" menu are accessible to the operator. These restrictions
are canceled again only if P358 and P359 are given the same
parameter setting.
You should proceed in the following manner when using the lock and
key mechanism:
1. Adopt key parameter P358 in the "User parameters" menu
(P360.x = 358).
2. Program the lock parameter P359 in both parameter indices with
your specific password.
3. Change over to the "User parameters" menu.
Depending on the parameterization of the key parameter P358 (the
same or not the same as P359), you can now leave the "User
parameters" menu and carry out or not carry out further
parameterization (Exception: "Fixed settings" menu).
Examples:
Lock Key Event
P359.1 = 0 P358.1 = 0 Lock and key have the same parameter
P359.2 = 0 P358.2 = 0 setting, all menus are accessible.
(Factory setting) (Factory setting)
P359.1 = 12345 P358.1 = 0 Lock and key do not have the same
P359.2 = 54321 P358.2 = 0 parameter setting, only the "User
parameters" and "Fixed settings" menus
are accessible.
5-3.2 = 54321 P358.1 = 12345 Lock and key have the same parameter
P358.2 = 54321 setting, all menus are accessible.

Table 5-3 Examples of using the lock and key mechanism

NOTE If you should forget or lose your password, access to all the parameters
can only be restored by carrying out a parameter reset to factory setting
("Fixed settings") menu.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-5
Parameterization 10.2004

5.2 Changeability of parameters

The parameters stored in the units can only be changed under certain
conditions. The following preconditions must be satisfied before
parameters can be changed:
Preconditions Remarks
• Either a function data set, a motor data Visualization parameters
set or a BICO parameter must be (identified by lower-case letters
involved (identified by upper-case letters in the parameter number)
in the parameter number) cannot be changed.
• Parameter access must be granted for Release is given in P053
the source from which the parameters Parameter Access.
are to be changed.
• A menu must be selected in which the The menu assignment is
parameter to be changed is contained. indicated in the parameter list
for every parameter.
• The unit must be in a status which The statuses in which it is
permits parameters to be changed. possible to change parameters
are specified in the parameter
list.

Table 5-4 Preconditions for being able to change parameters

NOTE The current status of the units can be interrogated in parameter r001.

Examples Status (r001) P053 Result

"Ready for ON" (09) 2 P222 Src n(act) can only be changed via the PMU
"Ready for ON" (09) 6 P222 Src n(act) can be changed via the PMU and
SCom1 (e.g. OP1S)
"Operation" (14) 6 P222 Src n(act) cannot be changed on account of
the drive status

Table 5-5 Influence of drive status (r001) and parameter access (P053) on the
changeability of a parameter

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-6 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.3 Parameter input via the PMU

The PMU parameterizing unit enables parameterization, operator
control and visualization of the converters and inverters directly on the
unit itself. It is an integral part of the basic units. It has a four-digit
seven-segment display and several keys.
The PMU is used with preference for parameterizing simple
applications requiring a small number of set parameters, and for quick
parameterization.

PMU in units of the

Compact PLUS type

Seven-segment display for:

Drive statuses

Alarms and faults

Parameter numbers
Raise key
Lower key
Toggle key Parameter indices

Parameter values

Fig. 5-2 PMU in units of the Compact PLUS type

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-7
Parameterization 10.2004

Key Significance Function

Toggle key • For switching between parameter number, parameter index
and parameter value in the indicated sequence (command
becomes effective when the key is released)
• If fault display is active: For acknowledging the fault
Raise key For increasing the displayed value:
• Short press = single-step increase
• Long press = rapid increase
Lower key For lowering the displayed value:
• Short press = single-step decrease
• Long press = rapid decrease
Hold toggle key • If parameter number level is active: For jumping back and forth
and depress raise between the last selected parameter number and the
key operating display (r000)
• If fault display is active: For switching over to parameter
number level
• If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the right if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (left-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the left)
Hold toggle key • If parameter number level is active: For jumping directly to
and depress lower operating display (r000)
key • If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the left if the parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (right-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the right)

Table 5-6 Operator control elements of the PMU (Compact PLUS type)

PMU in units of the

Compact and
chassis type

Raise key
Seven-segment display for:

Drive statuses

Reversing key Alarms and

faults
ON key
Toggle key Parameter numbers

OFF key
Parameter indices
Lower key
X300 Parameter values

Fig. 5-3 PMU parameterizing unit

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-8 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

Key Meaning Function

ON key • For energizing the drive (enabling motor activation).
• If there is a fault: For returning to fault display
OFF key • For de-energizing the drive by means of OFF1, OFF2 or OFF3
(P554 to 560) depending on parameterization.
Reversing key • For reversing the direction of rotation of the drive.
The function must be enabled by P571 and P572
Toggle key • For switching between parameter number, parameter index
and parameter value in the sequence indicated (command
becomes effective when the key is released).
• If fault display is active: For acknowledging the fault
Raise key For increasing the displayed value:
• Short press = single-step increase
• Long press = rapid increase
Lower key For lowering the displayed value:
• Short press = single-step decrease
• Long press = rapid decrease
Hold toggle key • If parameter number level is active: For jumping back and forth
and depress raise between the last selected parameter number and the
key operating display (r000)
• If fault display is active: For switching over to parameter
number level
• If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the right if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (left-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the left)
Hold toggle key • If parameter number level is active: For jumping directly to the
and depress lower operating display (r000)
key • If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the left if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (right-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the right)

Table 5-7 Operator control elements on the PMU

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-9
Parameterization 10.2004

Raise key
Seven-segment display for:

Drive statuses

Reversing key Alarms and

faults
ON key
Toggle key Parameter numbers

OFF key
Parameter indices
Lower key
X300 Parameter values

Fig. 5-4 PMU parameterizing unit

Toggle key As the PMU only has a four-digit seven-segment display, the 3
(P key) descriptive elements of a parameter
♦ Parameter number,
♦ Parameter index (if parameter is indexed) and
♦ Parameter value
cannot be displayed at the same time. For this reason, you have to
switch between the individual descriptive elements by depressing the
toggle key. After the desired level has been selected, adjustment can
be made using the raise key or the lower key.

With the toggle key, you can change Parameter number

over:
• from the parameter number to the P
P
parameter index
• from the parameter index to the
parameter value Parameter Parameter
index value
• from the parameter value to the
parameter number P
If the parameter is not indexed, you
can jump directly to the parameter
value.

NOTE If you change the value of a parameter, this change generally becomes
effective immediately. It is only in the case of acknowledgement
parameters (marked in the parameter list by an asterisk ‘ * ’) that the
change does not become effective until you change over from the
parameter value to the parameter number.
Parameter changes made using the PMU are always safely stored in
the EEPROM (protected in case of power failure) once the toggle key
has been depressed.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-10 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

Example The following example shows the individual operator control steps to be
carried out on the PMU for a parameter reset to factory setting.

Set P053 to 0002 and grant parameter access for PMU

P Ì P Ì
∇ ∇
Ê Ê Ì Ê Ì Ê
P053 0000 0001 0002 P053

Select P060
∇
Ê Ì
P053 P060

Set P060 to 0002 and select "Fixed settings" menu

P Ì P Ì
∇
Ê Ê Ì Ê
P060 1 2 P060

Select P970
∇ ∇
Ê Ì Ê Ì
P060 P366 P970

Set P970 to 0000 and start parameter reset

P Ì P Ì
∇
Ê Ê Ì Ê
P970 1 0 °009

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-11
Parameterization 10.2004

5.4 Parameter input via the OP1S

5.4.1 General

The operator control panel (OP1S) is an optional input/output device

which can be used for parameterizing and starting up the units. Plain-
text displays greatly facilitate parameterization.
The OP1S has a non-volatile memory and can permanently store
complete sets of parameters. It can therefore be used for archiving sets
of parameters, but first the parameter sets must be read out (upread)
from the units. Stored parameter sets can also be transferred
(downloaded) to other units.
The OP1S and the unit to be operated communicate with each other via
a serial interface (RS485) using the USS protocol. During
communication, the OP1S assumes the function of the master whereas
the connected units function as slaves.
The OP1S can be operated at baud rates of 9.6 kBd and 19.2 kBd, and
is capable of communicating with up to 32 slaves (addresses 0 to 31). It
can therefore be used in a point-to-point link (e.g. during initial
parameterization) or within a bus configuration.
The plain-text displays can be shown in one of five different languages
(German, English, Spanish, French, Italian). The language is chosen by
selecting the relevant parameter for the slave in question.

Order numbers Components Order Number

OP1S 6SE7090-0XX84-2FK0
Connecting cable 3 m 6SX7010-0AB03
Connecting cable 5 m 6SX7010-0AB05
Adapter for installation in cabinet door incl. 5 m cable 6SX7010-0AA00

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-12 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization


"


7





NJO LCD (4 lines x 16 characters)


NJO
3VO
9-pole SUB-D connector
LED red Fault on rear of unit
LED green Run
Reversing key

ON key I Raise key

OFF key O P Lower key

Key for toggling between control levels
Jog key Jog 7 8 9

4 5 6 0 to 9: number keys

1 2 3

0 +/- Reset Reset key

Sign key

Fig. 5-5 View of the OP1S

OP1S connections Pin Designation Meaning Range

1
2
1 5
3 RS485 P Data via RS485 interface
4
5 N5V Ground
6 9
6 P5V 5 V aux. voltage supply ±5%, 200 mA
7
8 RS485 N Data via RS485 interface
9 Reference potential

Table 5-8 OP1S connections

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-13
Parameterization 10.2004

5.4.2 Connecting, run-up

5.4.2.1 Connecting

The OP1S can be connected to the units in the following ways:

♦ Connection via 3 m or 5 m cable (e.g. as a hand-held input device
for start-up)
♦ Connection via cable and adapter for installation in a cabinet door
♦ Plugging into MASTERDRIVES Compact units (for point-to-point
linking or bus configuration)
♦ Plugging into MASTERDRIVE Compact PLUS units (for bus
configuration)
Connection via The cable is plugged into the Sub D socket X103 on units of the
cable Compact PLUS type and into Sub D socket X300 on units of the
Compact and chassis type.

SIEMENS
"
7
[[
)[
)[
#FUSJFC

Fault
Run

O P
USS-Bus
USS via RS485
Jog 7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 +/- Reset

X300
OP1S Connecting cable

5 5
9 9
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 6
1 1

OP1S side: Unit side:

9-pole SUB D socket 9-pole SUB D connector

Fig. 5-6 The OP1S directly connected to the unit

Plugging into units Carefully penetrate the pre-punched holes for the fixing screws in the
of the Compact and front panel of the Compact units. Plug the OP1S onto the Sub D socket
chassis type X300 and screw it tight using the two screws (M5 x 10, accessory pack)
from the inside of the front panel.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-14 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.4.2.2 Run-up

After the power supply for the unit connected to the OP1S has been
turned on or after the OP1S has been plugged into a unit which is
operating, there is a run-up phase.

NOTICE The OP1S must not be plugged into the Sub D socket if the SCom1
interface parallel to the socket is already being used elsewhere,
e.g. bus operation with SIMATIC as the master.

NOTE In the as-delivered state or after a reset of the parameters to the factory
setting with the unit's own control panel, a point-to-point link can be
adopted with the OP1S without any further preparatory measures.
When a bus system is started up with the OP1S, the slaves must first
be configured individually. The plugs of the bus cable must be removed
for this purpose (see section "Bus operation").

During the run-up phase, the text "Search slave" is shown in the first
line of the display, followed by "Slave found" and the found slave
number as well as the set baud rate.

Slave found
Adress: [00]
Baudrate: [6]

Example of a display after the run-up phase (6 corresponds to 9.6 kBd)

After approximately 4 s, the display changes to

SIEMENS
MASTERDRIVES VC
6SE7016-1EA61
SW:V3.0 OP:V2T20

Example of what is displayed after a slave address has been found

After a further 2 s, there is a changeover to the operating display. If it is

not possible to start communicating with the slave, an error message
“Error: Configuration not ok” appears. About 2 s later, a request is
made for new configuration.

New config?

#yes
no

Error message displayed when communication is not possible

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-15
Parameterization 10.2004

If the "P" key is pressed, the connected unit is reconfigured, i.e. the
interface parameters are set to the standard values.
Number of PKWs (P702): 127
Number of PZDs (P703): 2 or 4
Telegram failure time (P704): 0 ms
If communication with the slave is still impossible, the reasons may be
as follows:
♦ Defective cabling
♦ Bus operation with two or more slaves with the same bus address
(see section "Bus operation")
♦ The baud rate set in the slave is neither 9.6 nor 19.2 kBd
In the latter case, an error message "Error: No slave found" appears.
The unit's own PMU control panel must then be used to set parameter
P701 (baud rate) to 6 (9.6 kBd) or 7 (19.2 kBd) or to reset the
parameters to the factory setting.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-16 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.4.3 Operator control

5.4.3.1 Operator control elements

Key Meaning Function

ON key • For energizing the drive (enabling motor activation). The
function must be enabled by P554.
OFF key • For de-energizing the drive by means of OFF1, OFF2 or
O OFF3. The function must be enabled by P554 to P560.
Jog key • For jogging with jog setpoint 1 (only effective when the
Jog
unit is in the "Ready to start" state). This function must
be enabled by P568.
Reversing key • For reversing the direction of rotation of the drive. This
function must be enabled by P571 and P572.

Toggle key • For selecting menu levels and switching between

P parameter number, parameter index and parameter
value in the sequence indicated. The current level is
displayed by the position of the cursor on the LCD
display (the command comes into effect when the key is
released).
• For conducting a numerical input.
Reset key • For leaving menu levels
Reset
• If fault display is active: For acknowledging the fault. This
function must be enabled by P565.
Raise key For increasing the displayed value
• Short press = single-step increase
• Long press = rapid increase
• If motorized potentiometer is active, this is for raising the
setpoint. This function must be enabled by P573.
Lower key For lowering the displayed value:
• Short press = single-step decrease
• Long press = rapid decrease
• If motorized potentiometer is active, this is for lowering
the setpoint. This function must be enabled by P574.
Sign key • For changing the sign so that negative values can be
+/- entered
Number keys • Numerical input
0 to 9

Table 5-9 Operator control elements

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-17
Parameterization 10.2004

5.4.3.2 Operating display

After run-up of the OP1S, the following operating display appears:

0.0A 0V 00
# 0.00 min-1
* 0.00 min-1
Ready.

Example of an operating display in the "Ready" status

The values shown in the operating display (except for slave number, 1st
line on the far right) can be specified by means of parameterization:

1st line, left (P0049.001) in the example "Output current"

1st line, right (P0049.002) in the example "DC link voltage"
2nd line actual value (P0049.003) in the example "Actual speed"
(only a visualization parameter)
3rd line setpoint (P0049.004) in the example "Speed setpoint"
4th line (P0049.005) in the example "Operating state"

In the operating display, the actual value is indicated with "#" and the
setpoint with "*".
In addition to the operating display on the display unit, the operating
state is indicated by the red and green LEDs as follows:

Flashing Continuous
red LED Alarm Fault

green LED Ready for ON Operation

Table 5-10 Operating displays

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-18 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.4.3.3 Basic menu

When the "P" key is pressed, a changeover is made from the operating
display to the basic menu.

Ê P Ì
0.0 A 0 V 00 VectorControl
# 0.00 min-1 *Menu Selection
* 0.00 min-1 OP: Upread
Ready. OP: Download

Display of the basic menu

The basic menu is the same for all units. The following selections can
be made:
♦ Menu selection
♦ OP: Upread
♦ OP: Download
♦ Delete data
♦ Change slave
♦ Config. slave
♦ Slave ID
As not all the lines can be shown at the same time, it is possible to
scroll the display as required with the "Lower" and "Raise keys.

Ê ∇ Ì Ê ∇ Ì Ê ∇ Ì Ê ∇ Ì
VectorControl VectorControl VectorControl VectorControl VectorControl
*Menu Selection *Menu Selection *Menu Selection OP: Upread OP: Download and so on
OP: Upread #OP: Upread OP: Upread OP: Download Delete data
OP: Download OP: Download #OP: Download #Delete data #Change slave

Example of switching from one line to the next

The currently active function is indicated by the "*" symbol and the
selected function by the "#” symbol. After the "P" key has been
pressed, the relevant symbol jumps to the selected function. The
"Reset" key is for returning to the operating display.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-19
Parameterization 10.2004

5.4.3.4 Slave ID

With the "Slave ID" function, the user can request information about the
connected slave. The slave ID consists, for example, of the following
lines:

MASTERDRIVES VC
6SE7016-1EA61
2.2 kW
V3.0
15.02.1998

Starting from the basic menu, the "Slave ID" function is selected with
"Raise" or "Lower" and activated with "P". As all the lines cannot be
shown at the same time, it is possible to scroll the display as required
with the "Lower" and "Raise" keys. In addition, the slave number is
shown at the top on the right-hand side.

Ê P Ì Ê ∇ Ì Ê ∇ Ì Ê ∇ Ì
VectorControl VectorControl 00 VectorControl 00 VectorControl 00 VectorControl 00
Change slave Slave ID Slave ID Slave ID Slave ID
Config. slave MASTERDRIVES VC 6SE7016-1EA61 and so on
#Slave ID 6SE7016-1EA61 2.2 kW

Example of a slave ID

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-20 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.4.3.5 OP: Upread

With the "OP: Upread“ function, the parameters of the connected slave
can be upread and stored in the flash memory inside the OP1S.
Parameters of a possibly inserted technology board are not taken into
account (e.g. T100, T300). The DriveMonitor program is required here.
Starting from the basic menu, the "OP: Upread" function is selected
with "Lower" or "Raise" and started with "P". If the available memory is
insufficient, the procedure is interrupted with an appropriate error
message. During upread, the OP1S indicates the parameters currently
being read. In addition, the slave number is shown at the top on the
right-hand side.

Ê P Ì
VectorControl VectorControl 00
*Menu selection Upread
#OP: Upread Pxxx
OP: Download

Example: Selecting and starting the "Upread" procedure

With "Reset", the procedure can be interrupted at any time. If the

upread procedure has been completed in full, the user is requested to
enter an ID with a maximum of 12 characters for the stored parameter
set. This identification can, for example, consist of the date and two
differentiating numbers. It is entered with the numerical keypad. With
"Lower" a number which has been entered can be deleted.

Ê 1 Ì Ê 9 Ì Ê 0 Ì Ê 9 Ì Ê 1 Ì
VectorControl 00 VectorControl 00 VectorControl 00 VectorControl 00 VectorControl 00 VectorControl 00
Upread Upread Upread Upread Upread Upread
Enter ID Enter ID Enter ID Enter ID Enter ID Enter ID and so on
- 1- 19- 190- 1909- 19091-

Example of entering an ID

When "P" is pressed, the message "Upread OK" appears and the
display changes to the basic menu.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-21
Parameterization 10.2004

5.4.3.6 OP: Download

With the "OP: Download" function, a parameter set stored in the OP1S
can be written into the connected slave. Parameters of a possibly
inserted technology board are not taken into account (e.g. T100, T300).
The DriveMonitor program is required here. Starting from the basic
menu, the "OP: Download" function is selected with "Lower" or "Raise"
and activated with "P".

Ê P Ì
VectorControl Download
*Menu selection *1909199701
OP: Upread MASTERDRIVES VC
#OP: Download

Example: Selecting and activating the "Download" function

One of the parameter sets stored in the OP1S must now be selected
with "Lower" or "Raise" (displayed in the second line). The selected ID
is confirmed with "P". The slave ID can now be displayed with "Lower"
or "Raise" (see section "Slave ID"). The "Download" procedure is then
started with "P". During download, the OP1S displays the currently
written parameter.

Ê P Ì Ê P Ì
Download Download VectorControl 00
*1909199701 *1909199701 Download
MASTERDRIVES VC MASTERDRIVES VC Pxxx

Example: Confirming the ID and starting the "Download" procedure

With "Reset", the procedure can be stopped at any time. If downloading

has been fully completed, the message "Download ok" appears and the
display returns to the basic menu.
After the data set to be downloaded has been selected, if the
identification of the stored software version does not agree with the
software version of the unit, an error message appears for
approximately 2 seconds. The operator is then asked whether
downloading is to be discontinued.

Ê P Ì Ê P Ì Ê 2s Ì
Download Download Error: VectorControl 00
*1909199701 *1909199701 Different Stop download?
MASTERDRIVES VC MASTERDRIVES VC IDs #yes
no

Yes: The "Download" procedure is discontinued.

No: The "Download" procedure is carried out.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-22 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.4.3.7 Delete data

With the "Delete data" function, the user can delete parameter sets
stored in the OP1S, thus, for example, creating space for new
parameter sets. Starting from the basic menu, the "Delete data"
function is selected with "Lower" or "Raise" and activated with "P".

Ê P Ì
VectorControl Delete data
OP: Upread *1909199701
OP: Download MASTERDRIVES VC
#Delete data

Example: Selection and activation of the "Delete data" function

One of the parameter sets stored in the OP1S must now be selected
with "Lower" or "Raise" (displayed in the second line). With "P", the
selected ID is confirmed. The slave ID can now be displayed with
"Lower" or "Raise" (see section "Slave ID"). The "Delete data"
procedure can now be started with "P". After completion, the message
"Data deleted" appears and the display returns to the basic menu.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-23
Parameterization 10.2004

5.4.3.8 Menu selection

The actual parameterization and start-up of the connected slave is

performed by means of the "Menu selection" function. Starting from the
basic menu, the "Menu selection" function is selected with "Lower" or
"Raise". By pressing "P", the unit-specific sub-menu is displayed with
the following choices:
♦ User Param.
♦ Param Menu..
♦ FixedSet...
♦ Quick Param...
♦ Board Conf.
♦ Drive Set
♦ Download
♦ UpR/fr.Access
♦ Power Def.
Two or more dots after these items mean that there is a further sub-
menu level. If "Parameter menu.." is selected, access is possible to all
parameters via correspondingly structured sub-menus. If "UpR/fr.
Access" is selected, direct access is gained to the parameter level.

7x

Ê P Ì Ê ∇ Ì Ê P Ì
VectorControl Menüauswahl Menu selection r001 9
*Menu selection *User Param. Drive Set. Drive Status
Upread Param Menu.. Download
Download FixedSet... #UpR/fr.Access Ready

Example: Selecting the parameter level by means of UpR/fr.access

2x

Ê P Ì Ê ∇ Ì Ê P Ì Ê P Ì
Menu selection Parameter Menu Param Menu Communication P700.001
*User Param. *Gen. Param. *Gen. Param. *SST1/SST2 0
#Param Menu.. Terminals Terminals Field bus conn. SCom Bus Addrese
FixedSet... Communication #Communication SIMOLINK Ser. Interf.1

Example: Selecting a parameter via sub-menus

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-24 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

Parameter display A parameter number can be selected from the parameter level directly
and parameter with the numerical keys or with "Raise"/"Lower". The parameter number
correction is shown as a three-figure quantity. In the event of four-figure
parameter numbers, the first figure (1, 2 or 3) is not displayed. A
distinction is made with the letters (P, H, U etc.).

Ê 0 Ì Ê 4 Ì Ê 9 Ì
r001 9 r000 r004 r049.001
Drive Status 4
OP OperDisp
Ready 1. line, on left

Example: Direct input of the parameter number with the numerical keypad

∇ ∇ ∇
Ê Ì Ê Ì Ê Ì
r001 9 r002 r004 r006
Drive Status 0 min-1 0.0 A 0 V
Actual speed Output Amps DC Bus Volts
Ready.

Example: Correcting the parameter number by means of "Raise"

If the parameter is found not to exist when the number is entered, a

message "No PNU" appears. A non-existent parameter number can be
skipped by selecting "Raise" or "Lower".
How the parameters are shown on the display depends on the type of
parameter. There are, for example, parameters with and without an
index, with and without an index text and with and without a selection
text.

Example: Parameter with index and index text

P704.001
0 ms
SCom Tlg OFF
Ser.Interf.1

1st line: Parameter number, parameter index

2nd line: Parameter value with unit
3rd line: Parameter name
4th line: Index text

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-25
Parameterization 10.2004

Example: Parameter with index, index text and selection text

P701.001 6
SCom Baud rate
Ser Interf.1
9600 Baud

1st line: Parameter number, parameter index, parameter value

2nd line: Parameter name
3rd line: Index text
4th line: Selection text

Example: Parameter without index, with selection text, binary

value
P053 0006Hex
Parameter Access
0000000000000110
ComBoard: No

1st line: Parameter number, parameter value, hexadecimal

parameter value
2nd line: Parameter name
3rd line: Parameter value, binary
4th line: Selection text

Transition between the parameter number, parameter index and

parameter value levels is made with "P".
Parameter number → "P" → Parameter index → "P" → Parameter
value
If there is no parameter index, this level is skipped. The parameter
index and the parameter value can be corrected directly with the
"Raise"/"Lower" keys. An exception to this are parameter values shown
in binary form. In this case, the individual bits are selected with
"Raise"/"Lower" and corrected with the numerical keys (0 or 1).
If the index number is entered by means of the numerical keys, the
value is not accepted until "P" is pressed. If the "Raise" or "Lower" keys
are used to correct the number, the value comes into effect
immediately. The acceptance of an entered parameter value and return
to the parameter number does not take place until "P" is pressed. The
level selected in each case (parameter number, parameter index,
parameter value) is marked with the cursor. If an incorrect parameter
value is entered, the old value can be obtained by pressing "Reset".
The "Reset" key can also be used to go one level lower.
Parameter value → "Reset" → Parameter index → "Reset" → Para.No.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-26 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

Parameters which can be changed are shown in upper-case letters and

visualization parameters which cannot be changed are shown in lower-
case letters. If a parameter can only be changed under special
conditions or if an incorrect value has been entered with the numerical
keys, an appropriate message follows, e.g.:
♦ "Value not perm." Incorrect value entered
♦ "Value <> min/max" Value too large or too small
♦ "P53/P927?" No parameter access
♦ "Operating status?" Value can only be changed in the
"Drive setting" status, for example
With "Reset", the message is deleted and the old value is re-instated.

NOTE Parameter changes are always stored with power-failure protection in

the EEPROM of the unit connected to the OP1S.

Example of parameter correction

Selection of Correction of Accept and

parameter value parameter value return
P Ì P Ì
∇
Ê Ê Ì Ê
P605 0 P605 0 P605 1 P605 1
Brake control Brake control Brake control Brake control

without brake without brake Brake w/o chkbk Brake w/o chkbk

Selection of Correction of Accept and

parameter value parameter value return

Ê P Ì Ê 5 Ì Ê P Ì
P600 P600 P600 P600
0 ms 0 ms 5 ms 5 ms
MCont mssg time MCont mssg time MCont mssg time MCont mssg time

Selection of Correction of Selection of Correction of Accept and

parameter index parameter index parameter value parameter value return
P Ì P Ì 4 Ì P Ì
∇
Ê Ê Ì Ê Ê Ê
P049.001 P049.001 P049.002 P049.002 P049.002 P049.002
4 4 6 6 4 4
OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp
1st line, left 1st line, left 1st line, right 1st line, right 1st line, ??? 1st line, ???

Selection of Selection of Correction of bit Accept and

parameter index bit return
P Ì 0 Ì P Ì
∇
Ê Ê Ì Ê Ê
P053 0006Hex P053 0006Hex P053 0006Hex P053 0006Hex P053 0004Hex
Parameter Access Parameter Access Parameter Access Parameter Access Parameter Access
0000000000000110 0000000000000110 0000000000000110 0000000000000100 0000000000000110
ComBoard: No ComBoard: No BaseKeypad: Yes BaseKeyp: No BaseKeyp: No

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-27
Parameterization 10.2004

Some parameters may also be displayed without a parameter number,

e.g. during quick parameterization or if "Fixed setting" is selected. In
this case, parameterization is carried out via various sub-menus.

Example of how to proceed for a parameter reset.

2x

Ê P Ì Ê P Ì Ê ∇ Ì
0.0 A 0 V 00 VectorControl Menu Selection Menu Selection
# 0.00 min-1 *Menu selection *User Param. *User Param.
* 0.00 min-1 OP: Upread Param Menu.. Param Menu..
Ready. OP: Download Fixed Set... #Fixed Set...

Selection of fixed setting

P Ì ∇ Ì P Ì
∇
Ê Ê Ê Ì
Fixed Setting Fixed Setting Fixed Setting Factory Setting
*Select FactSet *Select FactSet FactSet. #FactSet.
FactSet. #FactSet. *No FactSet *No FactSet

Selection of factory setting

wait
P Ì Ê Ì
Factory Setting Menu Selection
#FactSet. *User Param..
*No FactSet Param. Menu..
busy............ FixedSet...

Start of factory setting

NOTE It is not possible to start the parameter reset in the "Run" status.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-28 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

Fault and alarm A fault or alarm message is indicated by the red LED. In the event of a
messages fault, the red LED lights up and stays on. A fault message appears in
the 3rd and 4th line of the operating display.

∇
Ê Ì
0.0 A 0 V 00 0.0 A 0 V 00
# 0.00 min-1 # 0.00 min-1
F065: SCom Tlg 1T 3h 2"
Fault 1/1 Fault 1/1

Example of a fault display

The fault number and the respective text are shown in the 3rd line. Up
to 8 fault messages can be stored but only the first fault to occur is
shown on the display. Several subsequent faults are shown in the 4th
line, e.g. with 1/3 (first of three). Information on all faults can be
obtained from the fault memory. With "Raise"/"Lower", the associated
operating hours are shown when a fault is waiting to be remedied.
After the cause of a fault has been removed, the fault is acknowledged
with "Reset" inside the operating display (the "Reset" key must be
appropriately parameterized. See section "Issuing commands via the
OP1S"). By pressing "P" and "Lower" at the same time, it is possible to
skip back directly to the operating display from the parameter level.
When there is an alarm, the red LED flashes. A warning appears in the
4th line of the operating display.

8.2 A 520 V 00
# 100.00 min-1
* 100.00 min-1
-33:Overspeed

Example of an alarm display

The alarm number and the respective text is shown in the 4th line.
There can be several alarms at the same time but only the first alarm to
occur is shown on the display. Several alarms are shown in the 4th line
before the alarm number with an "+” instead of "-”. Information on all
alarms can be obtained with the alarm parameters r953 to r969.
An alarm cannot be acknowledged. As soon as the cause no longer
exists, the alarm/display disappears automatically.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-29
 Parameterization 10.2004

5.4.3.9 Issuing commands via the OP1S

Control functions and setpoint specifications for the connected unit can
be selected with the corresponding keys of the OP1S, for example
during start-up. To do so, the sources of the control commands have to
be added to the corresponding bits of word 1 of the SCom1 interface
1), or SCom2 interface 2). For setpoint specification, the sources of the
setpoints must be appropriately "interconnected". In addition, the
setpoint to be changed is to be parameterized as a displayed value in
the 3rd line of the operating display.
Key Function Parameter number Parameter value
ON/OFF1 P554 2100 1) / 6100 2)
O
Source ON/OFF1
Motorized potentiometer: P573 2113 1) / 6113 2)
setpoint higher, lower (only Source Raise MOP
effective within the operating P574 21141) / 6114 2)
display) Source Lower MOP
P443 KK0058
Source Main Setpoint (MOP Output)
P049.004 424
Setpoint Operating Disp (MOP Out)
Setpoint specification by means P443 KK0040
0 9
to of fixed septoint (only effective Source Main Setpoint (Fixed setpoints)
or within the operating display. If P573 0
entered with numerical key, Source Raise MOP
confirm with "P") P574 0
Source Lower MOP
P049.004 e.g. 401
Setpoint Operating Disp (selected fixed setpoint)
Reversing P571 2111 1) / 6111 2)
Source clockwise direc.
of rotation 2112 1) / 6112 2)
P572
Source anti-clockwise
direc. of. rotation

Reset
Acknowledging (only effective P565 2107 1) / 6107 2)
within the operating display) Source Acknowledge

Jog
Jogging with jog setpoint 1 P568 2108 1) / 6108 2)
(only effective in the "Ready" Source Jog Bit 0
status) P448 Setpoint in %
Jog Setpoint 1

NOTE The OFF function can also be performed with OFF2 or OFF3 instead of
OFF1. For this, the source of OFF2 (P555) or OFF3 (P556) must be
"interconnected" to 2101 1) / 6101 2) or 2102 1) / 6102 2) respectively in
addition to setting P554.

1) only applicable for Compact/chassis unit

2) only applicable for Compact PLUS

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-30 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.4.4 Bus operation

In order to start operating a bus system with the OP1S, the slaves must
first be configured individually. To do this, the bus connecting cable
between the slaves must be interrupted (pull out the bus-cable plug).
For configuration, the OP1S is connected with each slave one after the
other. A precondition for carrying out the configuration is a baud rate of
9.6 or 19.2 kBd set in the slave (see section "Run-up").

5.4.4.1 Configuring slaves

Starting from the basic menu, the "Config. slave" function is selected
with "Lower"/"Raise" and activated with "P". The user is now requested
to enter a slave address.

Ê P Ì
VectorControl Configuration
Delete data Address:00
Change slave
#Config. slave

Example of activating the "Config. slave" function

After a different slave address for each slave has been entered by
means of the "Raise" key or with the numerical keypad and confirmed
with "P", configuration is carried out, i.e. the interface parameters are
set to the standard value (see section "Run-up"). In addition, the slave
address is entered and a baud rate of 9.6 kBd is set in the slave. After
configuration has been completed, the message "Configuration ok"
appears, followed by a return to the basic menu. If the configuration of
all slaves has been successfully completed, bus operation can be
started after the bus connection between the slaves has been restored.

NOTE During bus operation, each slave must have a different address (P700).
Bus operation is also possible at 19.6 kBd (set P701 to 7). The baud
rate, however, must be set the same in all slaves.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-31
Parameterization 10.2004

5.4.4.2 Changing slaves

During bus operation, a specific slave can be selected via the OP1S
with the "Change slave" function without any re-plugging. Starting from
the basic menu, the "Change slave" function is selected with the
"Lower"/"Raise" key and activated with "P". The user is then requested
to enter a slave address.

Ê P Ì
VectorControl Change slave
Download Address:00
Delete data
#Change slave

Example of activating the "Change slave" function

After the slave address has been entered with "Raise"/"Lower" and
confirmed with "P", a change is made to the required slave and the
display returns to the basic menu. If the slave cannot be found, an error
message is output.

5.4.5 Technical data

Order number 6SE7090-0XX84-2FK0

Supply voltage 5 V DC ± 5 %, 200 mA
Operating temperature 0 °C to +55 °C
Storage temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
Transport temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
Environment class Acc. to DIN IEC 721 Part 3-3/04.90
• Humidity 3K3
• Pollution resistance 3C3
Protection class II acc. DIN VDE 0160 Part 1/05.82
IEC 536/1976
Degree of protection Acc. to DIN VDE 0470 Part 1/11.92
• Front IP54 EN60529
• Rear IP21
Dimensions W x H x D 74 x 174 x 26 mm
Standards VDE 0160/E04.91
VDE 0558 Part 1/07.87
UL, CSA

Table 5-11 Technical data

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-32 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.5 Parameter input with DriveMonitor

NOTE Please refer to the online help for detailed information on

DriveMonitor ( button or F1 key).

5.5.1 Installation and connection

5.5.1.1 Installation

A CD is included with the devices of the MASTERDRIVES Series when

they are delivered. The operating tool supplied on the CD (DriveMoni-
tor) is automatically installed from this CD. If "automatic notification on
change" is activated for the CD drive on the PC, user guidance starts
when you insert the CD and takes you through installation of
DriveMonitor. If this is not the case, start file "Autoplay.exe" in the root
directory of the CD.

5.5.1.2 Connection

There are two ways of connecting a PC to a device of the SIMOVERT

MASTERDRIVES Series via the USS interface. The devices of the
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Series have both an RS232 and an
RS485 interface.

RS232 interface The serial interface that PCs are equipped with by default functions as
an RS232 interface. This interface is not suitable for bus operation and
is therefore only intended for operation of a SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES device.

1 1 X300:
6 6 1 Ground
2 2 2 RxD (RS232)
7 7 3 Rx+/Tx+ (RS485)
3 3 4
8 8 5 Ground
4 4
9 6 +5V (OP1S)
9
5 5 7 TxD (RS232)
8 Rx-/Tx- (RS485)
9 Ground
To PC COMx Device side
socket -X300 (compact PLUS -X103)
9-pin SUB-D connector

Fig. 5-7 Connecting cable for connecting PC COM(1-4) to SIMOVERT

MASTERDRIVES X300

NOTICE DriveMonitor must not be operated via the Sub-D socket X300 if the
SST1 interface parallel to it is already being used for another purpose,
e.g. bus operation with SIMATIC as the master.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-33
Parameterization 10.2004

RS485 interface The RS485 interface is multi-point capable and therefore suitable for
bus operation. You can use it to connect 31 SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES with a PC. On the PC, either an integrated RS485
interface or an RS232 ↔ RS485 interface converter is necessary. On
the device, an RS485 interface is integrated into the -X300 (compact
PLUS -X103) connection. For the cable: see pin assignment -X300 and
device documentation of the interface converter.

5.5.2 Establishing the connection between DriveMonitor and the device

5.5.2.1 Setting the USS interface

You can configure the interface with menu Tools Æ ONLINE Settings.

Fig. 5-8 Online settings

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-34 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

The following settings (Fig. 5-9) are possible:

♦ Tab card "Bus Type", options
USS (operation via serial interface)
Profibus DP (only if DriveMonitor is operated under Drive ES).
♦ Tab card "Interface"
You can enter the required COM interface of the PC (COM1 to
COM4) and the required baudrate here.

NOTE Set the baudrate to the baudrate parameterized in SIMOVERT

MASTERDRIVES (P701) (factory setting 9600 baud).
Further settings: operating mode of the bus in RS485 operation;
setting according to the description of the interface converter
RS232/RS485
♦ Tab card "Extended"
Request retries and Response timeout; here you can increase the
values already set if communication errors occur frequently.

Fig. 5-9 Interface configuration

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-35
Parameterization 10.2004

5.5.2.2 Starting the USS bus scan

DriveMonitor starts with an empty drive window. Via the menu "Set up
an ONLINE connection..." the USS bus can be scanned for connected
devices:

Fig. 5-10 Starting the USS bus scan

NOTE The "Set up an online connection” menu is only valid from Version 5.2
onwards.

Fig. 5-11 Search for online drives

During the search the USS bus is scanned with the set baudrate only.
The baud rate can be changed via "Tools Æ ONLINE Settings", see
section 5.5.2.1.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-36 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.5.2.3 Creating a parameter set

With menu FileÆ New Æ... you can create a new drive for
parameterization (see Fig. 5-12). The system creates a download file
(*.dnl), in which the drive characteristic data (type, device version) are
stored. You can create the download file on the basis of an empty
parameter set or the factory setting.

Fig. 5-12 Creating a new drive

Based on factory setting:

♦ The parameter list is preassigned with the factory setting values
Empty parameter set:
♦ For compilation of individually used parameters

If the parameters of a parameter set that has already been created

have to be changed, this can be done by calling the corresponding
download file via the “FileÆ Open” menu function. The last four drives
can be opened via “Parameter sets last dealt with”.
When you create a new drive, the window "Drive Properties" (Fehler!
Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.) opens. Here you
must enter the following data:
♦ In dropdown list box "Device type", select the type of device (e.g.
MASTERDRIVES MC). You can only select the devices stored.
♦ In dropdown list box "Device version", you can select the software
version of the device. You can generate databases for (new)
software versions that are not listed when you start online
parameterization.
♦ You must only specify the bus address of the drive during online
operation (switchover with button Online/Offline)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-37
Parameterization 10.2004

NOTE The specified bus address must be the same as that of the
parameterized SST bus address in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
(P700).
No bus address is assigned to the drive with the button "Disconnect
network connection".

NOTE Field "Number of PCD" has no special significance for the

parameterization of MASTERDRIVES and should be left at "2".
If the value is changed, it must be/remain ensured that the setting value
in the program matches the value in parameter P703 of the drive at all
times.

Fig. 5-13 Create file; Drive properties

After confirming the drive properties with ok you have to enter the name
and storage location of the download file to be created.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-38 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

5.5.3 Parameterization

5.5.3.1 Structure of the parameter lists, parameterization with DriveMonitor

Parameterization using the parameter list is basically the same as

parameterization using PMU (See Chapter 6 "Parameterizating Steps").
The parameter list provides the following advantages:
♦ Simultaneous visibility of a larger number of parameters
♦ Text display for parameter names, index number, index text,
parameter value, binectors, and connectors
♦ On a change of parameters: Display of parameter limits or possible
parameter values

The parameter list has the following structure:

Field Field Name Function
No.
1 P. Nr Here the parameter number is displayed. You can only change the field in
menu Free parameterization.
2 Name Display of the parameter name, in accordance with the parameter list
3 Ind Display of the parameter index for indexed parameters. To see more than
index 1, click on the [+] sign. The display is then expanded and all indices of
the parameter are displayed
4 Index text Meaning of the index of the parameter
5 Parameter Display of the current parameter value. You can change this by double-
value clicking on it or selecting and pressing Enter.
6 Dim Physical dimension of the parameter, if there is one

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-39
Parameterization 10.2004

With buttons Offline, Online (RAM), Online (EEPROM) (Fig. 5-14 [1])
you can switch modes. When you switch to online mode, device
identification is performed. If the configured device and the real device
do not match (device type, software version), an alarm appears. If an
unknown software version is recognized, the option of creating the
database is offered. (This process takes several minutes.)

Fig. 5-14 Drive window/parameter list

The DriveMonitor drive window has a directory tree for navigation

purposes (Fig. 5-14 [2]). You can deselect this additional operating tool
in menu View - Parameter selection.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

5-40 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterization

The drive window contains all elements required for the

parameterization and operation of the connected device. In the lower
bar, the status of the connection with the device is displayed:

Connection and device ok

Connection ok, device in fault state

Connection ok, device in alarm state

Device is parameterized offline

No connection with the device can be established (only offline

parameterization possible).

NOTE If no connection with the device can be established because the device
does not physically exist or is not connected, you can perform offline
parameterization. To do so, you have to change to offline mode. In that
way, you can create an individually adapted download file, which you
can load into the device later.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5-41
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

6 Parameterizing Steps
The chapter entitled "Parameterizing Steps" describes the parameter
assignments to be made for starting up SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES:
In addition to this chapter, you should also refer to Chapter 3 (First
Start-Up) and Chapter 8 (Parameterization) in the operating
instructions.
The parameterizing steps are divided into different categories:
♦ Parameter reset to factory setting (6.1)
♦ Quick parameterization procedures (6.2)
♦ Detailed parameterization (6.3)

Parameter reset to The factory setting is the defined initial state of all the parameters of a
factory setting unit. The units are delivered with this setting.
A detailed description is given in section 6.1.

Quick The quick parameterization procedures can always be used when the
parameterization exact application conditions of the units are known and no tests with the
procedures associated extensive parameter corrections are required.
The following quick parameterization procedures are described in
section 6.2:
1. Quick parameterization, P060 = 3
(Parameterizing with parameter modules)
2. Parameterizing with user settings
(Fixed settings or factory settings, P060 = 2)
3. Parameterizing with existing parameter files
(Download, P060 = 6)
Depending on the specific conditions prevailing in each case,
parameters can either be assigned in detail (see section 6.3) or with
one of the specified quick procedures.
By activating a fixed setting (P060 = 2) the parameters of the unit can
also be reset to the original values.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-1
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Detailed Detailed parameterization should always be used in cases where the

parameterization exact application conditions of the units are not known beforehand and
detailed parameter adjustments need to be made locally, e.g. on initial
start-up.
The description of detailed parameterization in section 6.3 is divided
into the following main steps:
1. Power section definition (P060 = 8)
2. Board definition (P060 = 4)
3. Drive definition (P060 = 5)
4. Function adjustment.

Supply
conditions

Power sections

CUVC

Optional
boards

Motor

Motor
encoder

parameterization
Detailed
Board configuration Drive setting
Function adjustment
(P060 = 4) (P060 = 5)
As-delivered state

Parameterizing with user settings (fixed setting, P060 = 2)

quick parameterization

Power section definition

Factory settings (parameter reset) (P060 = 2)
Procedures for

(P060 = 8)

Parameterizing with existing parameter files (download, P060 = 6)

Parameterizing with parameter modules(quick parameterization, P060 = 3)

Fig. 6-1 Detailed and quick parameterization

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-2 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

6.1 Parameter reset to factory setting

The factory setting is the defined initial state of all parameters of a unit.
The units are delivered with this setting.
You can restore this initial state at any time by resetting the parameters
to the factory setting, thus canceling all parameter changes made since
the unit was delivered.
The parameters for defining the power section and for releasing the
technology options and the operating hours counter and fault memory
are not changed by a parameter reset to factory setting.

Parameter number Parameter name

P050 Language
P070 Order No. 6SE70..
P072 Rtd Drive Amps
P073 Rtd Drive Power
P366 Select FactSet
P947 Fault memory
P949 Fault value

Table 6-1 Parameters which are not changed by the factory setting

If the parameters are reset to the factory setting via one of the
parameters (SST1, SST2, SCB, 1.CB/TB, 2.CB/TB), the interface
parameters of that interface are not changed either. Communication via
that interface therefore continues even after a parameter reset to the
factory setting.

Parameter number Parameter name

P053 Parameterization enable
P700 SST bus address
P701 SST baud rate
P702 SST PKW number
P703 SST PZD number
P704 SST frame failure

Table 6-2 The factory setting is made either via interface SST1 or SST2:
Parameters that are not changed by the factory setting either. None of
the indices of the parameters is changed.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-3
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Parameter number Parameter name

P053 Parameterization enable
P696 SCB protocol
P700 SST bus address
P701 SST baud rate
P702 SST PKW number
P703 SST PZD number
P704 SST frame failure

Table 6-3 The factory setting is made via interface SCB2: Parameters that are not
changed by the factory setting either. None of the indices of the
parameters is changed.

Parameter number Parameter name

P053 Parameterization enable
P711 to P721 CB parameters 1 to 11
P722 CB/TB frame failure
P918 CB bus address

Table 6-4 The factory setting is made either via interface 1.CB/TB or 2.CB/TB:
Parameters that are not changed by the factory setting either. None of
the indices of the parameters is changed.

NOTE Parameter factory settings which are dependent on converter or motor

parameters are marked with '(~)' in the block diagrams.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-4 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

Grant parameter access

P053 = 6
6: Parameter changes permitted via PMU and serial interface
SCom1 (OP1S 1) and PC)

P060 = 2 Select "Fixed settings" menu

Select desired factory setting

P366 = ?
0: Standard with PMU, setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
1: Standard with OP1S, setpoints via fixed setpoints (BICO1)
2: Cabinet unit with OP1S, setpoint via fixed setpoints (BICO1)
3: Cabinet unit with PMU, setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
4: Cabinet unit with OP1S and NAMUR terminal strip (SCI) 1),
setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
Note: This parameter was correctly set prior to delivery of
the unit and only needs to be changed in exceptional
cases.
re 0 to 3: In BICO data set 2 activation/deactivation is carried
out via the terminal strip and the setpoint is specified
via fixed setpoint (P405).
Start parameter reset
P970 = 0
0: Parameter reset
1: No parameter change
Unit carries out parameter
reset and then leaves the
"Fixed settings" menu
Fig. 6-2 Sequence for parameter reset to factory setting

1) only applicable for Compat/chassis unit

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-5
 Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Factory settings
dependent on P366
Para- Designation of the Factory setting Factory setting Cabinet unit Cabinet unit Cabinet unit
meters parameter on the with with with with PMU or with NAMUR
depen- OP1S PMU OP1S OP1S or terminal strip terminal strip
dent on terminal strip (SCI) 1)
P366 (Src = Source) P366 = 0 P366 = 1 P366 = 2 P366 = 3 P366 = 4
BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2
(i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002)
P443 Src MainSetpoint KK058 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK058 KK040 KK058 K4102
P554 Src ON/OFF1 B0005 1) B0022 B2100 1) B0022 B2100 1) B0022 B0005 1) B0022 B2100 B4100
B0022 2) B6100 2) B6100 2) B0022 2)
P555 Src1 OFF2 B0001 B0020 B0001 B0020 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001
P556 Src2 OFF2 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B4108
P565 Src1 Fault Reset B2107 B2107 B2107 1) B2107 1) B2107 1) B2107 1) B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107
B6107 2) B6107 2) B6107 2) B6107 2)
P566 Src2 Fault Reset B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B4107 B4107
P567 Src3 Fault Reset B0000 B0018 B0000 B0018 B0000 B0010 B0000 B0010 B0000 B0000
P568 Src Jog Bit0 B0000 B0000 B2108 1) B0000 B2108 1) B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000
B6108 2) B6108 2)
P571 Src FWD Speed B0001 B0001 B2111 1) B0001 B2111 1) B0001 B0001 B0001 B2111 B4129
B6111 2) B6111 2)
P572 Src REV Speed B0001 B0001 B2112 1) B0001 B2112 1) B0001 B0001 B0001 B2112 B4109
B6112 2) B6112 2)
P573 Src MOP UP B0008 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0008 B0000 B2113 B4105
P574 Src MOP Down B0009 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0009 B0000 B2114 B4106
P575 Src No ExtFault1 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020
P590 Src BICO DSet B0014 B0014 B0014 B0014 B0012 B0012 B0012 B0012 B4102 B4102
P651 Src DigOut1 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0107 B0107
P652 Src DigOut2 B0104 B0104 B0104 B0104 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0104 B0104
P653 Src DigOut3 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0000 B0000
P693.1 SCI AnaOutActV 1 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 KK020 KK020
P693.2 SCI AnaOutActV 2 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0022 K0022
P693.3 SCI AnaOutActV 3 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0024 K0024
P698.1 Src SCI DigOut 1 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0100 B0100
P698.2 Src SCI DigOut 2 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0120 B0120
P698.3 Src SCI DigOut 3 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0108 B0108
P698.4 Src SCI DigOut 4 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0107 B0107
P704.3 SCom TlgOFF SCB 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 100 ms 100 ms
P796 Compare Value 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 2.0 2.0
P797 Compare Hyst 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.0 1.0
P049.4 OP OperDisp r229 r229 P405 P405 P405 P405 r229 r229 r229 r229

Table 6-5 Factory setting dependent on P366

1) only applicable for Compact/chassis unit

2) only applicable for Compact PLUS

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-6 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

All other factory setting values are not dependent on P366 and can be
taken from the parameter list or from the block diagrams (in the
Compendium).
The factory settings for Index 1 (i001) of the respective parameter are
displayed in the parameter list.

Significance of the binectors and connectors for factory setting:

Entry Description See function diagram

(in Compendium)
B0000 Fixed binector 0 -15.4-
B0001 Fixed binector 1 -15.4-
B0005 1) PMU ON/OFF -50.7-
B0008 PMU MOP UP -50.7-
B0009 PMU MOP DOWN -50.7-
B0010 DigIn1 -90.4-
B0012 DigIn2 -90.4-
B0014 DigIn3 -90.4-
B0016 DigIn4 -90.4-
B0018 DigIn5 -90.4-
B0020 DigIn6 -90.4-
B0022 DigIn7 -90.4-
B0100 Rdy for ON -200.5-
B0104 Operation -200.5-
B0107 No fault -200.6-
B0108 No OFF2 -200.5-
B0120 CompV OK -200.5-
B2100 SCom1 Word1 Bit0 -100.8-
...
B2115 SCom1 Word1 Bit15 -100.8-
B4100 1) SCI1 Sl1 DigIn -Z10.7- / -Z30.4-
...
B4115 1) SCI1 Sl1 DigIn -Z30.8-
B6100 SCom2 Word1 Bit0 -101.8-
...
B6115 SCom2 Word1 Bit15 -101.8-
r229 n/f(set,smooth) -360.4- / -361.4- / -362.4- /
-363.4- / -364.4-

1) only applicable for Compact/Chassis unit

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-7
 Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Entry Description See function diagram

(in Compendium)
P405 Fixed setpoint 5 -290.3-
KK0020 Speed (smoothed) -350.8- / -351.8- / -352.8-
K0022 Output Amps (smoothed) -285.8- / -286.8-
K0024 Torque (smoothed) -285.8-
KK0040 Current FixSetp -290.6-
KK0058 MOP (Output) -300.8-

Bxxxx = Binector = freely assignable digital signal

(values 0 and 1)
Kxxxx = Connector = freely assignable 16-bit signal
(4000h = 100 %)
KKxxxx = Double connector = freely assignable 32-bit signal
(4000 0000h = 100 %)

Use of binectors for digital inputs in factory settings:

When B0010 to B0017 (DigIn1 to 4) are used, the corresponding digital
outputs cannot be used!

P366 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
BICO data 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
set
B0010 P567 P567
B0012 P590 P590 P590 P590
B0014 P590 P590 P590 P590
B0016 P580 P580 P580 P580 P580
B0018 P567 P567 P575 P575 P575 P575 P575 P575
B0020 P555 P555 P588 P588 P588 P588 P588 P588
B0022 P554 P554 P554 P554

Meaning of the parameters in the factory setting:

Entry Description See function diagram
(in Compendium)
P554 Src ON/OFF1 -180-
P555 Src1 OFF2(electr) -180-
P567 Src3 Fault Reset -180-
P575 Src No ExtFault1 -180-
P580 Src FixSetp Bit0 -190-
P588 Src No Ext Warn 1 -190-
P590 Src BICO DSet -190-

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-8 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

6.2 Quick parameterization procedures

The following quick procedures are always used in cases where the
application conditions of the units are exactly known and no tests and
related extensive parameter corrections are required. Typical examples
of applications for quick parameterization are when units are installed in
standard machines or when a unit needs replacing.

6.2.1 Quick parameterization, P060 = 3

(Parameterizing with parameter modules)
Pre-defined, function-assigned parameter modules are stored in the
units. These parameter modules can be combined with each other, thus
making it possible to adjust your unit to the desired application by just a
few parameter steps. Detailed knowledge of the complete parameter
set of the unit is not required.
Parameter modules are available for the following function groups:
1. Motors (input of the rating plate data with automatic
parameterization of open-loop and closed-loop control)
2. Open-loop and closed-loop control types
3. Setpoint and command sources
Parameterization is effected by selecting a parameter module from
each function group and then starting quick parameterization. In
accordance with your selection, the necessary unit parameters are set
to produce the desired control functionality. The motor parameters and
the relevant controller settings are calculated using automatic
parameterization (P115 = 1).

NOTE Parameterizing with parameter modules is carried out only in BICO

data set 1 and in function and motor data set 1.
Quick parameterization is effected in the "Download" converter status.
Since quick parameterization includes the factory settings for all
parameters, all previous parameter settings are lost.
Quick parameterization incorporates an abridged drive setting,
(e.g. pulse encoder always with pulse number/revolution 1024).
The complete procedure is given in the "Drive setting" section.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-9
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Function diagram Function diagram modules (function diagrams) are shown after the flow
modules chart for parameter modules stored in the unit software. On the first few
pages are the :
♦ setpoint and command sources (sheets s0 to s83), on the following
pages are the
♦ analog outputs and the display parameters (sheet a0) and the
♦ open-loop and closed-loop control types (sheets r0 to r5).
It is therefore possible to put together the function diagrams to exactly
suit the selected combination of setpoint/command source and
open/closed-loop control type. This will give you an overview of the
functionality parameterized in the units and of the necessary
assignment of the terminals.
The function parameters and visualization parameters specified in the
function diagrams are automatically adopted in the user menu
(P060 = 0) and can be visualized or changed there.
The parameter numbers of the user menu are entered in P360.
Reference is made in the function diagrams to the respective function
diagram numbers (Sheet [xxx]) of the detail diagrams (in the
Compendium).

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-10 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

P060 = 3 Menu selection "Quick parameterization"

Input unit line voltage in V

P071 = ?
AC units: r.m.s. alternating voltage
DC units: DC link voltage
The input is important, e.g. for voltage limitation control
(Vdmax control, P515 = 1)

Enter the motor type

P095 = ?
2: Compact-async. motor 1PH7 (=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
P095=2 P095=10 P095=11 10: Async./sync. IEC (international standard)
11: Async./sync. NEMA (US standard)
Enter the code number for the connected motor of type
P097 = ?
1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
(Automatic parameterization is carried out if you enter
P095 = 2 and P097 > 0)
Enter the open/closed-loop control type (sheet r0 to r5)
P100 = ?
0: v/f open-loop control + n-controller with pulse encoder
P095=2
(P130 = 11)
P097>0 1: v/f open-loop control
2: v/f open-loop control, textile
3: Vector control without tachometer (f-control)
4: Vector control with tachometer (n-speed)
with pulse encoder (P130 = 11)
5: Torque control (M control)
with pulse controller (P130 = 11)
For v/f control (0..2) a linear curve is set in P330 (P330 = 1:
parabolic).
The pulse encoder has a pulse number of P151 = 1024 per
revolution.
The following inputs of motor data are necessary if the motor
deviates from the converter data, if one of the vector control
types (P100 = 3, 4, 5) has been selected or if speed feedback is
used (P100 = 0). In the case of motor outputs higher than
approx. 200 kW one of the vector control types should be used.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-11
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Enter the rated motor voltage in V 1

P101 = ?
as per rating plate

Enter the rated motor current in A 2

P102 = ?
as per rating plate
(group drives: total of all motor currents)

IEC motor: Cos (phi) as per rating plate 3

P104=? P105=?
NEMA motor: nominal rating [Hp]
(group drives: total of all ratings)
NEMA motor: Enter the motor efficiency in %
P106=?
as per rating plate

Enter the rated motor frequency in Hz 4

P107 = ?
as per rating plate

Enter the rated motor speed in rpm 5

P108 = ?
as per rating plate

Enter the motor pole pair number

P109 = ?
(is automatically calculated)

SIEMENS 3 ~Mot. 1LA7133-4AA10 CE

IP 55 Nr.E H984 6148 01 002
4 132 M/IM B3 EN 60034 Th.Cl. F
50 Hz 230 / 400V /D 60 Hz 460 V
5 7.5 kW 26.5 / 15.3 A 8.6 kW 14.7 A
cos 0.82 1455 / min cos 0.83 1755 / min
3 220-240 / 380-420 V / 440/480 V
26.5-27.0 / 15.3-15.6 A SF 1.1 15.0-15.2 A
2

WARNING!
P114 = ?
INCORRECT SETTINGS CAN BE DANGEROUS!
P100=1,2 For vector control only:
Process-related boundary conditions for control
0: Standard drives (default)
1: Torsion, gear play
2: Acceleration drives
3: Load surge
4: Smooth running characteristics
5: Efficiency optimization
6: Heavy-duty starting
7: Dynamic torque response in field-weakening range
See "Drive setting" section for description

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-12 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

Thermal motor System with motor protection according to UL regulation?

protection desired? The motor temperature is calculated via the motor current.
no yes (In the pre-setting, motor overload protection in accordance with
P095=2
P097>0
UL regulation is activated!)
Specify motor cooling
P382 = ?
0: self-ventilated
1: forced-ventilated
(automatically pre-set for P095 = 2, P097 > 0)
Enter the thermal time constant of the motor in s
P383 = 0 P383 = ?
The values can be taken from the table on the next page
(automatically pre-set for P095 = 2, P097 > 0).
The motor load limit (P384.2) is pre-assigned to 100 %.
Select setpoint and command source
P368 = ?
(sheet s0...s4, s6 - s83)
P368 = 0,1,2,3 4,7,8 6
0: PMU + MOP 1) (Operation via the operator panel,
see next page for description)
1: Analog and digital inputs on the terminal strip
2: Fixed setpoints and digital inputs on the terminal strip
3: MOP and digital inputs on the terminal strip
4: USS1 (e.g. with SIMATIC)
5: not used
6: PROFIBUS (CBP)
7: OP1S and fixed setpoints via SCom1 (X300: PMU) 1) /
SCom2 (X103: PMU) 2)
8: OP1S and MOP via SCom1 (X300: PMU) 1) /
SCom2 (X103: PMU) 2)
P700.1 = ? Enter the USS bus address

Enter the PROFIBUS address

P918.1 = ?

Start of quick parameterization

P370 = 1
0: No parameter change
1: Parameter change in acordance with selected combination
of parameter modules
(automatic factory setting according to P366)
(followed by automatic parameterization as for
P115 = 1)
Return to the user menu
P060 = 0
End of quick parameterization

1) only applicable for Compact/Chassis unit

2) only applicable for Compact PLUS

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-13
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

P368 Settings PMU and motor-operated potentiometer (P368 = 0)

setpoint source With this setting, it is possible to move the drive via the PMU:

ON / OFF =
/

Faster / slower = Arrow up / down

CCW / CW = Arrow left / right

With the " key" the motor is switched on and runs up to the minimum
speed set in P457.

After that, you can increase the speed with the " " key.

You can use the " " key to lower the speed.

The selection of setpoint sources (P368) may be restricted by the type

of factory setting (P366).
Factory setting P366 Setpoint source P368
0 = PMU 0 ... 8 = All sources possible
1 = OP1S 7 = OP1S
2 = Cabinet unit OP1S 7 = OP1S
3 = Cabinet unit PMU 0 = PMU
4 = OP1S and SCI 1) 8 = OP1S

P383 Mot Tmp T1 Thermal time constant of the motor

Setting notes Activation of the i2t calculation is made by setting a parameter value >=
100 seconds.
Example: for a 1LA5063 motor, 2-pole design, the value 480 seconds
has to be set.
The thermal time constants for Siemens standard motors are given in
the following table in seconds:

1) only applicable for Compact/Chassis unit

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-14 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

1LA-/1LL motors Type 2- 4- 6- 8- 10- 12-

pole pole pole pole pole pole
1LA7063 480 780 - - - -
1LA7070 480 600 720 - - -
1LA7073 480 600 720 - - -
1LA7080 480 600 720 - - -
1LA7083 600 600 720 - - -
1LA7090 300 540 720 720 - -
1LA7096 360 660 720 840 - -
1LA7106 480 720 720 960 - -
1LA7107 - 720 - 960 - -
1LA7113 840 660 780 720 - -
1LA7130 660 600 780 600 - -
1LA7131 660 600 - - - -
1LA7133 - 600 840 600 - -
1LA7134 - - 960 - - -
1LA7163 900 1140 1200 720 - -
1LA7164 900 - - - - -
1LA7166 900 1140 1200 840 - -
1LA5183 1500 1800 - - - -
1LA5186 - 1800 2400 2700 - -
1LA5206 1800 - 2700 - - -
1LA5207 1800 2100 2700 3000 - -
1LA6220 - 2400 - 3300 - -
1LA6223 2100 2400 3000 3300 - -
1LA6253 2400 2700 3000 3600 - -
1LA6280 2400 3000 3300 3900 - -
1LA6283 2400 3000 3300 3900 - -
1LA6310 2700 3300 3600 4500 - -
1LA6313 2700 3300 3600 4500 - -
1LA6316 2880 3480 3780 4680 - -
1LA6317 2880 3480 3780 4680 - -
1LA6318 - - 3780 4680 - -
1LA831. 2100 2400 2700 2700 3000 3000
1LA835. 2400 2700 3000 3000 3300 3300
1LA840. 2700 3000 3300 3300 3600 3600
1LA845. 3300 3300 3600 3600 4200 4200
1LL831. 1500 1500 1800 1800 2100 2100
1LL835. 1800 1800 2100 2100 2400 2400
1LL840. 2100 2100 2100 2100 2400 2400
1LL845. 2400 2100 2400 2400 2700 2700

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-15
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Type 2- 4- 6- 8- 10- 12-

pole pole pole pole pole pole
1LA135. 1800 2100 2400 - - -
1LA140. 2100 2400 2700 2700 - -
1LA145. 2400 2700 3000 3000 3300 3300
1LA150. 3000 3000 3300 3300 3900 3900
1LA156. 3600 3300 3600 3600 4200 4200
1LL135. 1200 1200 1500 - - -
1LL140. 1500 1500 1800 1800 - -
1LL145. 1800 1800 1800 1800 2100 2100
1LL150. 2100 1800 2100 2100 2400 2400
1LL156. 2400 2100 2100 2100 2400 2400

1LA7 motors The data for 1LA5 motors are also applicable for 1LA7 motors with the
same designation.

1LG4 motors Type 2- 4- 6- 8-

pole pole pole pole
183 1200 1500 - -
186 - 1500 1800 2100
188 1200 2100 2100 2400
206 1500 - 2100 -
207 1500 2100 2400 2400
208 1800 2700 2700 3000
220 - 2700 - 2700
223 2100 2400 2700 2700
228 2100 2700 3000 3300
253 2700 2700 3000 3000
258 2400 3000 3600 3000
280 2400 2700 3000 3300
283 2400 3000 2700 3300
288 2400 3300 3000 3300
310 2400 2700 3000 2700
313 2400 2400 3300 4200
316 2100 3600 3600 3600
317 3000 3600 4200 4500
318 3300 4200 4500 4800

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-16 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

1LG6 motors Type 2- 4- 6- 8-

pole pole pole pole
183 1800 1800 - -
186 - 1800 2700 2100
206 1800 - 2700 -
207 1800 2700 2700 2700
220 - 2400 - 2700
223 2400 2700 3300 2400
253 2700 3000 2700 3000
280 2400 3300 3000 3600
283 2400 3000 3600 3900
310 2700 3300 3600 3900
313 2700 3900 3600 4200
316 2700 3900 4200 4200
317 2700 3900 4500 3900
318 3600 3900 4500 5700

1PH6 motors Type 1PH610 1PH613 1PH616 1PH618 1PH620 1PH622

T1 in s 1500 1800 2100 2400 2400 2400

Exceptions: 1PH610 at n = 1150 rpm: T1 = 1200 n

1PA6 motors (= Shaft height 100 132 160 180 225

1PH7 motors)
T1 in s 1500 1800 2100 2400 2400

Type 1PH7284 1PH7286 1PH7288

T1 in s 4500 5000 5400

1PL6 motors Shaft height 180 225

T1 in s 1800 1800

Type 1PL6284 1PH6286 1PH6288

T1 in s 3200 3900 4300

1PH4 motors Shaft height 100 132 160

T1 in s 1500 1800 2100

NOTE If 1PH7, 1PL6, or 1PH4 motors are parameterized in the list selection
(P097), both the motor cooling (P382) and the thermal motor time
constant (P383) are assigned the correct default values.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-17
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Reference quantities Display of function parameters, monitoring parameters, and connectors

are limited to double the reference value.
After fast parameterization, the reference and rated motor values are
identical. This enables signal representation (e.g. via connectors) up to
twice the rated motor values. If this is not sufficient, you can switch to
the menu "Drive setting" (P060 = 5) to adapt the reference values. The
following parameters are available for that purpose:
P350 Reference current in A
P351 Reference voltage in V
P352 Reference frequency in Hz
P353 Reference speed in rpm
P354 Reference torque in Nm

Dependent Speed reference frequency and reference speed are always coupled
reference values via the number of pole pairs.
60
P353 = P352 ×
P109
If one of the two parameters is altered, the second is converted using
this equation.
The reference power (in W) is calculated from the reference torque and
reference speed:
P354 × P353 × 2 × π
R W,ref =
60

Power values of the closed-loop control are also stated as a percentage

and refer to the reference power stated. Conversion to rated motor
power is possible using the ratio PW,ref / Pmot,rated.

P113 × 2 × π × P108
Pmot,rated =
60

Automatic motor For exact determination of the motor parameters, it is possible to carry
identification out automatic motor identification and speed controller optimization.
For this purpose, the procedures of the "Drive setting" have to be
observed. If one of the vector control types (P100 = 3, 4, 5) of a
converter without a sinusoidal output filter and of an induction motor
without an encoder or with a pulse encoder (correct number of pulses in
P151) is used, the motor identification procedure can be shortened. In
this case, "Complete motor identification" has to be selected (P115 = 3)
and the converter has to be powered up accordingly if the alarms A078
and A080 appear.

WARNING During motor identification inverter pulses are released and the drive
rotates!
For reasons of safety, identification should first be carried out without
coupling of the load.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-18 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
 -X101
Terminal strip Sh. [90] /1 n959.81 = 4
P24
10.2004

*) If used as digital inputs, the parameters /2

P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have M24
*)

Siemens AG
to be set to 0! P651.1 (107) no fault
0=fault B B0107
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must /3
not be wired. B0010
*)
from sheet [200]
P652.1 (104) operation
1=operation
If P366 = 3 B B0104
/4
P590 = B0012 B0012
P651 = B0000 *)
P653.1 (0)
P652 = B0000

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
P653 = B0107 B P590 (14)
/5 Src BICO DSet
P48 PMU Operating Display B
B0014

Seven segment display Toggle key (acknowledge)

P

Raise key

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

P554.1 (5)
Reversing key ON/OFF1 Src ON/OFF1
I O B0005 B
to sheet [180]
I
ON key P573.1 (8)
Raise MOP Src Raise MOP
Toggle key B0008 B

OFF key O P
P574.1 (9)
Lower MOP Src Lower MOP

Compendium Vector Control

Lower key
B0009 B

X300
PMU Sh.[50]

Note: Accel Time MOP Decel Time MOP

P431 P432
The keys "Raise MOP" and "Lower MOP"
are only effective if the operating display MOP (max) MOP(Outp)
(r000) is selected. P421 r424
Src Main Setp
Explanations: MOP(Outp) P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
MOP Sheet [300]
KK058 KK N
Sh. [300] : See Compendium Sheet 300
Src.T Setp
N : Reference to N-controller (see rXX-sheets) P422 P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
MOP (min.) KK M
M : Reference to T-controller (see rXX-sheets)
P425 (for T control)

: Reference to the current path sheet "a0" Conf.MOP

1
"Analog outputs and display variables" 0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF
0xx1 = ... Storing after OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source Not valid for Compact PLUS!

6-19
Parameterizing Steps

- s0 -
PMU and MOP (P368=0) MASTERDRIVES VC
6-20
Terminal strip Sheet [90] -X101 n959.82 = 4
/1
P24
/2
M24
*)
P651.1 (107) no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
Parameterizing Steps

*) from sheet [200]

P652.1 (104) operation
1=operation
B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1 (0)
B
/5
B0014
*)
P654.1
B P561.1 (16)
/6 Src Inv Release
B0016 B
P567.1 (18)
*) If used as digital inputs, the parameters /7 Src3 Acknowledge
B0018 B
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have
to be set to 0! P555.1 (20)
/8 Src1 OFF2
B0020 B to sheet [180]
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must
P554.1 (22)
not be wired. <1> Src ON/OFF1
B0022 B

Analog inputs Sheet [80] / sheet [82] AnaIn Conf. CUVC Compact PLUS
P632 S3 Jumper on EBV
AnaIn1 Smoothing
switch S3 switch
P634.1 AnaIn1 Offset AnaIn1 Setpoint
Analog input 1 P631.1 r637.1 0 -10 ... 10 V open 5-6
Src Main setpoint 1 -10 ... 10 V
A AnaIn1 Setpoint P443.B (11)
to sheet[316.1]
<2> K0011 KK N 2 -20 ... 20 mA
D 3 -20 ... 20 mA closed 4-5
<3>

Compendium Vector Control

Src.T setpoint 4 -04 ... 20 mA
0-10 ... 10 V P486.B (11) Setting guide for gain and
to sheet[320.1]
corresponds to AnaIn2 Smoothing KK M offset of setpoint frequency/
-100 .... 100 % P634.2 AnaIn2 Offset AnaIn2 Setpoint (only T-control) speed values: sheet[316]
Analog input 2 P631.2 r637.2
A AnaIn2 Setpoint <1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9
Compact PLUS type unit: Terminal X102/19
X102/17 K0013
<2> Compact/chassis type unit: Terminal X102/15
X102/18 D Compact PLUS type unit: Terminal X101/9
<3> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X102/16
Compact PLUS type unit: Terminal X101/10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- s1 -
Analog input and terminal strip (P368=1) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Terminal strip Sheet[90] -X101
/1
P24 n959.83 = 4
10.2004

/2
M24
*)

Siemens AG
P651.1 no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
*)
P652.1 operation from sheet [200]
1=operation B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
B P580.1 (14)
/5 Src.FSetp Bit 0
B0014 B
)
*
P654.1
B P581.1 (16)
/6 Src FSetp Bit 1
B0016 B
*) If used as digital inputs, the parameters P567.1 (18)
/7 Src3 Acknowledge to sheet [180]

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have B0018 B
to be set to 0! P555.1 (20)
/8 Src1 OFF2
B0020 B
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must
P554.1 (22)
not be wired. <1> Src ON/OFF1
B0022 B

FSetp FSetp
Bit 2

Compendium Vector Control

Bit 3
<1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9 P418.B P417.B
Sheet [290] Compact PLUS type unit: Terminal X102/19
Fixed setpoints
KK0041
Fixed setpoint1 0 0 0 0
P401.F KK0042
Fixed setpoint2 0 0 0 1
P402.F KK0043
in %
Fixed setpoint3 0 0 1 0 Active FSetp
P403.F KK0044 r420
Fixed setpoint4 0 0 1 1 Src Main Setpoint
Act.FSetp P443.B (40) to sh. [316.1]
P404.F
KK0045 KK0040 KK N
Fixed setpoint5 0 1 0 0
P405.F KK0046
in Hz Fixed setpoint6 0 1 0 1
P406.F KK0047 Src T setpoint
Fixed setpoint7 0 1 1 0 P486.B (40) to sh. [320.1]
P407.F KK0048 KK M
Fixed setpoint8 0 1 1 1 (for T control)
P408.F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source

6-21
Parameterizing Steps

- s2 -
Fixed setpoints and terminal strip (P368=2) MASTERDRIVES VC
 MOP and

6-22
Sheet [90] -X101 n959.84 = 4
terminal strip /1
P24
/2
M24
)
P651.1 (107) * no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3 from sheet [200]
B0010
Parameterizing Steps

)
P652.1 (104) * operation
1=operation
B B0104
/4
B0012
P653.1 *)
B P573.1 (14)
/5 Src Raise MOP
B0014 B
)
P654.1 *
B P574.1 (16 )
/6 Src Lower MOP
B0016 B
P567.1 (18)
*) If used as digital inputs, the parameters /7 Src3 Acknowledge to sheet [180]
B0018 B
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have
to be set to 0! P555.1 (20)
/8 Src1 OFF2
B0020 B
P554.1 (22)
<1> Src ON/OFF1
B0022 B

<1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9

Compact PLUS type unit: Terminal X102/19

MOP MP Sheet [300]

Accel Time MOPDecel Time MOP
P431 P432

MOP (max) MOP (outp)

P421 r424

Compendium Vector Control

Raise MOP Src Main Setpoint
MOP (outp) P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
KK058 KK N
Lower MOP
Src T Setpoint
P422 P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
MOP (min.) KK M
(for T control )
P425
Conf MOP

0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF

0xx1 = ... storing after OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- s3 -
MOP and terminal strip (P368=2) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Baud rate PKW # PcD # n959.85 = 4
10.2004

P701.1 P702.1 P703.1

Sheet [110]

Siemens AG
Transmit actual values
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word 1) PZD2 (Data word 2)

P707.2 from sheet

<1> <2> n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
Reserved for write operations of K KK0148
-X101 / -X100 [352.7], [400.7]
parameter data P707.1(32)
Transmit Status word ZUW1 from sheett
K K0032
r552 [200]

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
<1> <2> SCom1Word1
Receive r709.1
/10 / 35
RS485P Control word
PKW: 4 K2001
PZD: 2 SComWord2
Main setpoint
r709.2 to sheet [316.1]
Baud rate: P443.B
<1> <2>
/11 / 36 9.6 kB K2002 K (2002) N
Reserved for read
RS485N operations of Src T setpoint

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

parameter data For T control: P486.B to sheet [320.1]
K M
Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PZD1 (Data word1) PZD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B2200
Sheet [100] up to Bit15
B2215 P554.1
Bit0

Compendium Vector Control

B2100 ON/OFF1 B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
P555.1
Bit1 B2101 OFF2 (electr.) B (2101) Src OFF2
P700.1 = Bus address
<1> Only applicable for Compact/Chassis type unit
•

B2102 OFF3 (QStop)

<2> Only applicable for Compact PLUS type unit
P704.1 = Tlg failure time B2103 Inv. Release
B2104 RGen Release
B2105 No RGen Stop
• • • • •

B2106 Setpoint Release

P565.1
Bit7 B2107 Acknowledge B (2107) Src 1 Acknow
P568.1
B (2108) Src Jog Bit0
•

B2108 Jog Bit0

B2109 Jog Bit1
B2110 PcD control P571.1

Alarm effective
Switch-on ihibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation

Undervoltage fault
Comp. Setp reached

Ramp-function gen. active

Set/actual deviation

pos./neg. speed setp

Energize main cont.

Reserve
PZD control
Ready
Ready for ON
Src Pos Spd
• • • • •

B2111 Positive Spd B (2111)

1 P572.1
15 0 B2112 Negative Spd B (2112) Src Neg. Spd
ZUW1
PcD1 (Data word1) B2113 Raise MOP to sheet [180]
Bit14 B2114 Raise MOP control word 1
Bit15 B2115 r550
External fault

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source

6-23
Parameterizing Steps

- s4 -
USS1 (P368=4) with Simatic MASTERDRIVES VC
6-24
CB Parameter 1
0 ... 65535 Sheet [125]
P711.01 Transmit actual values
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word 1) PZD2 (Data word 2)

P734.2 from sheet

n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
Parameterizing Steps

••••••
••••••
Reserved for write operations of K KK0148
[352.7], [400.7]
CB Parameter 10 parameter data P734.1(32)
Transmit Status word ZUW1 from sheett
0 ... 65535 K K0032
r552 [200]
P720.01
1. CB Word1
Receive r733.1
CB Control word
CB Parameter 11 K3001
configu-
0 ... 65535 1. CB Word2
ration Main setpoint
P721.01 to .05
r733.2 to sheet [316.1]
P443.B
K3002 K (3002) N
CB/TB TlgOFF Reserved for read
0 ... 6500 ms operations of Src T setpoint
P722.01 (10) parameter data For T control: P486.B to sheet [320.1]
P722.01 =0 : K M
No monitoring Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PZD1 (Data word1) PZD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B3200
CB Bus Address
0 ... 200
Sheet [120] up to Bit15
B3215 P554.1
P918.01 (3) Bit0 B3100 ON/OFF1 B (3100) Src ON/OFF1
P555.1
Bit1 B3101 OFF2 (electr.) B (3101) Src OFF2
•

B3102 OFF3 (QStop)

B3103 Inv. Release
B3104 RGen Release
B3105 No RGen Stop
• • • • •

B3106 Setpoint Release

P566.1
Bit7 B3107 Acknowledge B (3107) Src 2 Acknow

Compendium Vector Control

P568.1
Src Jog Bit0
•

B3108 Jog Bit0 B (3108)

B3109 Jog Bit1
B3110 PcD control P571.1

Alarm effective
Switch-on ihibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation

Undervoltage fault
Comp. Setp reached

Ramp-function gen. active

Set/actual deviation

pos./neg. speed setp

Energize main cont.

Reserve
PZD control
Ready
Ready for ON
Src Pos Spd
• • • • •

B3111 Positive Spd B (3111)

1 P572.1
15 0 B3112 Negative Spd B (3112) Src Neg. Spd
ZUW1
PcD1 (Data word1) B3113 Raise MOP to sheet [180]
Bit14 B3114 Raise MOP control word 1
Bit15 B3115 r550
External fault

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- s6 -
PROFIBUS 1st CB (P368=6) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Baud rate PKW # PcD # n957.88 = 4
10.2004

P701.1 P702.1 P703.1

Sheet [110]

Siemens AG
Transmit actual values
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word 2)

P707.2 from sh.

n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
Reserved for write operations of K KK0148
-X101 [352.7], [400.5]
parameter data P707.1
Status word 1 ZUW1 from sh.
Transmit K K0032
r552 [200]

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Receive SCom1Word1
/10 r709.1
RS485P Control word 1 Setpoint via process data
PKW:127 K2001 (only DriveMonitor):
PcD: 2 SCom1Word2
Main setpoint
r709.2
Baud rate: P443.B to sh. [316.1]
/11 9.6 kB K2002 K (2002) N
Reserved for read
RS485N operations of Src T setpoint

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

parameter data for T control: P486.B to sh. [320.1]
K M
Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B2200
Sheet [100] OP1S keys bis Bit15
B2215 P554.1
Bit0

Compendium Vector Control

I O B2100 ON/OFF1 B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
Bit1 B2101 OFF2 (electr.)
B2102 OFF3 (QStop)
•

P700.1 = Bus address B2103 Inv Release

B2104 RGen Release
P704.1 = Tlg failure time B2105 No RGen Stop
• • • • •

B2106 Setp Release

P565.1
Reset Bit7 B2107 Acknowledge B (2107) Src1 Acknow.
P568.1
•

Jog Bit8 B2108 Jog Bit0 B (2108) Src Jog Bit0

B2109 Jog Bit1
B2110 PcD control
• • • • •

P571.1 Src positive spd

Bit11

pos./neg. speed setp

Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.

Reserve
PcD control
Alarm effective
Switch-on inhibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Ready
Ready for ON
B2111 Positive Spd B (2111)

Undervoltage fault
Comp. setpoint reached
Set/actual deviation
1 P572.1 Src negative spd
Bit12 B2112 Negative Spd B (2112)
15 0
ZUW1
B2113 Raise MOP to sheet [180]
PZD1 (Data word1) B2114 Lower MOP control word 1
Bit15 r550
P049 = OP operating display B2115 External fault

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source Not valid for Compact PLUS!

6-25
Parameterizing Steps

- s7 -
OP1S / DriveMonitor and fixed setpoints at USS1 (P368=7) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Terminal strip Sheet [90]

6-26
-X101 n959.89 = 4
/1
P24
/2
M24
*)
P651.1 (107) No fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
Parameterizing Steps

*) from sheet [200]

P652.1 (104) Operation
1=operation B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1 (0)
B P590 (14)
/5 Src BICO DSet
B0014 B
If used as digital inputs, the parameters
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B must
be set to 0!

If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must

not be wired. to sheet [180]
*)
If P366 = 2
P590 = B0012
P651 = B0000
P652 = B0000
P653 = B0107
FSetp FSetp FSetp
Bit 2 FSetp
Bit 3 Bit 1 Bit 0
P418.B P417.B P581.B
P580.B
Fixed Sheet [290]
setpoints
KK0041
(for T control)
Fixed setpoint1 0 0 0 0
P401.F KK0042
Fixed setpoint2 0 0 0 1
in % P402.F KK0043
Fixed setpoint3 0 0 1 0 Active FSetp
P403.F KK0044

Compendium Vector Control

r420
Fixed setpoint4 0 0 1 1 Src Main Setpoint
Act.FSetp P443.B (40) to sheet[316.1]
P404.F
KK0045 KK0040 KK N
(for n/f control or v/f control)
Fixed setpoint5 0 1 0 0
See P049.4
P405.F KK0046
in Hz Fixed setpoint6 0 1 0 1
P406.F KK0047 Src T setpoint
Fixed setpoint7 0 1 1 0 P486.B (40) to sheet[320.1]
P407.F KK0048 KK M
Fixed setpoint8 0 1 1 1 (for T control)
P408.F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- s71 -
OP1S and fixed setpoints (P368=7) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Baud rate PKW # PcD # n957.88 = 4
10.2004

P701.2 P702.2 P703.2

Sheet [111]

Siemens AG
Transmit actual values
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word 2)

P708.2 from sh.

n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
Reserved for write operations of K KK0148
-X103 [352.7], [400.5]
parameter data P708.1
Status word 1 ZUW1 from sh.
Transmit K K0032
r552 [200]

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Receive SCom2Word1
/3 r709.17
RS485P Control word 1 Setpoint via process data
PKW:127 K6001 (only DriveMonitor):
PcD: 2 SCom2Word2
Main setpoint
r709.18
Baud rate: P443.B to sh. [316.1]
/8 9.6 kB K6002 K (6002) N
Reserved for read
RS485N operations of Src T setpoint

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

parameter data for T control: P486.B to sh. [320.1]
K M
Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B6200
Sheet [101] OP1S keys bis Bit15
B6215 P554.1
Bit0

Compendium Vector Control

I O B6100 ON/OFF1 B (6100) Src ON/OFF1
Bit1 B6101 OFF2 (electr.)
B6102 OFF3 (QStop)
•

P700.2 = Bus address B6103 Inv Release

B6104 RGen Release
P704.2 = Tlg failure time B6105 No RGen Stop
• • • • •

B6106 Setp Release

P565.1
Reset Bit7 B6107 Acknowledge B (6107) Src1 Acknow.
P568.1
•

Jog Bit8 B6108 Jog Bit0 B (6108) Src Jog Bit0

B6109 Jog Bit1
B6110 PcD control
• • • • •

P571.1 Src positive spd

Bit11

pos./neg. speed setp

Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.

Reserve
PcD control
Alarm effective
Switch-on inhibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Ready
Ready for ON
B6111 Positive Spd B (6111)

Undervoltage fault
Comp. setpoint reached
Set/actual deviation
1 P572.1 Src negative spd
Bit12 B6112 Negative Spd B (6112)
15 0
ZUW1
B6113 Raise MOP to sheet [180]
PZD1 (Data word1) B6114 Lower MOP control word 1
Bit15 r550
P049 = OP operating display B6115 External fault

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source Only applicable for Compact PLUS!

6-27
Parameterizing Steps

- s72 -
OP1S and fixed setpoints at USS2 (P368=7) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Baudrate PKW # PZD #
n957.90 = 4

6-28
P701.1 P702.1 P703.1
Sheet [110]
Transmit actual values
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word2)

P707.2 from sh.

n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
Reserved for write operations of K KK0148
-X101 [352.7], [400.5]
Parameterizing Steps

parameter data P707.1

Status word 1 ZUW1 from sh.
Transmit K K0032
r552 [200]

Receive SST1Word1
/10 r709.1
Control word 1 Setpoint via process data
RS485P PKW:127 K2001 (only DriveMonitor):
PZD: 2 SST1Word2
Main setpoint
r709.2
Baud rate: P443.B to sh. [316.1]
/11 9.6 kB Reserved for read K2002 K (2002) N
RS485N operations of Src T setpoint
parameter data for T control: P486.B to sh. [320.1]
K M
Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word 1) PcD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B2200
Sheet [100] OP1S-keys bis Bit15
B2215 P554.1
I O Bit0 B2100 ON/OFF1 B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
Bit1 B2101 OFF2 (electr.)
B2102 OFF3 (QStop) to sh. [180]
B2103 Inv Release Control word 1
P700.1 = Bus address r550
B2104 RGen Release
P704.1 = Tlg failure time B2105 No RGen Stop
• • • • • •

B2106 Setp Release

P565.1
Reset Bit7
B2107 Acknowledge B (2107) Src1 Acknow.

Jog Bit8 B2108 Jog Bit0

Compendium Vector Control

B2109 Jog Bit1
B2110 PcD control
• • • • •

Bit11 B2111 Positive Spd P572.1

Bit12 Src negative spd

Reserve
PcD control
Alarm effective
Switch-on inhibit
Fault effective
Ready
Ready for ON

Undervoltage fault
Comp. setpoint reached
Set/actual deviation

pos./neg. speed setp

Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Operation
B2112 Negative Spd B (2112)
1 P573.1
15 0 Src Raise MOP
ZUW1 B2113 Raise MOP B (2113)
P574.1
PZD1 (Data word1) Src Lower MOP
B2114 Lower MOP B (2114)
Bit15 B2115 External fault
P049 = OP operating display

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source Not valid for Compact PLUS!

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- s8 -
OP1S / DriveMonitor and MOP at USS1 (P368=8) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Terminal strip Sheet [90] -X101
/1
P24 n959.91 = 4
10.2004

/2
M24
*)

Siemens AG
P651.1 (107) no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
*) from sheet [200]
P652.1 (104) operation
1=operation
B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1 (0)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
B P590 (14)
/5 Src BICO DSet
B0014 B

P554.1 (5)
ON/OFF 1 Src ON/OFF1
I O B2100 B

P565
Src1 Acknowledge

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

1 Acknowledge
P B2107 B

P572
Negative Spd Src Negative Spd to sheet [180]
B2112 B

P573.1 (8)
Raise MOP Src Raise MOP
B2113 B

Compendium Vector Control

P574.1 (9)
Lower MOP Src Lower MOP
B2114 B

MOP MP Sheet [300]

Accel Time MOPDecel Time MOP
P431 P432

MOP (max) MOP(Outp.)

P421 r424
Raise MOP Src Main Setpoint
MOP(Outp.) P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
KK058 KK N
Lower MOP
Src T Setpoint
P422 P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
MOP (min.) KK M
(for T control )
P425
Conf MOP

0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF

0xx1 = ... storing after OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source Not valid for Compact PLUS!

6-29
Parameterizing Steps

- s81 -
OP1S and MOP (P368=8) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Baudrate PKW # PZD #
n957.90 = 4

6-30
P701.2 P702.2 P703.2
Sheet [111]
Transmit actual values
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word2)

P708.2 from sh.

n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
Reserved for write operations of K KK0148
-X103 [352.7], [400.5]
Parameterizing Steps

parameter data P708.1

Status word 1 ZUW1 from sh.
Transmit K K0032
r552 [200]

Receive SST2Word1
/3 r709.17
Control word 1 Setpoint via process data
RS485P PKW:127 K6001 (only DriveMonitor):
PZD: 2 SST2Word2
Main setpoint
r709.18
Baud rate: P443.B to sh. [316.1]
/8 9.6 kB Reserved for read K6002 K (6002) N
RS485N operations of Src T setpoint
parameter data for T control: P486.B to sh. [320.1]
K M
Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word 1) PcD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B6200
Sheet [101] OP1S-keys bis Bit15
B6215 P554.1
I O Bit0 B6100 ON/OFF1 B (6100) Src ON/OFF1
Bit1 B6101 OFF2 (electr.)
B6102 OFF3 (QStop) to sh. [180]
B6103 Inv Release Control word 1
P700.2 = Bus address r550
B6104 RGen Release
P704.2 = Tlg failure time B6105 No RGen Stop
• • • • • •

B6106 Setp Release

P565.1
Reset Bit7
B6107 Acknowledge B (6107) Src1 Acknow.

Jog Bit8 B6108 Jog Bit0

Compendium Vector Control

B6109 Jog Bit1
B6110 PcD control
• • • • •

Bit11 B6111 Positive Spd P572.1

Bit12 Src negative spd

Reserve
PcD control
Alarm effective
Switch-on inhibit
Fault effective
Ready
Ready for ON

Undervoltage fault
Comp. setpoint reached
Set/actual deviation

pos./neg. speed setp

Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Operation
B6112 Negative Spd B (6112)
1 P573.1
15 0 Src Raise MOP
ZUW1 B6113 Raise MOP B (6113)
P574.1
PZD1 (Data word1) Src Lower MOP
B6114 Lower MOP B (6114)
Bit15 B6115 External fault
P049 = OP operating display

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source Only applicable for Compact PLUS!

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- s82 -
OP1S and MOP at USS2 (P368=8) MASTERDRIVES VC
 Terminal strip Sheet [90] -X101
/1
P24 n959.91 = 4
10.2004

/2
M24
*)

Siemens AG
P651.1 (107) no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
*) from sheet [200]
P652.1 (104) operation
1=operation
B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1 (0)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
B P590 (14)
/5 Src BICO DSet
B0014 B

P554.1 (22)
ON/OFF 1 Src ON/OFF1
I O B6100 B

P565
Src1 Acknowledge

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

1 Acknowledge
P B6107 B

P572
Negative Spd Src Negative Spd to sheet [180]
B6112 B

P573.1 (8)
Raise MOP Src Raise MOP
B6113 B

Compendium Vector Control

P574.1 (9)
Lower MOP Src Lower MOP
B6114 B

MOP MP Sheet [300]

Accel Time MOPDecel Time MOP
P431 P432

MOP (max) MOP(Outp.)

P421 r424
Raise MOP Src Main Setpoint
MOP(Outp.) P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
KK058 KK N
Lower MOP
Src T Setpoint
P422 P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
MOP (min.) KK M
(for T control )
P425
Conf MOP

0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF

0xx1 = ... storing after OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source Only applicable for Compact PLUS!

6-31
Parameterizing Steps

- s83 -
OP1S and MOP (P368=8) MASTERDRIVES VC
 <1> n959.80 = 3

6-32
Display variables Analog outputs Sheet [81]
Switches on CUVC S4:
2s Rot Freq Actual Speed
r002 r015 AA1 AA2
Actual speed AA1 Scaling -10 V ... 10 V
KK020 AA1 Offset
P643.1 1-3 4-6
P644.1
n/f (act) Switch S4
Src Analog Output
r218 0 mA ... 20 mA 2-3 5-6
2 n/f(act) P640.1 D 1 +/- 10 V
Parameterizing Steps

x y 3
KK148 K (148) y(v) = x / 100% * P643 -X102/19
from sheet AA1
A 2 -X102/20
[350.7]
[351.7] AA2 Scaling 0 ... 20 mA
[352.7] P643.2 AA2 Offset
P644.2
[400.5] 2s Output Amps Switch S4
Src Analog Output
r004
Output Amps P640.2 D 4 +/- 10 V
x y 6
K0022 K (22) y(v) = x / 100% * P643 -X102/21
AA2
4 I(Output Amps) A 5 -X102/22
K0242 0 ... 20 mA
from sheet <1> Only applicable for Compact/Chassis type unit,
[285.3] for Compact PLUS Sheet [82] is applicable
[286.3]
2s Output voltage
Output voltage Display parameters Sheet [30] Note concerning the setting of analog outputs:
Reference frequency
B = Reference variable (c.f. P350 ... P354)
K0021
P352 Smin = smallest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A)
3 U(set,v/f) Smax = largest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A)
K0204 P042.x
Amin = smallest output value in V
from sheet .01 Amax = largest output value in V
[285.3] K
.02 Display frequency
[286.3] Output power K Hz
.03 r043.1 to .3 Output values applying to output current:
Output power K 4 mA ⇒ Amin = + 6 V
K0023 20 mA ⇒ Amax = - 10 V
from sheet
[285.7] Reference speed Amax − Amin
[286.7] Torque *) P353 P643 = xB
30 ms
r007 )
Smax − Smin
Torque *
K0024 P040.x
K .01 Amin x Smax − Amax x Smin
) Display speed P644 =
T(act) * K .02 rpm Smax − Smin
K0241 .03 r041.1 to .3
K

Compendium Vector Control

from sheet
[285.7]
2s DC Link Volts
r006 Reference torque *)
DC Link Volts P354
K0025
6 UZk(ist) P038.x
.01 Explanations:
K0240 K
.02 Display torque *)
from sheet K % Sheet [300]: See Compendium sheet 300
r039.1 to .2
[285.3]
[286.3] Reference to the current path of
1
rXX sheets
*) Torque display only with n/f/T control

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Analog outputs and display variables

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- a0-
MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.85 = 0
10.2004

Setpoint channel Speed controller Speed limitation controller v/f characteristic Gating unit
Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 318 Sheet 364 Sheet 401 Sheet 405 Sheet 286

Siemens AG
Ref. Boost End Field Weak
Frequency: P352 *)
Freq Mot.Freq.(n) Freq
Speed: P353 *)
P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
max.Outp Volts
r346

P240.M
Srce AddSetp1 n/f-Reg.Tn
P433.B (0) P235.M Smooth. vd(act)
n/f-Reg.Gain1 Mot.voltage P287.M
KK P101.M *)

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110.0%) *) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) f(Slip)
Src main setpoint r482 r229 KK0188
P443.B FSetp Boost 6
KK P325.M

KK075
–
N r014
P453.F (-110.0%) *) Setpoint speed

Compendium Vector Control

n/f(max,neg.Spd)
– Volts
P462.F (10s) P464.F (10s) Imax-Ctrl Gain Imax-Ctrll.Tn mod
Accel Time Decel Time Maximum P331.M P332.M depth Asyc.
Smooth. n/f(act) current – Mot. 3~
Sheet 250 Sheet 352
Pulse # P223.M P128.M
P151.M (1024) *)
P330.M 3
n/f(act) r129
Src SelCurve *)
r218 Motor
<1> Motor encoder encoder
X103 P130.M (11) *) Current
Lim. f(set,stator)
n/f(act) –
23 Tacho M KK199
KK148
24 Track A Imp.tach.
25 Track B
2 Output
26 Zero track 4
Ana.tach. current Explanations:
27 Control tr.
28 Tacho P15V Sh. [300] :
n/f(act,encoder)
See Compendium Sheet 300
Normalization KK091
N M : Reference to setpoint source (see sXX-sheets)

P138.M (3000)
Ana.TachScale
1 : Reference to current path sheet "a0"
"Analog outputs and display variables"

*) Parameter only adjustable in the "Drive setting" state (P60=5) <1> Compact PLUS: X104

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f characteristic with speed controller (P100=0)

6-33
Parameterizing Steps

- r0 -
MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.86 = 0

6-34
Setpoint channel Current limitation controller V/f characteristic Gating unit
Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 318 Sheet 400 Sheet 405 Sheet 286
Boost end Field weak.
Ref,
frequency Mot.Freq.(n) frequency
frequency: P352 *)
speed: P353 *) P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M
Parameterizing Steps

Src add. setp.1 max.Outp Volts.

P433.B (0) Slip comp Kp r346
KK P336.M (0)

f(Slip)
KK188 Smooth vd(act)
Mot. Volts P287.M
P101.M *)
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * ) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) n/f(ist)
Src main setpoint r482 r229 r218
P443.B 6
FSetp Boost
KK
– P325.M
KK075
r014
N KK148
P453.F (-110.0%) * ) Setpoint speed
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s) n/f(max,neg.spd) Volt.
Accel time Decel time 2 Mod.
Imax controller Kp Depth Asyc.
P331.M – Mot. 3~
Maximum P330.M
current Src Select Char.
3
Imax controller Tn
P128.M P332.M
r129

f(set,Stator)
Current KK199
lim.

Compendium Vector Control

–

Output Amps
4

*) Parameter only adjustable in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f characteristic (P100=1)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- r1 -
MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.87 = 0
10.2004

Setpoint channel Current limitation controller V/f characteristic Gating unit

Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 318 Sheet 402 Sheet 405 Sheet 286

Siemens AG
Ref. Boost end Field weakening
frequency: P352 *) frequency Mot.Freq.(n) frequency
speed: P353 *) P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
max.outp. volts
Src Add Setp2 r346
Src AddSetp.1
P438.B (0)
P433.B (0)
KK
KK
Smooth Vd(act)
Mot.voltage P287.M

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

P101.M *)
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * ) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) n/f(act)
Src main setpoint r482 r229 r218
P443.B 6
FSetp boost
KK
P325.M *)
KK075
r014
KK148
N P453.F (-110,0%) * ) Setpoint speed

Compendium Vector Control

P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s) n/f(max,neg.spd) Volt.
Accel Time Decel Time Mod.
Imax controller Kp 2 Depth Asyc.
P331.M – Mot. 3~
Maximum P330.M
currents Src Select Char.
3
Imax controller Tn f(set,stator)
P128.M P332.M KK199
r129

Current
lim.
–

Output Amps
4

*) Parameter can only be adjusted in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f characteristic (P100=2)

6-35
Parameterizing Steps

- r2 -
Textile MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.88 = 0

6-36
Setpoint channel Speed controller Torque/current limit Current controller Gating unit
Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 319 Sheet 362 Sheet 367 Sheet 372 Sheet 390 Sheet 285
Ref. Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
frequency: P352 *) Src TorqLimit1 FSetp P128.M P259.M
speed: P353 *) P492.F (100%)
torque: P354 *)
Src TorqLimit1 r129
Parameterizing Steps

P354 is referred to P493.B (170)

P113 *)
K170 K
Src TorqLimit2 FSetp
P498.F (-100%) Src TorqLimit2 Torque limitation
P499.B (171)
K171 K
Start-up time Scal.T(pre)
P116.M P471.M (0) TorqLimit1,act
Sheet 318 K0172
TorqLImit2,act
Isq(set)
Src Add. Setp1 K0173
K0168
P433.B (0) Smooth Vd(act)
T(set,limitr)
P235.M P240.M Kp Tn P287.M
KK r269
n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn P283.M P284.M
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * ) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) K0165
Src main setpoint r482 r229 i-Anteil
P443.B K0155 6
x 3
KK
Msoll,reg y
– –
N KK075 K0153
r014
P453.F (-110,0%) * ) Setpoint speed K0184
Sheet 381 max.mod. depth r346 Volt.
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s) n/f(max,neg.spd) Kp Tn
Isq(act) P283.M P284.M Mod.
Accel Time Decel Time Depth Asyc.
Smooth.n/f(act) Mot. 3~
Sheet 351 ModDepth Headrm
P223.M P344.M
n/f(ist)
Field weak. charac. P339.M *)
r218 – ModSystem
Note: Sheet 382 Release
Isd (act)
n/f(ist) T(droop) P278.M
The current injection of
T(dynam.) P279.M
P278 T(droop) (Fig. 382) KK148
is only calculated for

Compendium Vector Control

Smoothing I(set) P280.M
frequencies below approx. 10%
of the rated motor frequency. Sheet 396 f(set,stator)
KK199
+
+
Current Slip frequency EMF
model KK188 model
*) Parameter can only be – i-comp.
2
changed in the "Drive setting"
status (P60=5)
P127.M (80%) P315.M P316.M
R(rotor)Ktmp EMF Reg.Kp EMF-Reg.Tn

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop speed control without encoder (frequency control) P100=3

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- r3 -
Master drive (P587 = 0) MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.89 = 0
10.2004

Setpoint channel Speed controller Torque/current limit Current controller Gating unit
Sheet 320 Sheet 363 Sheet 372 Sheet 390 Sheet 285
Maximum

Siemens AG
current Pw,max(gen)
P128.M P259.M
Ref. TorqLimit1 FSetp
frequency: P352 *) P492.F (100%) TorqLimit1
speed: P353 *)
torque: P354 *) r496

P354 is referred to
P113 *) Torque limitation
-1

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
r502
Mgrenz2 FSW Mgrenz2 TorqLimit1,act
P498.F (-100%) K0172
TorqLimit2, act
K0173

Isq(set)
K0168
Smooht. Vd(act)
M(set,limitr)

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

P235.M P240.M Kp Tn P287.M
n/f(max,pos spd) r269
T-add. FSetp P452.F (110 %) *) n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn P283.M P284.M
P505.F (0.0) n/f(soll) n/f(setl,smooth) K0165
Src Torq Setp r482 r229 i-comp.
P486.B K0155 3 6
x
K
Tset,reg y
KK075 – K0153 –
r014

Compendium Vector Control

M K0184
setpoint speed
Sheet 381 max.Ausg.spg. r346 Volt.
P453.F (-110,0%) * ) Kp Tn
Isq(act) P283.M P284.M Mod.
n/f(max,neg.spd) Depth Asyc.
Smooth.n/f(act) Mot. 3~
Sheet 351 ModDepth Headrm
Start-up time
P223.M P344.M
P116.M (~)
n/f(act)
Field weak. charac. P339.M *)
r218 – ModSystem
Sheet 382 Release
Isd (act)
T(droop) P278.M
n/f(act) T(dynam.) P279.M
KK148
SmoothingI (set) P280.M
Sheet 396 f(set,Stator)
KK199
+
+
Current Slip frequency EMF
model KK188 Model
2 –
*) Parameter can only be
changed in the "Drive setting"
status (P60=5) P127.M (80%) P315.M P316.M
R(rotor)Ktmp EMF Reg Gain EMF Reg.Tn

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop speed control without encoder (frequency control) P100=3

6-37
Parameterizing Steps

- r31 -
Slave drive (P587 = 1) MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.90 = 0

6-38
Setpoint channel Speed controller Torque/current limit Current controller Gating unit
Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 319 Sheet 360 Sheet 365 Sheet 370 Sheet 390 Sheet 285
Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
Ref.
frequency: P352 *) TorqLimit1 FSetp P128.M P259.M
speed: P353 *) P492.F (100%)
torque: P354 *)
Src TorqLimit1 r129
P354 is referred to
Parameterizing Steps

P493.B (170)
P113 *)
K170 K
TorqLimit2 FSetp
P498.F (-100%) Src TorqLimit2 Torque limitation
P499.B (171)
K171 K
Start-up time Scal.Torq(pre.)
P116.M P471.M TorqLimit1,act
Sheet 318 K0172
TorqLimit2,act
K0173 Isq(set)
Src Add Setp.1 Src Add Setp2
K0168
P433.B (0) P438.B (0) Smooth Vd(act)
T(set,limitr) P287.M
KK KK P235.M P240.M r269 Kp Tn
n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn P283.M P284.M
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) *) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) K0165
Src main setpoint r482 r229 i-Anteil
P443.B K0155 3 6
x
KK
Msoll,reg y –
–
KK075 K0153
N r014
P453.F (-110,0%) *) Setpoint speed K0184
n/f(max,neg.spd) Volt.
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s) Sheet 380 Kp Tn
max.outp.volt. Mod.
Accel Time Decel Time Isq(act) P283.M P284.M Depth Asyc.
r346
Smooth n/f(act) Mot. 3~
Sheet250 Sheet 350
Pulse # P223.M
P151.M (1024) *) ModDepth Headrm
n/f(act) P344.M
P339.M *) Motor
r218
<1> Motor encoder Smooth.n/f(pre) ModSystem encoder
P216.M
– Release
X103 P130.M (11) *)
Field weakening
n/f(ist) characteristic Isd (act)
23 Tacho M
KK148
24 Track A Imp.tach. Blatt 395 f(set,Stator)
25 Track B

Compendium Vector Control

KK199
26 Zero track +
27 Control track Ana.tach. +
28 Tacho P15V 2 Slip frequency
n/f(act,encoder) Current EMF
KK188
model Model
Normalization KK091 –

P138.M (3000) P127.M (80%) P315.M P316.M

Ana.TachoComp R(rotor)Ktmp EMF Reg Gain EMF Reg.Tn

*) Parameter can only be changed in the "Drive setting" status P60=5 <1> Compact PLUS: X104

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop speed control (P100=4)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG
10.2004

- r4 -
Master drive (P587 = 0) MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.91 = 0
Speed limitation
10.2004

Setpoint channel controller Torque/current limit Current controller Gating unit

Sheet 320 Sheet 361 Sheet 371 Sheet 390 Sheet285

Siemens AG
Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
TorqLimit1 FSetp P128.M P259.M
Ref.
frequency: P352 *) P492.F (100%) TorqLimit1
speed: P353 *)
torque: P354 *) r496

P354 is referred to P113 *)

Torque limitation
-1
r502

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
TorqLimit1,act
P498.F (-100%) TorqLimit2
TorqLimit2 FSetp K0172
TorqLimit2,act
K0173

Isq(set)
K0168
Smooth. Vd(act)
M(set,limitr) P287.M
n/f(max,pos spd) P235.M P240.M r269 Kp Tn

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

Torq Add. FSetp P452.F (110 %) *) n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn P283.M P284.M
P505.F (0.0) n/f(set) n/f(set, smooth) K0165
Src Torque Setp r482 r229 i-comp.
P486.B K0155 3 6
x
K
Tset,reg y –
–
KK075 K0153
M r014
Setpoint speed K0184

Compendium Vector Control

Volt.
P453.F (-110,0%) Sheet 380 Kp Tn
max.outp. volts Mod.
n/f(max,neg.spd) *) Isq(act) P283.M P284.M Depth Asyc.
r346
Smooth n/f(act) Mot. 3~
Sheet 250 Sheet 350
Pulse P223.M
P151.M (1024) *) ModDepth Headrm
n/f(act) P344.M P339.M *) Motor
r218
<1> Motor encoder Smooth.n/f(FWD) Pulse system encoder
P216.M
– release
X103 P130.M (11) *)
Field weakening
n/f(act) characteristic Isd (act)
23 Tacho M
KK148
24 Track A IPulse tach. Sheet 395 f(set, stator)
25 Track B KK199
26 Zero track +
27 Control track Ana.tach. +
2
28 Tacho P15V Slip frequency
n/f(act,encoder) Current EMF
KK188
model model
Normalization KK091 –

P138.M (3000) P127.M (80%) P315.M P316.M

Ana.TachoComp R(rotor)Ktmp EMF Reg Gain EMF-Reg Tn

*) Parameter can only be changed in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5) <1> Compact PLUS: X104

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop speed control / torque control (P100=4/5)

6-39
Parameterizing Steps

- r5 -
Slave drive (P587 = 1) MASTERDRIVES VC
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Parameter assignments depending on setpoint source (P368) and control type (P100):
P368 = Setpoint source
P368 = 0 P368 = 1 P368 = 2 P368 = 3 P368 = 4 P368 = 6 P368 = 7 P368 = 8
PMU + Analog FSetp + MOP + USS PROFI- OP1S + OP1S +
MOP 1) inp. + terminals terminals BUS FSetp MOP
Parameter description terminals
P554.1 Src ON/OFF1 B0005 B0022 B0022 B0022 B2100 B3100 B2100 1) B2100 1)
B6100 2) B6100 2)
P555.1 Src OFF2 1 B0020 B0020 B0020 B2101 B3101 1 1
P561.1 Src InvRelease 1 B0016 1 1 1 1 1 1
P565.1 Src1 Fault Reset B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 1) B2107 1)
B6107 2) B6107 2)
P567.1 Src3 Fault Reset 0 B0018 B0018 B0018 0 0 0 0
P568.1 Src Jog Bit0 0 0 0 0 B2108 B3108 B2108 1) 0
B6108 2)
P571.1 Src FWD Speed 1 1 1 1 B2111 B3111 B2111 1) 1
B6111 2)
P572.1 Src REV Speed 1 1 1 1 B2112 B3112 B2112 1) B2112 1)
B6112 2) B6112 2)
P573.1 Src MOP Up B0008 0 0 B0014 0 0 0 B2113 1)
B6113 2)
P574.1 Src MOP Down B0009 0 0 B0016 0 0 0 B2114 1)
B6114 2)
P580.1 Src FixSetp Bit0 0 0 B0014 0 0 0 0 0
P581.1 Src FixSetp Bit1 0 0 B0016 0 0 0 0 0
P590 Src BICO DSet B0014 * 0 0 0 0 B0014 B0014 * B0014 **
P651.1 Src DigOut1 B0107 * B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 * B0107 *
P652.1 Src DigOut2 B0104 * B0104 B0104 B0104 B0104 B0104 B0104 * B0104 *
P653.1 Src DigOut3 0* 0 0 0 0 0 0* 0*
P654.1 Src DigOut4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Setpoint conn. parameter KK0058 K0011 KK0040 KK0058 K2002 K3002 KK0040 KK0058

* For factory setting P366 = 2, 3

♦ P590 = B0012
♦ P651 = B0000
♦ P652 = B0000
♦ P653 = B0107
** For factory setting P366 = 4 1):
♦ P590 = B4102
Bxxxx = Binector (Digital signal; values 0 and 1)
Kxxxx = Connector (16-bit signal; 4000h = 100 %)
KKxxxx = Double connector (32-bit signal; 4000 0000h = 100 %)
v/f characteristic + n/f-control: Setpoint connector parameter
(Setp-KP) = P443
T-control + n/f control: Setpoint connector parameter
(Setp-KP) = P486

1) only applicable for Compact/Chassis unit

2) only applicable for Compact PLUS

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-40 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

P100 = control type

Parameter description P100 = 0 P100 = 1 P100 = 2 f-Reg. n-Reg. P100 = 5
V/f + n V/f Textile (P587 = 0) (P587 = 0) T-Reg.
P038.1 DispTorqConn.r39.1 - - - - - Sw-KP
P038.1 DispTorqConn.r39.2 - - - - - K0165
P040.1 DispSpdConn.r41.1 Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP KK0150
P040.2 DispSpdConn.r41.2 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148
P040.3 Disp Freq Conn.r41.3 - - - KK0091 KK0091 KK0091
P042.1 Disp Freq Conn.r43.1 Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP KK0150
P042.2 Disp Freq Conn.r43.2 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148
P042.3 Disp Freq Conn.r43.3 KK0199 KK0199 KK0199 KK0091 KK0091 KK0091

6.2.2 Parameterizing with user settings

During parameterization by selecting user-specific fixed settings, the
parameters of the unit are described with values which are permanently
stored in the software. In this manner, it is possible to carry out the
complete parameterization of the units in one step just by setting a few
parameters.
The user-specific fixed settings are not contained in the standard
firmware; they have to be compiled specifically for the customer.

NOTE If you are interested in the provision and implementation of fixed

settings tailored to your own requirements, please get in contact with
your nearest SIEMENS branch office.

P060 = 2 Select "Fixed settings" menu

Select desired factory setting

P366 = ?
0...4: Factory settings
5: User setting 1 (currently as P366 = 0)
6: User setting 2 (currently as P366 = 0)
:
10: Lift and lifting equipment
Start parameter reset
P970 = 0
0: Parameter reset
1: No parameter change
Unit carries out parameter
reset and then leaves the
"Fixed settings" menu
Fig. 6-3 Sequence for parameterizing with user settings

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-41
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

6.2.3 Parameterizing by loading parameter files (download P060 = 6)

Download When parameterizing with download, the parameter values stored in a
master unit are transferred to the unit to be parameterized via a serial
interface. The following can serve as master units:
1. OP1S operator control panel
2. PCs with DriveMonitor service program
3. Automation units (e.g. SIMATIC)

The interface SCom1 or SCom2 with USS protocol of the basic unit
(SCom2 for Compact PLUS type unit (only OP1S)) and field bus
interfaces used for parameter transfer (e.g. CBP for PROFIBUS DP)
can serve as serial interfaces.
Using download, all changeable parameters can be set to new values.

"
7
[[
)[
)[
3VO
Operating mode Type of construction Terminal SIEMENS
Fault
Run

Individual operation Compact PLUS X103

US
I
S
O P
USS-Bus Compact, chassis X300 via
RS
Jog 7 8 9

4 5 6 (SCom1)
1 2 3
48
0 +/- Reset

Bus operation Compact PLUS X100 5

OP1S Compact, chassis X101

X300
Operating mode Type of construction Terminal USS via RS232
Individual operation Compact PLUS X103
Compact, chassis X300
(SCom1)
Laptop
ific
ec
s -sp
Operating mode Type of construction Terminal bu
Bus operation Optional board CBx e. g. X448
e. g. CBP for Profibus for CBP

Automation unit
(e. g. SIMATIC S7)

Fig. 6-4 Parameter transfer from various sources by download

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-42 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

Downloading with The OP1S operator control panel is capable of upreading parameter
the OP1S sets from the units and storing them. These parameter sets can then be
transferred to other units by download. Downloading with the OP1S is
thus the preferred method of parameterizing replacement units in a
service case.
During downloading with the OP1S, it is assumed that the units are in
the as-delivered state. The parameters for power section definition are
thus not transferred. (Refer to Section "Detailed parameterization,
power section definition")

Parameter number Parameter name

P060 Menu selection
P070 Order No. 6SE70..
P072 Rtd Drive Amps(n)
P073 Rtd Drive Power(n)

Table 6-6 Parameters you cannot overwrite during download

The OP1S operator control panel also stores and transfers parameters
for configuring the USS interface (P700 to P704). Depending on the
parameterization of the unit from which the parameter set was originally
upread, communication between the OP1S and the unit can be
interrupted on account of changed interface parameters after
downloading has been completed. To enable communication to re-
commence, briefly interrupt the connection between the OP1S and the
unit (disconnect OP1S or the cable). The OP1S is then newly initialized
and adjusts itself after a short time to the changed parameterization via
the stored search algorithm.

Download with With the aid of the DriveMonitor PC program, parameter sets can be
DriveMonitor uploaded from the units, saved to the hard disk or to floppy disks, and
edited offline. These parameter sets, stored in parameter files, can then
be downloaded to the units again.
The offline parameter editing facility can be used to produce special
parameter files to suit a particular application. In such cases, the files
need not contain the full set of parameters but can be limited to the
parameters relevant to the application in question. For further
information, see under "Upload / Download" in the "Parameterization"
section.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-43
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

NOTICE Successful parameterization of the units by download is only ensured if

the unit is in the "Download" status when the data is being transferred.
Transition into this status is achieved by selecting the "Download"
menu in P060.
P060 is automatically set to 6 after the download function has been
activated in the OP1S or in the DriveMonitor service program.
If the CU of a converter is replaced, the power section definition has to
be carried out before parameter files are downloaded.
If only parts of the entire parameter list are transferred by download, the
parameters of the following table must always be transferred too, as
these automatically result during the drive setting from the input of other
parameters. During download, however, this automatic adjustment is
not carried out.

Parameter number Parameter name

P109 Pole pair number
P352 Reference frequency = P353 x P109 / 60
P353 Reference frequency = P352 x 60 / P109
Table 6-7 Parameters which always have to be loaded during download

If parameter P115 = 1 is set during download, the automatic

parameterization is then carried out (according to the setting of
parameter P114). In automatic parameterization, the controller settings
are calculated from the motor rating plate data and the reference values
P350 to P354 are set to the motor rated values of the first motor data
set.
If the following parameters are changed during download, they are not
then re-calculated by the automatic parameterization:
P116, P128, P215, P216, P217, P223, P235, P236, P237, P240, P258,
P259, P278, P279, P287, P291, P295, P303, P313, P337, P339, P344,
P350, P351, P352, P353, P354, P388, P396, P471, P525, P536, P602,
P603.

6.2.4 Parameterization by running script files

Description Script files are used to parameterize devices of the MASTERDRIVES
series as an alternative to downloading a parameter set. A script file is
a pure text file that must have the filename extension *.ssc. The script
file executes individual commands using a simple command syntax for
the purpose of device parameterization. (You can write the script files
using a simple text editor, such as WordPad.)

NOTE Please refer to the online help for the scriptfiles.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-44 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

6.3 Detailed parameterization

Detailed parameterization should always be used in cases where the
application conditions of the units are not exactly known beforehand
and detailed parameter adjustments need to be carried out locally. An
example of a typical application is initial start-up.

6.3.1 Power section definition

The power section definition has already been completed in the as-
delivered state. It therefore only needs to be carried out if the CUVC
needs replacing, and is not required under normal circumstances.
During the power section definition, the control electronics is informed
which power section it is working with. This step is necessary for all
Compact, chassis and cabinet type units.

WARNING If CUVC boards are changed over between different units without the
power section being re-defined, the unit can be destroyed when it is
connected up to the voltage supply and energized.

The unit has to be switched to the "Power section definition" state for
carrying out the power section definition. This is done by selecting the
"Power section definition" menu. The power section is then defined in
this menu by inputting a code number.

P060 = 8 Select "Power section definition" menu

Input the code number for the unit concerned

P070 = ?
The code number is allocated to the order numbers (MLFB).
The order number can be read off the unit's rating plate.
The list of units is on the following pages.

P060 = 1 Return to parameter menu

Fig. 6-5 Sequence for performing the power section definition

WARNING To check the input data, the values for the converter supply voltage in
P071 and the converter current in P072 should be checked after
returning to the parameter menu. They must tally with the data given on
the unit rating plate.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-45
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

PWE: Parameter value P070

In [A]: Rated output current in Ampere (P072)

6.3.1.1 List of units for Compact PLUS frequency converter

Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7011-5EP60 1.5 1
6SE7013-0EP60 3.0 3
6SE7015-0EP60 5.0 5
6SE7018-0EP60 8.0 7
6SE7021-0EP60 10.0 9
6SE7021-4EP60 14.0 13
6SE7022-1EP60 20.5 15
6SE7022-7EP60 27.0 17
6SE7023-4EP60 34.0 19

6.3.1.2 List of units for Compact PLUS inverter

Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7012-0TP60 2.0 2
6SE7014-0TP60 4.0 4
6SE7016-0TP60 6.1 6
6SE7021-0TP60 10.2 8
6SE7021-3TP60 13.2 12
6SE7021-8TP60 17.5 14
6SE7022-6TP60 25.5 16
6SE7023-4TP60 34.0 18
6SE7023-8TP60 37.5 20

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-46 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

6.3.1.3 List of units for Compact frequency converter

3 AC 200 V to 230 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7021-1CA60 10.6 14
6SE7021-3CA60 13.3 21
6SE7021-8CB60 17.7 27
6SE7022-3CB60 22.9 32
6SE7023-2CB60 32.2 39
6SE7024-4CC60 44.2 48
6SE7025-4CD60 54.0 54
6SE7027-0CD60 69.0 64
6SE7028-1CD60 81.0 70

3AC 380 V to 480 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7016-1EA61 6.1 3
6SE7018-0EA61 8.0 9
6SE7021-0EA61 10.2 11
6SE7021-3EB61 13.2 18
6SE7021-8EB61 17.5 25
6SE7022-6EC61 25.5 35
6SE7023-4EC61 34.0 42
6SE7023-8ED61 37.5 46
6SE7024-7ED61 47.0 52
6SE7026-0ED61 59.0 56
6SE7027-2ED61 72.0 66

3AC 500 V to 600 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7014-5FB61 4.5 1
6SE7016-2FB61 6.2 5
6SE7017-8FB61 7.8 7
6SE7021-1FB61 11.0 16
6SE7021-5FB61 15.1 23
6SE7022-2FC61 22.0 30
6SE7023-0FD61 29.0 37
6SE7023-4FD61 34.0 44
6SE7024-7FD61 46.5 50

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-47
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

6.3.1.4 List of units for Compact inverter

DC 270 V to 310 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7021-1RA60 10.6 15
6SE7021-3RA60 13.3 22
6SE7021-8RB60 17.7 28
6SE7022-3RB60 22.9 33
6SE7023-2RB60 32.2 40
6SE7024-4RC60 44.2 49
6SE7025-4RD60 54.0 55
6SE7027-0RD60 69.0 65
6SE7028-1RD60 81.0 71

DC 510 V to 650 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7016-1TA61 6.1 4
6SE7018-0TA61 8.0 10
6SE7021-0TA61 10.2 12
6SE7021-3TB61 13.2 19
6SE7021-8TB61 17.5 26
6SE7022-6TC61 25.5 36
6SE7023-4TC61 34.0 43
6SE7023-8TD61 37.5 47
6SE7024-7TD61 47.0 53
6SE7026-0TD61 59.0 57
6SE7027-2TD61 72.0 67

DC 675 V to 810 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7014-5UB61 4.5 2
6SE7016-2UB61 6.2 6
6SE7017-8UB61 7.8 8
6SE7021-1UB61 11.0 17
6SE7021-5UB61 15.1 24
6SE7022-2UC61 22.0 31
6SE7023-0UD61 29.0 38
6SE7023-4UD61 34.0 45
6SE7024-7UD61 46.5 51

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-48 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

6.3.1.5 List of units for chassis-type frequency converter

3AC 200 V to 230 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7031-0CE60 100.0 13
6SE7031-3CE60 131.0 29
6SE7031-6CE60 162.0 41
6SE7032-0CE60 202.0 87

3AC 380 V to 480 V Order number In [A] PWE PWE

Air-cooled Water-cooled
6SE7031-0EE60 92.0 74 -
6SE7031-2EF60 124.0 82 -
6SE7031-5EF60 146.0 90 -
6SE7031-8EF60 186.0 98 -
6SE7032-1EG60 210.0 102 -
6SE7032-6EG60 260.0 108 -
6SE7033-2EG60 315.0 112 -
6SE7033-7EG60 370.0 116 -
6SE7035-1EK60 510.0 147 233
6SE7036-0EK60 590.0 151 237
6SE7037-0EK60 690.0 164 168

3AC 500 V to 600 V Order number In [A] PWE PWE

Air-cooled Water-cooled
6SE7026-1FE60 61.0 60 -
6SE7026-6FE60 66.0 62 -
6SE7028-0FF60 79.0 68 -
6SE7031-1FF60 108.0 78 -
6SE7031-3FG60 128.0 84 -
6SE7031-6FG60 156.0 94 -
6SE7032-0FG60 192.0 100 -
6SE7032-3FG60 225.0 104 -
6SE7033-0FK60 297.0 136 222
6SE7033-5FK60 354.0 141 227
6SE7034-5FK60 452.0 143 229

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-49
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

3AC 660 V to 690 V Order number In [A] PWE PWE

Air-cooled Water-cooled
6SE7026-0HF60 55.0 58 -
6SE7028-2HF60 82.0 72 -
6SE7031-0HG60 97.0 76 -
6SE7031-2HF60 118.0 80 -
6SE7031-5HG60 145.0 88 -
6SE7031-7HG60 171.0 96 -
6SE7032-1HG60 208.0 106 -
6SE7033-0HK60 297.0 137 223
6SE7033-5HK60 354.0 142 228
6SE7034-5HK60 452.0 146 232

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-50 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

6.3.1.6 List of units for chassis-type inverter

DC 270 V to 310 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7031-0RE60 100.0 20
6SE7031-3RE60 131.0 34
6SE7031-6RE60 162.0 86
6SE7032-0RE60 202.0 92

DC 510 V to 650 V Order number In [A] PWE PWE

Air-cooled Water-cooled
6SE7031-0TE60 92.0 75 -
6SE7031-2TF60 124.0 83 -
6SE7031-5TF60 146.0 91 -
6SE7031-8TF60 186.0 99 -
6SE7032-1TG60 210.0 103 -
6SE7032-6TG60 260.0 109 -
6SE7033-2TG60 315.0 113 -
6SE7033-7TG60 370.0 117 -
6SE7035-1TJ60 510.0 120 206
6SE7036-0TJ60 590.0 123 209
6SE7037-0TK60 690.0 126 212
6SE7038-6TK60 860.0 127 213
6SE7041-1TM60 1100.0 134 -
6SE7041-1TK60 1100.0 135 221
6SE7041-3TM60 1300.0 140 226
6SE7041-6TM60 1630.0 150 236
6SE7042-1TQ60 2090.0 153 239
6SE7041-3TL60 1300.0 154 199
6SE7037-0TJ60 690.0 163 167
6SE7038-6TS60 6450.0 181 247
6SE7041-1TS60 6270.0 185 250
6SE7042-5TN60 2470.0 194 244

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-51
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

DC 675 V to 810 V Order number In [A] PWE PWE

Air-cooled Water-cooled
6SE7026-1UE60 61.0 61 -
6SE7026-6UE60 66.0 63 -
6SE7028-0UF60 79.0 69 -
6SE7031-1UF60 108.0 79 -
6SE7031-3UG60 128.0 85 -
6SE7031-6UG60 156.0 95 -
6SE7032-0UG60 192.0 101 -
6SE7032-3UG60 225.0 105 -
6SE7033-0UJ60 297.0 110 200
6SE7033-5UJ60 354.0 114 202
6SE7034-5UJ60 452.0 118 204
6SE7035-7UK60 570.0 121 207
6SE7036-5UK60 650.0 124 210
6SE7038-6UK60 860.0 128 214
6SE7041-0UM60 990.0 130 216
6SE7041-1UM60 1080.0 132 218
6SE7041-2UM60 1230.0 138 224
6SE7041-4UM60 1400.0 144 230
6SE7041-4UQ60
6SE7041-6UM60 1580.0 148 234
6SE7041-6UQ60
6SE7041-1UL60 1080.0 155 195
6SE7042-4UR60 2450.0 157
6SE7041-2UL60 1230.0 159 197
6SE7043-3UR60 3270.0 161 -
6SE7044-1UR60 4090.0 165 -
6SE7044-8UR60 4900.0 169 -
6SE7045-7UR60 5720.0 173 -
6SE7046-5UR60 6540.0 177 -
6SE7036-5US60 4940.0 179 245
6SE7038-6US60 6540.0 182 248
6SE7041-1US60 6160.0 186 251
6SE7041-2US60 5840.0 188 253
6SE7042-1UN60 2050.0 190 240
6SE7042-3UN60 2340.0 192 242

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-52 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

DC 890 V to 930 V Order number In [A] PWE PWE

Air-cooled Water-cooled
6SE7026-0WF60 60.0 59 -
6SE7028-2WF60 82.0 73 -
6SE7031-0WG60 97.0 77 -
6SE7031-2WG60 118.0 81 -
6SE7031-5WG60 145.0 89 -
6SE7031-7WG60 171.0 97 -
6SE7032-1WG60 208.0 107 -
6SE7033-0WJ60 297.0 111 201
6SE7033-5WJ60 354.0 115 203
6SE7034-5WJ60 452.0 119 205
6SE7035-7WK60 570.0 122 208
6SE7036-5WK60 650.0 125 211
6SE7038-6WK60 860.0 129 215
6SE7041-0WM60 990.0 131 217
6SE7041-1WM60 1080.0 133 219
6SE7041-2WM60 1230.0 139 225
6SE7041-4WM60 1400.0 145 231
6SE7041-4WQ60
6SE7041-6WM60 1580.0 149 235
6SE7041-6WQ60
6SE7034-5WK60 452.0 152 238
6SE7041-1WL60 1080.0 156 196
6SE7042-4WR60 2450.0 158 -
6SE7041-2WL60 1230.0 160 198
6SE7043-3WR60 3270.0 162 -
6SE7044-1WR60 4090.0 166 -
6SE7044-8WR60 4900.0 170 -
6SE7045-7WR60 5720.0 174 -
6SE7046-5WR60 6540.0 178 -
6SE7036-5WS60 4940.0 180 246
6SE7038-6WS60 6540.0 183 249
6SE7041-1WS60 6160.0 187 252
6SE7041-2WS60 5840.0 189 254
6SE7042-1WN60 2050.0 191 241
6SE7042-3WN60 2340.0 193 243

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-53
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

6.3.2 Board configuration

During board configuration, the control electronics is informed in what
way the installed optional boards have to be configured. This step is
always necessary when CBx or SLB optional boards are used.
The unit must be switched to the "Board configuration" status for this
purpose. This is done by selecting the "Board configuration" menu. In
this menu, parameters are set which are required for adapting the
optional boards to the specific application (e.g. bus addresses, baud
rates, etc.). After leaving the menu, the set parameters are transferred
and the optional boards are initialized.

P060 = 4 Select "Board configuration" menu

SCB inserted ? Serial communications board

no yes NOTE: Not for Compact PLUS units

SCB protocol
P696 = ?
0: SCI
1: USS 4-wire
2: USS 2-wire
3: Peer-to-Peer

CBx inserted ? Communications board (e.g. Profibus-DP)

no yes

P711.1...2 = ? Enter the CB parameters 1 to 11 necessary for the inserted

to communications boards CBx
P721.1...10 = ? The necessary CB parameters and their significance can be
derived from the function diagrams of the individual
communications boards.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-54 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

SLB inserted ? SIMOLINK bus interface

no yes

Enter the SLB module address

P740 = ?
0: Unit operates as a dispatcher
greater than 0: Unit operates as a transceiver
Enter the SLB telegram failure time in ms
P741 = ?
0: No monitoring
greater than 0: Monitoring time in ms
Enter the SLB transmit power (for plastic fiber-optic cables)
P742 = ?
1: weak up to 15 m fiber-optic cable length
P740 > 0 P740 = 0 2: medium up to 25 m fiber-optic cable length
3: strong up to 40 m fiber-optic cable length
NOTE: If glass fiber-optic cables are used, the possible
lengths are increased by the factor 7.5.
Enter the number of modules (incl. dispatcher)
P743 = ?
in the SIMOLINK ring

P745 = ? Enter the number of channels per module

P746 = ? Enter the SIMOLINK cycle time in ms

P749.1...8 = ? Enter the SLB read addresses

CBx inserted ? Communications board (e.g. Profibus-DP)

no yes

P918.1...2 = ? Enter the CB bus addresses

P060 = 1 Return to the parameter menu

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-55
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Board codes The visualization parameter r826.x is used for displaying the board
codes. These codes enable the type of installed electronic boards to be
determined.
Parameter Index Position
r826 1 Basic board
r826 2 Slot A
r826 3 Slot B
r826 4 Slot C (not for Compact PLUS)
r826 5 Slot D (not for Compact PLUS)
r826 6 Slot E (not for Compact PLUS)
r826 7 Slot F (not for Compact PLUS)
r826 8 Slot G (not for Compact PLUS)

If a T100, T300 or TSY 1) technology board (mounting position 2) or an

SCB1 1) or SCB2 1) (mounting position 2 or 3) is used, the board code
can be found in the following indices:

Parameter Index Position

r826 5 Mounting position 2
r826 7 Mounting position 3

General board Parameter value Meaning

codes
90 to 109 Mainboards or Control Unit
110 to 119 Sensor Board (SBx)
120 to 129 Serial Communication Board (Scx) 1)
130 to 139 Technology Board
140 to 149 Communication Board (Cbx)
150 to 169 Special boards (Ebx, SLB)

1) only applicable for Compact/Chassis unit

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-56 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

Special board codes Board Meaning Parameter

value
CUVC Control Unit Vector Control 92
CUMC Control Unit Motion Control 93
CUMC+ Control Unit Motion Control Compact PLUS 94
CUVC+ Control Unit Vector Control Compact PLUS 95
CUPM Control Unit Motion Control Performance 2 96
CUMP Control Unit Motion Control Compact PLUS 97
Performance 2
CUA Control Unit AFE 106
CUSA Control Unit Sinus AFE 108
TSY Tacho and synchronization board 110
SBP Sensor Board Puls 111
SCB1 Serial Communication Board 1 (fiber-optic cable) 121
SCB2 Serial Communication Board 2 122
T100 Technology board 131
T300 Technology board 131
T400 Technology board 134
CBX Communication Board 14x
CBP Communication Board PROFIBUS 143
CBD Communication Board DeviceNet 145
CBC Communication Board CAN Bus 146
CBL Communication Board CC-Link 147
CBP2 Communication Board PROFIBUS 2 148
EB1 Expansion Board 1 151
EB2 Expansion Board 2 152
SLB SIMOLINK bus interface 161

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-57
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

6.3.3 Drive setting

The drive setting function extends the start-up facilities of quick
parameterization.
During the drive setting, the control electronics is informed about the
incoming voltage supply with which the drive converter is operating,
about the connected motor and about the motor encoder. In addition,
the motor control (V/f open-loop control or vector control) and the pulse
frequency are selected. If required, the parameters necessary for the
motor model can be calculated automatically. Furthermore, the
normalization values for current, voltage, frequency, speed and torque
signals are determined during the drive setting.
For start-up of the induction motor, first enter the manufacturer's
parameters completely (see below):
♦ In doing so, you must observe whether the induction motor has a
star or a delta connection.
♦ You must always use the S1 data from the rating plate.
♦ You must enter the r.m.s. base frequency of the rated voltage and
not the total r.m.s. value (including harmonic content) for converter
operation.
♦ You must always enter the correct rated motor current P102 (rating
plate). If there are two different rated currents on the rating plate for
special fan motors, you must use the value for M ~ n for constant
torque (not M ~ n2). A higher torque can be set with the torque and
active-current limits.
♦ The accuracy of the rated motor current has a direct effect on the
torque accuracy, as the rated torque is normalized to the rated
current. If a rated current is increased by 4 %, this will also
approximately result in a 4 % increase in the torque (referred to the
rated motor torque).
♦ For group drives, you have to enter the total rated current
P102 = x*Imot,rated
♦ If the rated magnetizing current is known, you should enter it during
the drive setting in P103 (in % Imot,rated). If this is done, the results
of the "Automatic parameterization" (P115 = 1) will be more precise.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-58 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

♦ As the rated magnetizing current P103 (not to be confused with the

no-load current during operation with rated frequency P107 and
rated voltage P101) is usually not known, you can first enter 0.0 %.
With the aid of the power factor (cosPHI) P104, an approximate
value is calculated and displayed in r119.
Experience shows that the approximation supplies values which are
rather on the large side in the case of motors with a high rating (over
800 kW), whereas it supplies values which are slightly too low in the
case of motors with low rating (below 22 kW).
The magnetizing current is defined as a field-generating current
component during operation at the rated point of the machine
(U = P101, f = P107, n = P108, i = P102).
♦ The rated frequency P107 and the rated speed P108 automatically
result in the calculation of the pole pair number P109. If the
connected motor is designed as a generator and the generator data
are on the rating plate (oversynchronous rated speed), you have to
correct the pole pair number manually (increase by 1 if the motor is
at least 4-pole), so that the rated slip (r110) can be correctly
calculated.
♦ For induction motors, you have to enter the actual rated motor
speed, and not the synchronous no-load speed in P108, i.e. the slip
frequency at nominal load has to be derived from parameters
P107...P109.
♦ The rated motor slip (1 - P108/60 x P109/P107) should usually be
greater than 0.35 % x P107.
These low values are, however, only achieved in the case of motors
with a very high rating (above approx. 1000 kW).
Motors with average rating (45..800 kW) have slip values around
2.0...0.6 %.
Motors with low rating (below 22 kW) can also have slip values up to
10 %.
♦ It is possible to achieve a more accurate evaluation of the rated slip
after standstill measurement (P115 = 2) by taking into account the
temperature evaluation for the rotor resistance P127.
On cold motors (approx. 20 °C), the value is usually around 70 %
(± 10 %) and on warm motors (operating temperature) around
100 % (± 10 %). If there are any large differences, you can proceed
on the assumption that the rated frequency P107 or the rated speed
P108 do not correspond to the real values.
♦ If the rated motor frequency (engineered!) is below 8 Hz, you have
to set P107 = 8.0Hz in the drive setting. The rated motor voltage
P101 has to be calculated in the ratio 8 Hz / fMot,N and the rated
motor speed P108 should result in the same slip:
P108 = ((8 Hz - P107old) x 60 / P109) + P108old.

WARNING During motor identification (P115 = 2...7) inverter pulses are released
and the drive rotates!
For reasons of safety, identification should first be carried out without
coupling of the load.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-59
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

P060 = 5 Select "Drive setting" menu

Output filter 0 = without output filter

P068 = ?
1 = with sinusoidal output filter
2 = with dv/dt output filter
Input unit line voltage in V
P071 = ?
AC units: r.m.s. alternating voltage
DC units: DC link voltage

Enter type of motor

P095 = ?
2: Compact asynchronous motor 1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
P095=2 P095 = P095=11 10: Async./sync. IEC (international standard)
10,12,13 11: Async./sync. NEMA (US standard)
12: Sync. motor, separately excited (special applications,
not V/f characteristic)
13: Sync. motor, permanently excited (special applications,
not v/f characteristic)
Enter the code number for the connected motor of type
P097 = ?
1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
(See Appendix for list)
(Automatic parameterization is carried out if you set P095 = 2
and P097 > 0)
Enter the type of open/closed-loop control
P100 = ?
0: v/f control + n control
P095=2 1: v/f control
P097>0
2: v/f control, textile
3: Speed control without tachometer (f control)
4: Speed control with tachometer (n control)
5: Torque control (M control)
Note: For motor ratings over approx. 200 kW one of the
vector control types should be used (P100 > 2).

Enter the rated motor voltage in V

P101 = ?
as per rating plate

Enter the rated motor current in A

P102 = ?
as per rating plate
(Group drives: total of all motor currents)
Enter the motor magnetizing current as a % of the rated
P103 = ?
motor current
IEC NEMA If value is not known, set P103 = 0, the value is then
automatically calculated when you exit Drive setting (see r119).

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-60 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

IEC motor: Cos (phi) as per rating plate

P104=? P105=?
NEMA motor: rated output [Hp]
(Group drives: total of all output ratings)
NEMA motor: Enter the motor efficiency in %
P106=?
as per rating plate

Enter the rated motor frequency in Hz

P107 = ?
as per rating plate

Enter the rated motor speed in rpm

P108 = ?
as per rating plate

Enter the motor pole pair number

P109 = ?
(This is calculated automatically)

Enter the rated motor torque in Nm

P113 = ?
as per rating plate or motor catalog (this is only used for
P100=0,1,2 P100 = 3,4,5 normalizing the process data and visualization parameters)
P100>2

P100=1,2 WARNING!
P114 = ?
INCORRECT SETTINGS CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Process-related conditions for closed-loop control
0: Drive for standard applications (e.g. pumps)
1: Drive with strong torsion, gear play, large moments of inertia
(e.g. paper machine)
2: Drive for very dynamic accelerations (without load inertia)
(e.g. shears)
3: Drive for strong schock stressing (e.g. roll drive)
4: Drive with high smooth running characteristics at low speeds.
5: Drives with modest response requirements, which can be
optimized in their efficiency with frequent part-load operation.
6: Drive with high starting torque.
7: Dynamic torque response in field-weakening range
See next section for description

P115 = 1 Calculate motor model for "Automatic parameterization"

Reference values P350 to P354 are set to the rated motor
values.
The motor parameters and controller settings are calculated.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-61
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Select the motor encoder

P130 = ?
5: External SBP board
P130 = P130 = P130 = 10: Without motor encoder
10,13,14 5 11,12,15,16 11: Pulse encoder (default if P095=2, P097>0)
12: Pulse encoder with control track
13: Analog input 1
14: Analog input 2
15: Pulse encoder with zero track
16: Pulse encoder with zero and control track
WARNING
Please check that the encoder has been connected
correctly!
Pulse encoder: Do not mix up tracks A and B!
Analog tachometer: Check voltage polarity (direction of
rotation) and amplitude!
In the event of faults the drive may involuntarily race to
maximum speed! For testing the encoder see parameter
P115=7 and P115=3 and 4.

Enter the pulse number/revolution of the pulse encoder

P151 = ?

P131 = ? Select TmpSensor

0: KTY84 (evaluation via P380/P381)
3: PT100 (evaluation only possible for SBP)
Configuration of setpoint encoder
P139 = ?

Setpoint encoder pulse number

P140 = ?

Reference frequency of setpoint encoder

P141 = ?

P100 =
0,1,2
Characteristic 0: Linear characteristic (constant torque drives)
P330 = ?
1: Parabolic characteristic (fans/pumps)

Release the edge modulation systems (FLM)

P339 = ?
0: All systems
1: Edge modulation systems from 60 Hz
2: Edge modulation systems from 100 Hz
3: No edge modulation systems
4: Overmodulated space vector modulation

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-62 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

Enter the pulse frequency in kHz

P340 = ?
Pulse frequency for asynchronous space vector modulation
Notes:
- The adjustable range depends on the converter/inverter
- An increase in the pulse frequency results in a reduction
of the maximum output current
(see "Technical Data", derating curves)

Enter the reference value for all current quantities in A

P350 = ?
(Normalization quantity for current limitations as well as current
setpoints and actual values) (see example in section 6.2.1)
Enter the reference value for all voltage quantities in V
P351 = ?
(Normalization quantity for voltage limitations as well as voltage
setpoints and actual values)

Enter the reference value for all frequency quantities in Hz

P352 = ?
(Normalization quantities for frequency limitations, frequency
setpoints and actual values) (see example in section 6.2.1)
Note: The parameter P353 is automatically adjusted.
Enter the reference value for all speed quantities in rpm
P353 = ?
(Normalization quantity for speed limitations, speed setpoints
and actual values) (see example in section 6.2.1)
Note: The parameter P352 is automatically adjusted.
Enter the reference value for all torque quantities in Nm
P354 = ?
(Normalization quantity for torque limitations, torque setpoints
and actual values) (see example in section 6.2.1)

Enter the sampling time T0 in ms

P357 = ?
The sampling time T0 is for determining the calculating
frequency of all functions.
The sampling times T1...T19 are multiples of sampling time T0
NOTICE: A very short sampling time T0 can lead to a calcu-
lation time overload if several function blocks are
activated at the same time!

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-63
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Thermal motor System with motor protection according to UL regulation?

protection desired ? The motor temperature is calculated via the motor current.
no yes (Motor overload protection in accordance with UL regulation
activated as default setting!)
Enter the motor temperature for output of the alarm A023
P380 = ?
"Motor overtemperature" (evaluation with KTY84)
(PTC evaluation: P380 = 1 °C)
Enter the motor temperature for output of the fault F020
P381 = ?
"Motor overtemperature" (evaluation with KTY84)
(PTC evaluation: P381 = 1 °C)
P095=2
P097>0
Specify motor cooling
P382 = ?
0: self-ventilated
1: force-ventilated (default if P095 = 2, P097 > 0)
Enter the thermal time constant of the motor in s
P383 = 0 P383 = ?
(< 100 s: monitoring deactivated)
(default if P095 = 2, P097 > 0)

P384.02 = 0 P384.02 = ? Enter the motor load limit 1...300 %

Enter the maximum frequency or speed in positive

P452 = ?
direction of rotation in %
The value is referred to P352 (reference frequency) and P353
(reference speed)
Enter the maximum frequency or speed in negative
P453 = ?
direction of rotation in %
The value is referred to P352 (reference frequency) and P353
(reference speed)

P060 = 1 Return to the parameter menu

Note
When the "Drive settings" menu is exited, the entered
parameter values are checked for their plausibility. Non-
plausible parameter settings result in a fault. The erroneously
set parameters are entered in parameter r949 (fault value).

P128 = ? Enter the maximum output current in A

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-64 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

Enter the acceleration time from standstill up to reference

P462 = ?
frequency (P352)

Enter the unit for acceleration time P462

P463 = ?
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours

Enter the deceleration time from reference frequency

P464 = ?
(P352) up to standstill

Enter the unit for deceleration time P464

P465 = ?
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours

Sinusoidal filter (P068=1)

or
synchronous motor?
no yes

Calculate motor model "Motor identification at standstill"

P115 = 2
NOTICE
Current flows through the motor and the rotor rotates!
After pressing the "P" key, the alarm message "A087" appears.
The converter must be turned on within 20 secs!

Analog tachometer? Analog tachometer present?

no yes

Adjust Adjust tachometer

tachometer Tachometer to ATI: See operating instructions for ATI
Tachometer to terminal strip: See function diagrams for analog
inputs

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-65
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

f, n, T control?
(P100 = 3, 4, 5)
no yes

Calculate motor model "No-load measurement"

P115 = 4
NOTICE: Current flows through the motor, the rotor rotates!
After "P" key is pressed, the alarm message "A080" appears.
The converter must be switched on within 20 seconds!
Wait until the converter is "Ready for ON" again (°009)
Wait
For fault "Fxxx", refer to chapter "Faults and alarms"

Enter the dynamic performance of the speed control circuit

P536 = ?
in %
Important for subsequent controller optimization.
Calculate motor model "Controller optimization"
P115 = 5
NOTICE: Current flows through the motor, the rotor rotates!
After "P" is pressed, the alarm message "A080" appears.
The converter must be switched on within 20 seconds!
Wait until the converter is powered-down
Wait
(Operating status "Ready for ON" (°009))
For fault "Fxxx", see chapter "Faults and alarms"

Finished

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-66 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

6.4 Notes regarding parameterization

The parameter list covers the setting parameters and visualization
parameters of all available motor types (induction motors and
synchronous motors), as well as all possible open-loop and closed-loop
control modes (e.g. V/f characteristic, speed control).
The constellation under which this parameter is influenced or whether it
is displayed at all is indicated under "Preconditions" in the parameter
description.

Unless otherwise specified, all percentage values refer to the reference

quantities in P350 to P354.
If reference quantities are changed, this will also change the
significance of the parameters with percentage normalization
(e.g. P352 = Maximum frequency).

Reference quantities Reference variables are intended as an aid to presenting setpoint and
actual value signals in a uniform manner. This also applies to fixed
settings entered as a "percentage". A value of 100 % corresponds to a
process data value of 4000h, or 4000 0000 h in the case of double
values.
All setpoint and actual value signals (e.g. set speed and actual speed)
refer to the physically applicable reference variables. In this respect, the
following parameters are available:
P350 Reference current in A
P351 Reference voltage in V
P352 Reference frequency in Hz
P353 Reference speed in rpm
P354 Reference torque in Nm

In quick parameterization mode and in automatic parameter

assignment mode (P115 = 1(2,3)), these reference variables are set to
the motor ratings. In case of automatic parameter assignment, this
occurs only if the "Drive setting" converter status is activated.
Speed and The reference speed and reference frequency are always connected by
frequency reference the pole pair number.
values 60
P353 = P352 ×
P109
If one of the two parameters is changed, the other is calculated using
this equation.
Since this calculation is not made on download (see section 6.2.3),
these two quantities must always be loaded in the correct relationship.
If the setpoint and actual control signals are related to a desired
reference speed in rpm, P353 must be set accordingly (P352 is
calculated automatically). If a rotational frequency in Hz is to be used
as the reference (calculated using the pole pair number P109), P352
must be set.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-67
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Torque reference Since the torque signals and parameters in the control system are
value always specified and displayed as a percentage, the ratio of the
reference torque (P354) to the rated motor torque (P113) is always
important for accuracy. If both values are the same, a display value of
100 % corresponds exactly to the rated motor torque, irrespective of the
values actually entered in P354 and P113.
For purposes of clarity, however, it is advisable to enter the true rated
torque of the drive in P113 (e.g. from catalog data).
PW (mot, rated)
P113 =
2⋅π⋅n(mot,rated)
60

Reference power The reference power (in W) is calculated from the reference torque and
value reference speed:
P354 ⋅ P353 ⋅ 2 ⋅ π
R W ,ref =
60
Power values for the control system are also always specified as a
percentage referred to the specified reference power. The ratio of
PW,ref / Pmot,rated can be used for conversion to the rated motor
power.
P113 ⋅ 2 ⋅ π ⋅ P108
Pmot,rated =
60

Reference current If the reference torque P354 is increased, for example, the reference
value current P350 must be increased by the same factor, because the
current increases at higher torque.

NOTE Setting and visualization parameters in engineering units (e.g. Imax in

A) must also be no more than twice the reference value.
If the reference quantities are changed, the physical value of all
parameters specified as a percentage also changes; that is all the
parameters of the setpoint channel, as well as the maximum power for
the control system (P258, P259) and the static current for frequency
control (P278, P279).

If the reference values and the rated motor values are identical (e.g.
following quick parameterization), signal representation (e.g. via
connectors) up to twice the rated motor values is possible. If this is not
sufficient, you must change to the "Drive setting" menu (P060 = 5) to
change the reference quantities.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-68 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

Example P107 = 52.00 Hz Rated motor frequency

P108 = 1500.0 rpm Rated motor speed
P109 = 2 Motor pole pair number
Pre-assignment:
P352 = 52.00 Hz Reference frequency
P353 = 1560 rpm Reference speed

For a maximum speed of four times the rated motor speed you must set
the reference speed to at least 3000 rpm. The reference frequency is
adjusted automatically (P352 = P353 / 60 x P109).

P352 = 100.00 Hz
P353 = 3000 rpm

A setpoint speed of 1500 rpm corresponds to a setpoint frequency of

50.00 Hz or an automation value of 50.0 %.
The representation range ends at 6000 rpm (2 x 3000 rpm).
This does not affect the internal representation range of the control
system. Since the internal control signals refer to the rated motor
quantities, there is always sufficient reserve control capacity.
The reference speed should normally be set to the desired maximum
speed.
Reference frequencies of P352 = P107, P352 = 2 x P107,
P352 = 4 x P107 are favorable for the calculating time.
For a maximum torque of three times the rated motor torque (P113) it is
advisable to set the reference torque to between twice and four times
the value of parameter P113 (for four to eight times the representation
range).

Separately excited Function diagrams and start-up instructions for separately excited
synchronous synchronous motors (with damping cage and excitation via sliprings)
motors are available as separate instructions.
The following parameters are only effective for these synchronous
motors:
P75 to P88; P155 to r168, P187, P258, P274, P297, P298, P301, r302,
P306 to P312.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-69
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

Automatic The following parameters are calculated or set to fixed values during
parameterization automatic parameterization (P115 = 1):
and motor P116 P236 P295 P337
identification
P117 P240 P303 P339
P120 P258 P306 P344
P121 P259 P313 P347
P122 P273 P315 P348
P127 P274 P316 P388
P128 P278 P319 P392
P161 P279 P322 P396
P215 P283 P325 P471
P216 P284 P326 P525
P217 P287 P334 P536
P223 P291 P335 P602
P235 P293 P336 P603

♦ P350 to P354 are only set to the rated motor quantities in the
converter status "Drive setting" (P060 = 5) or "Quick
parameterization (P060 = 3).
♦ In the converter state "Drive setting" (not in converter state
"Ready"), automatic parameterization is also performed on selection
of zero-speed measurement P115 = 2, 3.
♦ During the standstill measurement P115 = 2, 3, the following
parameters are measured or calculated:
• P103, P120, P121, P122, P127, P347, P349.
The controller settings resulting from these values are in: P283,
P284, P315, P316.
♦ During the rotating measurement P115 = 3, 4, P103 and P120 are
adjusted.
♦ During the n/f controller optimization P115 = 5, the parameters
P116, P223, P235, P236, P240 and P471 are determined.
In principle, automatic parameterization (P115 = 1) or motor
identification (P115 = 2, 3) should be carried out as soon as one of the
following parameters is adjusted in the converter status "Drive setting"
(P060 = 5):
P068 = Output filter
P095 = Motor type
P097 = Motor number
P100 = Control type
P101...P109 = Motor rating plate data
P339 = Release of modulation system
P340 = Pulse frequency
P357 = Sampling time

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-70 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

In exceptional cases this is not necessary:

♦ If P068 is only adjusted between 0 and 2 (dv/dt filter).
♦ If P340 is adjusted in integer increments, e.g. from 2.5 kHz to
5.0 kHz...7.5 kHz... etc.
♦ If P339 is not set to over-modulated space vector modulation; if
P339 = 4, 5 (over-modulated space vector modulation), the
overrange limit P342 must also be reduced to limit torque ripple and
motor heating.
♦ If changeover is made between speed and torque control
(P100 = 4, 5).
♦ If changeover is made between speed and frequency control and
the following parameters are adapted:

f-control (P100 = 3) n-control (P100 = 4)

P315 = EMF Reg.Kp 2 x Kp Kp
P223 = Smooth.n/f(act) ≥ 0 ms ≥ 4 ms
P216 = Smooth. n/f(pre) ≥ 4.8 ms ≥ 0.0 ms
P222 = Src n/f(act) KK0000 KK0000 (KK0091)

The speed controller dynamic response may have to be reduced in the

case of encoder-less speed control (frequency control) (Reduce gain
(P235); increase Tn (P240)).
Temperature Activation of the measured value or PTC thermistor monitoring for the
monitoring of the motor causes different fault and alarm signals depending on the setting
motor of parameters P380 and P381. These are listed in the following table:

P380 / P381 / Sensor r009 Alarm A23 in Alarm A23 in Fault F20 in Fault F20 in
°C °C ready operation ready operation
=0 =0 KTY84 for RL if P386 = - - - -
adapt. 2
=0 =1 PTC no - - - yes 1)
=1 =0 PTC no yes 1) yes 1) - -
=1 =1 PTC no yes 1) - - yes 1)
=0 >1 KTY84 yes - - - yes 3)
>1 =0 KTY84 yes yes 3) yes 3) yes 4) yes 2)
>1 >1 KTY84 yes yes 3) yes 3) yes 4) yes 3)
=1 >1 KTY84 no yes 1) - - yes 3) 2)
>1 =1 KTY84 no yes 3) yes 3) yes 4) yes 2)

1) Alarm or fault are triggered on violation of the PTC thermistor temperature or on a

cable break (not a cable short circuit).
2) Fault is only triggered on cable break or cable short-circuit.
3) Fault or alarm on violation of the temperature limit..
4) Fault is only triggered on cable short-circuit.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-71
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

6.4.1 Drive setting according to process-related boundary conditions

In order to support start-up, process-related characteristics can be
entered in P114. In a subsequent automatic parameterization
(P115 = 1) or motor identification (P115 = 2, 3) and controller
optimization (P115 = 3, 5), parameter adjustments are made in the
closed-loop control which are advantageous for the selected case, as
experience has shown.
The parameter adjustments can be taken from the following table. The
table clearly shows which parameters have a decisive influence on the
closed-loop control. The values themselves are understood to be
qualitative values and can be further adjusted according to the process-
related requirements.
If the type of process-related boundary conditions is not evident in the
current case (e.g. high smooth running characteristics at low speeds
with simultaneously fast acceleration processes), the parameter
settings can also be combined (manually). In any case, it is always
sensible to perform start-up with the standard setting in order to then
set the indicated parameters one after the other.
The settings of P114 = 2...4 are only possible if no gearless conditions
are present

P114 = 0: Standard drive (e.g. pumps, fans)

1: Torsion, gear play and large moments of inertia
(e.g. paper machines)
2: Acceleration drives with constant inertia
(e.g. shears)
3: High load surge requirements
(in the case of f-control only possible from approx.
20%fmot,n)
4: High smooth running characteristics at low speeds
(in the case of n-control; with a high encoder pulse
number)
5: Efficiency optimization at partial load by flux reduction
(low dynamic loading drives)
6: High start-up torque (heavy-duty start-up)
7: Dynamic torque response in the field-weakening range
(e.g. motor test beds)

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-72 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

Only deviations from the standard setting (P114 = 0) are indicated:

P114 = 0 P114 = 1 P114 = 2 P114 = 3 P114 = 4 P114 = 5 P114 = 6 P114 = 7

P216=Smooth n/f(FWD) 0ms (n-ctrl.) 4.8ms

4ms (f-ctrl.) (n-ctrl.)
P217=Slip Fail Corr'n. 0=off 2=on (n-ctrl) 2=on
P223=Smooth n/f(act) 4ms (n-ctrl.) 100ms
0ms (f-ctrl.)
P235=n/f-Reg Gain1 3.0 or 5.0 12.0 (n-ctrl.)
P236=n/f-Reg Gain2 3.0 or 5.0 12.0 (n-ctrl.)
P273=Smooth Isq(set) 6*P357 (T0) 3*P357
P240=n/f-Reg Tn 400ms 40ms (n-ctrl.)
P279=Torque (dynamic) 20.0% 80% (f-ctrl.) 0
P287=Smooth Vd(act) 9 0 0
P291=FSetp Flux(set) 100% 110%
P295=Efficiency Optim. 100%=off 99.9% 50%
P303=Smooth Flux(set) 10-20ms 60ms 100 (n-ctrl.)
500 (f-ctrl.)
P315=EMF Reg Gain Gain(n) 1.5*Gain(n) 1.5*Gain(n)
(f-ctrl.) (f-ctrl.)
P339=ModSystRelease 0=All syst 3=only RZM 3=only RZM 3=only RZM 3=only RZM 3=only RZM
P344=ModDepthHeadrm 0.0% 3.0% 3.0% 30.0%
P536=n/f RegDyn(set) 50% 20% 100 (n-ctrl.) 200 (n-ctrl.) 200 (n-ctrl.) 25% 100 (n-ctrl.) 100% (n-ctrl.)
50% (f-ctrl.) 100 (f-ctrl.) 50% (f-ctrl.) 50% (f-ctrl.)

RZM = Space vector modulation

The gain Kp of the speed controller (P235, P236) depends on the

inertia of the drive and has to be adapted if necessary.

Symmetrical optimum: P235 = 2 x P116 / P240

Kp = 2 x Tstart-up / Tn

The start-up time is the time taken by the drive to accelerate to rated
speed when the rated torque is specified. This is determined during
automatic speed controller optimization.
Notes for the setting of parameters
The following explanations provide additional information to that
contained in the respective parameter descriptions.
With P114 = 0, automatic parameterization is set for reliable operation
of all application examples with average dynamic performance. The
relevant parameter values are indicated in the first column of the table.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-73
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

P216 = Smooth n/f (FWD):

Smoothing for the pre-control speed is only used with n/T closed-loop
control if gearlessness results in steps in the speed signal. The time
constant should not be greater than approx. 10 ms because the control
could become unstable in such a case.
P217 = Slip fail corr'n:
The slip failure correction compensates for runtime effects of the digital
closed-loop controls. In doing so, the speed signal is differentiated. A
"clean" encoder signal is a prerequisite for its activation to make sure
that no vibrations are induced.
P223 = Smooth n/f(act):
Whenever signal ripples of the speed actual-value for n/f control cause
a rise in the speed control circuit (also in conjunction with mechanical
resonances), smoothing P223 should be increased.
It is particularly necessary in the case of gearlessness and torsion to
adjust the smoothing (if need be up to approx. 400 ms). At the same
time, the integral-action time of the speed controller must be increased.
The gain Kp has to be increased in order to reduce the setting times
again.
P235, P236 = n/f-Reg Gain1,2:
The gain of the speed controller is set at high default values for n/T
control in order to improve the smooth running characteristics. This is
not purposeful in the case of f-control because the controller no longer
operates at low speeds.
As the gain is dependent on the inertia of the drive, an automatic
controller optimization should be carried out, if possible. A "clean"
encoder signal is required for fast response values. The number of
pulse encoder pulses should be above 2000 for speeds below 10 rpm.
P240 = n/f-Reg. Tn:
The integral-action time of the speed controller is written to values for
200 % dynamic response for n/T control. The value increases with the
4-fold value of P223.
P273 = Smooth Isq (set):
This smoothing can be reduced for dynamic current build-up in the
field-weakening area. For this it is necessary to have sufficient
modulation depth headroom (P344 = ModDepth Headrm), which
generally requires a mains voltage or DC link voltage increased to the
rated motor voltage.
Increasing P273 reduces overshoot of the actual current value in the
event of sudden increases in torque with inadequate voltage reserves.
P279 = Torque (dynamic):
For a heavy-duty start, the dynamic torque is written at 80%T(mot,n) for
f-control. As a result of this, the current amount (preset by P278
Torque(static) in the low-speed range (i model) when the ramp-function
generator is active. The total torque from P278 and P279 must be at
least 10 % higher than the greatest occurring load torque in order to
prevent the drive from stalling.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-74 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Parameterizing Steps

P287 = SmoothDCBusVolts(act):
The Vd correction is set more dynamically by reducing the smoothing
time, in order to ensure correct precontrol of the current controller if
there are rapid changes in the DC link bus voltage. As smoothing is
automatically increased in the range of optimized pulse patterns, it is
sensible for the pulse-edge modulation (P339 = 3) to be disabled in this
context.
P291 = FSetp Flux (set):
Flux setpoint in the basic speed range. A load-dependent flux boost to
110 % may be appropriate for efficiency optimization. For this, P295
must be set to values below 100 %.
P295 = Efficiency Optim:
Drives which are continuously operated in the partial load range (below
30 % load) can be improved in their efficiency by a load-dependent flux
reduction (to a minimum of 50 %). The flux build-up and reduction is
smoothed via P303. The dynamic performance of the speed controller
has to be reduced.
If flux tracking is powered up (99.9 %), the differentiation of the flux
setpoint for forming the field-generating current component is switched
off. This enables a calmer controller response to be achieved in the
field weakening range for slow acceleration and deceleration times
without negatively influencing flux build-up und reduction. For fast
acceleration, the field-generating current is reduced, but flux build-up
and reduction are slowed down.
A further reduction of the value does not then make sense. The flux
setpoint smoothing time constant P303 does not have to be increased
as it does for load-dependent flux reduction.
P303 = Smooth Flux (set):
Smoothing of the flux setpoint must be switched on during load-
dependent flux reduction in order to rule out the risk of unstable control
performance.
In the field weakening range, the flux setpoint may have to be
smoothed for the sake of a calmer control performance.
P315 = cEMF Reg Gain:
The EMF controller is responsible for generating the speed actual-value
during frequency control. For dynamic closed-loop control, the EMF
controller must therefore also be set more dynamically. In general,
high-response drives without an encoder should only be used if the
operating speeds are higher than approx. 20 %.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 6-75
Parameterizing Steps 10.2004

P339 = ModSystemRelease:
During complete pulse-edge modulation system release (P339 = 0) the
modulation depth is raised to a maximum of 96 % (Uoff = Uon). For
this, a switchover of the modulation systems in the gating unit is
necessary (optimized pulse pattern = flange-edge modulation).As the
sampling rate of current control decreases in this range while, on the
other hand, the torque ripple increases slightly, pulse-edge modulation
has to be disabled for highly dynamic and very sensitive systems
(P339 = 3).
If space vector modulation is overmodulated (P339 = 4), the maximum
modulation depth P342 must be restricted to approx. 90 %.
P344 = ModDepth Headrm
The modulation depth headroom increases the interval between the
setpoint voltage and the maximum voltage in the field weakening area
in a steady-state (not dynamic) manner. The modulation depth
headroom prevents a switchover of the current controller dynamic
response when it reaches the voltage limit.
P348 = Dead Time Comp
To reduce the torque ripple (with 6-fold stator frequency) in the speed
range from approx. 10 Hz, it may be appropriate in the case of motors
above approx. 11 kW to switch in the deadtime compensation of the
gating unit. Software with at least version 3.1 and a CUVC controller
module with a version higher than C are necessary in this case.
P536 = n/f RegDyn(set):
Dynamic response of the speed control circuit only affects the setting of
the speed controller during automatic controller optimization (P115 = 5).
A dynamic value of 200 % corresponds to the symmetrical optimum.
This cannot be achieved on geared drives or with load-dependent flux
reduction.
The dynamic response must, however, be increased in case of load
surges and for requirements on the smooth running characteristics (and
maybe in the case of rapid accelerations).

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

6-76 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Functions 10.2004

7.2 Converter functions

7.2.1 Automatic restart (WEA)
Description The automatic restart function (WEA) can be used for automatic fault
acknowledgement and for automatic restart of the unit after a power
failure has occurred (F006 "DC link overvoltage" and F008 "DC link
undervoltage") as well as to permanently activate the "Flying restart"
function, without the need for the operating personnel to intervene.
Please refer to the "Faults and Alarms" chapter regarding the fault
messages F006 "DC link overvoltage" and F008 "DC link
undervoltage".
Parameters for P373.M WEA
setting the Value range: 0 to 13
automatic restart P373 = 0 WEA is inhibited.
function (WEA)
P373 = 1 Only reset after power has been restored after power failure.
The fault message F008 "DC link undervoltage" (power failure) is
acknowledged if this did not occur for an OFF or JOG command or for
motor data identification MOTID.
The automatic restart function does not automatically switch on the
converter.
P373 = 2 Restarting the drive after restoration of power.
The fault message F008 "DC link undervoltage" (power failure) is
acknowledged if this did not occur for an OFF or JOG command or for
motor data identification MOTID.
Once fault reset has occurred, the unit has to wait in the "Switch-on
inhibit" status (008) for the wait time (P374) to elapse before the WEA
function automatically restarts the unit.
If the flying restart function has been activated via the control word bit
23, the wait time (P374) is ignored.
The unit is only restarted if the ON command (control word bit 0) is still
present once the power has been restored.
Therefore, the automatic restart function is not possible with a
parameterized ON command (control word bit 0) via PMU or OP1S!
P373 = 3 The drive is always powered up with automatic flying restart
As in the case of P373 = 2, however, the flying restart function is
always activated irrespective of the control word bit 23.
The wait time (P374) is ignored.
Flying restart is activated every time the unit is switched on, even if no
power failure has occurred beforehand!
A description of the additionally necessary settings for the flying restart
function is contained in the "Flying restart" section.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

7-6 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Functions

P373 = 4 to 10 reserved
P373 = 11,12,13 Function as for P373 = 1, 2, 3, but the fault F006
"DC link overvoltage" is reset.
P374.M WEA wait time
Value range 0 s to 650 s
Wait time between recovery of power and restart of the converter when
the automatic restart function is activated.
The wait time is not effective if P373 = 3, 13 or if control word bit 23 is
set.
Alarm A065 (Auto The alarm is set after a power failure when automatic restart is active,
restart active) and is reset after switch-on of the unit and completion of precharging.
When the unit is restarted by the automatic restart function, the
precharging time is not monitored, with the result that fault F002
"DC link precharging" cannot occur.
The unit can also be manually shut down during this switch-on phase
by an OFF command (see Chapter "Faults and Alarms").
Special cases ♦ If the unit has an external aux. power supply, a fault is
acknowledged and the unit is restarted dependent on parameter
P373 even though there is still a power failure!
The alarm A065 "Auto restart active" is continuously present until
power has been restored!
♦ If other faults have occurred at the same time as fault message
F008 "DC link undervoltage" (power failure), these are also
acknowledged dependent on parameter P373!
♦ If the "Kinetic buffering" function is also activated, when the power
fails, this is first executed before fault trip F008 occurs and before
automatic restart intervenes.

WARNING During power failures and activated automatic restart function

(P373 = 2, 3, 12, 13), the unit can automatically restart when power is
restored and after expiry of the wait time P374 (does not apply if the
flying restart function is activated).
For this reason, the drive could be at a standstill for a long period of
time and could be accidentally mistaken for being switched off.
If the drive area is approached when the drive is in this status, death or
severe bodily injury or material damage could occur.

NOTICE If the flying restart function is not activated and P373 = 2, overload trip
F011 could occur or the motor could be suddenly braked when the unit
is restarted and the motor is still rotating!
Thus, the wait time P374 must be selected high enough to ensure that
the motor comes to a standstill before the switch-on command!

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 7-7
Functions 10.2004

7.2.2 Kinetic buffering (KIB) (function diagram 600)

Description The kinetic buffering function allows brief power failures to be buffered
by utilizing the kinetic energy (i.e. inertia) of the connected load.
In this case, the frequency is controlled (closed-loop) so that the system
losses are covered by a regenerative motor operation.
Function diagram 600 shows how kinetic buffering operates.
As the losses remain during the power failure, the converter output
frequency has to be lower. The thus reduced speed must be taken into
account.
When the supply returns, power is fed in from the supply and the
converter output frequency returns to the selected reference frequency
via a ramp-function generator function.
As long as the KIP function is switched in, the message "KIB active"
is set by status word bit 15.
Parameters for P517.M KIB FLR
setting the KIB Value range 0 to 3
function 0 Kinetic buffering is not released.
1 Kinetic buffering is released.
2, 3 Flexible response is released.
P518.M KIB initiation points
Value range 65 % to 115 %
This parameter enables the KIB switch-in threshold to be set between
65 % and 115 %.
The switch-out threshold lies 5 % above the switch-in threshold
(see chapter "Function diagrams").
For frequency / speed / torque control (P100 = 3, 4, 5), the drive is
tripped with fault message F008 "DC link undervoltage" if:
♦ 61 % Vd rated is fallen short of
♦ or 10 % of the rated motor frequency (P107) is fallen short of
♦ or only for frequency control (P100 = 3): the control mode changes
into the "current model" range
(B0253 from 1 "EMF model" to 0 "Current model")

NOTE For kinetic buffering, values for P518 > 90 % only make sense if an
Active Front End (AFE) is used as the rectifier/regenerative unit.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

7-8 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Functions

P519.M Dynamic response of the KIB controllers

Value range 0 % to 200 %
This parameter enables the response of the PID controller to be
influenced.
The factory setting is 25 %. At 0 % the KIB function is switched off.
The controller output can be visualized via connector K0270 or K0271.

Power failure
Ud

Vrated = P071
Vdrated 100 %

UdKIB OFF

5%
VdKIB ON P518

Power returns
61 %
Fault message F008
(DC link undervoltage)

KIB "ON" KIB "OFF" t

Fig. 7-2 Switch-in/switch-out threshold

Vd KIB ON = P518 × Vd rated

Presetting: P518 = 76 %
Vd KIB OFF = (P518 + 5 % ) × Vd rated
Presetting: at P518 = 76 % → 81 %
Vd rated = 1.315 × P071
Parameters P520, P521 and P522 may only be adjusted by the service
personnel.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 7-9
Functions 10.2004

7.2.3 Flexible response (FLR) (function diagram 605)

Description With this function, the unit can continue to be operated during supply
dips up to a minimum DC link voltage of 50 % of the rated value. The
maximum converter output is decreased according to the current supply
voltage during a voltage dip. If the "Flexible response" function is
enabled, the modulation depth is limited to the range of asynchronous
space vector modulation (reduction of the max. output voltage).
Function diagram 605 shows how the flexible response function
operates.

NOTE The maximum modulation depth can be taken from parameter r345.
The maximum output voltage at the current operating point can be read
off at parameter r346.

The message "FLR active" is set via the status word bit 15 as long as
the FLR function is active.
Preconditions A line commutating reactor of 4 % must be provided.
The power supply of the electronics must be ensured by an external
24 V supply at connector -X9 (see description of unit).
Thus, if an external main contactor is present, care must be taken to
ensure that it does not drop out during a voltage dip.
When the power returns, it is not permissible that the voltage increases
50 % to 100 % of its rated value in less than 5 ms.
A maximum of 10 dips per hour are permitted to occur, with a minimum
of 10 seconds time between them.

WARNING Non-observance of the above can result in malfunctions or in

destruction of the unit.

During a supply voltage dip, the available output of an induction motor

is reduced
♦ approximately linear for operation with vector control,
♦ over-proportionally for operation with one of the V/f operating modes
(P100 = 0, 1, 2)

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

7-10 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Functions

Parameters for P517.M KIB/FLR

setting the flexible Value range 0 to 3
response function 0: Flexible response is disabled.
1: Kinetic buffering is released.
2: Flexible response is released with v/f = const.
3: Flexible response is released with f = const. (only for v/f
characteristic mode P100 = 0, 1, 2).

P518.M FLR switch-in points

Value range 65 % to 115 %
This parameter enables the FLR switch-in threshold to be set between
65 % and 115 %.
The switch-out threshold is 5 % above the respective switch-in
threshold (see chapter "Function diagrams").

NOTE For flexible response, values for P518 > 90 % are not practical as
otherwise the function may not be able to be switched out. If an Active
Front End (AFE) is used as a rectifier/regenerative unit, the FLR
function is automatically contained in the AFE.

P519.M Dynamic response of FLR

Value range 0 % to 200 %
This parameter enables the response of the PID controller to be
changed.
The FLR controller is only released for v/f open/closed-loop control
modes (P100 = 0, 1, 2) and P517 = 2.
The controller ensures that the v/f ratio remains constant. During a
voltage dip, the output frequency of the converter and thus the speed of
the motor can be reduced.
The factory setting is 25 %.
The controller output can be visualized via connector K0270 or K0271.

P523 FLR Vdmin

Value range 50 % to 76 %
This parameter enables the voltage threshold for fault message F008
(DC link undervoltage) to be reduced from 76 % (factory setting) down
to 50 % (see chapter "Function diagrams").

P602 Excitation time

Value range 0.01 s to 10.00 s
If field weakening is achieved during a voltage dip, the output voltage is
ramped-up which corresponds to twice the excitation time in the V/f
control modes (P100 = 0, 1, 2) when the power returns. The excitation
time is calculated during automatic parameterization (P115 = 1) and
motor data identification (P115 = 2, 3).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 7-11
Functions 10.2004

Vd
200 ms

Vdrated 100 %

UdFLR OFF
VdFLR ON P518 5%

Vdmin P523
Fault message F008
(DC link undervoltage)

FLR "ON" FLR "OFF" t

Fig. 7-3 Flexible response

Vd FLR ON = P518 × Vd rated

Presetting: P518 = 76 %
Vd FLR OFF = (P518 + 5 %) × Vd rated
Presetting: at P518 = 76 % → 81 %
VdFLR min = P523 × Vd rated

Vd rated = 1.315 × P071

ParametersP520, P521 and P522 may only be adjusted by the service
personnel.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

7-12 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Functions

7.2.4 Vdmax closed-loop control (function diagram 610)

Description The Vdmax closed-loop control function allows briefly occurring
regenerative loading to be handled without the unit shutting down with
fault message F006 "DC link overvoltage". In this case, the frequency is
controlled (closed-loop) so that the motor does not excessively enter
over-synchronous operation.
For a steady-state load, the converter output frequency must increase.
If a regenerative load exists for too long, the unit is shut down with
F006 when the maximum frequency is reached (452, P453).
If regenerative loading occurs when the machine is decelerating too
quickly (P464), this is automatically reduced so that the converter is
operated at the voltage limit.
Function diagram 610 shows how the Vdmax closed-loop control
function operates.
The Vdmax closed-loop control is also optimally suited for regenerative
operation, which can occur when the speed stabilizes at the end of
ramp-up.
Parameters for P515.M Vdmax controller
setting the Vdmax Value range 0 and 1
closed-loop control 0: The Vdmax controller is inhibited.
1: The Vdmax controller is released.

P516.M Dynamic response of the Vdmax controller

Value range 0 % to 200 %
This parameter enables the response of the PID controller to be
influenced.
At 0 %, the Vdmax controller is shut down.
The factory setting is 25 %.
The controller output can be visualized via connector K0270 or K0271.

Alarm A041 "Vdmax The line voltage is too high or the converter supply voltage (P071) is
controller inhibit" incorrectly parameterized. The Vdmax controller is inhibited despite the
parameter enable (P515 = 1), as otherwise the motor would
immediately accelerate in operation to the maximum frequency.
The switch-in threshold for disabling the Vdmax controller is calculated
as follows:
Vd Max ON = 119% × 2 × Vsup ply,rated = 168% Vsup ply,rated
Vsupply, rated = P071 for AC/AC converters and
P071
Vsupply, rated = for DC/AC converters
1,315
Parameters P520, P521 and P522 may only be adjusted by the service
personnel.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 7-13
Functions 10.2004

7.2.5 DC current braking (DC brake) (function diagram 615)

Description The DC current braking function allows the drive to be brought to a
standstill in the shortest possible time. To realize this, a DC current is
impressed in the motor windings, which, for an induction motor, results
in a very high braking torque.

NOTICE The "DC current braking" function is only practical for induction motors!
With the DC current braking function, the kinetic energy of the motor is
converted into heat in the motor. The drive could overheat if it remains
in this status for an excessive period of time!

Function diagram 615 shows how the DC current braking function

operates.
Parameters for P603.M De-excitation time of the motor
setting the DC Value range 0.01 s to 10.00 s
current brake This parameter enables the minimum delay time between pulse inhibit
function and pulse enable to be set. This is to ensure that the motor is de-
magnetized to at least 90% upon pulse enable.
The parameter is preset during automatic parameterization and motor
data identification.

P395.M DC brake on/off

Value range 0 to 1
0: DC brake is not activated.
1: With the OFF3 command (quick stop), DC current braking is carried
out.

P396 DC braking current

This parameter enables the setpoint current which is impressed for DC
braking to be set. A maximum of 4 times the rated motor current can be
entered.

P397.M DC braking duration

Value range 0.1 s to 99.9 s
This parameter enables the duration of DC current braking to be set.

P398.M Frequency at which DC braking commences

Value range 0.1 Hz to 600.0 Hz
With an OFF3 command, DC current braking is commenced at this
frequency.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

7-14 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Functions

Sequence ♦ The DC brake is activated using the OFF3 command.

♦ The converter ramps along the parameterized OFF3 ramp (P466.1)
down to the start of DC braking frequency (P398). Thus, the kinetic
energy of the motor can be reduced without potentially endangering
the drive. However, if the OFF3 deceleration time (P466.1) is
selected too low, there is a potential danger that the drive could be
faulted by a DC link overvoltage (F006).
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-excitation
time (P603).
♦ The required braking current (P396) is then impressed for the set
braking duration (P397)
♦ The converter changes to the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or
READY TO SWITCH ON (009) state.

7.2.6 Flying restart (function diagram 620)

Description This function offers the possibility of connecting the converter to a
motor which is still rotating. If the motor were to be switched on without
the flying restart function, an overcurrent condition would occur, as the
flux in the motor first has to be built up and the open/closed-loop control
has to be set to the speed of the motor.

NOTE It is not possible to implement a flying restart function for multi-motor

drives as the motors have different run-down characteristics.
The following is executed, depending on whether a tachometer is
enabled.

7.2.6.1 Flying restart without tachometer (with search) (P130 = 0)

NOTE The "Flying restart without tachometer" (search) function is only

practical for induction motors!
For "Flying restart without tachometer", the "standstill test" generates a
braking torque which can cause drives with low moments of inertia to
be decelerated!

Description ♦ A standstill test (DC current is briefly impressed) is executed after

the de-excitation time (P603) has expired after the supply returns
with active WEA (see section "Automatic restart function") or since
the last shutdown time with "OFF2" command (inverter inhibit).
The standstill test can be shut down with P527.1 = 0 %.
♦ If it is identified that the motor is at standstill, excitation and
acceleration are started as for a standard start.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 7-15
Functions 10.2004

♦ If a motor standstill has not been identified, searching is started with

the maximum frequency, clockwise rotating phase sequence (P452);
if only COUNTER-CLOCKWISE phase sequence is selected (see
section "Control word"), searching starts with the maximum
frequency, clockwise rotating phase sequence (P453).
♦ The search frequency is linearly reduced down to 0 Hz, more
specifically, by the parameterizable search speed P526 (in Hz,
referred to the time interval of 1 second). In this case, the
parameterizable search current P525 is impressed.
At P100 = 3 (frequency control), the implemented search current is
limited to two times the rated magnetizing current (r119).
• P100 = 1 or 2 (V/f characteristic):
The converter reference output voltage necessary for the search
current is compared with the voltage of the V/f characteristic
corresponding to the search frequency.
If the motor frequency is found using this evaluation function, the
search frequency is kept constant and the output voltage is
changed to the voltage of the V/f characteristic with the excitation
time constant (dependent on the excitation time P602)
• P100 = 3 (Frequency control):
The converter reference output voltage necessary for the search
current is compared with the search frequency corresponding to
the EMF setpoint.
If the motor frequency is found using this evaluation function, the
search frequency is kept constant and the flux setpoint is
changed to the rated flux with the excitation time constant
(dependent on the excitation time (P602).
♦ Then the ramp-function generator is set to the search frequency.
If the ramp-function generator cannot be set as the supplementary
setpoint is too high, the converter is shut down with fault F018
"Ramp-function generator could not be set during flying restart".
Otherwise, the FLYING RESTART status (013) is exited and the
motor is operated at the actual reference frequency (via the ramp-
function generator).
♦ If the motor is not found, a standstill test at 0 Hz search frequency is
re-executed and a search started in the other direction of rotation,
with the rotating field enabled. If this search is also unsuccessful,
switch-in is with 0 Hz.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

7-16 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.2004 Functions

fMAX (RDF)
P452
Ref.
frequency

Acceleration
Search
P525,P526
t
Excitation

Standstill test
De-excitation time
P603 (conditional)

Fig. 7-4 Flying restart

7.2.6.2 Flying restart with tachometer (P130 <> 0)

Description ♦ After the de-excitation time (P603) has expired, afte the supply
returns with activated WEA (see section "Automatic restart function)
or since the last switch-off instant with "OFF2" command (Inverter
inhibit), then:
• For V/f control. the converter output voltage is increased linearly
from 0 to the V/f characteristic value (determined from the
measured smooth speed actual value within the excitation time
(P602).
• For vector control, the necessary magnetizing current is built up
within the excitation time (P602).
♦ After the excitation time P602 has expired, the ramp-function
generator is set to the smoothed speed actual value.
If it is not possible to set the ramp-function generator, because the
supplementary setpoint is too high, the converter is shut down with
fault F018 "Ramp-function generator could not be set during flying
restart".
♦ Otherwise, the status FLYING RESTART (013) is exited and the
motor is operated at the current reference frequency (via the ramp-
function generator).
♦ For torque control (P100 = 5) or slave drive (see P587), the motor is
operated at the current torque setpoint.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 7-17
Functions 10.2004

7.2.6.3 Parameters for setting the flying restart function

P583.B Flying restart enable

Value range 0 to 1
0: Flying restart is not enabled.
1: Flying restart is enabled with every ON command.
Exception: P373 = 3 or 13
The functions Automatic restart and flying restart (without taking into
account the control word command "Flying restart enable" (bit 23)) are
always activated.
Only for flying restart without tachometer (with search) (P130 = 0):
P525.M Flying restart search current
For V/f characteristic max. 4 times the rated motor current
For frequency control max. 2 times the magnetizing
current (r119)
is implemented.
Setpoint of the impressed current when searching for the motor
Presetting via automatic parameterization.

P526.M Flying restart search speed

Value range 0.1 Hz to 100.0 Hz
Ramp gradient with which the frequency is changed when searching
(in Hz, referred to 1 second).
The message "Flying restart active" is set via status word bit 16 as
long as the flying restart function is active.

WARNING With the "Flying restart without tachometer" function (P373 = 3 with
WEA or control word bit 23), the drive may suddenly accelerate as a
result of the search current in spite of the fact that the drive is at a
standstill and a 0 Hz setpoint!
Death, severe bodily injury or material damage can occur if the drive
area is entered.

Standstill Standstill identification can be optimized with P527 (r524) (only for
identification service personnel). The standstill test can be deactivated with
P527.1 = 0 % when the "flying restart without tachometer" function is
active.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

7-18 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2003 Control Word and Status Word

9 Control Word and Status Word

9.1 Description of the control word bits

The operating statuses can be read in visualization parameter r001:
e.g. READY TO POWER-UP: r001 = 009
The function sequences are described in the sequence in which they
are actually realized.
Function diagrams 180 and 190 refer to further function diagrams in the
Compendium.

Bit 0: ON/OFF 1 command (↑ "ON") / (L "OFF1")

Condition Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO

POWER-UP condition (009).
Result ♦ PRECHARGING (010)
Main contactor (option)/bypass contactor, if available, are switched-
in (closed).
The DC link is pre-charged.
♦ READY (011)
If the drive was last powered-down with "OFF2", the next condition
is only selected after the de-energization time (P603) has expired
since the last shutdown
♦ GROUND FAULT TEST (012), only when the ground fault test has
been selected (P375).
♦ RESTART ON THE FLY (013), if restart on the fly (control word bit
23 via P583) has been enabled.
♦ RUN (014).
Condition LOW signal and P100 = 3, 4 (closed-loop frequency/speed control)
Result ♦ OFF1 (015), if the drive is in a status where the inverter is enabled.
• For P100 = 3, 4 and slave drive, the system waits until the
higher-level open-loop/closed-loop control shuts down the drive.
• For P100 = 3, 4 and master drive, the setpoint at the ramp-
function generator input is inhibited (setpoint = 0), so that the
drive decelerates along the parameterized down ramp (P464) to
the OFF shutdown frequency (P800).
After the OFF delay time (P801) has expired, the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main contactor (option/bypass contactor), if
available, are opened.
If the OFF1 command is withdrawn again when the drive is ramping-
down, (e.g. as the result of an ON command), ramp-down is
interrupted, and the drive goes back into the RUN (014) condition.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 9-1
Control Word and Status Word 05.2003

♦ For PRECHARGING (010), READY (011), RESTART-ON-THE-FLY

(013) or MOT-ID-STANDSTILL (018), the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main contactor (option)/bypass contactor, if
available, is opened.
♦ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008); compare status word 1, bit 6
♦ READY-TO-POWER-UP (009), if "OFF2" or "OFF3" are not present.
Condition Low signal and P100 = 5 (closed-loop torque control)
Result ♦ An OFF2 command (electrical) is executed.

Bit 1: OFF2 command (L "OFF2") electrical

Condition LOW signal

Result ♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited, and the main contactor
(option)/bypass contactor, if available, are opened.
♦ POWER-ON INHIBIT (008), until the command is removed.

NOTE The OFF2 command is simultaneously connected from three sources

(P555, P556 and P557)!

Bit 2: OFF3 command (L "OFF3") (fast stop)

Condition LOW signal

Result ♦ This command has two possible effects:
• DC braking is enabled (P395 = 1):
DC BRAKING (017)
The drive decelerates along the parameterized downramp for
OFF3 (P466) until the frequency for the start of DC braking is
reached (P398).
The inverter pulses are then inhibited for the duration of the de-
energization time (P603).
After this, the drive DC brakes with an adjustable braking current
(P396) for a braking time which can be parameterized (P397).
The inverter pulses are then inhibited and the main contactor
(option)/bypass contactor, if available, is opened.
• DC braking is not enabled (P395 = 0):
The setpoint is inhibited at the ramp-function generator input
(setpoint = 0), so that the drive decelerates along the
parameterized downramp for OFF3 (P466) to the OFF shutdown
frequency (P800).
The inverter pulses are inhibited after the OFF delay time (P801)
has expired, and the main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened. If
the OFF3 command is withdrawn while the drive is decelerating,
the drive still continues to accelerate.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

9-2 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2003 Control Word and Status Word

♦ For PRE-CHARGING (010), READY (011), RESTART-ON-THE-

FLY (013) or MOT-ID STANDSTILL (018), the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened.
♦ If the drive operates as slave drive, when an OFF3 command is
issued, it automatically switches-over to the master drive.
♦ POWER-ON inhibit (008), until the command is withdrawn.

NOTE The OFF3 command is simultaneously effective from three sources

(P558, P559 and P560)!
Priority of the OFF commands: OFF2 > OFF3 > OFF1

Bit 3: Inverter enable command (H "inverter enable")/(L "inverter inhibit")

Condition HIGH signal, READY (011) and the de-energization time (P603) has
expired since the last time that the drive was shutdown.
Result ♦ RUN (014)
The inverter pulses are enabled and the setpoint is approached via
the ramp-function generator.
Condition LOW signal
Result ♦ For RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), RUN (014), KINETIC
BUFFERING with pulse enable, OPTIMIZATION OF THE SPEED
CONTROLLER CIRCUIT (019) or SYNCHRONIZATION (020):
♦ The drive changes over into the READY (011), condition, and the
inverter pulses are inhibited.
♦ If OFF1 is active (015), the inverter pulses are inhibited, the
main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened, and the drive goes into
the POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) condition.
♦ If OFF3 is active (016 / fast stop), the inverter inhibit command is
ignored, fast stop is continued and, after shutdown (P800, P801),
the inverter pulses are inhibited.

Bit 4: Ramp-function generator inhibit command (L "RFG inhibit")

Condition LOW signal in the RUN (014) condition.

Result ♦ The ramp-function generator output is set to setpoint = 0.

Bit 5: Ramp-function generator hold command (L "RFG hold")

Condition LOW signal in the RUN (014) condition.

Result ♦ The actual setpoint is "frozen at the ramp-function generator output".

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 9-3
Control Word and Status Word 05.2003

Bit 6: Setpoint enable command (H "setpoint enable")

Condition HIGH signal and the de-energization time have expired (P602).
Result ♦ The setpoint at the ramp-function generator input is enabled.

Bit 7: Acknowledge command (↑ "Acknowledge")

Condition Rising (positive) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the FAULT

condition (007).
Result ♦ All of the current faults are deleted after they have been previously
transferred into the diagnostics memory.
♦ POWER-ON INHIBIT (008), if no actual faults are present.
♦ FAULT (007), if there are no faults.

NOTE The Acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from the three

sources (P565, P566 and P567) and always from the PMU!

Bit 8: Inching 1 ON command (↑ "Inching 1 ON") / (L "Inching 1 OFF")

Condition Positive (rising) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO

POWER-UP (009) condition.
Result ♦ An ON command is automatically executed (refer to control word bit
0), and inching frequency 1 (P448) is enabled in the setpoint
channel.
The ON/OFF1 command (bit 0) is ignored for active inching
operation!
The system must wait until the de-energization time (P603) has
expired
Condition LOW signal
Result ♦ An OFF1 command is automatically executed (refer to control word
bit 0).

Bit 9: Inching 2 ON command (↑ "Inching 2 ON") / (L "Inching 2 OFF")

Condition Rising (positive) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO

POWER-UP (009) condition.
Result ♦ An ON command is automatically executed (refer to control board
bit 0), and inching frequency 2 (P449) is enabled in the setpoint
channel.
The ON/OFF1 command (bit 0) is ignored if inching is active.
The system must wait until the de-energization time (P603) has
expired.
Condition LOW signal
Result ♦ An OFF1 command is automatically executed (refer to control word
bit 0).

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

9-4 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2003 Control Word and Status Word

Bit 10: Control from the PLC command (H "control from the PLC")

Condition HIGH signal; the process data PZD (control word, setpoints) are only
evaluated if the command has been accepted; this data is sent via the
SST1 interface of the CU, the CB/TB interface (option) and the
SST/SCB interface (option).
Result ♦ If several interfaces are used, only the process data of the interfaces
are evaluated, which send an H signal.
♦ For an L signal, the last values are received in the appropriate dual
port RAM of the interface.

NOTE An H signal appears in the visualization parameter r550

"control word 1", if one of the interfaces sends an H signal!

Bit 11: Clockwise rotating field command (H "clockwise rotating field")

Condition HIGH signal

Result ♦ The setpoint is influenced in conjunction with bit 12 "counter-
clockwise rotating field".

Bit 12: Counter-clockwise rotating field command (H "counter-clockwise rotating field")

Condition HIGH signal

Result ♦ The setpoint is influenced in conjunction with bit 11 "clockwise-
rotating field".

NOTE The counter-clockwise rotating field and the clockwise rotating

field command have no influence on supplementary setpoint 2, which
is added after the ramp-function generator (RFG)!

Bit 13: Command to raise the motorized potentiometer (H "raise motorized

potentiometer")

Condition HIGH signal

Result ♦ The motorized potentiometer in the setpoint channel is driven in
conjunction with bit 14 "motorized potentiometer, lower".

Bit 14: Command to lower the motorized potentiometer (H "lower motorized

potentiometer")

Condition HIGH signal

Result ♦ The motorized potentiometer in the setpoint channel is driven in
conjunction with bit 13 "raise motorized potentiometer".

Bit 15: Command external fault 1 (L "External fault 1")

Condition LOW signal

Result ♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F035).
The inverter pulses are inhibited, the main contactor/bypass
contactor, if used, is opened.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 9-5
Control Word and Status Word 05.2003

Bit 16: Function data set FDS bit 0 command

Result ♦ In conjunction with bit 17 "FDS BIT 1" one of the four possible
function data sets is energized.

Bit 17: Function data set FDS bit 1 command

Result ♦ In conjunction with bit 16 "FDS BIT 0" one of the four possible
function data sets is energized.

Bit 18: Motor data set, MDS bit 0 command

Condition READY TO POWER-UP (009), PRE-CHARGING (010) or

READY (011)
Result ♦ One of the four possible motor data sets is energized in conjunction
with bit 19 "MDS BIT 1".

Bit 19: Motor data set, MDS bit 1 command

Condition READY TO POWER-UP (009), PRE-CHARGING (010) or

READY (011)
Result ♦ One of the four possible motor data sets is energized in conjunction
with bit 18 "MDS BIT 0".

Bit 20: Fixed setpoint FSW bit 0 (LSB) command

Result ♦ In conjunction with bit 21 "FSW BIT 1", one of the four possible fixed
setpoints is energized to input as percentage fixed setpoints,
referred to the reference frequency P352 or reference speed P353.

Bit 21: Fixed setpoint FSW bit 1 (MSB) command

Result ♦ In conjunction with bit 20 "FSW BIT 0" one of the four possible fixed
setpoints is energized for input as percentage fixed setpoints,
referred to the reference frequency P352 or the reference speed
P353.

Bit 22: Synchronizing enable command (H "synchronizing enable")

Condition ♦ For converter sychronization (P534 = 1):

HIGH signal, TSY (option) available and P100 = 2 (V/f
characteristic for textile applications).
♦ For line synchronization (P534 = 2):
HIGH signal, TSY (option) P100 = 1, 2 or 3
Result ♦ The command enables the synchronizing function.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

9-6 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2003 Control Word and Status Word

Bit 23: Restart-on-the-fly enable command (H "restart-on-the-fly enable")

Condition HIGH signal

Result ♦ The command enables the restart-on-the-fly function.

Bit 24: Droop/technology controller enable command (H "droop/technology controller

enable")

Condition HIGH signal

Result ♦ The command enables the droop function, if P100 (open-
loop/closed-loop control type) is assigned 3 (closed-loop frequency
control) or 4 (closed-loop speed control), parameter P246 <> 0 and
the inverted pulses of the drive converter are enabled.
The speed/frequency controller output, fed back as negative signal
to the speed/frequency setpoint, can be set via parameter P245
(source steady-state) and P246 (scaling steady-state)

Bit 25: Controller enable command (H "controller enable")

Condition HIGH signal and the drive converter inverter pulses are enabled.
Result ♦ The speed controller output is enabled for the appropriate control
type (P100 = 0,4,5).

Bit 26: Command, external fault 2 (L "External fault 2")

Condition LOW signal; it is only activated from the READY (011) condition
onwards and after an additional time delay of 200 ms.
Result ♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F036).
The inverter pulses are inhibited, the main contactor, if available, is
opened.

Bit 27: Slave/master drive command (H "Slave drive")/(L "Master drive")

Condition HIGH signal, P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) = 3, 4 (closed-

loop frequency/speed control), and the drive inverter pulses are
enabled.
Result ♦ Slave drive: The closed-loop control acts as closed-loop torque
control (M closed-loop control). With f closed-loop control, precise
torque control is not possible until from about 10 % of motor rated
speed onwards.
Condition LOW signal, P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) = 3, 4 (closed-
loop frequency/speed control), and the drive converter inverter pulses
are enabled.
Result ♦ Master drive: The closed-loop control operates as closed-loop
speed or frequency control (closed-loop frequency/speed control).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 9-7
Control Word and Status Word 05.2003

Bit 28: Command, external alarm 1 (L "External alarm 1")

Condition LOW signal

Result ♦ The operating status is maintained. An alarm message is issued
(A015).

Bit 29: Command, external alarm 2 (L "External alarm 2")

Condition LOW signal

Result ♦ The operating status is maintained. An alarm message is issued
(A016).

Bit 30: Select, BICO data sets (H "data set 2") / (L "data set 1")

Condition HIGH signal

Result ♦ The parameter settings of data set 2 for all binector and connector
commands and signals, are activated.
Condition LOW signal
Result ♦ The parameter settings of data set 1 for all binector and connector
commands and signals, are activated.

Bit 31: Main contactor checkback signal command (H "main contactor checkback
signal")

Condition HIGH signal, corresponding to the wiring and parameterization of the

main contactor (option). The checkback time can be set in P600.
Result ♦ Checkback signal, "main contactor energized" (closed).

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

9-8 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2003 Control Word and Status Word

9.2 Description of the status word bits

Bit 0: Message, "Ready to power-up" (H)

HIGH signal POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO POWER-UP (009) status

Significance ♦ The power supply, the open- and closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited.
♦ If an external power supply and a main contactor (option)/bypass
contactor are available, it is possible to bring the DC link into a no-
voltage condition, when the drive converter is in this status!

Bit 1: Message, "Ready" (H)

HIGH signal PRE-CHARGING (010) or READY (011) status

Significance ♦ The power supply, the open-loop and the closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ The unit is powered-up.
♦ Pre-charging has been completed.
♦ The DC link has been ramped-up to the full voltage.
♦ The inverter pulses are still inhibited.

Bit 2: Message, "Run" (H)

HIGH signal GROUND-FAULT TEST (012), RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), RUN

(014), OFF1 (015) or OFF3 (016) status
Significance ♦ The unit is functioning.
♦ The inverter pulses are enabled.
♦ The output terminals are live.

Bit 3: Message "Fault" (H)

HIGH signal Fault (007) status

Significance ♦ A fault has occurred.

Bit 4: Message "OFF2" (L)

LOW signal OFF2 command available

Significance ♦ The OFF2 command was output (control word bit 1).

Bit 5: Message "OFF3" (L)

LOW signal OFF3 (016) status, and/or OFF3 command available

Significance ♦ The OFF3 command was output (control word bit 2).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 9-9
Control Word and Status Word 05.2003

Bit 6: Message "Power-on inhibit" (H)

HIGH signal POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) status

Significance ♦ The power supply, open-loop and closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ If an external power supply and a main contactor (option)/bypass
contactor are available, it is possible to bring the DC link voltage in
this drive converter status into a no-voltage condition!
♦ The message is available as long as an OFF2 command is present
via control word bit 1 or an OFF3 command is available via control
word bit 2 after the setpoint has been ramped-down, or an ON
command is available via control word bit 0 (edge evaluation).

Bit 7: Message, "Alarm" (H)

HIGH signal Alarm (Axxx)

Significance ♦ An alarm has been issued.
♦ The signal is present until the cause has been resolved.

Bit 8: Message "Setpoint-actual value deviation" (L)

LOW signal Alarm, "Setpoint-actual value deviation" (A034)

Significance ♦ The frequency actual value deviates from the frequency setpoint
(reference value, by a value which exceeds P794 (setpoint-actual
value deviation, frequency), for a time which is longer than P792
(setpoint-actual value deviation time).
♦ The bit is again set as H signal, if the deviation is less than
parameter value P792.

Bit 9: Message "PZD control requested" (H)

HIGH signal Still present.

Bit 10: Message, "Comparison frequency reached" (H)

HIGH signal The parameterized comparison frequency has been reached.

Significance ♦ The absolute frequency actual value is greater than or equal to the
parameterized comparison frequency (P796).
♦ The bit is again set to L signal, as soon as the absolute value of the
comparison frequency (P796), minus the parameterized comparison
frequency hysteresis (P797 as %, referred to the comparison
frequency (P796)) is fallen below.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

9-10 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2003 Control Word and Status Word

Bit 11: Message "Undervoltage" (H)

HIGH signal "Undervoltage in the DC link"

Significance ♦ The DC link voltage has fallen below the permissible limit value.
From drive status (°011) fault message (F008) "DC link
undervoltage" is additionally output..
Refer to the Section "Fault- and alarm messages"

Bit 12: Message "Main contactor energized" (H)

HIGH signal The main contactor (AC unit)/precharging contactor (DC unit) (option) is
operated.
Significance ♦ The main contactor/precharging contactor (option) can be driven
with the appropriate wiring and parameterization.

Bit 13: Message "RFG active" (H)

HIGH signal Ramp-function generator active

Significance ♦ The ramp-function generator output (r480 / KK0073) is not equal to
the ramp-function generator input (r460 / KK0072).
A hysteresis, which can be parameterized (P476 as %, referred to
the rated system frequency P352), can only be taken into account
for an analog setpoint input.
♦ When the "Synchronizing" function is selected, alarm A069 is
initiated, as long as the ramp-function generator is active in the
setpoint channel of the synchronizing converter.
The synchronizing operation is not started as long as the ramp-
function generator is active.

Bit 14: Message, "Clockwise rotating field" (H)/ "Counter-clockwise rotating field" (L)

HIGH signal Clockwise rotating field

Significance ♦ The frequency setpoint for the closed-loop control (speed/frequency
setpoint, r482 / KK0075) is greater than or equal to 0.
LOW signal Counter-clockwise rotating field
Significance ♦ The frequency setpoint for the closed-loop control (speed/frequency
setpoint, r482 / KK0075) is less than 0.

Bit 15: Message "KIP/FLN active" (H)

HIGH signal The kinetic buffering (KIP) function or flexible response (FLN) is active.
Significance ♦ KIP: A brief power failure is bypassed using the kinetic energy of
the connected load.
♦ FLN: The converter can be operated up to a minimum DC link
voltage of 50% of the rated value.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 9-11
Control Word and Status Word 05.2003

Bit 16: Message "Restart-on-the-fly active" (H)

HIGH signal The restart-on-the-fly function is active, or the excitation time (P602) is
running.
Significance ♦ The drive converter is switched to a motor which is still rotating.
♦ Overcurrent is prevented as a result of the restart-on-the-fly
function.
♦ The excitation time (magnetization time) is active.

Bit 17: Message "Synchronism has been reached" (H)

HIGH signal Synchronism has been reached.

Significance ♦ Synchronism has been reached.
Prerequisite TSY (option) available and P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) =
2 (V/f characteristic for textile applications) or P100 = 1, 2, 3 at line
synchronism (P534 = 2).

Bit 18: Message "Overspeed" (L)

LOW signal Alarm "Overspeed" (A033)

Significance ♦ The frequency actual value is either:
♦ greater than the maximum frequency for the clockwise rotating field
(P452) plus a hysteresis (P804 as %, referred to P452) or
♦ less than the maximum frequency for the counter-clockwise rotating
field (P453) plus a hysteresis (P804 as %, referred to P453).
♦ The bit is again set to an H signal as soon as the absolute value of
the frequency actual value is less than or equal to the absolute
value of the appropriate maximum frequency.

Bit 19: Message "External fault 1" (H)

HIGH signal "External fault 1"

Significance ♦ A "External fault 1" is present in control word, bit 15.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Bit 20: Message "External fault 2" (H)

HIGH signal "External fault 2"

Significance ♦ A "External fault 2" is present in control word bit 26.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

9-12 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2003 Control Word and Status Word

Bit 21: Message "External alarm" (H)

HIGH signal "External alarm"

Significance ♦ An "external alarm 1" is present in control word bit 28, or, "external
alarm 2" in control word bit 29.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Bit 22: Message "Alarm i2t drive converter" (H)

HIGH signal Alarm "i2t alarm, inverter" (A025)

Significance ♦ If the instantaneous load status is maintained, then the drive
converter will be thermally overloaded.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Bit 23: Message "Fault, converter overtemperature" (H)

HIGH signal "Inverter temperature too high" fault (F023)

Significance ♦ The limiting inverter temperature has been exceeded.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Bit 24: Message "Alarm, converter overtemperature" (H)

HIGH signal Alarm, "inverter temperature too high" (A022)

Significance ♦ The inverter temperature threshold to release an alarm has been
exceeded.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Bit 25: Message "Alarm, motor overtemperature" (H)

HIGH signal Alarm "Motor overtemperature"

Significance ♦ It involves an "I2t alarm, motor" (A029) or an overtemperature alarm
from the KTY (P380 > 1) or PTC thermistor (P380 = 1).
♦ The alarmis initiated either by calculating the motor load (r008 /
K0244) or from the KTY84 sensor (r009 / K0245).
♦ Parameters involved in the calculation:
P380 (mot. temp. alarm), P382 (motor cooling),
P383 (mot. temp.T1), P384 (mot. load limit).
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 9-13
Control Word and Status Word 05.2003

Bit 26: Message "Fault, motor overtemperature" (H)

HIGH signal Fault, "Motor overtemperature"

Significance ♦ It involves an "I2t fault, motor" (F021) or an overtemperature fault,
from KTY (P381 > 1) or PTC thermistor (P381 = 1).
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Bit 27: Reserve

Bit 28: Message, "Fault, motor stalled/locked" (H)

HIGH signal Fault, "Motor stalled or blocked" (F015)

Significance ♦ The drive has either stalled or is locked.
Precondition ♦ Blocking recognition at P100 = 3, 4 f/n control:
setpoint/actual value deviation has occurred (bit 8), torque limit
(B0234) reached, speed < 2 % and time in P805 expired
♦ In the case of M control (P100 = 5) or slave drive (P587), blocking is
not recognized.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Bit 29: Message "Bypass contactor energized" (H)

HIGH signal The bypass contactor is energized after precharging has ended
(applies only to AC units equipped with bypass contactor).
Significance ♦ A bypass contactor (option) can be energized with the appropriate
wiring and parameterization.

Bit 30: Message "Alarm sync. error" (H)

HIGH signal Alarm, "Synchronizing error" (A070)

Significance ♦ After successful synchronization, the phase deviation is greater than
the parameterized tolerance range (P531).
Prerequisite TSY (option) available and P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) =
2 (V/f characteristic for textile applications) or P100 = 1, 2, 3 at line
synchronism (P534 = 2).
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.

Bit 31: Message "Pre-charging active" (H)

HIGH signal PRE-CHARGING (010) condition

Significance ♦ Pre-charging is realized after an ON command.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AG) Siemens AG

9-14 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
 8
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
6SE70 Vector Control

Extract from Operating Instructions

Section Topic Page

7 Connecting-up 7-1 to 7-11

12 Forming, Size Compact 12-1 to 12-2

11 Replacing Boards and Components, 11-2 to 11-15

Size Chassis Type

12 Forming, Size Chassis Type 12-1 to 12-2

03.99 Connecting-up

7 Connecting-up

WARNING SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.

The equipment must be in a no-voltage condition (disconnected from
the supply) before any work is carried out!
Only professionally trained, qualified personnel must work on or with
the units.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant property damage could occur if
these warning instructions are not observed.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the unit up to 5 minutes after it
has been powered down due to the DC link capacitors. Thus, the
appropriate delay time must be observed before working on the unit or
on the DC link terminals.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be live even when
the motor is stationary.
If the DC link voltage is supplied centrally, the converters must be
reliably isolated from the DC link voltage!
When working on an opened unit, it should be observed that live
components (at hazardous voltage levels) can be touched (shock
hazard).
The user is responsible that all the units are installed and connected-up
according to recognized regulations in that particular country as well as
other regionally valid regulations. Cable dimensioning, fusing,
grounding, shutdown, isolation and overcurrent protection should be
particularly observed.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 7-1
Connecting-up 03.99

Aux. contactor,
external DC24 V-
supply X9

DC link
connection X3
U 1 V1 W1 PE1 C D

Mains connection X1 L1 L2 L3 L+ L-

Mounting position 3
Mounting position 2
Optional board
in slot A
PMU connection X108
Mount.pos. 1 (CUVC)
X101

X102

X103
Optional board
in slot C

T1 T2 T3
Motor connection X2
Shield connection U2 V2 W2 PE2

for control cables

and tachometer cables
Cable connecting
adapter for EMC
(option)

Fig. 7-1 Connection overview of types A, B and C

6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
7-2 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Connecting-up

Aux. contactor,
external DC24 V-
supply X9
DC link
connection X3
Mains connection X1

-F101 -F102 U1 V1 W1 PE1 C D

Fan fuses
L1 L2 L3 L+ L-

Mount.pos. 1 (CUVC)
Optional board Mount. pos. 3
in slot A Mount. pos. 2
PMU connection X108
X101

X102
X103
Optional board
in slot C

T1 T2 T3

Motor connection X2
U2 V2 W2 PE2

Adjustment of
fan voltage
Shield connections for control
cables and tachometer cables
Cable connection
adapter for EMC
(Option)

Fig. 7-2 Connection overview for type D

NOTE A 230 V fan is installed in drive converters, type of construction D. The

fan is supplied via the fan transformer. To supply the fan with 230 V,
the primary side of the fan transformer must be adjusted to the existing
line voltage via the plug connector (Connection 2). (For supply voltage
range, see terminal).
Transformer terminals
Connection 2
Connection 1

X2
0V

Fan-
transformer

Fig. 7-3 Transformer location (only for converters, type of construction D)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 7-3
Connecting-up 03.99

7.1 Power connections

Protective The protective conductor must be connected up both on the mains side
conductor and on the motor side.
On account of leakage currents through the interference-suppression
capacitors, a minimum cross-section of 10 mm² must be used in
accordance with VDE 0160. If mains connections with cross-sections
less than 10 mm² are used, the following measures can be applied.
If the unit is mounted on a grounded mounting surface via a conductive
connection, the protective conductor cross-section can be the same as
that of the supply-cable conductor.
In the case of insulated installation or a poor conductive connection to
the mounting surface, a separate protective conductor with a cross-
section of 10 mm² can be connected up instead of the protective
conductor of the mains connection.
Line voltage 3 AC 200 V to 230 V
Order No. Rated Line side Motor side
input Line reactor
current cross-section Recommended fuse cross-section
6SE70... VDE AWG gR (SITOR) gL lvhrc North America VDE AWG
[A] [mm²] [A] 3NE [A] 3NA Type [V] [A] 4EP.. [mm²]
21-1CA60 10.6 2.5 14 −− −− 16 3805 AJT, LPJ 600 15 3400-1UK 1.5 16
21-3CA60 13.3 4 10 −− −− 20 3807 AJT LPJ 600 17.5 3500-0UK 1.5 16
21-8CB60 17.7 6 8 25 1815-0 25 3810 AJT, LPJ 600 25 3600-4UK 2.5 14
22-3CB60 22.9 10 6 35 1803-0 35 3814 AJT, LPJ 600 30 3600-5UK 4 10
23-2CB60 32.2 16 4 40 1802-0 50 3820 AJT, LPJ 600 40 3700-2UK 10 6
24-4CC60 44.2 25 2 50 1817-0 63 3822 AJT, LPJ 600 60 3800-2UK 16 4
25-4CD60 54 25 2 80 1820-0 80 3824 AJT, LPJ 600 70 3900-2UK 25 2
27-0CD60 69 35 0 80 1820-0 80 3824 AJT, LPJ 600 90 3900-2UK 25 2
28-1CD60 81 50 00 100 1021-0 100 3830 AJT, LPJ 600 100 3900-2UK 35 0
Line voltage 3 AC 380 V to 480 V
Order No. Rated input Line side Motor side
Line reactor
current cross-section Recommended fuse cross-section
6SE70... VDE AWG gR (SITOR) gL lvhrc North America VDE AWG
[A] [mm²] [A] 3NE [A] 3NA Type [V] [A] 4EP.. [mm²]
16-1EA61 6.1 1.5 16 −− −− 10 3803 AJT, LPJ 600 8 3200-1UK 1.5 16
18-0EA61 8.0 1.5 16 − − −− 16 3805 AJT, LPJ 600 12 3400-2UK 1.5 16
21-0EA61 10.2 2.5 14 −− −− 16 3805 AJT, LPJ 600 15 3400-1UK 1.5 16
21-3EB61 13.2 2.5 14 25 1815-0 25 3810 AJT, LPJ 600 17.5 3500-0UK 2.5 14
21-8EB61 17.5 4 10 25 1815-0 25 3810 AJT, LPJ 600 25 3600-4UK 2.5 14
22-6EC61 25.5 10 6 35 1803-0 35 3814 AJT, LPJ 600 35 3600-5UK 10 6
23-4EC61 34 16 4 40 1802-0 50 3820 AJT, LPJ 600 45 3700-2UK 10 6
23-8ED61 37.5 16 4 63 1818-0 63 3822 AJT, LPJ 600 50 3700-5UK 16 4
24-7ED61 47 25 2 63 1818-0 63 3822 AJT, LPJ 600 60 3800-2UK 16 4
26-0ED61 59 25 2 80 1820-0 100 3830 AJT, LPJ 600 80 3800-2UK 16 4
27-2ED61 72 50 00 80 1820-0 100 3830 AJT, LPJ 600 90 3900-2UK 25 2

6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
7-4 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Connecting-up

Line voltage 3 AC 500 V to 600 V

Order No. Rated input Line side Motor side
Line reactor
current cross-section Recommended fuse cross-section
6SE70... VDE AWG gR (SITOR) gL lvhrc North America VDE AWG
[A] [mm²] [A] 3NE [A] 3NA Type [V] [A] 4EP.. [mm²]
14-5FB61 4.5 1.5 16 −− −− 10 38031) AJT. LPJ 600 6 3200-2UK 1.5 16
16-2FB61 6.2 1.5 15 −− −− 10 38031) AJT. LPJ 600 8 3300-0UK 1.5 16
17-8FB61 7.8 1.5 15 20 1814-0 20 38071) AJT. LPJ 600 10 3400-3UK 1.5 16
21-1FB61 11 2.5 14 20 1814-0 20 38071) AJT. LPJ 600 15 3600-8UK 2.5 14
21-5FB61 15.1 4 10 20 1814-0 20 38071) AJT. LPJ 600 20 3600-2UK 2.5 14
22-2FC61 22 10 6 35 1803-0 35 38141) AJT. LPJ 600 30 3600-3UK 4 10
23-0FD61 29 10 6 40 1802-0 50 38201) AJT. LPJ 600 40 3700-6UK 10 6
23-4FD61 34 16 4 40 1802-0 50 38201) AJT. LPJ 600 45 3700-1UK 10 6
24-7FD61 46.5 25 2 40 1802-0 63 38221) AJT. LPJ 600 60 3800-1UK 16 4
Table 7-1 Conductor cross-sections, fuses, line reactors

1):The indicated fuses are only valid for converters with AC 3-phase
500 V input voltage. For converterw with a higher input voltage, fuses
up to 660 V must be used. The order numbers of these fuses can be
obtained by adding on the corresponding 500 V fuse “-6”.
e.g.: for 500 V 3NA3803
for 660 V 3NA3803-6

NOTES The connection cross-sections are determined for copper cables at

40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature (according to DIN VDE 0298 Part
4 / 02.88 Group 5).
Both the cables and the semiconductors are protected by fuses with gR
characterstics.

WARNING gL fuses only provide reliable protection to the cables, and not to the
semiconductors.
If the units are connected to the supply system without a main contactor
which can interrupt the incoming supply in the event of a fault, the unit
may suffer further damage.

Maximum possible Type Order number Finely-stranded Multi-stranded, solid

connection cross-
sections mm² AWG mm² AWG
A 6SE702_-__A__ 1.5 to 10 12 to 6 2.5 to 16 12 to 4
B 6SE702_-__B__ 1.5 to 10 12 to 6 2.5 to 16 12 to 4
C 6SE702_-__C__ 4 to 16 10 to 4 10 to 25 6 to 2
D 6SE702_-__D__ 10 to 35 6 to 2 10 to 50 6 to 0

Table 7-2 Maximum connectable cross-sections

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 7-5
Connecting-up 03.99

7.1.1 Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. AC 380 - 480 V and 3-ph. AC 500 - 600 V)
X9 - External The 9-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up to a 24 V voltage
DC 24 V supply, supply and for connecting up a main or bypass contactor.
main contactor The voltage supply is required if the converter is connected up via a
control main or bypass contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
Terminal Designation Meaning Range
9 Main contactor control Main contactor control AC 230 V, 1kVA
9
8 Not connected Not used
8
7 7 Main contactor control Main contactor control AC 230 V, 1kVA
6 6 Not connected Not used
5
5 Not connected Not used
4
3 4 Not connected Not used
2 3 Not connected Not used
1 2 0V Reference potential 0V
1 +24 V (in) 24 V voltage supply DC24 V ≤ 2.5 A
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
Terminal 1 is at the front when installed.

Table 7-3 Connection of external aux. voltage supply DC24 V, main contactor
control

7.1.2 Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. AC 200 - 230 V)
X9 - external The 5-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up a 24 V voltage
DC 24 V supply, supply and a main or bypass contactor.
main contactor The voltage supply is required if the inverter is connected up via a main
control or bypass contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
Terminal Designation Description Range
1 +24 V (in) 24 V voltage supply DC24 V ≥ 2.5 A
1
2 2 0V Reference potential 0V
3 3 n.c. Not connected
4
4 Main contactor control Main contactor control 1 kVA
5
5 Main contactor control Main contactor control AC 230 V
Connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Table 7-4 Connection of external aux. voltage supply DC24 V and main contactor
control (only for units for voltage supply 3-phase AC 200 V to 230 V)

6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
7-6 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Connecting-up

7.2 Control connections

Standard In the basic version, the unit has the following control connections on
connections the CUVC:
♦ Serial interface (RS232 / RS485) for PC or OP1S
♦ A serial interface (USS bus, RS485)
♦ A control terminal strip for connecting up a HTL unipolar pulse
encoder and a motor temperature sensor (PTC / KTY84)
♦ Two control terminal strips with digital and analog inputs and
outputs.

X108

S1
S2
S3/3,4
S3/1,2
X101

X102

X103
S4/4,5,6
S4/1,2,3

Fig. 7-4 View of the CUVC

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 7-7
Connecting-up 03.99

X101 Controller Slot A

1 P24V Micro- Slot C
Aux. power controller Slot D
supply 2 M24
150 mA Slot E
3 Slot F
Out Slot G
Out In In
Out PMU X300
4 Out
Bidirectional Out/In
digital inputs- 5V In
In
and outputs 5 Out
Iout ≤ 20 mA 24V In
6 Out
In
4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs
Outputs
7 5V
24V In
8 5V
Digital inputs 24V In
Ri = 3,4 kΩ 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9 5V

RS485P
BOOT
RS485N
RS232 TxD

RS232 RxD
n.c.
P5V
24V In
Inputs
RS485P
10
Serial interface 2
USS (RS485) RS485N UART BOOT
11

Reference potential RS485 12

S2

+5V
X102 Switch for USS bus connection
Reference voltage P10 AUX
P10 V / N10 V 13
≥1
I ≤ 5 mA N10 AUX
14

15
S1
S3 A
In
Analog input 1 D +5V
1 2 AI 1 Switch for USS bus connection
(non-floating)
11 bit + sign
16
U: Rin = 60 kΩ X103
I: Rin = 250 Ω
17 Tacho M
(Close S3) S3 A 23
In
Analog input 2 D
Track A Pulse
(non-floating) 3 4 AI 2 24 encoder
18 A Track B I≤190 mA
AO 1 S4
1
S 25

19
D 3 -10...+10 V I Zero pulse
26
Analog output 1 A 0...+20 mA C
2 Control
20 M 27
10 bit + sign S4
AO 2 Tacho P15
U: I ≤ 5 mA 4 28
6 -10...+10 V
I: R ≤ 500 Ω 21
D
A 0...+20 mA Mot. temp BS
Analog output 2 5 29 Motor
22 M temperature
Mot.temp
30 sensor
KTY84
or PTC
thermistor

Fig. 7-5 Overview of the standard connections

6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
7-8 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Connecting-up

X101 – Control The following connections are provided on the control terminal strip:
terminal strip ♦ 4 optionally parameterizable digital inputs and outputs
♦ 3 digital inputs
♦ 24 V aux. voltage supply (max. 150 mA) for the inputs and outputs
♦ 1 serial interface SCom2 (USS / RS485)
Terminal Designation Meaning Range
1 P24 AUX Aux. voltage supply DC 24 V / 150 mA
2 M24 AUX Reference potential 0V
3 DIO1 Digital input/output 1 24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA
4 DIO2 Digital input/output 2 24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA
5 DIO3 Digital input/output 3 24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA
6 DIO4 Digital input/output 4 24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA
7 DI5 Digital input 5 24 V, 10 mA
8 DI6 Digital input 6 24 V, 10 mA
9 DI7 Digital input 7 24 V, 10 mA
10 RS485 P USS bus connection SCom2 RS485
11 RS485 N USS bus connection SCom2 RS485
12 M RS485 Reference potential RS485
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
Terminal 1 is at the top when installed.

Table 7-5 Control terminal strip X101

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 7-9
Connecting-up 03.99

X102 – Control The following connections are provided on the control terminal strip:
terminal strip ♦ 10 V aux. voltage (max. 5 mA) for the supply of an external
potentiometer
♦ 2 analog inputs, can be used as current or voltage input
♦ 2 analog outputs, can be used as current or voltage output
Terminal Designation Meaning Range
13 P10 V +10 V supply for ext. +10 V ±1.3 %,
potentiometer Imax = 5 mA
14 N10 V -10 V supply for ext. -10 V ±1.3 %,
potentiometer Imax = 5 mA
15 AI1+ Analog input 1 + 11 bit + sign
16 M AI1 Ground, analog input 1 Voltage:
17 AI2+ Analog input 2 + ± 10 V / Ri = 60 kΩ
18 M AI2 Ground, analog input 2 Current: Rin = 250 Ω
19 AO1 Analog output 1 10 bit + sign
20 M AO1 Ground, analog output 1 Voltage:
21 AO2 Analog output 2 ± 10 V / Imax = 5 mA
22 M AO2 Ground, analog output 2 Current: 0...20 mA
R ≥ 500 Ω
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
Terminal 13 is at the top when installed.

Table 7-6 Control terminal strip X102

X103 – Pulse The connection for a pulse encoder (HTL unipolar) is provided on the
encoder connection control terminal strip.
Terminal Designation Meaning Range
23 - VSS Ground for power supply
24 Track A Connection for track A HTL unipolar
25 Track B Connection for track B HTL unipolar
26 Zero pulse Connection for zero pulse HTL unipolar
27 CTRL Connection for control track HTL unipolar
28 + VSS Power supply pulse 15 V
encoder Imax = 190 mA
29 - Temp Minus (-) connection
KTY84/PTC KTY84: 0...200 °C
30 + Temp Plus (+) connection PTC: Rcold ≤ 1.5 kΩ
KTY84/PTC
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
Terminal 23 is at the top when installed.

Table 7-7 Control terminal strip X103

6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
7-10 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Connecting-up

X300 - Serial Either an OP1S or a PC can be connected up via the 9-pole Sub D
interface socket.
Pin Name Meaning Range
1 n.c. Not connected

5 1 2 RS232 RxD Receive data via RS232 RS232

3 RS485 P Data via RS485 RS485
4 Boot Control signal for software update Digital signal, low active
9 6 5 M5V Reference potential to P5V 0V
6 P5V 5 V aux. voltage supply +5 V, Imax = 200 mA
7 RS232 TxD Transmit data via RS232 RS232
8 RS485 N Data via RS485 RS485
9 n.c. Not connected

Table 7-8 Serial interface X300

Switch settings Switch Meaning

S1 SCom1 (X300): Bus terminating resistor
• open • Resistor open
• closed • Resistor closed
S2 SCom2 (X101/10,11): Bus terminating resistor
• open • Resistor open
• closed • Resistor closed
S3 (1,2) AI1: Changeover current/voltage input
• open • Voltage input
• closed • Current input
S3 (3,4) AI2: Changeover current/voltage input
• open • Voltage input
• closed • Current input
S4 (1,2,3) AO1: Changeover current/voltage output
• Jumper 1, 3 • Voltage output
• Jumper 2, 3 • Current output
S4 (4,5,6) AO2: Changeover current/voltage output
• Jumper 4, 6 • Voltage output
• Jumper 5, 6 • Current output

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 7-11
03.99 Forming

12 Forming
If a unit has been non-operational for more than one year, the DC link
capacitors have to be newly formed. If this is not carried out, the unit
can be damaged when the line voltage is powered up.
If the unit was started-up within one year after having been
manufactured, the DC link capacitors do not have to be re-formed. The
date of manufacture of the unit can be read from the serial number.
How the serial (Example: A-J60147512345)
number is made up
Digit Example Meaning
1 and 2 A- Place of manufacture
3 J 1997
K 1998
L 1999
M 2000
4 1 to 9 January to September
O October
N November
D December
5 to 14 Not relevant for forming

The following applies for the above example:

Manufacture took place in June 1997.
During forming, the DC link of the unit is connected up via a rectifier, a
smoothing capacitor and a resistor.
As a result, the DC link capacitors receive a defined voltage and a
limited current, and the internal conditions necessary for the function of
the DC link capacitors are restored.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 12-1
Forming 03.99

3AC

A C R

Forming

Motor-
C / L+ D / L- connection
Disconnect
U1/L1 U2/T1

V1/L2 V2/T2

W1/L3 W2/T3

Rectifier Pre-charging DC link Inverter

PE1 PE2

Fig. 12-1 Forming circuit

Components for the Vrated A R C

forming circuit
(suggestion) 3AC 200 V to 230 V SKD 50 / 12 220 Ω / 100 W 22 nF / 1600 V
3AC 380 V to 480 V SKD 62 / 16 470 Ω / 100 W 22 nF / 1600 V
3AC 500 V to 600 V SKD 62 / 18 680 Ω / 100 W 22 nF / 1600 V

Procedure ♦ Before you form the unit, all mains connections must be
disconnected.
♦ The converter incoming supply must be switched off.
♦ Connect the required components in accordance with the circuit
example.
♦ Energize the forming circuit. The duration of forming depends on the
idle time of the converter.

Forming time
6
in hours
5

2
Off-circuit idle
1
time in years

1 2 3 4 5

Fig. 12-2 Forming time as a function of converter idle time

6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
12-2 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Maintenance 03.99

11.1 Replacing the fan

The fan is designed for an operating time of L10 ≥ 35 000 hours at an
ambient temperature of Tu = 40 °C. It should be replaced in good time
to maintain the availability of the unit.
Construction types The fan assembly consists of:
E-G ♦ the fan housing
♦ a fan
The fan assembly is installed between the capacitor battery and the
motor connection.
Replacement ♦ Withdraw connector X20.
♦ Remove the cable fastening.
♦ Undo the two M6x12 Torx screws.
♦ Pull out the fan assembly towards the front.
♦ Install the new fan assembly in reverse sequence.
Prior to start-up, check that the fan can run freely and check for correct
direction of air flow.
The air must be blown upwards out of the unit.

Torx M6x12 Torx M6x12

Fan Fan housing

Fig. 11-1 Fan assembly

Construction type K The fan assembly consists of:

♦ the fan housing
♦ a fan.
The fan assembly is installed at the top of the chassis.
♦ Withdraw connector X20.
♦ Undo the two M8 screws of the fan assembly.
♦ Pull out the fan assembly towards the front (if necessary, tilt it
slightly downwards at the front) and lay it down safely.

CAUTION The fan assembly weighs up to 38 kg, depending on its design.

6SE7087-6JK60 Siemens AG
11-2 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Maintenance

♦ Undo the cable fastenings and fan connections.

♦ Take the fan support plate out of the fan assembly and remove the
fan from the support plate.
♦ Install the new fan assembly in the reverse sequence.
Prior to start-up, check that the fan can run freely and check for correct
direction of air flow.
The air must be blown upwards out of the unit.
The direction of rotation is counter-clockwise when seen from above.

Fig. 11-2 Fan assembly -E1, fan transformer primary fuse, starting capacitor -C110

11.2 Replacing the fan fuse (type K)

The fuses are in a fuse holder which is mounted on a DIN rail in the
bottom of the unit. The fuse holder has to be opened to replace the
fuses.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JK60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 11-3
Maintenance 03.99

11.3 Replacing the fan transformer fuse -F3, -F4 (type K)

Construction type K: Fuses -F3, -F4
The fuses are in a fuse holder which is arranged below the fan in front
of the air baffle plate. To replace the fuses, the fuse holder has to be
opened.

Fig. 11-3 Fan transformer (-T10), fan transformer fuses (-F3, -F4)

11.4 Replacing the fan transformer

Construction types The fan transformer is screwed on behind the motor connection.
E-G
Construction type K ♦ Mark the connecting cables on the transformer and disconnect
them.
♦ Undo the screw connections at the bottom on the transformer plate
and remove the transformer.
Type K: Secure the transformer against falling down!
♦ Install the new transformer in the reverse sequence.

6SE7087-6JK60 Siemens AG
11-4 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Maintenance

11.5 Replacing the starting capacitor

The starting capacitor is situated
• next to the fan connection (types E-G),
• inside the fan housing (type K, -C110).
♦ Withdraw the plug connections on the starting capacitor.
♦ Unscrew the starting capacitor.
♦ Install the new starting capacitor in reverse sequence (4.5 Nm).

11.6 Replacing the capacitor battery

The unit is an assembly which consists of the DC link capacitors, the
capacitor support and the DC link bus module.
Construction types ♦ Disconnect the electrical connection to the inverter bus module.
E and F ♦ Undo the mechanical interlock.
♦ Swing the capacitor battery out towards the front and lift the unit out
towards the top.
Construction type G ♦ Remove the connection for the balancing resistor (cable lug M6).
♦ Detach the mechanical fastening.
♦ Swing the capacitor battery out towards the front and lift the unit at
an angle of 45 ° out of the converter.
Construction type K The capacitor battery consists of three modules. Each module has a
capacitor support and a DC link bus module.
♦ Withdraw the plug connections.
♦ Detach the mechanical fastening (four screws: two on the left, two
on the right).
Swing the capacitor battery out as far as it will go, slightly raise the unit
and pull it forwards out of the converter.

CAUTION The capacitor battery weighs up to 15 kg, depending on the converter

output!

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JK60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 11-5
Maintenance 03.99

11.7 Replacing the SML and the SMU

SML: Snubber Module Lower
SMU: Snubber Module Upper
♦ Remove the capacitor battery.
♦ Undo the fixing screws (4 x M8, 8 - 10 Nm or 4 x M6, 2.5 - 5 Nm,
1 x M4, max 1.8 Nm).
♦ Remove the modules.
Install the new modules in the reverse sequence.

11.8 Removing and installing the module busbars

(from type G)
Removal ♦ Remove the capacitor battery.
♦ Undo the screws of the module busbars.
M8 power connections
M6 fastening on spacers
M4 circuit.
♦ Take out the insulation of the SMU / SML.
♦ Lift out the module busbars.
Installation
The spacing between the plus busbar and the minus busbar must be at
NOTE least 4 mm. In order to install the module busbars, you must therefore
use a template, e.g. a 4 mm thick piece of plastic.
♦ Place the module busbars and SMU/SML insulation on spacer bolts
and fix in place (M6).
♦ Place the template instead of the DC link bus module in the module
busbars.
♦ Locate the SMU and SML and tighten the modular connections (M8,
8 - 10 Nm, M6, 2.5 - 5 Nm).
♦ Screw the nuts tight on the spacer bolts (6 Nm).
♦ Connect the circuit resistors (M4, 1.8 Nm).
♦ Tighten the power connections (M8, 13 Nm).
♦ Remove the template from the module busbars.
Template 4 mm

Module screw Module

connection screw con-
+ nection −

Fig. 11-4 Installing the module busbars

6SE7087-6JK60 Siemens AG
11-6 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Maintenance

11.9 Replacing the balancing resistor

The balancing resistor is situated in the rear installation level on the
heat sink between the inverter modules, i.e. behind the capacitor
battery and the module busbars.
♦ Remove the capacitor battery.
♦ Remove the module busbars and the IGD module.
♦ Undo the fixing screws and take out the balancing resistor.
♦ Install the new component in reverse sequence.
♦ The balancing resistor is tightened with 1.8 Nm.
Coat the base plate evenly and thinly with a thermo-lubricant, paying
attention to correct contact assignment.

11.10 Replacing the PCU (types E to G)

PCU: Pre-Charge Unit
Construction types ♦ Withdraw connector X39.
E and F ♦ Remove the screws at the bus connection U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3, C,
D and PE1.
♦ Unlock the spacers and take out the PCU.
♦ Install the new PCU in the reverse sequence.
Construction type G ♦ Take out the PCC unit.
♦ Withdraw connector X39.
♦ Remove the screws at the bus connection U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3, C,
D and PE1.
♦ Unlock the spacers and take out the PCU.
♦ Install the new PCU in the reverse sequence.

11.11 Replacing the PCC (types E to G)

PCC: Precharge Control Circuit
♦ Take out the PCU (type E and F).
♦ Withdraw connector X11, X12, X13 and X246 on the PCC.
♦ Disconnect the NUD cable.
♦ Remove the fixing screws of the PCC unit.
♦ Unlock the spacers and take out the PCC.
♦ Install the new PCC in the reverse sequence.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JK60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 11-7
Maintenance 03.99

11.12 Replacing the rectifier module

Removal ♦ Remove the PCC and the PCU.
Construction types ♦ Dismantle the input bus module and the rectifier bus module.
E and F
♦ Undo the screws of the faulty module and remove it.
Construction type G ♦ Remove the PCC together with the support plate
♦ Remove the PCU, PSU and the electronics box.
♦ Dismantle the input bus module and the rectifier bus module.
♦ Install the new PCU in the reverse sequence.
Installation ♦ Coat the contact surfaces of the heat sink thinly and evenly with a
thermo-lubricant.
♦ Tighten the fixing screws of the rectifier module with 4 Nm.
♦ Re-install the remaining components in the reverse sequence.

11.13 Replacing the IVI

IVI: Inverter-Value Interface (interface board for the power section)
The IVI board is screwed on at the rear of the electronics box.
Construction types ♦ Withdraw the connections X205, X206, X208, X31 and X33 from the
E to G IVI board.
♦ Remove the capacitor battery (types E and F).
♦ Disconnect the fiber-optic cables (type G with rated input voltage
3 ph. AC 660 - 690 V or DC 890 - 930 V).
♦ Remove the PSU together with its insulation (type G)
♦ Take all the units out of the electronics box and place them on a
suitable surface which is not statically charged.
♦ Undo the two fixing screws of the electronics box.
♦ Push the electronics box out of its interlock and remove it towards
the front.
♦ Pull out the ABO adaption board.
♦ Unscrew the IVI board and take it out.
♦ Install the new IVI in reverse sequence.

6SE7087-6JK60 Siemens AG
11-8 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Maintenance

Construction type K ♦ Unscrew the two screws of the electronics slide-in unit and pull it out
to its endstops.
♦ Disconnect the ground cable of the electronics slide-in unit.
♦ Remove all boards from the electronics box and place them on a
suitable surface which cannot be statically charged.
♦ Unscrew the two fixing screws of the electronics box.
♦ Push the electronics box out of its interlock and take it out towards
the front.
♦ Pull out the ABO Adaption Board.
♦ Disconnect the fiber-optic cables.
♦ Unscrew the IVI board and take it out.
♦ Install the new IVI in the reverse sequence.

11.14 Replacing the VDU and the VDU resistor

VDU: Voltage-Dividing Unit
The VDU and the VDU resistor are only found on converters with higher
supply voltages. The VDU bracket is an integral component of the
electronics slide-in unit.
VDU ♦ Detach the plug-in connections.
♦ Undo the fixing screw
♦ Take out the VDU.
♦ Install the new VDU in the reverse sequence.
VDU resistor ♦ Unscrew the cable fasteners.
♦ Detach the plug-in connections.
♦ Take out the VDU resistor.
♦ Install the new VDU resistor in the reverse sequence.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JK60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 11-9
Maintenance 03.99

11.15 Replacing the PSU

PSU: Power Supply Unit
Construction types ♦ Withdraw connectors X18, X258 and X70.
E to G ♦ Remove the Torx screw with ground connection from the side panel.
♦ Push the PSU out of its locking pins and take it out sideways and
frontwards under the input bus.
♦ Install the new PSU in the reverse sequence.
Construction type K ♦ Remove the VDU and the VDU resistor (if present).
♦ Remove the VDU retainer plate.
♦ Detach the plug-in connections on the PSU.
♦ Undo the screws (six Torx M4 screws) on the PSU.
♦ Take out the PSU.
♦ Install the new PSU in the reverse sequence.

11.16 Replacing the IGD

IGD: IGBT Gate Drive
Construction types ♦ The IGD board is mounted directly on the IGBT modules.
E and F ♦ Take out the capacitor battery.
♦ Remove the electronics box with IVI board for type E.
♦ Mark the output wiring U2/T1, V2/T2 and W2/T3 and disconnect it.
♦ Remove the inverter bus module after unscrewing the twelve M6
screws.
♦ Withdraw connector X295.
♦ Undo the fixing screws and remove the IGD board.
Construction type G ♦ The IGD board is mounted directly on the IGBT modules.
♦ Take out the capacitor battery.
♦ Remove the SML and SMU modules.
♦ Remove the module busbars.
♦ Remove the fiber-optic cables or connector X295.
♦ Withdraw connectors X290 and X291.
♦ Undo the fixing screws and remove the IGD board.

NOTE The spacing between the plus busbar and the minus busbar must be at
least 4 mm. In order to install the module busbars, you must therefore
use a template, e.g. a 4 mm thick piece of plastic.

6SE7087-6JK60 Siemens AG
11-10 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Maintenance

Construction type K ♦ The IGD board is situated behind the module busbars.
♦ Take out the capacitor battery.
♦ Take out the SML and SMU modules.
♦ Remove the module busbars.
♦ Remove the nine fiber-optic cables at the top of the IGD.
♦ Withdraw the P15 feeder cable.
♦ Undo the fixing screws and remove the IGD board.
♦ Install the new IGD in the reverse sequence.
Make sure when doing so that you push in the fiber-optic cables up
to the endstop.

11.17 Replacing the TDB (type K)

TDB: Thyristor Drive Board
The TDB is arranged in front of the thyristor modules. These are
situated in the rectifier section between the fan assembly and the
inverter.
♦ Remove the cover (undo screws, then first of all detach the right-
hand snap hook, and then the left-hand snap hook)
♦ Withdraw connectors X246, X11, X12 and X13.
♦ Disconnect the PUD and NUD connections of the pre-charging
resistors R1 and R2 (M4, Torx).
♦ Disconnect the connections to phases U, V, W .
♦ Disconnect the NUD1, NUD2, NUD3 connections.
♦ Remove the TDB board.
♦ Install the new TDB in the reverse sequence.
See figure under section "Replacing the thyristor modules"

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JK60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 11-11
Maintenance 03.99

11.18 Replacing the IGBT module

Replacement is carried out as in the case of the IGD board, with the
following additions:
♦ Remove the fixing screws of the faulty IGBT module and take it out.
♦ Install a new IGBT module, paying attention to the following:
• Coat the contact surfaces thinly and evenly with a thermo-
lubricant.
• Tighten the fixing screws of the IGBT module with 5 Nm,
observing the sequence of tightening.
♦ Modules with the same type designation
e.g. FZxxxxRYYKF4 must be installed in every phase (type K).

C E
1 3 3 6

1 2

4 2
5 4

Screw on IGBT module:

1. Hand-tighten (~ 0.5 Nm)
Sequence 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
2. Tighten with 5 Nm
(Order No. 6SE7031-8EF60: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm)
Sequence 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

Fig. 11-5 Screwing on the IGBT module

6SE7087-6JK60 Siemens AG
11-12 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Maintenance

11.19 Replacing the thyristor modules (V1 to V3, type K)

Replacement as in the case of the TDB, with the following additions:
♦ Disconnect the supply cables C+ D− of the option terminals
♦ Disconnect the connection of the C and D bars between the rectifier
and the inverter.
♦ Disconnect the connections U, V, W of the modules.
♦ Disconnect the connections between modules and C(+) bar.
♦ Remove the connecting bar C(+).
♦ Disconnect the connections between modules and D(−) bar.
♦ Remove the connecting bar D(−).
♦ Undo the module fixing screws (M6, Torx).
♦ Remove the module (weight approx. 500 g).
♦ Clean the contact surface.
♦ Coat the new modules thinly and evenly with a thermo-lubricant and
mount them.
Tightening torque of the fixing screws: 6 Nm ± 15 %.
♦ Further installation is performed in the reverse sequence.
Tightening torque of the electrical connections (C and D): 12 Nm
(+ 5 %, − 10 %).

Fig. 11-6 TDB board, pre-charging resistors and thyristor modules V1, V2, V3

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JK60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 11-13
Maintenance 03.99

11.20 Replacing the PMU

♦ Remove the ground cable on the side panel.
♦ Carefully press the snap catches on the adapter section together,
remove the PMU with adapter section from the electronics box.
♦ Withdraw connector X108 on the CUx board.
♦ Carefully lift forward the PMU out of the adapter section using a
screwdriver.
♦ Install the new PMU in the reverse sequence.

Adapter section

PMU
Snap catches

E-box

Fig. 11-7 PMU with adapter section on the electronics box

6SE7087-6JK60 Siemens AG
11-14 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
03.99 Maintenance

11.21 Replacing the pre-charging resistors (R1 - R4, type K)

These are situated on the right next to the TDB board in the rectifier
section.
♦ Remove the cover (undo screws, then detach first the right-hand
snap catch and then the left-hand snap catch).
♦ Disconnect the PUD and the NUD connections of the pre-charging
resistors R1 - R4 (M4, Torx).
♦ Detach the pre-charging resistors and take them out.
♦ Install the new pre-charging resistor with torque of 20 Nm ± 10 %.

CAUTION Do NOT tilt the pre-charging resistor!

♦ Mount the fastenings and the connections in the reverse sequence.

See figure under section "Replacing the thyristor modules"

11.22 Replacing the circuit resistor

Construction type K ♦ Take out the capacitor battery.
♦ Take out the SML and SMU modules.
♦ Remove the module busbars.
♦ Undo the fixing screws (2 x M5, torque: max. 1.8 Nm) and take out
the circuit resistor.
♦ The new resistor must be thinly and uniformly rolled in a thermo-
lubricant.
♦ Max. torque of the electrical connections: 1.8 Nm.
♦ Install the new circuit in the reverse sequence.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JK60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 11-15
03.99 Forming

12 Forming
If a unit has been non-operational for more than one year, the DC link
capacitors have to be newly formed. If this is not carried out, the unit
can be damaged when the line voltage is powered up.
If the unit was started-up within one year after having been
manufactured, the DC link capacitors do not have to be re-formed. The
date of manufacture of the unit can be read from the serial number.
How the serial (Example: A-J60147512345)
number is made up
Digit Example Meaning
1 and 2 A- Place of manufacture
3 J 1997
K 1998
L 1999
M 2000
4 1 to 9 January to September
O October
N November
D December
5 to 14 Not relevant for forming

The following applies for the above example:

Manufacture took place in June 1997.
During forming, the DC link of the unit is connected up via a rectifier, a
smoothing capacitor and a resistor.
As a result, the DC link capacitors receive a defined voltage and a
limited current, and the internal conditions necessary for the function of
the DC link capacitors are restored.

3AC

A C R

Forming

Motor-
C / L+ D / L- connection
Disconnect Pre-charging
U1/L1 U2/T1

V1/L2 V2/T2

W1/L3 W2/T3

DC link Inverter
PE1
Rectifier
PE2

Fig. 12-1 Forming circuit

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6JK60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 12-1
Forming 03.99

Components for the Types E to G:

forming circuit
Vrated A R C
(suggestion)
3AC 200 V to 230 V SKD 50 / 12 220 Ω / 100 W 20 nF / 1600 V
3AC 380 V to 480 V SKD 62 / 16 330 Ω / 150 W 22 nF / 1600 V
3AC 500 V to 600 V 3 x SKKD 81 / 22 470 Ω / 200 W 22 nF / 1600 V
3AC 660 V to 690 V 3 x SKKD 81 / 22 470 Ω / 100 W 22 nF / 1600 V

Type K:
Vrated A R C
3AC 380 V to 480 V SKD 62 / 16 100 Ω / 500 W 22 nF / 1600 V
3AC 500 V to 600 V 3 x SKKD 81 / 22 150 Ω / 500 W 22 nF / 1600 V
3AC 660 V to 690 V 3 x SKKD 81 / 22 150 Ω / 500 W 22 nF / 1600 V

Procedure ♦ Before you form the unit, all mains connections must be
disconnected.
♦ The converter incoming supply must be switched off.
♦ Connect the required components in accordance with the circuit
example.
♦ Energize the forming circuit. The duration of forming depends on the
idle time of the converter.

Forming time
6
in hours
5

2
Off-circuit idle
1
time in years

1 2 3 4 5

Fig. 12-2 Forming time as a function of converter idle time

6SE7087-6JK60 Siemens AG
12-2 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
 9
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES SW3.4
6SE70 Vector Control

Extract from Circuit-Diagrams

 MASTERDRIVES VC function diagram - List of contents of the basic functions
Contents Page Contents Page Contents Page
General Setpoint channel Motor model/frequency
Basic functions: List of contents 10 Fixed setpoints 290 Speed/torque control, master/slave drive 395
Free blocks: List of contents 12 Motorized potentiometer 300 Frequency control, master/slave drive 396
Overview: Function diagrams for control 14 Setpoint channel (part 1): Master drive 316
Explanation of the symbols 15 Setpoint channel (part 2): Master drive + RGen 317 V/f open-loop control
Visualization and normalization parameters 20 Setpoint channel (part 3): Master drive 318 Current limitation, V/f characteristic 400
Free display parameters 30 Setpoint channel (part 4): Master drive 319 Current limitation, V/f charac.with sp. controller 401
Slave drive 320 Current limitation, V/f characteristic textile 402
Operator control Fixed setpoints (lift drives) 324
PMU 50 Motorized potentiometer (lift drives) 325 V/f characteristic 405
OP1S 60 Setpoint channel (part 1) (lift drives) 326
OP1S; type Compact PLUS 61 Setpoint channel (part 2) (lift drives) 327 Gating unit
Setpoint channel (part 3) (lift drives) 328 All open-loop and closed-loop control modes 420
CUVC terminals Setpoint channel (part 4) (lift drives) 329
Analog inputs 80 Temperature model
Analog outputs 81 Speed/position processing n/f/T control, master/slave drive 430
Type Compact PLUS: Analog inputs, voltage and Speed/torque control, master/slave drive 350
current specification 82 Frequency control, master/slave drive 351 Braking control 470
Type Compact PLUS: Analog outputs 83 V/f characteristic with speed controller 352
Digital inputs/outputs 90 Diagnosis
Main contactor control, ext. 24 V DC 91 Speed controller/limiting controller Messages 480
Safe STOP 92 Speed control, master drive 360 Messages 2 (lift drives) 481
Torque control and speed control, slave drive 361 Blocking/pull-out diagnosis, n/f/T control 485
Communication Frequency control, master drive 362 Blocking diagnosis, V/f characteristic 486
USS/SCom1: Receiving 100 Frequency control, slave drive 363 Alarms and faults 490
USS/SCom2: Receiving 101 V/f characteristic with speed controller 364 Fault memory 510
USS/SCom1: Transmitting 110
USS/SCom2: Transmitting 111 DT1 element, droop and torque pre-control Hardware configuration 515
First CB/TB board: Receiving 120 Speed control, master drive 365
First CB/TB board: Transmitting 125 Torque control and speed control, slave drive 366 Status diagram 520
Second CB/TB board: Receiving 130 Frequency control, master drive 367
Second CB/TB board: Transmitting 135 Data sets 540
SIMOLINK board: Configuration and diagnosis 140 Torque/current limitation 370
SIMOLINK board: Receiving 150 Motor parameters 550
SIMOLINK board: Transmitting 160 Torque/current limitation, friction
n/f-control, master drive 371 Functions
Control word, status word T control and n/f control, slave drive 372 Kinetic buffering (Vdmin control) 600
Control word 1 180 Flexible response 605
Control word 2 190 Fast torque setpoint 375 Vdmax control 610
Status word 1 200 DC braking 615
Status word 2 210 Flux calculation Flying restart 620
n/T control, master/slave drive 380
Encoder evaluation Frequency control, master/slave drive 381 Technology CU2/ CUVC 699
Speed/position processing 250
Current setpoint
Setpoints via external pulse encoder 256 Frequency control, master/slave drive 382

Measured-value sensing: n/f/T control 280 Current controller

n/f/T control, master/slave drive 390
Evaluation of set/actual values
n/f/T control 285
V/f control 286

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Basic functions fp_vc_010_e.vsd Function diagram
- 10 -
List of contents 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 MASTERDRIVES VC function diagram - List of contents
of the free blocks of the supplementary boards
Contents Page Contents Page Contents Page
Setting and monitoring the sampling Logic blocks TSY board X01
times and sampling sequences 702 - AND elements 765 - Synchronizing X02
OR elements 765 - Connection examples X03
General function blocks - Inverters 770
- Fixed setpoints 705 NAND elements 770 Terminal expansions
Fixed control bits 705 EXCLUSIVE OR elements 770 - EB1 No. 1
Connector/binector displays 705 Digital signal switches 770 Analog inputs, combined digital inputs Y01
- Fault/alarm trigger signals 710 - D flipflops 775 Analog outputs Y02
Voltage monitoring of power supply 710 RS flipflops 775 Digital inputs/outputs Y03
Connector <==> double connector converter 710 - Timers 780 - EB1 No. 2
- Connector/binector converter 715 - Pulse generators 782 Analog inputs, combined digital inputs Y04
- Binector/connector converter 720 Sampling-time changeover contacts Analog outputs Y05
782 Digital inputs/outputs Y06
Numeric function blocks and control blocks - EB2 No. 1
- Adders 725 Complex blocks Analog and digital inputs/outputs Y07
Subtracters 725 - Axial winder 784a, 784b - EB2 No. 2
Sign inverters 725 - Software counters 785 Analog and digital inputs/outputs Y08
- Multipliers 730 - Comfort ramp-function generator 790
Dividers 730 - Simple ramp-function generator 791 SCB expansions
- Multipliers 732 - Technology controller 792 - SCB1/2
Dividers 732 - Wobble generator 795 Peer-to-peer receiving Z01
- Delay blocks 734 - PRBS-Signal with Trace 796 Peer-to-peer transmitting Z02
Derivative elements 734 - SCB2
Integrators 734 Trace memory 797 USS receiving Z05
Smoothing elements 734 USS transmitting Z06
- Absolute-value generators with smoothing 735 Connector-to-parameter converter 798 - SCB1 with SCI1
limiters 735 Digital inputs slave 1 Z10
- Limit-value monitors with and without smoothing 740 Digital inputs slave 2 Z11
- Cam-contactor groups 745, 745a Digital outputs slave 1 Z15
- Analog signal switches 750 Digital outputs slave 2 Z16
Analog signal multiplexers and demultiplexers 750 Analog inputs slave 1 Z20
- Characteristic blocks 755 Analog inputs slave 2 Z21
Dead zone 755 Analog outputs slave 1 Z25
- Minimum/maximum selection 760 Analog outputs slave 2 Z26
Tracking/storage elements 760 - SCB1 with SCI2
Analog signal storages 760 Digital inputs slave 1 Z30
Digital inputs slave 2 Z31
Digital outputs slave 1 Z35
Digital outputs slave 2 Z36

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
List of contents fp_vc_012_e.vsd Function diagram
- 12 -
Free blocks 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 V/f control n control f control T control
Page Title
V/f char. + n ctrl Textile Master dr. Slave dr. Master dr. Slave dr.
280 Measured-value sensing x x x x x x x x
285 Evaluation of set/actual values for voltage/current/torque/output x x x x x
286 Evaluation of set/actual values for V/f open-loop control x x x
316 Setpoint channel (part 1), master drive x x x x x
317 Setpoint channel (part 2), master drive x x x x x
318 Setpoint channel (part 3), master drive x x x x x
319 Setpoint channel (part 4), master drive x x x x x
320 Setpoint channel, slave drive x x x
350 Speed/position processing x x x
351 Speed processing x x
352 V/f characteristic with speed controller x
360 Speed controller x
361 Speed limiting controller x x
362 Speed controller x
363 Speed limiting controller x
364 V/f characteristic with speed controller x
365 DT1 element, droop and torque pre-control x
366 DT1 element, torque control and speed control, slave drive x x
367 DT1 element, droop and torque pre-control x
370 Torque/current limitation x
371 Torque/current limitation x x
372 Torque/current limitation x
373 Torque/current limitation x
375 Fast torque setpoint x
380 Flux calculation x x x
381 Flux calculation x x
382 Current setpoint x x
390 Current controller x x x x x
395 Motor model, frequency x x x
396 Motor model, frequency x x
400 Current limitation, V/f characteristic x
401 Current limitation, V/f characteristic with speed controller x
402 Current limitation, V/f characteristic textile x
405 V/f characteristic x x x
420 Gating unit x x x x x x x x
430 Temperature model x x x x x
470 Braking control x x x x x x x x
480 Messages x x x x x x x x
Note: n control = speed control with speed controller (P100=4) Changeover from master to slave drive is only possible with closed-loop control types P100 =3/4 closed-loop speed control
f control = speed control without speed controller (P100=3) with/without encoder (control word 2 bit 27 [190.5]).
T control = torque control (P100=5) The closed-loop control then operates as torque control (as P100 = 4).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Overview fp_vc_014_e.vsd Function diagram
- 14 -
Assignment of the function diagrams for V/f open-loop control and n/f/T closed-loop control 13.02.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Explanation of the symbols used in the function diagram

Parameter P432 (546) Selection of any double connector Converting a double connector to a connector:
KK (factory setting: P432=546, i.e. connector
r007 n007 Display parameters KK546 selected) U584
KK0149 K

KK149 is converted to a connector by entering its high word

P123 U123 P597 (1) Selection of 3 binectors via indexed
.01 in the connector.
B parameters (binector B001 is selected in
Setting parameters B .02 the factory setting for all 3 outputs, i.e. fixed
B .03 value "1", see below) Cross references
U345 (50,00) Setting parameter, not indexed 0 B0000 [702.5] The signal comes from / goes to sheet 702,
0 ...120 % (factory setting: 50.00 Range 0 ... 120%) signal path 5 of function diagram

1 B0001 Sampling time of the main processor

U345.3
T0 = Basic sampling time = P357
Setting parameter, indexed, index 3 0% K0000
100%
(=16384)
K0001 Sampling time of the gating unit processor
U345.B Setting parameter, 200%
belongs to BiCo data set (2 indices) (=32767)
K0002 Tp = n/fpuls ≥ 0.4 ms (n = 1 ... 7) fpulse = P340
-100%
K0003 e.g.
U345.F (=-16384)
Setting parameter,
belongs to function data set (4 indices) -200%
P340=2.5 kHz n=1 Tp=0.4 ms
K0004 P340=4.0 kHz n=2 Tp=0.5 ms
(=-32767)

U345.M Setting parameter, 0 KK0000

belongs to the motor data set (16 indices)
100%
KK0001 Indication of the block number and the
(=1 073 741 824)
sampling time for the free blocks
200%
Connectors/binectors (=2 147 483 647)
KK0002
The block has the number 314. The block
Connector (freely interconnectable 16 bit U953.14 = ___(xx) can be activated via U953.14 and its
-100%
K0000 signal; number representation: KK0003
(=-1 073 741 824) sampling time selected (see sheet 702).
100% corresponds to 4000hex;
corresponds to 16384dec) -200% The block is permanently assigned to a
KK0004 n959.02 = 7
(=-2 147 483 647) sampling time
Double connector (freely intercon-
KK0001 nectable 32 bit signal;
number representation: Automatic conversion between connectors and Calculating time of the free blocks
100% corresponds to 40000000hex; double connectors Blocks of the indicated type require a typical
corresponds to 1073741824dec) {8 µs}
Converting a connector to a double connector: calculating time of proximately 8 microseconds
Binector (freely interconnectable binary (rough guide value).
B0000 U531
signal), can be output via digital output
K0139 KK If the total available calculating time is
[90], [91], [92]
exceeded, the monitoring system shown on
P531 (326) Selection of any connector (factory K139 is converted to a double connector by entering it in the sheet 702 will respond.
K• setting: P531=326, i.e. connector high word of the double connector and by setting its low
K326 selected) word to zero.
Place for entering the selected connector

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Explanation fp_vc_015_e.vsd Function diagram
- 15 -
Explanation of the symbols 09.04.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 General visualization paramaters

r001 Drive Status K0249 r014 Setp Speed KK0150 Pxxx.M ⇒ Motor data set parameter (4 indices)
Switchover by control word bit 18/19 [190/2]
r002 Rot freq KK0020 r015 n(act) KK0020 act. MotDataSet (Motor-Daten-Satz)
K0034
r011

r003 Output Volts K0021 Pxxx.B ⇒ BiCo - Data set parameter (2 indices)
(corresponds to the basic/reserve data set)
Switchover by control word bit 30 [190/2]
r004 Output Amps K0022
Active BICO DSet
r012 K0035
r005 Output power K0023

Pxxx.F ⇒ Function data set parameter (4 indices)

r006 DC Bus Volts K0025 (corresponds to the setpoint data set)
Switchover by control word bits 16 / 17 [190/2]
r007 Motor Torque K0024 Active FuncDSet
(Function Data Set) K0036
r013
r008 Motor Utilization K0244
Normalization variables for closed-loop and open-loop control of the unit or the equipment
r009 Motor Tmp K0245 (4000 (0000)Hex = 100 % of the base value)
P350 (~): Ref Amps (0.0 ... 6553.5 A)
r010 Drive Utilization K0246 P351 (~): Ref Volts (100 ... 2000 V) (also for DC link voltages)
P352 (50): Ref Frequency (4.00 ... 600.00 Hz)
P353 (1500): Ref Speed (1 ... 36000 1/min)
r069 SW Version P354 (~): Ref Torque (0.10 ... 900 000.00 Nm) (with P113 = Rated motor torque)
Ref Tmp 256 °C
Ref power P353 x P354 x 2 Pi / 60 (with P113 = Rated motor torque)
r828 SW ID Ref angle 90° (0° = 360°, 0 % = 400 % )
Menu Select Physical size Process quantity with normalization
r001 Drive Status P060 in A, V, Hz, 1/min, °C, ° 4000(0000)Hex 4000 (0000)Hex = 100 %
0: MRPD Input 0: User param Re fParameter
4: H/W Setting 1: M:Parameter
5: System Set 2: M:Fixed Set Torque and output in %
7: Fault 3: M:Quick Startup Motor Torque
8: ON locked 4: Board Def 4000 (0000)Hex = 100 %
4000Hex P113 P108
9: Rdy ON 5: Drive Setting · ⋅
100% P354 P353
10: Precharging 6: Download
11: Ready for Operation 7: UpR/fr access
12: Ground fault test 8: M:Power Def Notes:
13: "Flying restart" function active 1.Both the limit values of the control (e.g. speed, torque, current) and the
14: Operation normalizations of the internal and external setpoint and actual-value data are
15: OFF 1 influenced.
16: OFF 3
17: "DC braking" active 2.When calculation of the motor model (P115) is selected, the values are
18: Mot ID pre-assigned to motor rated quantities (only in converter status r001=5).
19: Speed controller opt.
20: "Synchronization" function active 3.The listed parameter values can only be changed in the "Drive setting" menu
21: Download (P060 = 5).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
General functions fp_vc_020_e.vsd Function diagram
- 20 -
Visualization parameters, normalization parameters 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.02 = 7

Src Disp Binec

n959.06 = 7 n959.09 = 7
P030.x
B .01 Display Binector Ref Amps Ref Spped
B .02 r031.1 to 5 [20.5] [20.5]
B .03
.04
BIN SrcDispAmpsConn SrcDisp SpdConn
B P036.x P040.x
.05 .01 Disp Amps Conn .01 Disp Speed Conn
B K r037.1 to .5 KK r041.1 to .5
K .02 KK .02
indicated in 0.01 A indicated in 0.1 1/min
K .03
.04
A KK .03
.04
RPM
n959.03 = 7 K KK
K .05 KK .05
Src Disp Conn
P032.x
.01 Display Conn
KK r033.1 to .5
KK .02
indicated in 0.001 %
KK .03
.04
% n959.07 = 7 n959.10 = 7
KK Ref Volts Ref Frequency
KK .05 [20.5] [20.5]
SrcDispVoltsConn SrcDispFreqConn
P034.x P042.x
.01 Disp Volts Conn Disp Freq Conn
K KK .01
.02 r035.1 to .5 r043.1 to .5
K KK .02
indicated in 0.1 V indicated in 0.001 Hz
n959.04 = 7
K .03
.04
V KK .03 Hz
K KK .04
SrcDisp DecConn .05
K KK .05
P044.x
KK .01 Disp DecConn
KK .02 r045.1 to .5
KK .03
.04
Dec
KK
.05 n959.11 = 7
KK n959.08 = 7
Rated motor speed Rated motor torque
Rated motor torque x x 100%
x 100% Ref speed [20.5] Ref torque [20.5]
n959.05 = 7 Ref torque [20.5]
SrcDisp HexConn Src DispTorqConn SrcDispPowerConn
P046.x P038.x P028.x
.01 Disp Torq Conn .01 DispPowerConn
KK Disp Hex Conn K .01 K
.02 r039.1 to .5 .02 r029.1 to .5
KK r047.1 to.10 K .02 K
indicated in 0.1 % indicated in 0.1 %
KK .03
.04
Hex K .03 % K .03
.04
%
KK K .04 K
KK .05 .05 K .05
K
- In r047.1 to .5 the higher word of
P046.1 to .5 is indicated.

- In r047.6 to 10 the lower word of

P046.1 to .5 is indicated.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
General functions fp_vc_030_e.vsd Function diagram
- 30 -
Free display parameters 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Operating display (r000) Note: Activation of the raise and lower keys is only effective
n959.15 = 4
selected and operation=1 if the operating display(r000) is selected, a changeover
of sequence control to the value display has taken place with the toggle key
and the unit is in the "Operation" status.
Seven-segment display
0 0 Raise motorized
B0008 potentiometer from
5V
1 PMU [see 180.3]
Raise key
0 0 Lower motorized
B0009 potentiometer from
5V
Lower key 1 PMU [see 180.3]
Toggle key
P
P Toggle key to operating
P
5V system, fault
acknowledgement to
PMU, control word 1 [see 180.1]

PMU OperDisp Compact PLUS type unit

Actuation of
0 ... 3998
seven-segment
P048 (2)
display
Parameter Acess
P053
Bit 1 = 1
Positive direction
1
xxxx xxxx xxxx xx1x
& SET
(Q=1)
Q B0006 of rotation from
PMU
Seven-segment display

5V POWER ON
Negative direction
Raise key RESET

& Q B0007 of rotation from

Reversing key (Q=0)
Priority: PMU
I 1 RESET
ON key 2 SET
Toggle key

OFF key O P Set-command from

sequence control if OFF2
Lower key
I
5V
or OFF3 from PMU
1 SET ON/OFF1, OFF2,
X300 (Q=1)
Q B0005 OFF3 from PMU
[see 180.3]
O
O
PMU, Compact and 5V
RESET
Q
chassis type unit (Q=0)

1
Reset command from
sequence control if
ON/OFF1 from PMU Priority:
1 RESET
2 SET
POWER ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PMU fp_vc_050_e.vsd Function diagram
- 50 -
Keypad, functionality and wiring 16.05.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp
4th line 3rd line (set) 2nd line(actual) 1st line left 1st line right
0 ... 3999 0 ... 3999 0 ... 3999 0 ... 3999 0 ... 3999 - A maximum of 6 characters (value + unit) are available for the display
active node P049.01 und P049.02 respectively.
P049.05 (1) P049.04 (229) P049.03 (2) P049.01 (4) P049.02 (6)
(=bus address)
- The 2nd line (P049.03) is provided for displaying actual values.
- The 3rd line (P049.04) is provided for displaying setpoint values.




"
7

[[ - To enable the setpoint to be changed in the operating display, its

)[
parameter number must be entered there. :
e. g. P049.04 = 405 = Fixed setpoint 5
)[ 0: Deutsch
3VO Language 1: English
P050 2: Español
3: Français
4: Italiano

OP Backlight
P361 "
7
[[
)[ LCD (4 lines x 16 characters)
The control commands are transferred via word 1 in the USS protocol.
Bit 2=1 Parameter Access )[
x1xx P053 3VO
B2100 ON/OFF1 from OP1S
I 0 B2101 OFF2 from OP1S
B2102 OFF3 from OP1S Fault
Run
B2113 Raise MOP from OP1S

Reversing key
B2114 Lower MOP from OP1S
ON key I Raise key
B2111 Positive speed direction from OP1S
B2112 Negative speed direction from OP1S OFF key 0 P Lower key

Reset B2107 Acknowledgement from OP1S Key for toggling between control levels
Inching key Jog 7 8 9
Jog B2108 Inching from OP1S
4 5 6 0 to 9: number keys

See connection to control word [180.3] 1 2 3

See Section 5.4.3 for operator control and BICO interconnection of

the OP1S. 0 +/- Reset Reset key
For an example of changing over from automatic to local operator
control via OP1S, see Section 6.1, Table 6-5, column "Cabinet unit Not valid for Compact PLUS Sign key
with NAMUR terminal strip".

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OP1S fp_vc_060_e.vsd Function diagram
- 60 -
Operating display 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp OP OperDisp
4th line 3rd line (set) 2nd line(actual) 1st line left 1st line right
0 ... 3999 0 ... 3999 0 ... 3999 0 ... 3999 0 ... 3999 - A maximum of 6 characters (value + unit) are available for the display
active node P049.01 und P049.02 respectively.
P049.05 (1) P049.04 (229) P049.03 (2) P049.01 (4) P049.02 (6)
(=bus address)
- The 2nd line (P049.03) is provided for displaying actual values.
- The 3rd line (P049.04) is provided for displaying setpoint values.




"
7

[[ - To enable the setpoint to be changed in the operating display, its

)[
parameter number must be entered there. :
e. g. P049.04 = 405 = Fixed setpoint 5
)[ 0: Deutsch
3VO Language 1: English
P050 2: Español
3: Français
4: Italiano

OP Backlight
P361 "
7
[[
)[ LCD (4 lines x 16 characters)
The control commands are transferred via word 1 in the USS protocol.
Bit 5 = 1 Parameter Access )[
xxxx xxxx xx1x xxxx P053 3VO
B6100 ON/OFF1 from OP1S
I 0 B6101 OFF2 from OP1S
B6102 OFF3 from OP1S Fault
Run
B6113 Raise MOP from OP1S

Reversing key
B6114 Lower MOP from OP1S
ON key I Raise key
B6111 Positive speed direction from OP1S
B6112 Negative speed direction from OP1S OFF key 0 P Lower key

Reset B6107 Acknowledgement from OP1S Key for toggling between control levels
Inching key Jog 7 8 9
Jog B6108 Inching from OP1S
4 5 6 0 to 9: number keys

See connection to control word [180.3] 1 2 3

See Section 5.4.3. for operation and BICO interconnection of the

OP1S. 0 +/- Reset Reset key
For an example for changing over from automatic to local operator
control via OP1S see Section 6.1, Table 6-5, column "Cabinet unit Sign key
with NAMUR terminal strip".

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OP1S; type Compact PLUS fp_vc_061_e.vsd Function diagram
- 61 -
Operating display 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 AnaIn Conf AI 1 Monitor n959.17 = 3
P632.1 0 ... 1
[80.5] P638.1 (0)

AnaIn1 Monitor
=4 1 B0031

2 mA 0
≠4 0
to fault [F037]
AnaIn Conf
0 ... 4
P632.1 (0)
AnaIn 1 Smooth Select Src AnaIn 2 Rel
<1>
4 ... 1000 ms AnaIn 1 Offset Motor Encoder P636.1 (1)
P634.1 (4) -10 V ... +10 V [250.2] 4 B
Analn 1 Setp
Analog input 1 P631.1 (0.00) r637.1
3
A ≠13 1 AnaIn1 Setp
X102/15 2 K0011
1 0
X102/16 D =13 0
Hardware 0
11bit + sign
smoothing 10 µs to tachometer [250.3]
<1>
AnaIn Configuration

P632.x AnaIn Conf AI 2 Monitor

P632.2 0 ... 1
Switch on CUVC: 0 -10 ... 10 V
[80.5] P638.2 (0)
AE1 AE2 S3 switch 1 0 ... 10 V
AnaIn Monitor
S3 (1-2) S3 (3-4) 3 1 2 -20 ... 20 mA =4 1 B0032
-10 ... 10 V open open 3 0 ... 20 mA 0
2 mA ≠4 0
-20 ... 20 mA closed closed 4 4 ... 20 mA to fault [F037]
4 2
AnaIn Conf
AE2 AE1
Note: 0 ... 4
Example of offset and gain for P632.2 (0)
frequency/speed settings in function AnaIn 2 Smooth Select Src AnaIn 2 Rel
diagram [316], [326] <1> P636.2 (1)
4 ... 1000 ms AnaIn 2 Offset Motor Encoder
P634.2 (4) -10 V ... +10 V [250.2] 4 B
Analn 2 Setp
Analog input 2 P631.2 (0.00)
r637.2
3
A ≠14 1 AI2 Setpoint
X102/17 2 K0013
1 0
X102/18 D =14 0
Hardware 0
11 bit + sign
smoothing 10 µs to tachometer [250.3]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CUVC terminals; Compact/Chassis type unit fp_vc_080_e.vsd Function diagram
- 80 -
Analog inputs, voltage and current specification 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.19 = 3

AA Scale AA Offset
-320.00 ... +320.00 V -10.00 ... +10.00 V
P643.1 (10.00) P644.1 (0.00)
Switch on CUVC:
Src AnaOut D A01
P640.1
y(V) = x/100% ⋅ P643 X102/19
K S4 (1-3) -10 ... 10 V
A X102/20
K0015 AO1 ActV S4 (2-3) 20 ... 0 mA
S4 switch
10 bit + sign
3 6

1 2 4 5

AA Scale AA Offset
-320.00 ... +320.00 V -10.00 ... +10.00 V
P643.2 (10.00) P644.2 (0.00)
Switch on CUVC:
Src AnaOut D A02
P640.2
y(V) = x/100% ⋅ P643 X102/21
K S4 (4-6) -10 ... 10 V
A X102/22
K0016 AO2 ActV S4 (5-6) 20 ... 0 mA
10 bit + sign

Notes on settings: A max − A min

B = Base value (compare P350 ... P354) P643 = ×B
Smin = Smallest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A) S max − S min
Smax = Largest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A) A max + A min S max − S min
P644 = − P643
Amin = Smallest output value inV 2 2×B
Amax = Largest output value in V A min* S max − A max* S min
P644 =
S max − S min
Output values in the case of current output:
4 mA ⇒ Amin = + 6 V
20 mA ⇒ Amax = - 10 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CUVC terminals; Compact/Chassis type unit fp_vc_081_e.vsd Function diagram
- 81 -
Analog outputs 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 AnaIn Conf AI 1 Monitor n959.17 = 3
P632.1 0 ... 1
[80.5] P638.1 (0)

AnaIn 1 Monitor
=4 1 B0031

2 mA 0
≠4 0
to fault [F037]

AnaIn Conf
AnaIn 1 Smooth Select 0 ... 4 Src AnaIn 2 Rel
4 ... 1000 ms AnaIn 1 Offset Motor Encoder P632.1 (0) P636.1 (1)
P634.1 (4) -10 V ... +10 V [250.2] B
P631.1 (0.00) <1> Analn 1 Setp
Analog input 1 r637.1
A ≠13 1 1 AnaIn1 Setp
X101/9 0 K0011
0
X101/10 D =13 0
Hardware
11bit + sign
smoothing 10 µs to tachometer [250.3]
<1>
AnaIn Configuration

Jumper on EBV: P632.x AnaIn Conf AI 2 Monitor

P632.2 0 ... 1
AnaIn 2 0 -10 ... 10 V
[80.5] P638.2 (0)
-10 ... 10 V S3: (5 - 6) 1 0 ... 10 V
AnaIn 2 Monitor
-20 ... 20 mA S3: (4 - 5) 2 -20 ... 20 mA =4 1 B0032
3 0 ... 20 mA 0
2 mA ≠4 0
4 4 ... 20 mA to fault [F037]

Note: AnaIn Conf

Example of offset and gain for 0 ... 4
frequency/speed settings in function P632.2 (0)
diagram [316], [326] AnaIn 2 Smooth Select Src AnaIn 2 Rel
<1> P636.2 (1)
4 ... 1000 ms AnaIn 2 Offset Motor Encoder
P634.2 (4) -10 V ... +10 V [250.2] 4 B
Analn 2 Setp
Analog input 2 P631.2 (0.00)
r637.2
3
A ≠14 1 AI2 Setpoint
X102/17 2 K0013
1 0
X102/18 D =14 0
Hardware 0
11 bit + sign
smoothing 10 µs to tachometer [250.3]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CUVC terminals; type Compact PLUS fp_vc_082_e.vsd Function diagram
- 82 -
Analog inputs, voltage and current specification 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.19 = 3
AA Scale AA Offset
-320.00 ... +320.00 V -10.00 ... +10.00 V
P643.1 (10.00) P644.1 (0.00)

Src AnaOut D
P640.1
y(V) = x/100% ⋅ P643 X101/11
K
A X101/12
K0015 AO1 ActV
10 bit + sign

AA Scale AA Offset
-320.00 ... +320.00 V -10.00 ... +10.00 V
P643.2 (10.00) P644.2 (0.00) Jumper on EBV:
Src AnaOut D A02
P640.2
y(V) = x/100% ⋅ P643 X102/15
K S4 (1-2) -10 ... 10 V
A X102/16
K0016 AO2 ActV S4 (2-3) 20 ... 0 mA
10 bit + sign

Notes on settings: A max − A min

B = Base value (compare P350 ... P354) P643 = ×B
S max − S min
Smin = Smallest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A)
A max + A min S max − S min
Smax = Largest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A) P644 = − P643
Amin = Smallest output value inV 2 2×B
Amax = Largest output value in V A min* S max − A max* S min
P644 =
S max − S min
Output values in the case of current output:
4 mA → Amin = + 6 V
20 mA → Amax = - 10 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CUVC terminals; type Compact PLUS fp_vc_083_e.vsd Function diagram
- 83 -
Analog outputs 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 -X101 /2 Ground Src DigOut1
<3> P651.B(107) Inputs U950.13 = ___(4)
- + /1 24 V P24 B DigOut 1 Outputs U950.23 = ___(4)
B0025
20 mA /3 24 V
B0010 DigIn 1
5V
1 B0011 DigIn 1 inv.
Src DigOut2
P652.B(104)
B DigOut 2 The terminals -X101/3 to -X101/6 can be used as
B0026 digital inputs or digital outputs.
20 mA /4 24 V
B0012 DigIn 2 If they are used as digital inputs, the parameters
5V P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have to be
1 B0013 DigIn 2 inv. set to 0.
Src DigOut3 If they are used as digital outputs,
P653.B (0) B010 ... B017 must not be used.
B DigOut 3
B0027 The terminals -X101/7 to -X101/9 (X102/19) can
/5 24 V only be used as digital inputs.
20 mA B0014 DigIn 3
5V
1 B0015 DigIn 3 inv. <1> Signal status display for digital input/output
Src DigOut4 terminals on the PMU in r646:
P654.B (0)
B DigOut 4
B0028
20 mA /6 24 V
B0016 DigIn 4 •
5V 9 8 76 54 3
1 B0017 DigIn 4 inv.
<2> Compact/Chassis type unit:
terminal X101/9

/7 24 V
B0018 DigIn 5 type Compact PLUS:
5V terminal X102/19
1 B0019 DigIn 5 inv.

/8 24 V
User circuit B0020 DigIn 6 <3> If the digital inputs are supplied by an external
5V 24 V voltage source, this has to correspond to
ground X101.2. The terminal X101.1 must not be
1 B0021 DigIn 6 inv.
linked to the external 24 V supply.
<2> 24 V
B0022 DigIn 7
5V
1 B0023 DigIn 7 inv.

Status DigIn r646 <1>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CUVC terminals fp_vc_090_e.vsd Function diagram
- 90 -
Digital inputs/outputs 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Compact PLUS type unit Compact type unit Chassis type unit

Converter
- X9 /1 - X9 /1 - X9 /1
M P24 P24

24 V ( ≥ 2.1 A) 24 V ( ≥ 2.1 A)
/2 /2 /2
P24 only output M M

/3 /3
- X100 /33
DC 24 V supply /4
for max. 2 /34 /5 /4 main
<1> M
inverters cont.
/6 to main contactor
AC 230 V, 1 kVA Safe Stop (SS)
/7 /5
main cont. [92.7]
to main contactor
Inverter: DC 30 V /8 Switch is closed when safety relay
Inverter
Converter: AC 230 V, 1 kVA Safe Stop (SS) is energized (only for option K80
/9
- X100 /33 [92.3] "Safe Stop").
P24
Switch is closed when safety relay
24 V ( ≥ 2.1 A) is energized (only for inverter).
/34
M

- X102 /20 n959.69 = 4

main cont. F001
to main contactor Contactor checkback
DC 30 V / 0.5 A /21

P591 Contactor checkback

[91.5] Monitoring
to pre-charging

Src ContactorMsg
Energize main contactor P591.B (0) ≠0 ContactorMsgTime <2>
B0270 B 0...6000 ms
Src DigOutMCon P600 (0)
MCon ready to start =0
P601.B (124) Energize MCon see control word 2
from pre-charging
Main contactor B B0124 [190.2]
T 0 MCon checkback
to pre-charging

<1> For 0.55 kW converter only one inverter

<2> A value of approx. 500 ms is recommended as the main contactor checkback time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Energizing main contactor, external DC 24 V supply fp_vc_091_e.vsd Function diagram
- 91 -
12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Compact type unit Compact PLUS type unit <1>
(only inverter) Chassis type unit <2>

- X9 /1
P24
24 V ( ≥ 2.1 A)
/2
M

/3
Checkback contact
"Safe Stop"
DC 30 V / 2 A /4

- X533 /1
/5
Checkback contact
"Safe Stop"
<3> <4> DC 30 V / 1 A <1> /2
/6 DC 30 V / 2 A <2>

/3
/7 P15 P15
<3> <4>
DC 24 V
to main contactor 30 mA /4
DC 30 V, 24 W /8
AC 60 V, 60 VA

/9 M
DC 24 V
30 mA

Safe Stop Safe Stop SS Safe Stop

[91.5] [91.8] [91.8]
Shutdown path M
opto-coupler / fiber-optic Shutdown path
cable opto-coupler / fiber-optic cable

<3> Safety switch "Safe Stop" active when switch is open

<4> results in OFF2 [180.2]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
"Safe Stop" function fp_vc_092_e.vsd Function diagram
- 92 -
24.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 PKW Task U950.10 = ___(4)
PKW- words
r738.1 to 4
RxD Receive telegram Receive
PZD-
SCom 1/2 RecvData
PZD words
r709.01 to 16
TLG End PKW TLG Head B2100 SCom1Word1 Bit0
16 15 14 • • • • 3 2 1 ••• B2115 SCom1Word1 Bit15
1 K2001 SCom1 Word1
B2200 SCom1Word2 Bit0

2 K2002 SCom1 Word2 B2215 SCom1Word2 Bit15

Low
KK2032 SCom1 DWord2 B2300 SCom1Word3 Bit0
High B2315 SCom1Word3 Bit15
3 Low
K2003 SCom1 Word3
Parameter access KK2033 SCom1 DWord3 B2400 SCom1Word4 Bit0
P053 High
4 K2004 SCom1 Word4 B2415 SCom1Word4 Bit15
Bit 2 = 1 Low
x1xx KK2034 SCom1 DWord4 B2500 SCom1Word5 Bit0
High B2515 SCom1Word5 Bit15
5 K2005 SCom1 Word5
Low
SCom BusAddr KK2035 SCom1 DWord5 B2600 SCom1Word6 Bit0
0 ... 31 High
6 K2006 SCom1 Word6 B2615 SCom1Word6 Bit15
P700.1 (0) Low
KK2036 SCom1 DWord6 B2700 SCom1Word7 Bit0
SCom Baud High B2715 SCom1Word7 Bit15
1 ... 13
7 K2007 SCom1 Word7
Low
USS- KK2037 SCom1 DWord7 B2800 SCom1Word8 Bit0
P701.1 (6)
configu-
High B2815 SCom1Word8 Bit15
ration 8 K2008 SCom1 Word8
Low
SCom PKW KK2038 SCom1 DWord8 B2900 SCom1Word9 Bit0
SCom TlgOFF
0/3/4/127 B0030 High
9 K2009 SCom1 Word9 B2915 SCom1Word9 Bit15
P702.1 (127) Low
KK2039 SCom1 DWord9
High
SCom PZD # Fault delay 10 K2010 SCom1 Word10
0 ... 16 Low
0.0 ... 100 s KK2040 SCom1 DWord10
P703.1 (2) P781.11 (0.0)
High
11 K2011 SCom1 Word11
Low
KK2041 SCom1 DWord11
SCom TlgOFF
T 0 F065 High
<1> 0 ... 6500 ms
SCom1 12 K2012 SCom1 Word12
P704.1 (0) Low
Tlg OFF KK2042 SCom1 DWord12
Monitoring is not activated until after High
13 K2013 SCom1 Word13
the first valid telegram. Low
P704.1 = 0 : no monitoring KK2043 SCom1 DWord13
No fault when P781=101.0 s
High
14 K2014 SCom1 Word14
Low
KK2044 SCom1 DWord14
Note: Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram
received via USS so that the converter will accept the High
15 K2015 SCom1 Word15
process data as being valid. For this reason, the control Low
KK2045 SCom1 DWord15
word 1 must be transferred to the converter in the first
PZD word. High
16 K2016 SCom1 Word16
<1> Telegram monitoring time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
USS/SCom1 fp_vc_100_e.vsd Function diagram
- 100 -
Receiving 09.04.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 PKW Task U950.14 = ___(4)
PKW words
r738.13 to .16
RxD Receive telegram Receive
PZD SCoRecvData
PZD words r709.17 to 32
TLG end PKW TLG head B6100 SCom2Word1 Bit0
16 15 14 • • • • 3 2 1 ••• B6115 SCom2Word1 Bit15
1 K6001 SCom2 Word 1
B6200 SCom2Word2 Bit0

2 K6002 SCom2 Word 2 B6215 SCom2Word2 Bit15

Low
KK6032 SCom2 DWord2 B6300 SCom2Word3 Bit0
High B6315 SCom2Word3 Bit15
P053 Parameter access 3 Low
K6003 SCom2 Word 3
Bit 5 = 1 KK6033 SCom2 DWord3 B6400 SCom2Word4 Bit0
xxxx xxxx xx1x xxxx High
4 K6004 SCom2 Word 4 B6415 SCom2Word4 Bit15
Low
KK6034 SCom2 DWord4 B6500 SCom2Word5Bit0
High B6515 SCom2Word5 Bit15
5 K6005 SCom2 Word 5
Low
SCom BusAddr KK6035 SCom2 DWord5 B6600 SCom2Word6 Bit0
0 ... 31 High
6 K6006 SCom2 Word 6 B6615 SCom2Word6 Bit15
P700.2 (0) Low
KK6036 SCom2 DWord6 B6700 SCom2Word7 Bit0
SCom Baud High B6715 SCom2Word7 Bit15
1 ... 13
7 K6007 SCom2 Word 7
Low
USS KK6037 SCom2 DWord7 B6800 SCom2Word8 Bit0
P701.2 (6)
configu-
High B6815 SCom2Word8 Bit15
ration 8 K6008 SCom2 Word 8
Low
SCom PKW KK6038 SCom2 DWord8 B6900 SCom2Word9 Bit0
SCom TlgOFF
0/3/4/127 B0055 High
9 K6009 SCom2 Word 9 B6915 SCom2Word9 Bit15
P702.2 (127) Low
KK6039 SCom2 DWord9
High
SCom PZD # Fault delay 10 K6010 SCom2 Word 10
0 ... 16 Low
0.0 ... 100 s KK6040 SCom2 DWord10
P703.2 (2) P781.12 (0.0)
High
11 K6011 SCom2 Word 11
Low
KK6041 SCom2 DWord11
SCom Tlg OFF
<1> 0 ... 6500 ms T 0 F065 High
SCom2 12 K6012 SCom2 Word 12
P704.2 (0) Low
Tlg OFF KK6042 SCom2 DWord12
Monitoring is not activated until after High
the first valid telegram. 13 K6013 SCom2 Word 13
Low
P704.2 = 0 : no monitoring No fault when P781=101.0 s KK6043 SCom2 DWord13
High
14 K6014 SCom2 Word 14
Notes: Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram Low
KK6044 SCom2 DWord14
received via USS so that the converter will accept the
process data as being valid. For this reason, the control High
15 K6015 SCom2 Word 15
word 1 must be transferred to the converter in the first Low
KK6045 SCom2 DWord15
PZD word.
High
<1> Telegram monitoring time 16 K6016 SCom2 Word 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
USS/SCom2 fp_vc_101_e.vsd Function diagram
- 101 -
Receiving 24.07.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 PKW Reply U950.20 = ___(4)
r739.01 to .04
••• PKW Word 1 USS SCom 1

PKW Word 2 USS SCom 1

PKW PKW
PKW Word 3 USS SCom 1 Transmit telegram
processing words
TxD
PKW Word 4 USS SCom 1

Transmit PZD
TLG
SCom TrnsRecData PKW TLG head
SrcSCom1TrnsData end 16 15 14 • • • 3 2 1
r710.01 to .16
P707 (0)
.01 •••
K 1

.02 PZD
K 2
words
.03
K 3

.04
K 4

.05
K 5

K .06 6

.07
K 7 Transmitting 32-bit words:

.08 If the same double-word connector is connected to two successive connector indices
K 8 in each case, this is transferred as a 32-bit word.

.09 Examples:
K 9
1.
K .10 10 P707 (0)
KK1000 1000 .02
KK1000 is transferred
.11 .03 as a 32-bit word
K 11 KK1000 1000

K .12 12 2.
P707 (0)
K .13 13 .02
KK2000 2000 Only the high part of
.03 KK1000 and KK2000
KK1000 1000
.14 is transferred as a
K 14 KK900 900 .04 16-bit word.
.15
K 15

.16
K 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
USS/SCom1 fp_vc_110_e.vsd Function diagram
- 110 -
Transmitting 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 PKW Reply U950.24 = ___(4)
r739.13 to .16
•••
PKW Word 1 USS SST 2
PKW Word 2 USS SST 2
PKW PKW
PKW Word 3 USS SST 2 Transmit telegram
processing words
TxD
PKW Word 4 USS SST 2

Transmit PZD
TLG
SCom TrnsRecData PKW TLG head
SrcSCom2TrnsData end 16 15 14 • • • • 3 2 1
r710.17 to .32
P708 (0)
.01 •••
K 1

.02 PZD
K 2
words
.03
K 3

.04
K 4

.05
K 5

K .06 6

.07
K 7 Transmitting 32-bit words:

.08 If the same double-word connector is connected to two successive connector indices
K 8 in each case, this is transferred as a 32-bit word.

.09 Examples:
K 9
1.
K .10 10 P708 (0)
KK1000 1000 .02
KK1000 is transferred
.11 .03 as a 32-bit word
K 11 KK1000 1000

K .12 12 2.
P708 (0)
K .13 13 .02
KK2000 2000 Only the high part of
KK1000 1000 .03 KK1000 and KK2000
.14
K 14 KK900 900 .04 is transferred as a
16-bit word.
.15
K 15

.16
K 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
USS/SCom2 fp_vc_111_e.vsd Function diagram
- 111 -
Transmitting 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 CB Diagnosis PKW Task U950.11 = ___(4)
r732.01 to 32 PKW words
r738.5 to 8
PZD CB/TB RecvData
CB Parameter 1 Dual- words
0 ... 65535 Port-RAM r733.01 to 16
B3100 CB/TB Word1Bit0
P711.01 ••
Config 1 K3001 CB/TB DWord1 B3115 CB/TB Word1Bit15

••••••

••••••
area Channel 0  B3200 CB/TB Word2Bit0
 2 K3002 CB/TB Word2 B3215 CB/TB Word2Bit15
Low
PKW KK3032 CB/TB DWord2 B3300 CB/TB Word3Bit0
CB Parameter 10
0 ... 65535 High B3315 CB/TB Word3Bit15
3 K3003 CB/TB Word3
P720.01  Low
KK3033 CB/TB DWord3
PZD Channel 1  B3400 CB/TB Word4Bit00
 4
High
K3004 CB/TB Word4 B3415 CB/TB Word4Bit15
CB Parameter 11 Low
KK3034 CB/TB DWord4 B3500 CB/TB Word5Bit0
0 ... 65535
P721.01 to .05 High B3515 CB/TB Word5Bit15
5 K3005 CB/TB Word5
CB
 Low
KK3035 CB/TB DWord5
CB/TB Tlg OFF Channel 2  B3600 CB/TB Word6Bit0
CB/TB TlgOFF configu- B0035
ration
 6
High
K3006 CB/TB Word6 B3615 CB/TB Word6Bit15
0 ... 6500 ms
Low
P722.01 (0) KK3036 CB/TB DWord6 B3700 CB/TB Word7Bit0
P722.01 =0 :
Fault Delay High B3715 CB/TB Word7Bit15
No monitoring 7 K3007 CB/TB Word7
0.0 ... 100.0 s  Low
KK3037 CB/TB DWord7
P781.13 (0.0) Channel 3  B3800 CB/TB Word8Bit0
CB Bus Address  8
High
K3008 CB/TB Word8 B3815 CB/TB Word8Bit15
0 ... 200 Low
KK3038 CB/TB DWord8 B3900 CB/TB Word9Bit0
P918.01 (x) T 0 F082
High B3915 CB/TB Word9Bit15
9 Low
K3009 CB/TB Word9
<1> CB parameter access CB/TB Tlg OFF  KK3039 CB/TB DWord9
P053
No fault
Channel 4 
Bit 0 = 1  10 High
when P781=101.0 s K3010 CB/TB Word10
xxxx xxx1 Low
KK3040 CB/TB DWord10
TB parameter access High
<2> P053 11 K3011 CB/TB Word11
 Low
KK3041 CB/TB DWord11
Bit 4 = 1 Channel 5 
xxx1 xxxx  12 High
K3012 CB/TB Word12
Applicable for following configurations: Low
KK3042 CB/TB DWord12
- Only a CB
- Only a TB (TB not possible with Compact PLUS) High
13 K3013 CB/TB Word13
- CB behind TB (CB in slot D or E)  Low
KK3043 CB/TB DWord13
- CB - CB for the CB with the lower slot letter Channel 6 
 14 High
K3014 CB/TB Word14
<1> CB = Communications board, e.g. CBP Low
<2> TB = Technology board, e.g. T100, T300, T400 KK3044 CB/TB DWord14
(cannot be plugged into Compact PLUS) High
15 K3015 CB/TB Word15
Note: Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word so that the  Low
KK3045 CB/TB DWord15
converter will accept the process data as being valid. For Channel 7 
this reason, the control word 1 must be transferred to the  16 High
K3016 CB/TB Word16
converter in the first PZD word.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
First CB/TB board (low slot letter) fp_vc_120_e.vsd Function diagram
- 120 -
Receiving 21.09.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 PKW Reply CB/TB
U950.21 = ___(4)
r739.5 to .8 (communications board/technology board
•••
PKW Word 1 CB/TB 01
Dual
PKW Word 2 CB/TB 02
port RAM
PKW PKW
PKW Word 3 CB/TB 03
processing words
PKW
PKW Word 4 CB/TB 04 words
Transmit

CB/TB Trns Data PZD PZD

SrcCB/TBTrnsData r735.01 to .16 words words
P734 (0)
.01 •••
K 1
Transmit telegram
.02
K 2

.03
K 3

.04
K 4

.05
K 5

K .06 6

.07
K 7 Transmitting 32 bit words:

.08 If the same double-word connector is connected up to two successive connector

K 8 indices, this is transferred as a 32 bit word.

.09 Examples:
K 9
1.
K .10 10 P734 (0)
KK1000 1000 .02
KK1000 is transferred
.11 .03 as a 32 bit word
K 11 KK1000 1000

K .12 12 2.
P734 (0)
K .13 13 .02 Only the high part of
KK2000 2000
.03 KK1000 and KK2000
KK1000 1000 is transferred as a
.14
K 14 KK900 900 .04 16 bit word.

.15
K 15

.16
K 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
First CB/TB board (low slot letter) fp_vc_125_e.vsd Function diagram
- 125 -
Transmitting 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 PKW task U950.15 = ___(4)
PKW words
r738.17 to 20
CB Parameter 1 Dual
0 ... 65535 Port-RAM PZD CB/TB RecvData
P711.02 words r733.17 to .32
Config B8100 2nd CBWord1 Bit0

••••••

••••••
area
••
1 K8001 2nd CB Word 1 B8115 2nd CB Word1 Bit15
B8200 2nd CBWord2 Bit0
CB Parameter 10 PKW 2 K8002 2nd CB Word 2 B8215 2nd CB Word2 Bit15
0 ... 65535 Low
KK8032 2nd CB DWord2 B8300 2nd CBWord3 Bit0
P720.02
High B8315 2nd CB Word3 Bit15
PZD 3 Low
K8003 2nd CB Word 3
KK8033 2nd CB DWord3 B8400 2nd CBWord4 Bit0
CB Parameter 11 USS High
0 ... 65535 configu- 4 K8004 2nd CB Word 4 8415 2nd CB Word4 Bit15
Low
P721.06 to .10 ration KK8034 2nd CB DWord4 B8500 2nd CBWord5 Bit0
2. CB Tlg OFF High B8515 2nd CB Word5 Bit15
CB/TB TlgOFF
5 K8005 2nd CB Word 5
B0045 Low
KK8035 2nd CB DWord5 B8600 2nd CBWord6 Bit0
0 ... 6500 ms
P722.02 (0) High B8615 2nd CB Word6 Bit15
P722.02 =0 : 6 K8006 2nd CB Word 6
Low
no monitoring Fault Delay KK8036 2nd CB DWord6 B8700 2nd CBWord7 Bit0
0.0 ... 100.0 s High
P781.14 (0.0) 7 K8007 2nd CB Word 7 B8715 2nd CB Word7 Bit15
Low
CB Bus Address KK8037 2nd CB DWord7 B8800 2nd CBWord8 Bit0
0 ... 200 High
P918.02 (x) 8 K8008 2nd CB Word 8 B8815 2nd CB Word8 Bit15
T 0 Low
KK8038 2nd CB DWord8 B8900 2nd CBWord9 Bit0
F082
High B8915 2nd CB Word9 Bit15
CB/TB Tlg OFF 9 Low
K8009 2nd CB Word 9
No fault KK8039 2nd CB DWord9
when P781=101.0 s High
10 K8010 2nd CB Word 10
Low
KK8040 2nd CB DWord10
Valid for following configurations (TB not possible with Compact PLUS):
- CB - CB for the CB with the higher slot letter High
- CB before TB, i.e. CB in slot A or C (no parameter data transfer to TB is possible)
11 K8011 2nd CB Word 11
Low
KK8041 2nd CB DWord11
High
12 K8012 2nd CB Word 12
Low
KK8042 2nd CB DWord12
High
13 K8013 2nd CB Word 13
Low
KK8043 2nd CB DWord13
High
14 K8014 2nd CB Word 14
Low
KK8044 2nd CB DWord14
Note: Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word so that the
converter will accept the process data as being valid. For High
15 K8015 2nd CB Word 15
this reason, the control word 1 must be transferred to the Low
KK8045 2nd CB DWord15
converter in the first PZD word.
High
16 K8016 2nd CB Word 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Second CB/TB board (higher slot letter) fp_vc_130_e.vsd Function diagram
- 130 -
Receiving 16.05.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 PKW Reply Dual- U950.25 = ___(4)
r739.17 to .20 Port-RAM
•••
PKW Word 1 CB/TB 01

PKW Word 2 CB/TB 02

PKW PKW Word 3 CB/TB PKW
03
processing words
PKW
PKW Word 4 CB/TB 04 words
Transmit
CB/TBTrnsData PZD PZD
SrcCB/TBTrnsData r735.17 to .32 words words
P736 (0)
.01
•••
K 1
Transmit telegram
.02
K 2

.03
K 3

.04
K 4

.05
K 5

K .06 6

.07
K 7 Transmitting 32 bit words:

.08 If the same double-word connector is connected up to two successive

K 8 connector indices, this is transmitted as a 32 bit word.

.09 Examples:
K 9
1.
K .10 10 P736 (0)
KK1000 1000 .02
KK1000 is transmitted as
.11 .03 a 32 bit word
K 11 KK1000 1000

K .12 12 2.
P736 (0)
K .13 13 .02
KK2000 2000 Only the high part of
.03 KK1000 and KK2000 is
KK1000 1000
.14 transmitted as a 16 bit
K 14 KK900 900 .04 word.
.15
K 15

.16
K 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Second CB/TB board (higher slot letter) fp_vc_135_e.vsd Function diagram
- 135 -
Transmitting 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.20 = 7

SLB TlgOFF
SLB Diagnosis
SLB NodeAddr B0040
r748 r748.001: Number of error-free synchronizing
0 ... 200 Fault Delay
K7081 telegrams
P740.1 (1) SLB- 0.0 ... 101.0 s
P740.2 (1) configuration P781.16 (0.0) SLB- .002: Number of CRC faults
SLB TlgOFF Diagnosis
K7082
0 ... 6500 General part T 0 F056
P741 (0) .003: Number of timeout faults
SIMOLINK
P741 = 0: no monitoring Time out K7083
Tlg OFF
B0041
SLB Trns Power Monitoring is not activated until .004: Last addressed bus address
1 ... 3 after first valid telegram
P742 (3) No fault when P781.16 = 101.0 s .005: Address of node which transmits
B7010 SLB Appl.Flag 0 the special timeout telegram
SLB # Nodes SIMOLINK K7085
0 ... 255 O B7011 SLB Appl.Flag 1
Receive .006: Active SYNC interrupt delay
P743.1 (0)
B7012 SLB Appl.Flag 2 1 = 273 ns
P743.2 (0) E
.007: Position of the node in the ring
B7013 SLB Appl.Flag 3 .008: Number of nodes in the ring
.010: Corrected pulse periods in units of
100 ns
Src.SLB Appl.Flags
P747 (0) .012: internal
.01 .013: internal
B
B .02 SIMOLINK .015: Implemented bus cycle time
.03 E .016: internal
B
B .04 Transmit
O
SLB Channel #
1 ... 8
P745.1 (2)
P745.2 (2)
<2>
Dispatcher-
SLB Cycle Time specific part
0.20 ... 6.50 ms
P746.1 (3.20)
P746.2 (3.20) Module
address = 0 B0042 Start alarm

f
<1> A002
SIMOLINK Start alarm

P746 + 3,18 us 1 When SIMOLINK is used, telegram failure

<1> f: Number of addressed nodes = ( - 2) × ; 6,36us = time for 1 telegram (3,18 due to rounding)
6,36 us P745 monitoring should always be activated!
For the SLB telegram failure time
<2> Number of channels = Number of transmission channels (32-bit transmit words) per node; is according to the node which uses the most transmissio
n channels. P741 = 4* P746 (SLB bus cycle time) is
recommended.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SIMOLINK board (SLB) fp_vc_140_e.vsd Function diagram
- 140 -
Configuration and diagnosis 12.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 SLB Read Addr .01
<1> 0.0 ... 200.7 U950.12 = ___(4)
<1> Example: P749.02 = 0.1 Data
P749

• • •
⇒KK7035 = Transm. channel1 from node 0 16 x 16 bit
SLB Rcv Data
.08 r750.01 to .16
B7100 SLB Word1 Bit0
••• B7115 SLB Word1 Bit15
1 K7001 SLB Word 1
 KK7031 SLB DWord 1
SIMOLINK
Channel 0  B7200 SLB Word2 Bit0
 2 K7002 SLB Word 2 B7215 SLB Word2 Bit15
Low
Receive O Receive telegram KK7032 SLB DWord 2 B7300 SLB Word3 Bit0
High B7315 SLB Word3 Bit15
E 3 K7003 SLB Word 3
 Low
KK7033 SLB DWord 3
RxD Channel 1  B7400 SLB Word4 Bit0
 4
High
K7004 SLB Word 4 B7415 SLB Word4 Bit15
Low
KK7034 SLB DWord 4 B7500 SLB Word5 Bit0
High B7515 SLB Word5 Bit15
5 K7005 SLB Word 5
 Low
KK7035 SLB DWord 5
Note: Channel 2  B7600 SLB Word6 Bit0
Special data can only be sent  High
by the SL master! 6 K7006 SLB Word 6 B7615 SLB Word6 Bit15
Low
KK7036 SLB DWord 6 B7700 SLB Word7 Bit0
Special data
8 x 16 bit High B7715 SLB Word7 Bit15
7 K7007 SLB Word 7
 Low
KK7037 SLB DWord 7
Channel 3  B7800 SLB Word8 Bit0
 8
High
K7008 SLB Word 8 B7815 SLB Word8 Bit15
1 K7101 SLB Special Word 1 Low
KK7038 SLB DWord 8 B7900 SLB Word9 Bit0
KK7131 SLB Spec DWord 1
High B7915 SLB Word9 Bit15
9 Low
K7009 SLB Word 9
2 K7102 SLB Special Word 2  KK7039 SLB DWord 9
KK7132 SLB Spec DWord2 Channel 4 
 10 High
K7010 SLB Word 10
3 K7103 SLB Special Word 3 Low
KK7040 SLB DWord 10
KK7133 SLB Spec DWord3
High
11 K7011 SLB Word 11
4 K7104 SLB Special Word 4  Low
KK7041 SLB DWord 11
KK7134 SLB Spec DWord4 Channel 5 
 12 High
K7012 SLB Word 12
5 K7105 SLB Special Word 5 Low
KK7042 SLB DWord 12
KK7135 SLB Spec DWord5
High
13 K7013 SLB Word 13
6 K7106 SLB Special Word 6  Low
KK7043 SLB DWord 13
KK7136 SLB Spec DWord 6 Channel 6 
 14 High
K7014 SLB Word 14
7 K7107 SLB Special Word 7 Low
KK7044 SLB DWord 14
KK7137 SLB Spec DWord 7
High
15 K7015 SLB Word 15
8 K7108 SLB Special Word 8  Low
KK7045 SLB DWord 15
Channel 7 
 16 High
K7016 SLB Word 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SIMOLINK Board fp_vc_150_e.vsd Function diagram
- 150 -
Receiving 09.04.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.21 = 2
SLB TrnsData Transmit words
SrcSLBTrnsData r752.01 to .16
P751 (0)
.01
•••
K 1  Node 1 SIMOLINK
 Channel0 Bus cycle
.02  Transmit words 3 and 4
K 2 (Example for 3 nodes and 2 channels) E
Transmit
TxD
.03
K 3 
O
Channel1 3.1 3.0 2.1 2.0 1.1 1.0 0.1 0.0
.04 
K 4
Pause SYNC NOP • • • • • • NOP 2W 2W 2W 2W 2W 2W 2W 2W
.05
K 5  Bus cycle time
Channel2
.06 
K 6

.07
K 7 
- Each module can read out all circulating telegrams.
Channel3 - Each telegram consists of 2 words = 2 x 16 bit.
.08  - Each module can only describe the telegrams of its own module address.
K 8 - In the above example, module 1 can describe telegrams 1.0 and 1.1.
- The dispatcher (module address 0) provides the SYNC signal after the defined bus cycle time.
.09 - The number of nodes is determined by establishing the bus cycle time and the number of channels.
K 9  The dispatcher transmits as many telegrams with ascending node address and channel number as
Channel4
.10  the bus cycle time permits.
K 10 - If the total number of telegrams requires less time than the bus cycle time, the time up to the SYNC
signal is filled up with NOP (No Operation) telegrams.
.11 - The total number of telegrams (modules x channels) is limited to 1023.
K 11 
Channel5
K .12 12 
Transmitting 32 bit words:
K .13 13  If the same double-word connector is connected up to two successive connector
Channel6 indices, this is transmitted as a 32 bit word.
.14 
K 14
Example:
.15
K 15 
1.
Channel7 P751 (0)
.16  KK1000 1000 .02
K 16 KK1000 is transmitted
KK1000 1000 .03 as a 32 bit word.

2.
P751 (0)
KK2000 2000 .02 Only the high part of
.03 KK1000 and KK2000 is
KK1000 1000 transmitted as a 16 bit
KK900 900 .04 word.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SIMOLINK board fp_vc_160_e.vsd Function diagram
- 160 -
Transmitting 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Display of r550 on PMU
n959.25 = 4
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Control word 1
r550
Control word 1 •
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit No. Meaning K0030

Src ON/OFF1 P554.B (22/22) 0=OFF1, Shutdown via ramp-function generator, to sequence control 1)
Src1 OFF2(coast) P555.B (1/20)
B Bit 0 followed by pulse disable, to braking control [470.1]
B
1=ON, operating condition (edge-controlled) to setpoint processing [300.5]
Src2 OFF2(coast) P556.B (1/1) 0=OFF2, pulse disable, motor coasts down to sequence control 1)
Bit 1
B 1=Operating condition to braking control [470.1]
Src3 OFF2(coast) P557.B (1/1)
B
& Bit 2
0=OFF3, quick stop
1=Operating condition
to sequence control 1)
to braking control [470.1]
to setpoint processing [318.3], [328.3]
Src InvRelease P561.B (1/1)
1=Inverter enable, pulse enable
"Safe OFF" 2) B Bit 3 to sequence control 1)
0=Pulse disable
Src RampGen Rel P562.B (1/1)
Src1 OFF3(QStop) P558.B (1/1) 1=Ramp-function generator enable
B Bit 4 to setpoint processing [317.6], [327.6]
B 0=Set ramp-function generator to 0

Src2 OFF3(QStop) P559.B (1/1) Src RampGen Stop P563.B (1/1) 1=Start ramp-function generator
B
& Src Setp Release
B

P564.B (1/1)
Bit 5
0=Stop ramp-function generator
to setpoint processing [317.6], [327.6]

Src3 OFF3(QStop) P560.B (1/1) 1=Setpoint enable

B Bit 6 to setpoint processing [317.1], [327.1]
B 0=Setpoint disable
B0094 Fault acknowl. 3)
Src1 Fault Reset P565.B(2107)
Bit 7 0 =>1 Edge fault acknowledgement to sequence control 1)
B
Src Inching Bit0 P568.B (0/0) to sequence control 1)
Src2 Fault Reset P566.B (0/0) to setpoint processing
B Bit 8 1=Inching bit0
B [316.1], [318.2], [326.1], [328.2]

Src3 Fault Reset P567.B (0/18)

B
1 Src Inching Bit1 P569.B (0/0)
B Bit 9 1=Inching bit1
to sequence control 1)
to setpoint processing
[316.1], [318.2], [326.1], [328.2]
1=Control requested Note:This bit must be set in the first PZD word of the
from PMU [50.7] Bit 10 telegram received from serial interfaces, so that the
0=No control requested converter will accept the process data as being valid
Src FWD Speed P571.B (1/1) (compare USS, PROFIBUS, etc.)
1=Clockwise phase sequence enable
B Bit 11 to setpoint processing [316.4], [326.4]
0=Clockwise phase sequence disable
1) The sequence control is the internal Src REV Speed P572.B (1/1)
1=Counter-clockwise phase sequence
control (software) for realizing the B Bit 12 to setpoint processing [316.4], [326.4]
enable 0=Counter-clockwise phase sequence disable
drive status (r001)
Src MOP UP P573.B (8/0)
Pre-assignment of the BICO parameters: B Bit 13 1=Raise mot. potentiometer to setpoint processing [300.1]
1. Binector valid for BICO data set 1
2. Binector valid for BICO data set 2 Src MOP DOWN P574.B (9/0)
B Bit 14 1=Lower mot. potentiometer to setpoint processing [300.1]
2) "OPTION" / With Kompact PLUS devices [92.6]
Src No ExtFault1 P575.B (1/1)
0=External fault 1 to sequence control 1)
3) The signal remains high on acknowledgement for B Bit 15
1=No external fault to fault processing
T10 (= 204.8 ms with 5 kHz pulse frequency).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control word 1 fp_vc_180_e.vsd Function diagram
- 180 -
24.07.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.26 = 4
Control word 2
r551
Control word 2
Bit No. Meaning K0031
Display of r551 on the PMU
Src FuncDSetBit0 P576.B (0/0) B0092 FuncDSet Bit 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
B Bit 16 Select fixed setpoint bit 0 to data sets [540.4]

Src FuncDSetBit1 P577.B (0/0) B0093 FuncDSet Bit 1

B Bit 17 Select fixed setpoint bit 1 to data sets [540.4] •
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Src MotDSet Bit0 P578.B (0/0)
B Bit 18 Select motor data set bit 0 to data sets [540.4]

Src MotDSet Bit1 P579.B (0/0)

B Bit 19 Select motor data set bit 1 to data sets [540.4]

Src FixSetp Bit0 P580.B (0/16)

B Bit 20 Select fixed setpoint bit 0 to fixed setpoints [290.6]

Src FixSetp Bit1 P581.B (0/0)

B Bit 21 Select fixed setpoint bit 1 to fixed setpoints [290.6]

Src Sync Release P582.B(5002)

1= Enable synchronizing
2) B Bit 22 to synchronization [X02] 2)
0=Synchronizing disabled
Src Fly Release P583.B (0/0)
1=Enable flying restart
B Bit 23 to sequence control 1)
0=Flying restart disabled
Src Droop Rel P584.B (0/0)
1=Enable droop, speed controller
B Bit 24 to speed control [365.7], [367.4]
0=Droop, speed controller disabled No.n-Reg Rel
Src n-Reg Rel P585.B (1/1) 1 B0099
1=Enable speed controller
B Bit 25 to speed control [360.5], [361.5]
0=Speed controller disabled
Src No ExtFault2 P586.B (1/1)
0=External fault 2 to sequence control 1)
B Bit 26
1=No external fault 2 to fault processing
Src Master/Slave P587.B (0/0) Separate function diagrams are available for
0=Master drive (speed control) to speed control
B Bit 27 master and slave drive control!
1=Slave drive (torque control) to fixed setpoints
Src No Ext Warn1 P588.B (1/1) 1) The sequence control is the internal
0=External alarm 1 to sequence control 1)
B Bit 28 control (software) for realizing the
1=No external alarm 1 to alarm processing
drive status (r001).
Src No Ext Warn2 P589.B (1/1)
0=External alarm 2 to sequence control 1)
B Bit 29
1=No external alarm 2 to alarm processing Pre-assignment of the BICO parameters:
Src BICO DSet P590 (14) 1. Binector valid for BICO data set 1
0=Select BICO data set 1 2. Binector valid for BICO data set 2
B Bit 30 to data sets [540.4]
1=Select BIC data set 2
Src ContactorMsg P591.B (0/0)
0=No checkback, waiting time P600 active 2) not Compact PLUS
B Bit 31 to sequence control 1)
1=Checkback main contactor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control word 2 fp_vc_190_e.vsd Function diagram
- 190 -
12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.27 = 4

Status word 1
r552
Status word 1 Display of r552 on the PMU
Bit No. Meaning K0032 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

from sequence control 1) Bit 0

1=Ready to switch on 1 B0101 Not Rdy for ON
0=Not ready to switch on B0100 Rdy for ON •
1=Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses disabled) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
from sequence control 1) Bit 1 1 B0103 NotRdy for Oper
0=Not ready for operation B0102 Rdy for Oper
1) The sequence control is the internal
1=Run (voltage at output terminals) 2) 1 B0105 Not operating control (software) for realizing the
from sequence control 1) Bit 2
0=Pulses disabled B0104 drive status (r001).
Operation
1=Fault active (pulses disabled) 1 B0107 No fault 2) The message is also active when the
from sequence control 1) Bit 3
0=No fault B0106 unit is in trial operation (e.g. ground
Fault
fault test).
0=OFF2 active 1 B0109 OFF2
from sequence control 1) Bit 4
1=No OFF2 B0108 No OFF2
0=OFF3 active 1 B0111 OFF3
from sequence control 1) Bit 5
1=No OFF3 B0110 No OFF3
1=Switch-on inhibit 1 B0113 Not blocked
from sequence control 1) Bit 6
0=No switch-on inhibit (possible to switch on) B0112 Blocked
1=Warning active 1 B0115 No alarm
from alarm processing Bit 7
0=No warning B0114 Alarm
1=No setpoint/actual value deviation detected 1 B0117 Deviation
from messages [480.7] Bit 8
0=Setpoint/actual value deviation B0116 No Deviation

from sequence control 1) Bit 9 1=PZD control requested (always 1)

1=Comparison value reached 1 B0121 CompV not OK

from messages [480.7] Bit 10
0=Comparison value not reached B0120 CompV OK
1=Message low voltage 1 B0123 No Low Voltage
from fault processing Bit 11
0=Message no low voltge B0122 Low Voltage
1=Request to energize main contactor 1 B0125 N.Energ.MCon
from sequence control 1) Bit 12
0=No request to energize main contactor B0124 Energize MCon
from setpoint processing 1=Ramp-function generator active 1 B0127 RampGen n.act.
Bit 13
[317.8], [327.8] 0=Ramp-function generator not active B0126 RampGen active
1=Positive speed setpoint 1 B0129 Speed Setp REV
from messages [480.7] Bit 14
0=Negative speed setpoint B0128 Speed Setp FWD
From KIB/FLR control 1=Kinetic buffering/flexible response active 1 B0131 KIB/FLR n.active
Bit 15
[600.8], [605.8] 0=Kinetic buffering/flexible response inactive B0130 KIB/FLR active

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status word 1 fp_vc_200_e.vsd Function diagram
- 200 -
12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.28 = 4

Status word 2
r553
Status word 2 Display of r553 on the PMU
Bit No. Meaning K0033 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

from sequence control 1) Bit 16

1=Flying restart or excitation active 1 B0133 Fly/Exc n.act. 2)
0=Flying restart not active or excitation finished B0132 Fly/Exc active •
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
from synchronization [X01.6] Bit 17
1=Synchronism achieved 1 B0135 Sync n.reached 3)
0=Synchronism not achieved B0134 Sync reached
1) The sequence control is the internal
0=Overspeed 1 B0137 No Overspeed
from messages [480.7] Bit 18 control (software) for realizing the
1=No overspeed B0136 Overspeed drive status (r001).
1=External fault 1 active 1 B0139 No Ext Fault 1
from sequence control 1) Bit 19
0=No external fault 1 B0138 2) in addition
Ext Fault 1
ExcitationEnd
1=External fault 2 active 1 B0141 No Ext Fault 2
from sequence control 1) Bit 20 B0255
0=No external fault 2 B0140 Ext Fault 2
1=External warning active 1 B0143 No Ext Warning
from sequence control 1) Bit 21 3) not Compact PLUS
0=No external warning B0142 Ext Warning
1=Converter overload warning active 1 B0145 No OvldWarn Drv
from alarm processing Bit 22
0=No converter overload warning B0144 Ovld Warn Drive
1=Converter overtemperature fault active 1 B0147 No Tmp Flt Drv
from fault processing Bit 23
0=No converter overtemperature fault B0146 Tmp Flt Drive
1=Converter overtemperature warning active 1 B0149 No TmpWarn Drv
from alarm processing Bit 24
0=No converter overtemperature warning B0148 TmpWarn Drive
1=Motor overtemperature warning active 1 B0151 No TmpWarnMotor
from alarm processing Bit 25
0=No motor overtemperature warning B0150 TmpWarnMotor
1=Motor overtemperature fault active 1 B0153 No TmpFltMotor
from fault processing Bit 26
O=No motor overtemperature fault B0152
TmpFltMotor
Bit 27 Reserve

from block/pullout 1=Motor pulled out/blocked fault active 1 B0157 No MotorPullOut

Bit 28
diagnosis [485.8] 0=No motor pulled out/blocked fault B0156 Motor PullOut
1=Bypass contactor energized (only AC units) 1 B0159 ChrgRelay open
from sequence control 1) Bit 29
0=Bypass contactor not energized B0158 ChrgRelay close

from synchronization [X01.6] 3) Bit 30

1=Fault during synchronization 1 B0161 No Sync Fault 3)
0=No fault during synchronization B0160 Sync Fault
1=Pre-charging active 1 B0163 Prechrg n.act.
from sequence control 1) Bit 31
0=Pre-charging not active B0162
Prechrg active

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status word 2 fp_vc_210_e.vsd Function diagram
- 210 -
24.07.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 P15 n957.01 = 2

Control Evalu-
X401/74
Encoder Pulse # ation
60 ... 20000
from SBP
P151.M (1024) [256.5]
encoder signal
<2> evaluation mode
KK0094
Tacho M
X103/23
Track A
X103/24
Track B
X103/25 05 Control Track
zero Pulse encoder B0060
X103/26 evaluation
11,12,15,16
Control
X103/27

Motor encoder
Tacho P15 05 ... 16
X103/28
P130.M (10)

Rotor angle <1>

Pulse encoder via SBP
05 r186
Rotor angle <1>
w/o mot. encoder 0 10 K0090
d n/f(act,encod) To speed/
Pulse encoder
11 dt KK0091 position processing
From analog input 1 Pulse encoder with control track
[80.8]
12 Pos (act Mot) <1>
[350.2], [352.2]
Analog input 1
Normalization 13 r185
Analog input 2
14
Pulse encoder with zero track Pos. angle <1>
15 KK120
Pulse encod. with zero and control track
AnalogTachScale
16
500 ... 6000 1/min Src Pos SetV <1>
P138.M (3000)
P172.B
KK

From analog input 2

[80.8]
Normalization

<1> Angle displayed only at P130 = 15,16

<2> Compact PLUS: terminal strip X104

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Encoder evaluation fp_vc_250_e.vsd Function diagram
- 250 -
Speed/position processing 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Frequency signal evaluation mode Conf Setp Enc
1000...1133 n959.33 = __ (4)
(P139 = 1xxx) P139 (0000)
SetpEnc Ref Freq
Normalization
Terminal assignment X400: 500...1000000 Hz
Channel 1 forwards counter (+) <2>
60...67: n.c. X401/68 P141.1 (10000) <3>
X401/69 Channel 1 forwards counter (-) Counter d SBP Setpoint Channel 1
Terminal assignment X401: <1> channel 1 dt KK0094
X401/70 Channel 1 reverse counter (+)
68: Forward counter channel 1+ (forw./rev.) SetpEnc Ref Freq
69: Forwards counter channel 1- X401/71 Channel 1 reverse counter (-) Normalization
500...1000000 Hz
70: Reverse counter channel 1+ <2>
P141.2 (10000) <3>
71: Reverse counter channel 1- X401/72 Channel 2 forwards counter (+) Counter d SBP Setpoint Channel 2
72: Forwards counter channel 2+ Channel 2 forwards counterr (-) channel 2 dt KK0095
73: Forwards counter channel 2- X401/73 (forwards)
74: n.c.
75: n.c. SBP

Encoder signal evaluation mode Conf Setp Enc

2000...2133
(P139 = 2xxx) P139 (0000)

Terminal assignment X400: SetpEncPulse # to encoder evaluation [250.3]

Normalization
60: Supply voltage 60...20000
Track A (+) <2> <3>
61: Supply ground X401/68 P140.1 (1024)
Track A (-) SBP Setpoint Channel 1
62...67: n.c. X401/69 Counter d
Track B (+) channel 1 dt KK0094
Terminal assignment X401: <4> X401/70 (forw./rev.)
Track B (-) SetpEncPulse #
68: Track A+ (channel 1) X401/71 Normalization
60..20000
69: Track A- (channell 1) <2>
P140.2 (1024) <3>
70: Track B+ (channel 1) Channel 2 forwards counter(+) Counter
X401/72 d SBP Setpoint Channel 2
71: Track B- (channel 1) Channel 2 forwards counter (-) channel 2 dt KK0095
72: Forwards counter channel 2+ X401/73 (forwards)
Supply voltage
73: Forwards counter channel 2- X400/60
74: n.c. Supply ground SBP
X400/61
75: n.c.

<1> maximum input frequency: 1 MHz

Setting P139: Encoder power supply
Input level A/B track x0xx: 5V
<2> Normalization via
x1xx: 15V
- Frequency signal evaluation mode xxx0: Channel 1 / encoder input HTL unipolar
Frequency (frequencies stated in P141.1 and .2 xxx1: Channel 1 / encoder input TTL unipolar
correspond to the output of xxx2: Channel 1 / encoder input HTL differential input
100% to the connectors KK0094 and KK0095. xxx3: Channel 1 / encoder input TTL / RS422 U12x (0) Smoothing Time Constant
- Encoder signal evaluation mode Input level zero track U95x.xx = __ (20) 0...3 0...10000 ms
Pulse number (pulse numbers of connected xx0x: Channel 2 HTL unipolar U1xx (0)
encoders stated in P140.1 and .2) xx1x: Channel 2 TTL unipolar
xx2x: Channel 2 HTL differential input 3
<3> optional smoothing s. Function Diagram 735 U1xx (0)
-1
xx3x: Channel 2 TTL / RS422
2
K -1 Kxxxx
<4> maximum input frequency: 410 kHz Mode of setpoint evaluation 1
0xxx: Frequency signal evaluation deactivated 0
1xxx: Frequency signal evaluation mode
2xxx: Encoder signal evaluation mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint input fp_vc_256_e.vsd Function diagram
- 256 -
Setpoint input via external frequency or encoder signals with the SBP option board 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Selectivity
0 ... 1 n959.62 = 0
P371 (0)

Overcurrent F11

Phase 1 Amps
r832.1 <1>
IL1 Phase 1 Amps
A K0238 IL1 set/act values [285.1], [286.1]

D Phase 3 Amps
r832.2
IL3 Phase 3 Amps <1>
A K0239 IL3 Set/act values [285.1], [286.1]

Overcurrent F11

C/L+
+
DC link bus A to evaluation set/act values
module
D/L- [285.1], [286.1]
– D K0240
<1> At maximum, the r.m.s. value of the actual DC BusVolts act
current is displayed. Drive Temperat.
r833 <4>
<2> Only valid for Compact PLUS M to alarms/faults [490.1]
Temp.
•••

A
measuring X
<3> Not valid for Compact PLUS Drive Temperat.
points <3>
<4> r833.01 for Compact PLUS K0247

Select TmpSensor <2> Motor temperature monitoring <2>

0...3 Monitoring with KTY84: P131 = 0
P131(0) Monitoring with PT100: P131 = 3
from SBP mode
encoder signal evaluation Motor temp. SBP <2>
Temperature
X400/62 K0252
evaluation n959.62 = 4
X400/63
Motor Temp
Src Motor Temp r009
MotTemp P385.B (245) to temperature model [430.1], [431.1] No temp. sensor : P380 = P381 = 0°C
X103/ 29 K0245 K Temp. sensor KTY84 : P380, P381 > 1°C
X103/ 30 to alarms/faults [490.1] Temp. monitoring PTC : P380, P381 = 1°C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Measured-value sensing fp_vc_280_e.vsd Function diagram
- 280 -
n/f/T control, master/slave drive, v/f control 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 P276 (0) 2)
(0...2) n957.05 = 3

Isd(act)
Phase 1 Amps K0182
3
Output Amps
From MVal sensing Mean r004
2s Output Amps
[ 280.3 ] Vector value Isq(act)
rotation gener-
i2sd + i2sq K0022
K0184 OutputAmps(rms)
ation
K0242
Phase 3 Amps
2
M (set, friction)
Transformation angle from gating unit [420.8] [371] ... [375]
Motor Torque
– r007
30 ms Motor Torque
isq * ψ K0024
ψ Torque(act)
From motor model K0241
[395.3], [396.3], [397.5]
n/f(act) Output Power
r218 r005
x Output Power
x
K0023
From speed y
n/f(act)
processing y
[350.7], [351.7] KK0148
Motor Rtd Speed x Mot pole pair #
[550], [551] 60
Output Volts
r003
From current control [390.7] 2s Output Volts
K0021
U(set,abs)
K0189

DC Bus Volts
From MVal sensing r006
[280.8] 2s DC Bus Volts
K0025
DC BusVolts act
K0240
SmoothDCBusVolts
0 ...16
P287.M (9) 1) 1) When P287 = 16, the DC-link voltage
calculated from the converter supply
voltage is displayed (Ud = Udrated).

DCBusVolt(smo´d) 2) When P276 = 0 no mean value

K0236 generation takes place.

Tsmooth= Tp⋅2P287

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Evaluation of setpoints/actual values for voltage/current/torque/output fp_vc_285_e.vsd Function diagram
- 285 -
n/f/T control, master/slave drive 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.06 = 3

Phase 1 Amps
3
Output Amps
From measured- r004
2s Output Amps
value sensing Isq(act)
[ 280.3 ]
Ammeter i2sd + i2sq K0022
K0184 OutputAmps(rms)
K0242
Phase 3 Amps
2 Smooth Isq
0 ... 3200
P335.M (~)
Transformation angle from gating unit [420.8]

Isq(set,active)
K0168

n/f(ist) Output Power

r218 r005
x Output Power
From setp frequency x
K0023
[400] to [402] y
n/f(act)
KK0148 y

Motor Rtd Speed x Mot pole pair #

[550] 60
Output Volts
r003
From v/f characteristic [405.7] 2s Output Volts
K0021
U(set,V/f)
K0204

DC Bus Volts
From MVal sensing r006
[280.8] 2s DC Bus Volts
K0025
DC BusVolts act
K0240
SmoothDCBusVolts
0 ...16
P287.M (9) 1) 1) When P287 = 16, the DC-link voltage
calculated from the converter supply
voltage is displayed (Ud = Udrated).

DCBusVolt(smo´d)
K0236

Tsmooth = Tp⋅2P287

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Evaluation of set/actual values for voltage/current/torque/output fp_vc_286_e.vsd Function diagram
- 286 -
V/f open-loop control 12.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Src FSetp Bit2
P417.B (0)
B n959.40 = 4
Src FSetp Bit3
FixConn 0% Select FSetp bit 1 from control word 2/bit 21 [190.5]
P418.B (0)
0.0 % KK0000
B Select FSetp bit 0 from control word 2/bit 20 [190.5]

FixConn 100% Fixed Freq1(set) KK0041

100.0 % KK0001 -200.000 ... 200.000 % 0 0 0 0 # Active FSetp
P401.F (0.000) r419
Fixed Freq2(set) KK0042
FixConn 200%
-200.000 ... 200.000 % 0 0 0 1
200.0 % KK0002
P402.F (0.000)
Fixed Freq3(set) KK0043
FixConn -100% -200.000 ... 200.000 % 0 0 1 0
-100.0 % KK0003 P403.F (0,000)
Fixed Freq4(set) KK0044
FixConn -200% -200.000 ... 200.000 % 0 0 1 1
-200.0 % KK0004 P404.F (0.000)

FixConn 05%
Fixed Freq5(set) KK0045
50.0 % KK0005
-600.000 ... 600.000 Hz 0 1 0 0
P405.F (0.000) Active FSetp
KK0046 r420
FixConn 150% Fixed Freq6(set)
150.0 % KK0006 -600.000 ... 600.000 Hz 0 1 0 1
P406.F (0.000) Active FSetp
KK0047 KK0040
Fixed Freq7(set)
FixConn -50%
-600.000 ... 600.000 Hz 0 1 1 0
-50.0 % KK0007
P407.F (0.000)
Fixed Freq8(set) KK0048
FixConn -150% -600.000 ... 600.000 Hz 0 1 1 1
-150.0 % KK0008 P408.F (0.000)

Fixed Freq9(set) KK0049

-36000.0 ... 36000.0 1/min 1 0 0 0
FixBinector 0 P409.F (0.0)
0 B0000 KK0050
Fixed Freq10(set)
-36000.0 ... 36000.0 1/min 1 0 0 1
P410.F (0.0)
FixBinector 1
Fixed Freq11(set) KK0051
1 B0001
B000
-36000.0 ... 36000.0 1/min 1 0 1 0
P411.F (0.0)
Fixed Freq12(set) KK0052
-36000.0 ... 36000.0 1/min 1 0 1 1
P412.F (0.0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_vc_290_e.vsd Function diagram
- 290 -
Fixed setpoints 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Conf MOP n959.41 = 4
0000 ... 0111
P425 (0110)

MOP storage: 0 Mot. potentiometer setpoint is not stored, starting

point is specified after ON by P426 StartValue MOP
1 Mot. potentiometer setpoint is stored in a non-volatile
manner after OFF. After ON the mot. potentiometer
is set to this value
Ramp generator: 0 Ramp generator is not effective in automatic mode,
accel./decel. time = 0
1 Ramp generator is always effective
Initial rounding: 0 Without initial rounding
1 With initial rounding (with which the times set in P431 and
P432 are not precisely realized. P431 and P432 refer to a
Raise MOP from control word 1 setpoint of 100 %.)
bit 13 [180.7]
Lower MOP from control MOP Accel Time MOP Decel Time
word 1 bit 14 [180.7] 0.0 ... 1000.0 s 0.0 ... 1000.0 s
P431 (10.0) P432 (10.0)
Src MOP inv. Src Manual/Auto
0 0 P423 (0) P430 (0)
B B
MOP (max) MOP (Out)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % 0 1 r424
MOP (Input)
P421 (100.0) KK0057
0
0 MOP (Out)
MOP (min) -1 1 KK0058
-200.0 ... 200.0 % 1 0
1
P422 (0.0)
MOP
Src Auto Setp (Realization via internal
P429 (0) ramp-function generator with
1 1 KK fixed initial rounding)

Src SetV MOP

P426 (0.0)
P428 (0)
0.0 ... 200.0 %
KK
StartValue MOP
Src Set MOP
P427 (0)
B
ON from sequence control [180.7]
0

-1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_vc_300_e.vsd Function diagram
- 300 -
Motorized potentiometer 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 from synchronization [X02.3] <1> Sync TargFreq <1> n959.42 = 4
KK0275

Slip Frequency
KK0188 +
from V/f control [400.5]
from f control [396.4]
–
Inching bit 0 from control word 1 / bit 8 [180.7] Src n/f(max, FWD Spd)
P483.B (2)
Inching bit 1 from control word 1 / bit 9 [180.7] KK M n/f(max, FWD Spd)
I KK0078

Scale Add Setp1 Add Setpoint 1 n/f(max, FWD Spd)

-300.00 ... 300.00 % r437 0.0 ... 200.0 %
P434.F (100.00) P452.M (~)
Add Setpoint 1 Release FWD speed
Src AddSetpoint1
KK0067 from control word 1/bit 11 [180.7]
P433.P (0)
Release REV speed n(set, spd sel)
KK
from control word 1/bit 12 [180.7] r451
Scale Main Setp Main Setp.(act)
-300.00 ... 300.00 % r447 n(set, spd sel)
P444.F (100,00) Min Setp
KK0071
Main Setp.(act) n(set, total1) -200.0 ... 200.0 %
Src MainSetpoint
KK0069 KK0070 P457.F (0.0)
P443.B (58) + to [320.4]
KK 0 0 [320.4], [318.6], [480.6]
+ 0% 0 0
y To
Jog Setp 1 setpoint
P445.F (0,0) -200.000 ... 200.000 % 0 1 0 1
=20 channel
-200.0 ... 200.0 % P448 (0.000) x [317.1]
Base Setpoint
≠19,20 1 0
-1 No SpdDir Sel
Jog Setp 2
Setting notes for analog inputs: B0200
-200.000 ... 200.000 % 1 0 0
B = Base value (P352, P353) =19 1 1
P449 (0.000)
Smin = Smallest signal value (in Hz, rpm)
Smax = Greatest signal value (in Hz, rpm)
Emin = Smallest input value in V Drive Status to P455.F (0,0) P456.F (0,0)
Emax = Greatest input value in V r001 [320.4], [318.6], 0.0 ...200.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 %
Maintain setpoint 1 1
19 = Optimization n/f controller [480.4] Skip Value Skip Freq Width
n/f(max,REV Spd)
Input values for current specification: 20 = Synchronization * <1>
-200.0 ... 0.0 %
P632.x = 2: P453.M (~)
-20 mA ⇒ Emin = -10 V 100 % S max − S min <1> not Compact PLUS
20 mA ⇒ Emax = 10 V P444 = 10 V ⋅ ⋅
B E max − E min M
Q.n/f(max,REV Spd) n/f(max,REV Spd)
P632.x = 4:
4 mA ⇒ Emin = 0 V 100 % S min ⋅ E max − S max ⋅ E min P484.B (2) A KK0079
P445 = ⋅
20 mA ⇒ Emax = 10 V B E max − E min KK -1 X
* only in the case of line synchronization (P534 = 2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel (part 1) fp_vc_316_e.vsd Function diagram
- 316 -
Master Drive 24.07.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Release setpoint n959.43 = 4
[180.6]
Src Scale Torq(PRE)
&
Accel. Time Unit Decel. Time Unit OFF 3 Initial Rounding Time
Converter status 0 ... 2 0 ... 2 0.0 ... 999.9 s P473.B (1)
OPERATION P463.F (0) P465.F (0) P466.2 (0.0) K

Accel. Time Decel. Time Decel. Time OFF3 ProtRampGen Gain

0.0 ... 999.9 0.0 ... 999.9 0.0 ... 999.9 s 1.0 ... 100.0
P462.F (10.0) P464.F (10.0) P466.1 (5.0) P467.F (1.0) Scale Torq(PRE) Start-up Time
0.0 ... 200.0 % 0.10 ... 327.67 s
P471.M (0) P116 (1.00)
n(set, RGenIn) Tup Tup Tdn
KK0072 y T(Precontrol)
K0077
0% 0 100 %
x Ramp-function generator n(set, RGenOut)
KK0073 To setpoint channel
n(set,Spd Sel) 1
[318.1]
from setpoint channel [316.8] <2>
n/f(set,Ramp IN) t
r460 Accel active
B0201 n(set, RGenOut)
Src Set RGen Decel active r480
-100 %
P477.B (0) B0202
B dy/dt AR ER AR ER AR ER AR ER RGen active
to status word 1

Src SetV RGen 1 [200.2]

P478.B (0)
KK t

<1> B0237 Set RGen <3>

Tup_eff
Effective acceleration time:Tup_eff =Tup + (AR/2+ER/2)
<1> Tdn_eff B0238 RGen AccBlock <3>
Effective deceleration time:Tdn_eff =Tdn + (AR/2+ER/2)

<2> B0239 RGen DecBlock <3>

Rounding is also effective during zero passage
B0240 ProtRGen act<4>
<3>
The RGen (setting and stopping) is only set by internal <1>
B0205 RGen blocked
control functions AR ER
e. g. - Kinetic buffering
- Flying restart B0206 RGen released
- Flexible response
- Model change in the case of f-control P469.F (0,50) P475 (0,0) [180.7]
B0207 RGen stopped
- Line synchronization 0.00 ... 10.00 s 0.0 ... 50.0 RGen Release
Ramp StartSmooth Ramp Limitation
<4> B0208 RGen set <3>
In the case of f-control P468 (0) P470.F (0,50) P476 (1,0) [180.7]
(P100 = 3), the protective HLG works in the range of the 0 ... 1 0.00 ... 10.00 s 0.0 ... 20.0 No RGen Stop
RGen Round Type Ramp End Smooth RampGen Act Hyst B0209 RGen tracked
current model
RGen tracking
active [480.4]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel (Part 2) fp_vc_317_e.vsd Function diagram
- 317 -
Master drive + RFG 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.44 = 3

n/f(set,rampOUT) n/f(set,total2) n/f(max, FWD Spd

r480 r481 [316.6]

n/f(set, rampOUT) n/f(set,total2) y Limitr FWD act.

KK0073 KK0074 B0203
from setpoint channel [317.8] + x Speed setpoint [319.2]
Limitr REV act.
+
Src.Diameter factor B0204
P440 (1)
No inching KK
[180.7]
n/f Droop No OFF3 n/f(max,REV Spd)
[365.8], [367.5] [180.7] Add Setpoint 2 [316.6]
Scale Add Setp2
KK0068
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P439.F (100.00) 0
0
Src AddSetpoint2 0 – Add Setpoint 2
0%
P438.B (0) r442
+ 1
KK +
1
df(Sync.Reg.)
KK0277

From synchronization <1>

[X02.8 ]

<1> not Compact PLUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel (part 3) fp_vc_318_e.vsd Function diagram
- 318 -
Master drive 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.45 = 3
n/f(set)
r482
to closed-loop control
Speed setpoint [318.7] [360.1], [362.1], [365.1],
to open-loop V/f control
[364.1], [400.1], [401.1], [402.1]
n/f(set)
KK0075
Scale TorqLim1
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P494.F (100.00)
Max Torque 1
Src FixTorque 1 r497
FixTorque 1 Set Torq(limit1,set) P493.B (170)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0170 K to control [370.1]
P492.F (100,0) Max Torque 1
K0082
Scale TorqLim2
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P500.F (100.00) Max Torque 2
Src FixTorq 2 r503
FixTorq 2 Set Torq(limit2,set) P499.B (171)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0171 K to control [370.1]
P498.F (-100.0) Max Torque 2
K0084

ScaleTorqAddSetp
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P507.F (100.00)
Torq AddSetp
Src Torq Add r510
Torq AddFSetp Torq Add FSetp P506.B (87)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0087 K to control [365.1], [367.3]
P505.F (0.0) Torq AddSetp
K0086

Scale I Add Setp

-200.00 ... 200.00 %
P509.F (100.00) I AddSetp
Src I Add r511
I Add Fsetp I Add FSetp P508.B (88)
to control [382.1]
-200.00 ... 200.00 % K0088 K
I AddSetp to v/f characteristic [400] to [402]
P504.F (0.0)
K0085

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel (part 4) fp_vc_319_e.vsd Function diagram
- 319 -
Master drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 P354 Reference Torque Scale TorqLim1
P113 Rated motor torque n959.46 = 3
-300.00 ... 300.00
P494.F (100.00)
Fix Torque 1
Src FixTorque 1 r496
FixTorque 1 Set FixTorque 1 Set P493.B (170)
-200.0 ... 200.0% K0170 K
P492.F (100.0) Fix Torque 1
K0081
Scale TorqLim2
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P500.F (100.00) Fix Torque 2
Src FixTorq 2 r502
FixTorq 2 Set FixTorq 2 Set P499.B (171)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0171 K
P498.F (-100.0) Fix Torque 2
K0083
Max Torque 1 K0082 Max Torque 1
Scale Torq Sept r497
-300.00 ... 300.00 % To control [369.1], [370.1]
P487.F (100.00)
Torque Setpoint Max Torque 2
Src Torque Setp r490 r503
P486.B (0) + to control [369.1], [370.1]
K -1
T(Setpoint)
+
K0080
ScaleTorqAddSetp K0084 Max Torque 2
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P507.F (100.00)
Torq AddSetp
Src Torq Add r510
Torq Add Fsetp Torq Add Fsetp P506.B (87) Minimum setpoint
≥0 Torq Setp
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0087 K from setpoint channel part 1
P505.F (0.0) Torq FixAddSet [316.8]
K0086 to control
<0
[351.1]
n/f(max, FWD Spd) ≥0
[316.6]
=0
<0
n/f(set) KK0075 n/f(set,lim)
r482
≥0
to control
Minimum setpoint >0 [361.1], [363.1]
[316.8] <0

≥0
Scale I Add Setp <0
n/f(max,REV Spd)
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
[316.6] <0
P509.F (100.00) I AddSetp
Src I Add K0085 I FixAddSet
r511
I Add Fsetp I Add Fsetp P508.B (88)
to control [382.1]
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0088 K
P504.F (0.0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_vc_320_e.vsd Function diagram
- 320 -
Slave drive 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Selection of fixed setp bit0 for control word 2 /bit 20 [190.5] n959.39 = 4

Selection of fixed setp bit 1 for control word 2 /bit 21 [190.5]

Src FSetp Bit2 P417.B(0)

B

Src FSetp Bit3 P418.B(0)

B
Src FSetp Bit4 P2818.B(0)
B
Src FSetpBit5 P2819.B(0)
B
Src FSetp Bit6 P2820.B(0)
Fixed B
setpoints
FixSetpoint
FSetp 1 KK0041 # Active FSetp
0.000...0.500 m/s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r419
Sel FDS RGen
U810.F (0.000) FixSetpoint 0...1
FSetp 2 KK0042 U826 (0)
0.000...30.000 m/s 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
U811.F (0.000) FixSetpoint Travel Command
FSetp 3 KK0043 r2823
0.000...30.000 m/s 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Evaluation
U812.F (0.000) Function data-set ramp funct. generator [326.3]
FixSetpoint
FSetp 4 KK0044
0.000...30.000 m/s 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 T
U813.F (0.000) Curr FixSetp
FixSetpoint
KK0040
FSetp 5 KK0045
0.000...30.000 m/s 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
U814.F (0.000) FixSetpoint Active FSetp
KK0046 U839 (0,200) r420
FSetp 6
0.010...2.000 m/s
0.000...30.000 m/s 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
EmergOper V
U815.F (0.000) FixSetpoint
FSetp 7 KK0047
0.000...30.000 m/s 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 EmergOper Vd
U816.F (0.000) FixSetp 10...400 V
U837.2 (380)
FSetp 8 KK0048 Upper limit Emerg Oper
0.000...30.000 m/s 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 B0856
DC link voltage Vd
U817.F (0.000)
Src BCD Trigger Lower limit
EmergOper Vd
U821.B (1) U822 (1) U845.F (0) 10...400 V EmergOper MDS
B 0...2 0.00...10.00 s 1...4
U837.1 (380)
FSetp Selectl Approach Delay U838 (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_vc_324_e.vsd Function diagram
- 324 -
Fixed setpoints, lift and hoisting-gear applications (U800=1) 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Conf MOP n959.41 = 4
0000 ... 0111
P425 (0110)

Mem. mot. potentiometer 0 Motor-pot. setpoint is not stored.

Starting point is stipulated after ON by means of P426 Start Value MOP.
1 Motor-pot. setpoint is stored as non-volatile after OFF.
Motor-pot. set to this value after ON.

Ramp funct. gen. mot. potent.: 0 Ramp function generator is not active in automatic mode,
Accel/decel time =0
1 Ramp function generator is always active
Initial rounding mot. potent.: 0 without initial rounding
1 with intial rounding (the times set in P431 and P432 are not
therefore implemented exactly.
Mot. pot. higher from P431 and P432 refer to a setpoint of 100 %).
control word 1 bit 13 [180.7]
Mot. pot. lower from MOP Accel Time MOP Decel Time
control word 1 bit 14 [180.7] 0.0 ... 1000.0 s 0.0 ... 1000.0 s
P431 (10,0) P432 (10,0)
Src MOP inv. Src Manual/Auto
0 0 P423 (0) P430 (0)
B B
Motorpoti (max) MOP (Out)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % 0 1 r424
MOP Input
P421 (100,0) KK0057
0
0 MOP (Output)
Motorpoti (min) -1 1 KK0058
-200.0 ... 200.0 % 1 0
1
P422 (0,0)
Motor potentiometer
Src Auto Setp (created by means of
P429 (0) internal ramp function
1 1 KK generator with fixed initial
rounding)

Src SetV MOP

P426 (0,0)
P428 (0)
0.0 ... 200.0 %
KK
Start Value MOP
Src Set MOP
P427 (0)
B
ON from sequence control [180.7]
0

-1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel fp_vc_325_e.vsd Function diagram
- 325 -
Motor potentiometer 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 from synchronization [X02.3] <1> Sync TargFreq <1>
KK0275 n959.47 = 4
Slip Frequency
from open-loop V/f control [400.5]
KK0188 +
from closed-loop f control [396.4]

Inching bit 0 from control word 1 / bit 8 [180.7] –

Inching bit 1 from control word 1 / bit 9 [180.7]

Add Setpoint 1 Src n/f(max, FWD Spd)

r437
P483.B (2)
Add Setpoint 1 KK M n/f(max, FWD Spd)
KK0067 I KK0078
Funct AddSetp1 N
Scale Add Setp1 0 ... 1
-300.00 ... 300.00 % U825 (0)
P434.F (100.00) Max Speed
0 ... 6000 min-1
Src AddSetpoint1
1 U805 (1500)
P433.B (0)
Release FWD speed
KK from control word 1/bit 11 [180.7]
0 Release REV speed n(set, spd sel)
from control word 1/bit 12 [180.7] r451
Main Setp.(act)
Scale Main Setp r447
-300.00 ... 300.00 % n(set, spd sel)
P444.F (100,00) Main Setp.(act) Min Setp
KK0071
KK0069 n(set, total1) -200.0 ... 200.0 %
Src MainSetpoint
KK0070 P457.F (0,0)
P443.B (58) + to [320.4]
KK 0 0 [320.4], [328.6], [480.6]
+ 0% 0 0
y To
Jog Setp 1 setpoint
P445.F (0,0) -200.000 ... 200.000 % 0 1 0 1
=20 channel
-200.0 ... 200.0 % P448.F (0.000) x [327.1]
Base Setpoint
≠19,20
-1 1 0 No SpdDir Sel
Jog Setp 2
Setting notes for analog inputs B0200
-200.000 ... 200.000 % 1 0 0
B = Base value (P352, P353) =19 1 1
P449.F (0.000)
Smin = Smallest signal value (in Hz, rpm)
Smax = Greatest signal value (in Hz,rpm)
Drive Status to P455.F (0,0) P456.F (0,0)
Emin = Smallest input value in V
r001 [320.4], [328.6], 0.0 ...200.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 %
Emax = Greatest input value in V Maintain setpoint 1 1
(19 = Optimization n/f controller) [480.4] Skip Value Skip Freq Width
Max Speed
Input values for current specification: 20 = Synchronization *) <1>
0 ... 6000 min-1
-20 mA ⇒ Emin = -10 V U805 (1500)
to
100 % S max − S min
20 mA ⇒ Emax = 10 V P444 = 10 V ⋅ ⋅
B E max − E min
Q.n/f(max,REV Spd)
M n/f(max,REV Spd)
4 mA ⇒ Emin = -10 V P484.B (2) A KK0079
to 100 % S min ⋅E max − S max ⋅E min
20 mA ⇒ Emax = 10 V P445 =
B
⋅
E max − E min
KK -1 X
* Only in the case of line synchronization (P534 = 2) <1> not Compact PLUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel (Part 1) fp_vc_326_e.vsd Function diagram
- 326 -
Master Drive, Lift And Hoisting-Gear Applications (U800 = 1) 26.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.48 = 4
Release setpoint Decel. Time OFF3 OFF 3 Initial Rounding Time
0.0 ... 999.9 s Src Scale Torq(PRE)
[180.6] 0.0 ... 999.9 s
P466.1 (5,0) P466.2 (0.0) P473.B (1)
Converter status
OPERATION
& Acceleration
0.100...10.000 m/s²
Deceleration
0.100...10.000 m/s²
ProtRampGen Gain
1.0 ... 100.0
K

U827.F (1,0) U828.F (1,0) P467.F (1.0) Scale Torq(PRE) Start-up Time
n(set, RGenIn)
0.0 ... 200.0 % 0.10 ... 327.67 s
KK0072 P471.M (0) P116 (1.00)

Tup Tup Tdn T(Precontrol)

y
K0077
0 100 %
0%
x
Ramp-function generator
n(set, RGenOut)
1 KK0073
<2> n/f(set) [328.1]
n/f(set,Ramp IN) t
r460

n(set, RGenOut)
r480
-100 % Accel active
0 B0201
dy/dt AR ER AR ER AR ER AR ER
Src Set RGen
1
n(set,Spd Sel) P477.B (0)
from setpoint channel Decel active
B
[326.8] B0202
t RGen active
Short Run to status word 1

<3>
B0855 Tup_eff
<1> Tdn_eff
1 [200.2]

Time Short Run Src SetV RGen <1>

0.00...10.00 s T 0 P478.B (0)
U846.F (0) KK AR ER

B0205 RGen blocked

B0206 RGen released

K0650

Src T Short Run & U829.F (0,8) P476 (1,0) [180.7]

B0207 RGen stopped

U847.B(650) 0.100...10.000 m/s³ 0.0 ... 20.0 No RGen Stop B0208 RGen set <3>
K Init Jerk RampGen Act Hyst
U830.F (0,8) B0209 RGen tracked
P468 (0) [180.7] P475 (0,0)
Approach 0.100...10.000 m/s³ RGen Release 0.0 ... 50.0
[fixed setpoint] 0 ... 1 RGen tracking
Final Jerk Ramp Limitation
RGen Round Type active [480.4]
Ramp. funct. gen. active

<1> Effective acceleration time:Tup_eff =Tup + (AR/2+ER/2)

Effective deceleration time:Tdn_eff =Tdn + (AR/2+ER/2)
<2> Rounding has an effect even for zero passage
<3> Tv = Tab · Connector value

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel (Part 2) fp_vc_327_e.vsd Function diagram
- 327 -
Master drive + ramp function generator, lift and hoisting-gear applications (U800 = 1) 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.49 = 3

n/f(set,rampOUT) n/f(set,total2) n/f(max, FWD Spd

r480 r481 [326.6]

n/f(set.rampOUT) n/f(set,total2) y Limitr FWD act.

KK0073 KK0074 B0203
from setpoint channel [317.8] + x Speed setpoint [319.2]
Limitr REV act.
+
B0204

No inching
[180.7] n/f(max,REV Spd)
n/f Droop Smooth AddSetp2 No OFF3 [326.6]
[365.8], [367.5] 4...1000 ms [180.7]
Scale Add Setp2 U841.M (50) Add Setpoint 2
-300.00 ... 300.00 % KK0068
P439.F (100.00)
0
Src AddSetpoint2 0 – Add Setpoint 2
0%
P438.B (0) r442
KK
1
+ +

Start Pulse
-100.0 %...100.0 %
U842.M (0,0)

Src StartPulse Starting pulse

U844.B(275)
B + +
Starting pulse triggering
Standard: Release
brake U843.M (100)
50...1000 ms
SmoothStartPulse

From synchronization <1>

[X02.8]

<1> not Compact PLUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel (part 3) fp_vc_328_e.vsd Function diagram
- 328 -
Master drive, lift and hoisting-gear applications (U800 = 1) 26.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n/f(set) n959.45 = 3
r482
to closed-loop control
Speed setpoint [328.7] [360.1], [362.1], [365.1],
to open-loop V/F control
[364.1], [400.1], [401.1], [402.1]
n/f(set)
KK0075

Scale TorqLim1
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P494.F (100.00)
Max Torque 1
Src FixTorque 1 r497
FixTorque 1 Set Torq(limit1,set) P493.B (170)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0170 K to control [370.1]
P492.F (100,0) Max Torque 1
K0082
Scale TorqLim2
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P500.F (100.00) Max Torque 2
Src FixTorq 2 r503
FixTorq 2 Set Torq(limit2,set) P499.B (171)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0171 K to control [370.1]
P498.F (-100.0) Max Torque 2
K0084

ScaleTorqAddSetp
-300.00 ... 300.00 %
P507.F (100.00)
Torq AddSetp
Src Torq Add r510
Torq AddFSetp Torq Add FSetp P506.B (87)
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0087 K to control [365.1], [367.3]
P505.F (0.0) Torq AddSetp
K0086

Scale I Add Setp

-200.00 ... 200.00 %
P509.F (100.00) I AddSetp
Src I Add r511
I Add Fsetp I Add FSetp P508.B (88)
to control [382.1]
-200.00 ... 200.00 % K0088 K
I AddSetp to v/f characteristic [400] to [402]
P504.F (0.0)
K0085

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel (part 4) fp_vc_329_e.vsd Function diagram
- 329 -
Master drive, lift and hoisting-gear applications (U800 = 1) 26.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.10 = 2

Rot Freq
2s
r002
Speed smooth
KK0020

r015
n(act)

max. dn/dt Smooth n/f(FWD) Slip fail corr'n

0.00 ... 600.00 Hz 0.0 ... 20.0 ms 0 ... 2
P215.M (~) P216.M (0.0 ms) P217.M (0) Sel Mot Encod To motor model [395.1], [397.1]
[250.6] To speed controller [360.1], [361.1]
To set/actual values [285.1]
Src n/f(act) n/f(act) To DT1 element [365.1], [366.1]
P222.B (0) Plausibility test normal =2
[250.8] Tracking 10,11,12 r218 To friction torque [373.1], [374.1]
KK error slow =1 15,16 To blocking diagnosis [485.1], [487.1]
[251.8] A43
correction without =0
F53
(P222=0 n/f(act)
corr. to Tacho Error 13,14 KK0148
P222=91) B0256

P806.M (0)
0 ... 1
React Tach Err
<1>

<1> Only in the case of n-control (P100 = 4)

Not in the case of synch. motor (P95=12)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed/position processing fp_vc_350_e.vsd Function diagram
- 350 -
Speed/torque control, master/slave drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.11 = 2

Rot Freq
r002
2s Speed smooth
KK0020

r015
Smooth n/f(setl) From control word 2 bit 27 n(act)
[362.1] [190.5]
n/f(set)
r482 n/f(act)
From setpoint channel [318.8] r218
0 + + To speed controller [362]
n/f/set,limit)
KK0075 + + n/f(act)
1
Start Time x ProtRGen Gain KK0148
[ 317.7] [317.6]
From torque limitation [370.8] Torq(limit1,act)
K0172

From setpoint channel

[320.8]

From torque limitation [370.8] Torq(limit2,act)

K0173

n/f(FWD Ctrl)
KK0149

From motor model [396.8] + To motor model [396.1]

+
f(cEMF Reg,i)
KK0234 Smooth n/f(FWD)
0.0 ... 20.0 ms Src n/f(act)
P216.M (~) P222.B (0)
KK

From motor model [396.8]

f(cEMF Reg,p)
KK0233

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed processing fp_vc_351_e.vsd Function diagram
- 351 -
Frequency control, master/slave drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.12 = 2

Rot Freq
2s
r002
Speed smooth
KK0020

r015
n(act)

max. dn/dt
0.00 ... 600.00 Hz
P215.M (~)

n/f(act)
Src n/f(act) To speed controller [364.1]
r218
P222.B (0) [250.8] Plausibility test To set/actual values [286.1]
KK A43
F53 n/f(act)
KK0148
(P222=0
corr. to
P222=91)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed/position processing fp_vc_352_e.vsd Function diagram
- 352 -
v/f characteristic with speed controller 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Src n-RegGain
P238.B (1) n957.15 = 3
K
Is only calculated if P260 or P262
T3 = 2 x T0 are not connected in diagram 375

n/f-Reg. Gain2 n/f RegGain(act)

0.0...2000.0 K0156
P236.M (10.0) Src M(lim,reg1)
n/f RegGain(act) P256.B (172)
n/f-Reg Gain 1 r237
Src n/f RegAdapt K
0.0...2000.0 M Mmax1(reg,act)
P232.B (0) P235.M (~) I K0161
K N
M(lim,act)
[369], [370]
P233.M (0.0) P234.M (100.0) n/f(Reg,I-Comp)
0.0...200.0 % 0.0...200.0 % K0155
n/f Reg Time
n/f Reg. Adapt.1 n/f-Reg. Adapt.2 n/f (Reg,P)
smooth n/f(set) 25...32001 ms
P240.M (400) K0154
0...2000 ms
P221.M (4) Scale T(Pre) n/f(set,smo'd) Smooth m(set)
[ 317.7] r229 0...2000 ms
From setpoint n/f Deviation P220.M (0)
channel n/f(set,smo'd) Kp Tn T(set,reg. off)
KK0150 KK0152
[319.8], [329.8] =0.0 % y r255

x
>0.0 %
+ – To torque pre-
r014 control [365.6]
Setp Speed n/f(Band-Stop) Src Set n/f-Reg I
Set I Comp act
KK0158 P242.B (0)
B0229
B T(set, n/f Reg)
n(act) n/f Reg Disable
K0153
r219 B0228
0 0
Smooth n/f(act) Band-Stop Gain Filter bandwidth SrcSetV n/f-Reg I 0
0...2000 ms 0.0...150.0 0.5...20.0 Hz P241.B (0)
Motor #PolePairs P223.M (~) ≠0 1
x P251.M (0.0) P253.M (0.5) K T(lim2,act)
1 ... 15
y y [369], [370]
From speed P109.M (~) x M Mmax2(reg,act)
processing Src nf-Reg I STOP Src T(lim,reg2) A K0162
[350.8] P243.B (0) P257.B (173) X
B K
n/f(act)
KK0148

n/f(act) P254.M (50.0)

r218 5.0...200.0 Hz
ResonFreqBStop From control word 2 bit 25 [190.5]
n/f(act,smo'd)
KK0151 [371.5] ... [374.5]

n/f(act,smo'd) Limitation active from torque limit,

r230 stop I component when torque limits of the unit
have been reached;
Limit I component to torque limits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed controller fp_vc_360_e.vsd Function diagram
- 360 -
Speed control, master drive 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Src n-RegGain
n957.16 = 3
P238.B (1)
K

T3 = 2 x T0
n/f-Reg. Gain2 n/f RegGain(act)
0.0 ... 2000.0 K0156
P236.M (10.0) n/f RegGain(act)
n/f-Reg. Gain1 r237
Src T(lim,reg1)
Src n/f RegAdapt 0.0 ... 2000.0 P256.B (172) Tmax1(reg,act)
P232.B (0) P235.M (~) M
K K0161
K I
Torq(lim1,act) N
[369], [370]
P233.M (0.0) P234.M (100.0) n/f Reg Time
n/f(set,smo'd)
0.0 ... 200.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 % 25 ... 32001 ms
r229
n/f Reg. Adapt.1 n/f Reg. Adapt.2 P240.M (400)

n/f(set) n/f(Reg,I-Port)
KK0150 n/f Deviation K0155 T(set,reg. off)
Kp Tn
KK0152 n/f (Reg,P) r255
K0154 y
from setpoint channel [320.8]
x
+ – to torque/current
r014
Set I Comp act. limitation
Setp Speed n/f(Band-Stop) Src Set n/f-Reg.I
B0229 [371.1], [374.1]
KK0158 P242.B (0)
B n/f-Reg.Stop T(set, n/f Reg)
n (act) B0228 K0153
r219 0 0
Smooth n/f(act) Band-Stop Gain Filter bandwidth Src Set n/f-Reg.I 0
0 ... 2000 ms Torq(lim2,act)
0.0 ... 150.0 0.5 ... 20.0 Hz P241.B (0) [369], [370]
Motor #PolePairs P223.M (~) ≠0 1
x P251.M (0,0) P253.M (0,5) K M Tmax2(reg,act)
from 1 ... 15 Src T(lim,reg2)
y y A K0162
speed P109.M (~) P257.B (173)
x Src n/f-Reg.I STOP X
processing K
[350.8] P243.B (0)
B
n/f(act) n/f(act,smo´d)
KK0148 KK0151
from control word 2 bit 25 [190.5]
n/f(act) n/f(act,smo'd) P254.M (50.0)
r218 r230 5.0 ... 200.0 Hz
ResonFreqBStop [371.5] ... [374.5]
Limitation active from torque limit,
Stop I-component when torque limits of the
unit have been reached;
Limit I-component to torque limits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed limiting controller fp_vc_361_e.vsd Function diagram
- 361 -
Torque control and speed control/slave drive 08.09.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Src n-Reg Gain
P238.B (1) n957.17 = 3
K

T3 = 2 x T0
n/f-Reg. Gain2 n/f RegGain(act)
0.0 ... 2000.0 K0156
P236.M (10,0)
n/f RegGain(act)
n/f-Reg Gain 1 r237 Src T(lim,reg1)
Src n/f RegAdapt 0.0 ... 2000.0
P256.B (172)
P232.B (0) P235.M (~)
K
K M Tmax1(reg,act)
I K0161
N
P233.M (0.0) P234.M (100.0) Torq(lim1,act)
0.0 ... 200.0 % 0.0 ...200.0 % [369], [370]
n/f Reg Time
n/f(set,smo'd) n/f-Reg.Adapt 1 n/f-Reg.Adapt 2 25...32001 ms
smooth n/f(set) r229
0 ... 2000 ms P240.M (400)
P221.M (4) Scale T(Precon)
[317.7] n/f(set) n/f(Reg,I-Comp)
from setpoint
KK0150 n/f Deviation K0155 T(set,reg. off)
channel Kp Tn
[319.8], [329.8] KK0152 n/f (Reg,P) r255
=0.0 %
K0154 y

x
>0.0 %
+ – to torque pre-
r014 control
Set I Comp act.
Setp Speed n/f(Band-Stop) [367.6]
B0229
KK0158
Src Set n/f-Reg I n/f-Reg.Stop T(set, n/f Reg)
n(act) P242.B (0) B0228 K0153
r219 B
Smooth n/f(act) Band-Stop Gain Filter bandwidth
0 ... 2000 ms Torq(lim2,act)
0.0 ...150.0 0.5 ... 20.0 Hz 0 0 [369], [370]
Motor #PolePairs P223.M (~) SrcSetV n/f-Reg I 0
x P251.M (0.0) P253.M (0.5) M Tmax2(reg,act)
1 ... 99 Src T(lim,reg2)
y y P241.B (0) A K0162
from speed P109.M (~) ≠0 1 P257.B (173)
x K X
processing K
[351.8]
Src nf-Reg I STOP
n/f(act) n/f(act,smo'd) P243.B (0)
KK0148 KK0151 B
n/f(act) n/f(act,smo'd) P254.M (50.0)
r218 r230 5.0 ... 200.0 Hz [372.7]
ResonFreqBStop Limitation active from torque limit,
Stop I-component when torque limits of the
unit have been reached;
Limit I-component to torque limits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed controller fp_vc_362_e.vsd Function diagram
- 362 -
Frequency control, master drive 26.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Src n-Reg Gain n957.18 = 3
P238.B (1)
K

T3 = 2 x T0
n/f-Reg. Gain2 n/f RegGain(act)
0.0 ... 2000.0 K0156
P236.M (10,0)
n/f RegGain(act)
n/f-Reg. Gain1 r237
Src n/f RegAdapt 0.0 ... 2000.0
P232.B (0) P235.M (~)
K

P233.M (0.0) P234.M (100.0) n/f Reg Time

n/f(set,smo'd) 0.0 ... 200.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 % 25 ... 32001 ms
r229 n/f-Reg.Adapt 1 n/f-Reg.Adapt 2 P240.M (400)

n/f(set) n/f(Reg,I-Port)
KK0150 n/f Deviation K0155 T(set,reg. off)
Kp Tn
KK0152 n/f (Reg,P) r255
From setpoint channel [320.8] K0154

+ – to torque/current
r014
Src Set n/f-Reg.I Set I Comp act. limitation
Setp Speed n/f(Band-Stop)
B0229 [372.1]
KK0158 P242.B (0)
B n/f-Reg.Stop T(set, n/f Reg)
n (act) B0228 K0153
r219 0 0
Smooth n/f(act) Band-Stop Gain Filter bandwidth Src Set n/f-Reg.I 0
0 ... 2000 ms 0.0 ... 150.0 0.5 ... 20.0 Hz P241.B (0)
Motor #PolePairs P223.M (~) ≠0 1
x P251.M (0.0) P253.M (0.5) K
1 ... 99
y y
from speed P109.M (~)
processing x Src n/f-Reg.I STOP
[351.8] P243.B (0)
B
n/f(act) n/f(act,smo´d)
KK0148 KK0151 [372.5]
n/f (act) n/f(act,smo'd) P254.M (50.0) Limitation active from torque limit,
r218 r230 5.0 ... 200.0 Hz Stop I-component when torque limits of
ResonFreqBStop unit have been reached;
Limit I-component to torque limits.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed limiting controller fp_vc_363_e.vsd Function diagram
- 363 -
Frequency control, slave drive 26.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Src n-RegGain
P238.B (1) n957.19 = 3
K

T3 = 2 x T0
n/f-Reg. Gain2 n/f RegGain(act)
0.0 ... 2000.0 K0156
P236.M (10,0)
n/f RegGain(act)
n/f-Reg. Gain1 r237
Src n/f RegAdapt 0.0 ... 2000.0
P232.B (0) P235.M (~)
K

P233.M (0.0) P234.M (100.0)

n/f Reg Time
n/f(set,smo'd) 0.0 ... 200.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 %
25 ... 32001 ms
r229 n/f-Reg.Adapt 1 n/f-Reg.Adapt 2
P240.M (400)

n/f(set) n-Reg in Limitr

KK0150 n/f Deviation B0234
Kp Tn
KK0152
to setp frequency [401.1]
from setpoint channel [319.8], [329.8]

+ –
r014
Set I Comp act. Slip Frequency
Setp Speed Src Set n/f-Reg.I
B0229 KK0188
P242.B (0)
B n/f-Reg.Stop
n (act) B0228
r219 0 0
Smooth n/f(act) Src Set n/f-Reg.I 0
0 ... 2000 ms P241.B (0)
Motor #PolePairs P223.M (~) ≠0 1
x K
from 1 ... 15
y y
speed P109.M (~)
processing x Src n/f-Reg.I STOP
[352.8] P243.B (0)
B
n/f(act) n/f(act,smo´d)
KK0148 KK0151
from control word 2 bit 25 [190.5]
n/f(act) n/f(act,smo'd)
r218 r230

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed controller fp_vc_364_e.vsd Function diagram
- 364 -
V/f characteristic with speed controller 26.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.25 = 3

is only calculated if P260 or P262

Droop Rel [375.1] are not connected
Scale Droop [190.6]
0.0 ... 49.9 %
P246.M (0,0)
n/f(Droop)
Torq AddSetp K0157
r510 Src Droop 0 to setpoint channel [318.3], [328.3]
from setpoint channel
Torq FixAddSet P245.B (155) [365.6]
[319.6], [329.6]
K0086 K

T(Accel)
K0077
from setpoint channel
[317.8], [327.8]
+ T(set,precon)
K0164
+

Smooth n/f(set) n/f(set,smo´d)

[360.2] Scale T(precon) KK0150
[317.7], [327.7]
from n/f(Reg,I-Comp) T(set, n/f Reg)
n/f Deviation Kp Tn Tsetp for torque
setpoint channel K0155 K0153
KK0152 limitation
[319.8], [329.8] =0.0 %
+ [371.1], [373.1]
+
– + +
Smooth n/f(act) >0.0 % n/f (Reg,P)
n/f(set,limitr) [360.3] K0154
KK0075
Speed controller

Band Stop Filter

[360.4] Scale T(precon)
Smooth n/f(act) [317.7], [327.7] Band Stop Gain DT1 Function T1
[360.3] [360.4] 0.0 ... 200.0 ms
P249.M (10)
from speed >0
processing =0 for torque
[350.8] >0,0 ms =0,0 ms limitation dIsq
=0 [371.1], [373.1]
n/f(act,smo´d) >0
=0,0 ms >0,0 ms
KK0151

+ Output DT1 Elem

DT1 Function Td K0159
– 0.0 ... 1000.0 ms
P250.M (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DT1 element, droop and torque pre-control fp_vc_365_e.vsd Function diagram
- 365 -
Speed control, master drive 09.04.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.26 = 3

DT1 Function T1
Smooth n/f(act) 0.0 ... 200.0 ms
[361.3] P249.M (10)

from speed to torque

processing limitation dIsq
[350.8] [372.1], [374.1]

n/f(act,smo´d)
KK0151 Output DT1 Elem
K0159
DT1 Function Td
0.0 ... 1000.0 ms
P250.M (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DT1 element fp_vc_366_e.vsd Function diagram
- 366 -
Torque control and speed control, slave drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.27 = 3

Droop Rel
Scale Droop [190.6]
0.0 ... 49.9 %
P246.M (0.0)

Src Droop 0 to setpoint channel [318.3], [328.3]

P245.B (0)
K
150 ms

n/f(Droop)
K0157

Torq AddSetp
from setpoint channel r510
[319.6], [329.6] Torq FixAddSet
K0086

T(Accel)
K0077
from setpoint channel
[317.8], [327.8] +
+
T(set,precon)
K0164

n/f(Reg,I-Comp) T(set, n/f Reg)

Kp Tn Tsetp to
K0155 K0153
from speed controller torque limitation
[362.5] + [371.1]

+
n/f (Reg,P)
K0154

Speed controller

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Droop and torque pre-control fp_vc_367_e.vsd Function diagram
- 367 -
Frequency control, master drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.30 = 3

Max Torque 1 Max Torque 2

r497 r503
Max Torque 1 Max Torque 2
K082 K084
from setpoint channel [319.6], [320.6]
from setpoint channel [319.6], [320.6]

Isd(set)
r281
from flux calculation [380.8], [381.8] Isd(set)
K0179 Gain Isq(max)
25 ... 400 %
Torq(limit1,act)
Imax P268.M (100) Isq(max, abs)
MIN K0172
0.1 ...6553.5 A K0176
P128.M(~)
Src I(max) Calculation Isq,max to the torque setpoint [371], [372]
Imax(set)
P275.B (0)
r129
K Torq(limit2,act)
MIN ax
ψ -1 MAX K0173
from I2t calculation [490.5] I(max,perm) Im from motor model
K0175 [395.3], [396.3]
from flux calculation [380.3], [381.3] Isd to the torque setpoint [371], [372]
B0235
Isq(max) red.
r346
Max Output Volts Pw,max(gen) Pw,max(mot)
-0.1 ... -200.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 %
P259.M (~) P258.M (~)

f(set,stator)
KK0199
from motor model [395.8], [396.8]
FieldWeakFrq-ac)
from flux calculation [380.3], [381.3] KK0192

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Torque/current limitation fp_vc_370_e.vsd Function diagram
- 370 -
n/f/T control, master/slave drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.35 = 3

Torq(fr)Const Torq(fr)prop.n Torq(fr)prop.n2

0.000 ... 10% 0.000 ... 10% 0.000 ... 10% This part of the function diagram is replaced by
P760.M(0%) P761.M(0%) P762.M(0%) figure 375 if P260 or P262 have been softwired!
n/f(act)
r218
from torque processing Torq(set,fr)
r277
[350.8], [351.8]
Src Torq(fr,ch)
P763.B (0) Torq(set,fr)
K K0163

T = 8 x T0

from torque limits [370]

from torque limits [370] Torq (set, Lim) Isq(set,lim)

r269 r272

Torq(set,limit) Isq(set,limitr)
K0165 K0167

y Torq(Lim1)act. to
B0231 current control
+ x + [390.1]
from torque pre-control [365.8], [367.8] x x
y
Isq Torq(Lim2)act. + – Isq
B0232 y

ψ from
motor model
[395.3], [396.3]
n-Reg in Limitr
≥1 B0234

from torque pre-control dIsq [365.8]

(not in the case of f-control)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Torque setpoint fp_vc_371_e.vsd Function diagram
- 371 -
n/f-control, master drive 27.01.99 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.36 = 3
Torq(fr)Const Torq(fr)prop.n Troq(fr)prop.n2
0.000 ... 10% 0.000 ... 10% 0.000 ... 10%
P760.M(0%) P761.M(0%) P762.M(0%)
n/f(act)
r218
from speed processing Torq(set,fr)
r277
[350.8], [351.8]
Src Torq(fr,ch)
P763.B (0) Torq(set,fr)
K K0163

T = 8 x T0

from torque limits [370]

from torque limits [370]

Torq (set, Lim) Isq(set,lim)

r269 r272

Selection Torq(set,limit) Isq(set,limitr)

of torque K0165 K0167
setpoint
y Torq(Lim1)act.
to
B0231 current control
from speed-limitation controller [361.8], [363.8] + x
+ x x + [390.1]

+ y
+ Torq(Lim2)act. – Isq
B0232 y

ψ from
motor model
[395.3], [396.3]
n-Reg in Limitr
≥1 B0234
from DT1 element [366.8]

(not in the case of f-control)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Torque setpoint fp_vc_372_e.vsd Function diagram
- 372 -
T control and n/f control, slave drive 22.09.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Torq(fr)Const Torq(fr)prop.n Torq(fr)prop.n2 n957.39 = 2
0.000 ... 5% 0.000 ... 5% 0.000 ... 5%
P760.M(%) P761.M(%) P762.M(%) is only calculated if P260 or
n/f(act) P262 is interconnected [375.1]
r218

[350.8] Torq(set,fr)
r277

Src Torq(fr,ch)
P763.B (0) Torq(set,fr)
n/f RegGain(act)
K K0163
r237
from speed controller
[360.6], [361.6]

T = 8 x T0
n/f(max,posDR) [316.6]
– Control
n/f(max,negDR) [316.6]
–
Speed
limitation
from speed controller controller
[360.5], [361.5]
n/f(Band-Stop)
KK0158
+ Torq(limit1,act)
from torque/current limitation [370.6]
K0172 Torq (set, Lim) Isq(set,lim)
r269 r272
– Torq(limit2,act)
from torque/current limitation [370.6]
K0173

Torq(set,limit) Isq(set,limitr)
Src Torque(add) K0165 K0167
P262.B (0)
K Torq(Lim1)act.
y
Src Torq (set) B0231
P260.B (0) + to current control [390.1]
x x
K
x y
+ Isq
B0232 y
Torq(Lim2)act. ψ
from motor model
[395.3]

n-Reg in Limitr
1 B0234

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fast torque setpoint fp_vc_375_e.vsd Function diagram
- 375 -
Speed control, master drive 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.40 = 3
Vset from current controller [390.8] FieldWeakRegTime
10 ... 32001 ms
P305.M (150)
ModDepth Headrm
0.0 ... 10.0 % Field Weakening
P344.M (0) Max Output Volts B0251
0
r346
from current controller – + –

[390.8] + 20 ms Max
Mod Depth Limit OutputVolts Flux(FieldWkReg)
K0191 K0196 Imax(set)
K0190 r129
Mod Depth Limit from current
r345 limitation
I(max,perm)
[370.2]
DCBusVolt(smo´d) K0175
from set/actual evaluation [285.3]
K0236 Calculation of
field weakening
frequency Flux(Set,Total)
r304
FieldWeakFrq(act)
KK0192 Flux(set,totl)
FSetp Flux (set)
Smooth Flux(Set) K0197 Isd(set)
50.0 ... 200.0 %
4 ... 2000 ms r281
P291.M (100,0) Magn. Current
Flux(Curve) P303.M (~)
K0193 r0119 to current lim.
[370]
+ to current control-
+
Calculation ler [390]
from motor model [395.8] MIN
Isd(set)
+
Flux(set,smth) – Isd(set)
f(set,stator)
K0195 K0179
KK0199 Field weakening Isd(static)
curve K0177

Control of
flux build-up Fly/Exc active
B0132
Fly/Exc finished
Isq(set,lim)
r272 Efficiency Optim B0255
Excitation Time Smooth Accel
50 ... 100 %
0.0 ... 10.00 0 ... 1
P295.M (100)
from torque P602.M (~) P604.M (0)
limitation Isq(set,limitr)
[371.8], [372.8], K0167
[375.8] Flux(LoadDepnd)
Load-dependent
K0194
flux reduction

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Flux calculation fp_vc_380_e.vsd Function diagram
- 380 -
n/T-control, master/slave drive 09.04.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.43 = 3
Vsetp from curr. controller [390.8] FieldWeakRegTime
10 ... 32001 ms
P305.M (150)
ModDepth Headrm
0.0 ... 10.0 % Field Weakening
P344.M (0) Max Output Volts 0 B0251
r346
from curr. controller [390.8] – + –
+ 20 ms Max
Mod Depth Limit OutputVolts Flux(FieldWkReg
K0190 K0191 K0196 Imax(set)
r129
Mod Depth Limit
r345 from current
limitation
I(max,perm)
[370.2]
DCBusVolt(smo´d) K0175
from set/act evaluation [285.3]
K0236 Calculation
field weakening
frequency Flux(set,totl)
r304
FieldWeakFrq-ac)
KK0192 Flux(set,totl) Isd(set)
FSetp Flux (set)
Smooth Flux(Set) K0197 r281
50.0 ... 200.0 %
4 ... 2000 ms
P291.M (100,0) Magn. Current
Flux(Curve) P303.M (~) to curr. lim.
K0193 r0119 [370]
to curr. ctrl.
+
+ [390]
Calculation
from motor model [396.8] MIN
Isd(set)
+ +
f(set,stator) Flux(set,smth) – + Isd(set)
K0195 K0179
KK0199 Field weak. curve Isd(static)
K0177

Control
flux build-up Fly/Exc active
B0132
Fly/Exc finished
Isq(set,lim)
r272 Efficiency Optim B0255
50 ... 100 % Excitation Time Smooth Accel
P295.M (100) 0.0 ... 10.00 0 ... 1
P602.M (~) P604.M (0)
Isq(set,limitr)
from torque
K0167
limitation
[371.8], [372.8] Flux(LoadDepnd) from current setpoint [382] I(Set,smoothed)
Load-dependent
K0194 K0178
flux reduction

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Flux calculation fp_vc_381_e.vsd Function diagram
- 381 -
Frequency control, master/slave drive 09.04.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.44 = 3
from speed controller [362.7],[363.7] n/f(Reg,I-Port)
K0155
from current limitation [370.2] I(max,perm)
K0175

from setpoint channel RGen active

[317.8], [327.8]

Torque (dynamic)
0 ... 200 % 1 x y
P279.M (0) Smooth I(Set)
2 2
0 0 y -x 4 ... 32000 ms
P280.M (40)

+
Torque (static) + +
Calculation 0
0 ... 200 % to flux calculation [381.6]
I setp
P278.M (~) + + –
1 I(Set,smoothed)
0 K0178
r119
I AddSetp Magn. Current
from setpoint channel r511
[319.6], [320.8], [329.6]

I FixAddSet
KK0085

from motor model [396.8] EMF Model act.

B0253

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Current setpoint fp_vc_382_e.vsd Function diagram
- 382 -
Frequency control, master/slave drive 16.02.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.55 = 0
Tot Leak React Gain PRE Isq
1.0 ... 49.99 % 0.0 ... 200.0 %
R(Stator, tot) P122.M (~) P282.M (60.0)
r118
from temperature adaption [430.7]
Output Filter Max Mod Depth
from motor model [395.8],[396.8] Pulse Frequency ModSystemRelease
0 ... 2 20 ... 96 %
[420.5] [420.5]
P068.M (0) P342.M (96)
KK0199 f(set,stator) Precontrol and
decoupling
+
ψ from motor model [395.3],[396.3] Vsd(Decoupl)
K0228 + Calculation of max. modulation depth

Decoupl. Gain1 Decoupl. Gain 2

Mod Depth Limit
0.0 ... 200.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 %
r345
P288.M (100 %) P289.M (25 %)

Vsd(Isd-Reg.) Mod Depth Limit

K0218 from set/actual value
Curr. contr. Isd K0190
+ evaluation [285.3]
Isd(set,active) to flux calculation
Kp Tn [380.1],[381.1]
K0183
+ DCBusVolt(smo´d)
Isd from flux calculation [380.8],[381.8] + Vmax(Isd-Reg.) K0236
-1 K0217
– Modulation Depth
Vsq(Isd-Reg.,i) Vd
Act. values from [285.4] r343
K0219 correction to gating unit
Isd(act) K [420.2]
K0182
Current Reg Gain Current Reg Time Mod Depth
0.000 ... 2.500 2.0 ... 200.0 U(set,abs) K0222
P283.M (~) P284.M (~) K0189 Vsetp to set/actual values
Act. values from [285.4] [285.1]

Isq(act) Vsetp to flux calculation [380.1],[381.1]

Smooth Isq(set)
K0184 0 ... 20 ms
Current Reg Gain Current Reg Time to gating unit [420.2]
P273.M (6)
0.000 ... 2.500 2.0 ... 200.0
P283.M(~) P284.M (~) P Alpha(set)
Isq from curr. K0229
limitation
Vsq(Isq-Reg.,i)
[371], [372],
– Kp Tn K0221
[375] + +
Vsq(Isq-Reg.)
– K0220
Isq(set,active) +
K0168
I-Reg in Limitr +
from KIB/Vdmax control [600.8], [610.8] I(KIB/VdmaxReg) B0250
K0271
Curr. contr. Isq

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Current controller fp_vc_390_e.vsd Function diagram
- 390 -
n/f/T-control for master/slave drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Smooth Psi(act) cEMF Reg Gain
4.0 ... 200.0 ms 0.000 ... 6.000 n957.60 = 0
P301.M (4.0 ms) P315.M (~) cEMFRegGain(act)
Flux(act) K0230
r302

Tot Leak React cEMF Reg Time

1.0 ... 49.99 % Psi(act) 4.0 ... 999.9 ms
P122.M (25%) P316.M (~) EMF Reg in Lmtr
R(Stator,tot) K0181
T = 8 x T0 B0252
r118
f(cEMF Reg,p)
from temperature adaption [430.7]
ψ Rotor flux Kp Tn KK0233
+
RotResist EMF
r126 Model cEMF model outp
K0231 + + f(cEMF Reg,i)
from temperature adaption [430.7]
KK0234
– fmax(cEMF Reg)
EMF
Controller KK0232

f(ch, I-Mod) f(ch, EMF-Mod)

1.0 ... 99.0 % 1.00 ... 600.00 Hz
P314.M (50.0) P313.M (~)

Motor Rtd Slip

r110

from act. value evaluation [285.4]

Isd(act)
Slip Frequency
K0182 Current EMF Model act.
KK0188
Model B0253
from act. value eval. [285.4]
Isq(act)
K0184
f(set) in Limtr T = T0
n/f(act) B0254
r218
+ + to gating unit [420.1]
from speed processing [350.7] +
n/f(act) + + –
KK0148
f(set,stator)
n/f(max)+ KK0199
internal
control reserve
f(set,gating)
KK0200

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Motor model, frequency fp_vc_395_e.vsd Function diagram
- 395 -
Speed/torque control, master/slave drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 cEMF Reg Gain
0.000 ... 6.000 n957.61 = 0
P315.M (~) cEMFRegGain(act)
K0230

Tot Leak React cEMF Reg Time

1.0 ... 49.99 % 4.0 ... 999.9 ms
P122.M (25) P316.M (~) EMF Reg in Lmtr
R(Stator,tot) B0252 f(cEMF Reg,p)
r118 KK0233
from temperature adaption [430.7]
ψ Rotor flux Kp Tn
to speed processing [351]

RotResist EMF
r126 model cEMF model outp
from temp. adaption[430.7] K0231 + to speed processing [351]

– fmax(cEMF Reg) KK0234

EMF KK0232
controller f(cEMF Reg,i)

f(ch, I-Mod) f(ch, EMF Mod)

1.0 ... 99.0 % 1.00 ... 600.00 Hz
P314.M (50.0) P313.M (~)

Motor Rtd Slip

r110

from act.value evaluation [285.4]

Isd(act)
Slip Frequency
K0182 Current EMF Model act.
KK0188
model
B0253
from act. value evaluation[285.4]
Isq(act)
K0184
f(set) in Limtr T = T0
B0254

from speed processing [351.7] + + + to gating unit [420.1]

+ + – –
EMF Model act. f(set,stator)
[396.8] n/f(max)+ KK0199
B0253 internal
Reson.Damping Gain control reserve f(set,gating)
0.000 ... 10,000 0 f(Reson Damp) KK0200
P337.M (~) KK0235
0
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Motor model, frequency fp_vc_396_e.vsd Function diagram
- 396 -
Frequency control, master/slave drive 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.65 = 3
Slip Comp Gain Reson Damp Gain
0.0 ... 400.0 % 0.000 ... 10.000
P336.M (~) P337.M (~)
Isq(set,active)
K0168
from act.
Slip Frequency f(Reson Damp)
evaluation Resonance
KK188 KK0235
[286.8] damping

from
f(KIB/VdmaxReg) f(set) in Limtr
KIB/Vdmax control
KK0270 B0254
[600.8], [610.8]
n/f(set,smo'd)
r229 to V/f characteristic [405.1]
– to gating unit [420.1]
from setpoint channel
[319.8], [329.8]
n/f(set) – f(set,stator)
r014
KK0150 n/f(act) KK0199
Setp Speed n/f(max) +
r218
OutputAmps(rms) n/f(act) control reserve f(set,gating)
from actual-value evaluation KK0148 KK0200
K0242
[286.5]
Imax Reg Gain Imax Reg Time r219
0.005 ... 0.499 4 ... 32001 ms n (act)
Imax P331.M (0,05) P332.M (100)
0.1 ... 6553.5 A
P128.M (~)
Src I(max) Imax(set) Kp Tn I max-Reg.(Out)
P275.B (0) r129 K0208
K –
MIN to V/f characteristic
from [405.1]
I2t calculation I(max,perm)
[490.5] K0175 Imax-Reg(Outp)
K0209
I(max) Reg act
Accel Amps B0236 Acceleration current
0.0 ... 6553.5 A 1 to V/f characteristic [405.1]
P322.M (0)
0 0

RGen active [317.8], [327.8]

I AddSetp
r511
I FixAddSet
from setpoint channel
K0085
[319.8], [329.8]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f open-loop control fp_vc_400_e.vsd Function diagram
- 400 -
Current limitation, V/f characteristic 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.66 = 3
Reson Damp Gain
0.000 ... 10.000
P337.M (~)

from
Slip Frequency f(Reson Damp)
speed controller Resonance
KK0188 KK0235
[364.8] damping

from
f(KIB/VdmaxReg) f(set) in Limtr
KIB/Vdmax control
KK0270 B0254
[600.8], [610.8]
n/f(set,smo'd)
r229 to V/f characteristic [405.1]
– to gating unit [420.1]
from setpoint channel
[319.8], [329.8]
n/f(set) – f(set,stator)
r014
Setp Speed KK0150 KK0199
n/f(max) +
OutputAmps(rms) control reserve f(set,gating)
from actual-value evaluation KK0200
K0242
[286.5]
Imax Reg Gain Imax Reg Time
0.005 ... 0.499 4 ... 32001 ms
Imax P331.M (0,05) P332.M (100)
0.1 ... 6553.5 A
P128.M (~)
Src I(max) Imax(set) Kp Tn Imax Reg(Out)
P275.B (0) r129 K0208
K –
MIN to V/f characteristic
from
I2t calculation I(max,perm) [405.1]
[490.5] K0175 Imax Reg(Out)
K0209
I(max) Reg act
B0236 Acceleration current
Accel Amps
0.0 ... 6553.5 A 1 to V/f characteristic [405.1]
P322.M (0)
0 0

RGen active [317.8],[327.8]

I AddSetp
r511
I FixAddSet
from setpoint channel
K0085
[319.8], [329.8]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f open-loop control fp_vc_401_e.vsd Function diagram
- 401 -
Current limitation, V/f characteristic with speed controller 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.67 = 3

from
f(KIB/VdmaxReg) f(set) in Limtr
KIB/Vdmax control
KK0270 B0254
[600.8], [610.8]
n/f(set,smo'd) n/f(act)
r229 r218 to v/f characterstic [405.1]
from setpoint channel
– to gating unit [420.1]
[319.8], [329.8]
n/f(set) n/f(act) f(set,stator)
r014 r219 KK0148
Setp Speed KK0150 n (act) KK0199
n/f(max) +
OutputAmps(rms) control reserve f(set,gating)
from actual-value evaluation KK0200
K0242
[286.5]
Imax Reg Gain Imax Reg Time
0.005 ... 0.499 4 ... 32001 ms
Imax P331.M (0,05) P332.M (100)
0.1 ... 6553.5 A
P128.M (~)
Src I(max) Imax(set) Kp Tn
P275.B (0) r129 to V/f characteristic
K – [405.1]
MIN
from Imax Reg(Outp)
I2t calculation I(max,perm)
K0209
[490.5] K0175

I(max) Reg act

B0236 Acceleration current
Accel Amps
0.0 ... 6553.5 A 1 to V/f characteristic [405.1]
P322.M (0)
0 0

RGen active [317.8], [327.8]

I AddSetp
r511
from setpoint channel I FixAddSet
K0085
[319.8], [329.8]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f open-loop control, textile fp_vc_402_e.vsd Function diagram
- 402 -
Setpoint frequency, current limiting controller 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.55 = 0
Src Select Charact Mot Rtd Volts Boost End Freq Motor Rtd Freq Field Weak Freq
0 ... 1 100 ... 2000 V 0.00 ... 300.00 Hz 8.00 ... 200.00 Hz 8.00 ... 600.00 Hz
P330.M (0) P101.M (~) P326.M (~) P107.M (50) P293.M (~) Output Filter Max ModulatDepth
Pulse Frequency ModSystemRelease
0 ... 2 20 ... 96 %
[420.5] [420.5]
P068 (0) P342.M (96)

U Calculation of max. modulation depth

parab.
from 1
ref.frequency from evaluation of Max Output Volts
[400.8], [401.8], set/actual values r346
[402.8] f(set,gating) 0 f [286.3] Max OutputVolts
KK0200 K0191
DCBusVolt(smo´d)
Boost Volts
1 K0236
0.0 ... 500.0 V
P325.M (~) Mod
0 U Depth Limit
Boost Amps r345
0.0 ... 6553.5 A Mod Depth Limit
linear
P319.M (~) K0190

f
Boost Src U (set)
K0203 P317.B Modulation Depth
Vd r343
<1> correction to gating unit
Src U (set) 0
[420.2]
P317.B (0)
P121.M (~) P318.M (1)
0.00 ... 49.99 % 0 ... 1 K A(set,V/f)
>0
Stator Resist Boost Mode U(set,V/f) K0205
Excitation Time Smooth Accel
0.0 ... 10.00 0 ... 1 K0204 Vset to
from Imax controller set/act values
acceleration current P602.M (~) P604.M (0)
[286.1]
[400.8], [401.8], [402.8]

<1> U(set) via connector only for V/f textile;

IxR Compens Gain changeover with P317 ≠ 0
Control
0.00 ... 40.00
voltage build-up Fly/Exc active
P334.M (~)
Isq(set,active) B0132
K0168 Fly/Exc finished
from actual-value B0255
evaluation
[286.7]
0 Imax Reg(Out)
from Imax controller
K0209
[400] to [402], [615.7]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f open-loop control fp_vc_405_e.vsd Function diagram
- 405 -
V/f characteristic, Vd correction 09.04.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.56 = 0

Pulse Frequency ModSystemRelease

Mod Depth Limit 1.5 ... 16.0 kHz 0 ... 5
r345 P340.M (2.5) P339.M (0)

Mod Depth Limit

K0190

from current controller

[390.8], [391.8], [405.8]
B0320 RZM/FLM

B0321 Asy/Sy System

Mod. depth from current control [390.8], [391.8] K0222 Modulation Depth 3,4,5
Modulation depth from V/f control [405.8] K0205 A(set,V/f)
Gating unit B0322 Overmodulation
0,1,2
to evaluation of
Setpoint frequency from motor model actual values
KK0200 f(set,gating) Asynchronous space
[395.8], [396.8], [397.8] 3,4,5 [285.1], [397.1]
vector modulation
Transformation angle of field orientation
Setpoint frequency from V/f control KK0200 f(set,gating) NK
[400.8], [401.8], [402.8] 0,1,2
+
Setpoint angle from current
controller [390.8], [391.8] K0229 Alpha(set) optimized FLM
3,4,5
pulse pattern B0323 FLM System #1
0 (output-optimized)
0,1,2
B0324 FLM System #2

P100.M (1) B0325 FLM System #3

0 ... 5
Control Mode
B0326 FLM System #4

SIMO-Sound
0 ... 4
P535.M (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Gating unit fp_vc_420_e.vsd Function diagram
- 420 -
All open-loop and closed-loop control modes 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.69 = 8

Ambient temp. Motor Cooling Output Filter

-40.0 ... 80.0 C 0 ... 1 0 ... 2
P379.M (20) P382.M (0) P068 (0)

Rotor Time Const

RotResistTmpFact r124 T(rotor)
12.5 ... 400.0 %
P127.M (80 %) RotResist
r126 R(rotor)
RS/RL to motor model [395.1],[396.1]
Adaption
R(Stator+cable)
0.0 ... 49.99 %
P121.M (~) Leakage time constant
r125 T(sigma)
P386.M (0)
Resist Cable 0 ... 2 R(Stator,tot)
0.00 ... 40.00 % RotResistTmpAdap r118 R(Stator,tot)
P117.M (0.00) 0 = off to motor model [395.1],[396.1]
Motor Temperat. 1 = without temp.sensor
r009 2 = with temp.sensor
ActValues [280.3] Model Temp.
r393

P387.M (1) P388.M (~) P389.M (0) P390.M (100) P391.M (100) P392.M (1,50)
0 ... 6 5 ... 9999 0 ... 1 25 ... 200 % 25.0 ... 200.0 % 0.05 ... 10.00 %
Motor Series Motor Weight Internal Fan Overtemp. Factor K(overtemp.,rot) Iron Losses

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Temperature model fp_vc_430_e.vsd Function diagram
- 430 -
n/f/T control, master/slave drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Criterion for <1> Warning: If braking control is used, B277 and B238 must be connected up!
"Open brake" Limit value monitor BrakeThr1 over Example for interconnecting the braking control:
B0281 P605=2 Brake with checkback message (NO contact, switches if brake closes) [470.7]
Src BrakeThresh1 y P561=278 Inverter release from B278 [180.3]
P610 (242) 1 P564=277 Setpoint release from B277 [180.3]
x U953.48 = ___(20)
KK P654=275 Open brake via digital output 4 [90.6]
0 P613=20 Checkback "Brake Closed" from dig.input 6 [90.5], [470.1]
x P612=21 Checkback "Brake opened" from dig.input 6 [90.5], [470.6]
(K242=Current)
Open Brake
& SET (to digital output)
(Q=1) Q B0275
P611 (0) Machine magnetized
Command"Open brake"
0.0 ... 200.0 %
P608 (xxxx) RESET Close Brake
.01 (104) (B104="Operation")[200.6] Brake Thresh
B (Q=0) Q B0276
.02 (1) Brake with checkback message P605.2 [470.7]
B
Checkback signal
Priority Brake cannot be opened
1= Brake opened
1 RESET Src SigBrakeOp B0279
2 SET Alarm A036
Command "Close [710.5] POWER ON P612 (1)
&
<1> Brake cannot be opened
brake immediately" B
P609 (xxxx)
B .01 (105) (B105 = no "Operation") [200.7]
.02 (0)
1 BrakeOpenTime
(0.00 ... 10.00 s)
Operating mode 0 = No brake
BrakeCtrl
P605 (0)
1 = Brake without checkback
B P606 (0.20) 2 = Brake with checkback
B .03 (0)
B .04 (0)

BrakeThresh2Time
0.00 ... 100.00 s
T 0
& 1
0 SetpRel brake
2 B0277
Limit value monitor P617 (0.00)
BrakeThr2 under
1 <1>
Src BrakeThresh2 y B0282
P615 (148) 1
x y T 0
K

(KK148=Speed ActV)
x
0
Delay
& 0 InvRel Brake
BrakeCloseTime
0.00 ... 10.00 s
P607 (0.10)
& 2 1 B0278
<1>
1
P616 (0,5) [480]
0.0 ... 200.0 % Pulse block
Command "Close holding brake"
BrakeThresh2 Brake
P614 (0) T 0
B

"OFF command" from sequence control

(e. g. OFF1, 2 or 3=0) [180.7]
1
"Fault" from status word1, bit3 [200.6]

Checkback 1=Brake closed Alarm A037 Brake cannot be closed

P613 (0)
B
<1>
& & Brake cannot be closed
(e. g. from digital input) Brake with checkback B0280
(P605=2) [470.7]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Braking control fp_vc_470_e.vsd Function diagram
- 470 -
03.07.00 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Perm Deviation Deviation Time
0.0 ... 200.0 % n959.60 = 4
0.0 ... 100.0 s
P792.F (6) RGen tracking active P794.F (3,0)
from RGen (Is only calculated in converter status
[317.8] r001=14, 15, 16 and 17
from n/f(set) 0 T
1
not for slave drive!).
setpoint channel r482
+ 1
[319.8], [329.8] to set/actual deviation
n/f(act) OFF delay at status word 1 bit 8 [200]
from – 0
r218

{
speed processing
[350.8], [351.8] [470]
Pulse block
from Brake
P793.F (6) OFF Time
0.0 ... 200.0 %
Set/Act Hyst OFF1 or OFF3
0.00 ... 100.00 s
P801.F (0,00) no Brake
1
from sequence control (P605 = 0)
[180.7]
& to gating pulse inhibit
to sequence control
&
T 0
1

0 Delay

Overspeed Hyst
0.0 ... 20.0 %
n/f(max,REV Spd) P804 (10,0) n/f(max, FWD Spd
P800.F (0,5) [316.6] [316.6]
0.0 ... 200.0%
OFF Value

1 Overspeed
0 at status word 2, bit 18 [210]

Compare Value
0.0 ... 200.0 %
P796.F (100.0) Compare Time
0.0 ... 100.0 s
P798.F (3,0)

Src Comp ActV

P795 (148) 1
0 T Comparison value reached
K
at status word 1, bit 10 [200]
0
{

OFF delay

P797.F (3,0)
Src Speed Setp 0.0 ... 200.0 %
P802 (75) 1 Compare Hyst
K Positive speed setpoint
at status word 1, bit 14 [200]
0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Messages fp_vc_480_e.vsd Function diagram
- 480 -
07.05.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.59 = 3
V1 Comp
Speed display Messages 0.000...30.000 m/s
U831 (0.050)

SrcSpeedConn
U806 Speed display 1 v < v1
v(act) speed processing
KK n807.1 [350.8], [351.8] B0851
KK n807.2 0
KK n807.3
KK n807.4
KK n807.5 U835 (100) V2 Comp
m/s 10...1000 ms 0.000...30.000 m/s
Compare Hyst U832 (0,800)
Smoothing V(act)
0.0 %...100.0 %
U836 (3)
n/f(set) setpoint channel [329.7] v(set)
n808
1 v < v2
B0852
I(max) Brake
100 %...500 % 0
n/f(act) speed processing [350.7] v(act)
n809 U840 (500 %)
V3 Comp
0.000...30.000 m/s
Fault F057 U833 (0.500) Compare Hyst
Disp V-act Sm'th Current level
0.0 %...100.0 %
n848 [285.6], [286.6]
U836 (3)

1 v < v3
Setpoint < Comparison B0853
0
threshold
ThrPulseEnable V4 Comp
0.00 %...100.00 % 0.000...30.000 m/s
U824 (0) Compare Hyst U834 (0.3)
0.0 %...100.0 %
U836 (3)

Speed setpoint 1 v < v4

[326.8] < Setp Thresh B0854

MOTID controller optimization

& B0857 0

Compare Hyst
0.0 %...100.0 %
U836 (3)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Messages 2 fp_vc_481_e.vsd Function diagram
- 481 -
Lift and hoisting-gear applications (U800=1) 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.72 = 5
T control (P100=5)
or
slave drive
Set/act deviation
[480.7]
n/f-Reg in Limitr
B0234
Output delay
n/f-Reg in Limtr
[371.6], [375.6]
n/f(act)
& 0
15 x Tab

1
r0218 0 0 Alarm A042
1
Motor pulled out or blocked
from speed processing

<
[350.8], [351.8]

2% f(mot,n)
PullOut/BlckTime
0.00 ... 100.00 s
P805.M (50.00)

Fault F015
0 T Motor pulled out or blocked
f(set,stator) to status word 2 bit 28
[210.2]
KK0199
from motor model

>
[395.8], [396.8]

10% f(mot,n)

from motor model Ψ

[395.3], [396.3]

from flux calculation

[380.7], [381.7]
x
y
< &
r0304 4
Flux(Set,Total)

no f control

≥1
(P100 ≠ 3) EMF Model act.
B0253
from motor model
[396.8]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Blocking/pull-out diagnosis fp_vc_485_e.vsd Function diagram
- 485 -
n/f/T control, master/slave drive 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.73 = 5

Set/actual deviation
[480.7] Imax Reg(Out)

from current limitation

K0209 & Alarm A042
Motor pulled out or blocked
[400.4]

PullOut/BlckTime
0.00 ... 100.00 s
P805.M (50,00)
Fault F015
Motor pulled out or blocked

&
0 T to status word 2 bit 28
from messages
[210.2]
set/actual deviation
(only for V/f characteristic
from OFF delay
P100=1)
[480.3]

n-Reg in Limitr

from speed controller

B0234 & PullOut/BlckTime
[364.7]
0.00 ... 100.00 s
P805.M (50,00)
Fault F015
Motor pulled out or blocked

≥1
0 T to status word 2 bit 28
[210.2]
(only for V/f characteristic with n controller
P100=0)

n/f(act)

from speed processing

r0218
&
[352.8]

2% f(mot,n)
<

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Blocking diagnosis fp_vc_486_e.vsd Function diagram
- 486 -
V/f characteristic and V/f characteristic with speed controller 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.61 = 4
Alarm
100 % Converter overload to status word 2, bit 22 [210.1]
1

Rtd Drive Amps

P072 (~)
Drive Utiliz
from evaluation of OutputAmps(rms) r010
K0242 to current limitation [369.1], [370.1]
actual values
100 % Converter overload to V/f characteristic [400.1] to [402.1]
[285.5]
1
Derating
Drive Utiliz 0 B0227
K0246
i2t calculation Mot Load Limits
Motor Cooling Mot ThermT-Const 0 ... 300%
Mot. Temp.T1 0 ... 1 0 ... 16 000 s P384.1 (100%)
[490.4] P382.M (0) P383.M (100s) Motor Utilizat.
r008
Alarm: motor
overtemperature to status word 2, Bit 25 [210.2]
1

0 0
<100 Motor Utilizat. Fault: motor
i2t calculation K0244 overtemperature to status word 2, Bit 26 [210.2]
1

Converter temperature 0
limits
Fault: inverter
overtemperature F023 [210.1] Mot Tmp Warning
max. converter 0 ... 200 °C
temperature 1 Alarm: inverter P380 (0)
[280.6]
overtemperature A022 [210.1]
0
Motor Tmp Alarm
2 °C to status word 2, bit 25 [210.1]
r009 Motor Overtemperature
1
from measured-value sensing
[280.3] 0
Calc TimeHdroom Fault
r829.01 Motor Overtemperature to status word 2, bit 26 [210.1]
1
Sampling time
P357 (1,2 ms) K0248 0 No temp. sensor: P380 = P381 = 0°C
F042 Fault Thermistor (PTC): P380, P381 = 1°C
Calculating Temp.monitoring with KTY84: P380, P381 > 1°C
B0091 Computing time If inverter pulses are blocked, the fault message is
time P381(0)
A001 Alarm generated only in the event of a cable short-circuit.
monitoring 0 ... 200 °C
B0090 Computing time Mot Tmp Fault

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Alarms and faults fp_vc_490_e.vsd Function diagram
- 490 -
08.09.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 High byte = Current fault number r947.01 <1> n959.65 = (4)
K0250
Low byte = Current alarm number

Fault time in days r782.01 Fault time in days r782.04 Fault time in days r782.07
1s Fault Masking Fault time in hours .02 Fault time in hours .05 Fault time in hours .08
0 ... 255
"ON" status from P830 (0) Fault time in seconds .03 Fault time in seconds .06 Fault time in seconds .09
sequence control FNo. r947.01 FValue r949.01 FNo. r947.09 FValue r949.09 FNo. r947.17 FValue r949.17
.02 .02 .10 .10 .18 .18
.03 .03 .11 .11 .19 .19
Fault trigger signal
& from sequence control .04
.05
.04
.05
.12
.13
.12
.13
.20
.21
.20
.21
.06 .06 .14 .14 .22 .22
Day Hours Seconds
r825.01 r825.02 r825.03 .07 .07 .15 .15 .23 .23
Operating
hours .08 .08 .16 .16 .24 .24
counter Current fault 1st acknowledged fault 2nd acknowledged fault

Fault time in days r782.10 Fault time in days r782.13 Fault time in days r782.16
Fault time in hours .11 Fault time in hours .14 Fault time in hours .17
Fault time in seconds .12 Fault time in seconds .15 Fault time in seconds .18
FNo. r947.25 FValue r949.25 FNo. r947.33 FValue r949.33 FNo. r947.41 FValue r949.41
.26 .26 .34 .34 .42 .42
P952=0
.27 .27 .35 .35 .43 .43
Causes the diagnosis .28 .28 .36 .36 .44 .44
memory to be deleted .29 .29 .37 .37 .45 .45
.30 .30 .38 .38 .46 .46
.31 .31 .39 .39 .47 .47
.32 .32 .40 .40 .48 .48
3rd acknowledged fault 4ht acknowledged fault 5th acknowledged fault

Status at time of the

last fault: Fault time in days r782.19 Fault time in days r782.22
r 783 Fault n/f(act) Fault time in hours .20 Fault time in hours .23
r 784 Fault dn/dt Fault time in seconds .21 Fault time in seconds .24
r 785 Fault Isq(act)
FNo. r947.49 FValue r949.49 FNo. r947.57 FValue r949.57
r 786 Fault Out Volts
r 787 Fault CtrlStatus .50 .50 .58 .58
.51 .51 .59 .59
Auto Acknowl .52 .52 .60 .60
P514
.53 .53 .61 .61
.54 .54 .62 .62
.55 .55 .63 .63
.56 .56 .64 .64 <1> K0250 = 0000 if there is no fault
and no alarm
6th acknowledged fault 7th acknowledged fault

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fault memory fp_vc_510_e.vsd Function diagram
- 510 -
31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 SlotDeselect
0/1 n959.70 = 8
Generat. Date SW Version U910 (0)
r827 r069
PCB Code SW ID Board ID
r826.02 r828.02 n911.02
.02 0
Slot A (option board)
1 PCB Code SW ID Board ID
r826.03 r828.03 n911.03
.03 0 Slot B (option board)
(only with Compact PLUS)
1 PCB Code SW ID Board ID
r826.04 r828.04 n911.04
Power-section definition .04 0 Slot C (option board)
1 (not with Compact PLUS)
PCB Code SW ID Board ID
Order No. 6SE70.. r826.05 r828.05 n911.05
0 ... 254 .05 0 Slot D (option board)
P070 (~) 1 (not with Compact PLUS)
PCB Code SW ID Board ID
Line Volts r826.06 r828.06 n911.06
90 ... 1320 V .06 0 Slot E (option board)
(not with Compact PLUS)
Basic board
P071(~) 1 PCB Code SW ID Board ID
Rtd Drive Amps r826.07 r828.07 n911.07
0.0 ... 6540.0 A .07 0 Slot F (option board)
P072 (~) (not with Compact PLUS)
1 PCB Code SW ID Board ID
Rtd Drive Power r826.08 r828.08 n911.08
.08 0 Slot G (option board)
0.3 ... 6400.0 kW
(not with Compact PLUS)
P073 (~) 1

PCB Code Board Meaning r826

r826.01 CUVC Control Unit Vector Control 92
CUMC Control Unit Motion Control Compact 93
CUMC+ Control Unit Motion Control Compact PLUS 94
SW ID CUVC+ Control Unit Vector Control Compact PLUS 95
r828.01 CUPM Control Unit Motion Control Performan ce 2 96
VCS SW-Inform
n912.1 SW Version CUMP Control Unit Motion Control Kompakt PLUS Performance 2 97
n912.2 SW ID CUA Control Unit AFE 106
CUSA Control Unit Sinus AFE 108
n912.3 SW Gen. Year
SBP Sensor Board Pulse 111
n912.4 SW Gen. Month SBM Sensor Board Encoder/Multiturn 112
r826 Meaning n912.5 SW Gen. Day SBM2 Sensor Board Encoder/Multiturn 2 113
SBR1 Sensor Board Resolver 114
90 to109 Mainboards or Control Unit SBR2 Sensor Board Resolver 2 115
110 to 119 Sensor Board (SBx) SCB1 Serial Communication Board 1 (LWL) 121
SCB2 Serial Communication Board 2 122
120 to 129 Serial Communication Board (Scx) T100 Technology Board 131
T300 Technology Board 131
130 to 139 Technology Board
T400 Technology Board 134
140 to 149 Communication Board (Cbx) CBX Communication Board 14x
CBP Communication Board PROFIBUS 143
150 to 169 Special boards (EBx, SLB) CBC Communication Board CANBUS 146
CBP2 Communication Board PROFIBUS 2 148
EB1 Expansion Board 1 151
EB2 Expansion Board 2 152
SLB SIMOLINK Bus Interface 161
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Hardware configuration fp_vc_515_e.vsd Function diagram
- 515 -
12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 - 520 -

n959.68 = 4
START Drive Status
8

r001
MASTERDRIVES VC

K0249
Function diagram

Initialization
states
7

Error acknowledgement
after init. fault P060 = 4, 5
All components
P060 = 7, 5
ready
SWITCH-ON
fp_vc_520_e.vsd

DOWNLOAD
INHIBIT
22.09.98
(21)
(8)
6
Acknowledgement
No ON
or jogging OFF2/3 or P060 = 3, 6
"Illegal ON" <1>
FAULT P060 = 3, 6
READY FOR
(7)
SWITCHING ON

5
(9)
ON or jogging OFF command
OFF2 or
SAFE OFF or
OFF switch-off
from all PRECHARGING speed reached

4
states B0270
(10)
OFF2,
Precharging finished SAFE OFF
OFF2 or
INV stop or
SAFE OFF or
OFF switch-off READY FOR
speed reached OPERATION

3
(11)
INV release INV stop
OPERATION

2
(14)
OFF_WITH_ OFF_WITH_
RGEN_REV OFF1 OFF3 FASTSTOP

Status diagram
(OFF1) (15) (OFF3) (16)

1
OFF3
<1> Switch-on with e.g. P554.B = 1 is not permissible!
 n959.66 = 4
Changeover of motor parameters
Copy MotDataSet Parameter-
number Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 Index 4 act. MotDataSet
0 ... 43 r011
P362 (0) MotDataSet bit 18
from control word 2 xxxx K0034
xxxx
xxxx
MotDataSet bit 19 xxxx Note: The parameters concerned are
Target data set (1 ... 4) from control word 2 xxxx designated by the code "M".
xxxx It is only possible to copy the data
Source data set(1 ... 4) xxxx sets in the "Ready for ON" mode.
xxxx
...

Copy BICO-DS
0 ... 21 Changeover of binector and connector
parameters Active BICO DSet
P363 (0)
Parameter- r012
number Index 1 Index 2
BICO data set from K0035
control word 2 xxxx Note: The parameters concerned are
xxxx designated by the code "F".
Target data set (1/2)
xxxx
xxxx It is only possible to copy the data
xxxx sets in the "Ready for ON" mode.
Source data set(1/2) xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
...

Changeover of function parameters

Copy FuncDSet Parameter-
number Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 Index 4 Active FuncDSet
0 ... 43 r013
P364 (0) Function data set bit 16
from control word 2 xxxx
xxxx K0036
xxxx
Function data set bit 17 xxxx Note: The parameters concerned are
Target data set (1 ... 4) from control word 2 xxxx designated by the code "F".
xxxx
It is only possible to copy the data
Source data set(1 ... 4) xxxx
sets in the "Ready for ON" mode.
xxxx
...

A list of the respective data-set parameters can be found at

the end of the complete list of parameter s.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Data sets fp_vc_540_e.vsd Function diagram
- 540 -
31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.67 = 4

Drive setting Ready for ON

Converter status
(P60 = 5) r001 = 5 r001 = 9
Automatic Automatic Measurement at No-load n/f-controller optim. Ground fault test
Function:
parameterization 8) parameterization 8) standstill 6) 8) 9) measurement 6) P536 6) P375 6) 8) 9)
Selection P115 = 1 (2, 3) P115 = 1 (2, 3) P115 = 2 (3, 6) P115 = 4 (3) P115 = 5 (3) auch bei P115 = 2 (3, 6)
Motor rating-plate data (P60 = 5) Start with switch-on command (compare P554): Current measuring section r377
P95 = 2 1) P95 = 10(IEC) 1) P95 = 11 1) Reference values: r376 = GrdFltTestResult
P97 = P100 = Reg.Art P100 P537 = n/f-RegDyn(act)
Selection of P101 = Umot,n P101 P351 = Vref = P101 P538 = n/f Reg Osq Freq
1PH7
( = 1PA6) P102 = Imot,n P102 P350 = Iref = P102 r539 = TestPulseResult r539 = TestPulsesResult
1PL6 P103 = I0 2) P103 2) r540 = TachTestResult 7) r540 = TachTestResult 7)
1PH4 P104 = cosϕn r541=Mot ID R(Stator)→ P121
= Pmot,n P105 r542=Mot ID R(Rotor)→ r126,
=η P106 → P127

P107 = fmot,n P107 P352 = fref = P107 r543=Mot ID VoltsDrop→ P347

P108 = nmot,n P108 P353 = nref = P107 * 60 / P109
3)
r545=Mot ID DeadTime →
P109 = zp P109 3) P349
P113 = Mmot,n 4)
P113 4)
P354 = Mref = P113 r546=MotID X(leakage)→ P122
P114 5) P114 =Technol. Cond.5) P114 5) P103 = Mot Magn Amps P103 = Mot Magn Amps
r110 = Motor Rtd Slip r110 r110 r110 r110
P116 = Start-up Time
P117 = Resist Cable P117 P117 P117 P117
r118 = Resist Stator ++ r118 r118 r118 r118
r119 = Magn. Current r119 r119 r119 r119
P120 = Main reactance P120 P120 P120
P121 = Stator Resist P121 P121
P122 = Tot Leak React P122 P122
r124 = Rotor Time Const r124 r124
r125 = T(sigma) r125 r125
r126 = RotResist r126 r126
P127 = RotResistTmpFact = 80% P127 = 80% P127 = 80% P127 = 80%
P347 = ON VoltsCompens. P347 P347
P348 = Dead Time Comp. =0 P348 = 0 P348 = 0
P349 = T(DeadTimeComp.) P349 P349
P471 = Scale Torq(PRE) =0% P471 = 0% P471 = 100%

1) 6)
For synchronous motors and V/f characteristic, select P95 = 10,11. With P115 = 3, motor identification is carried out completely. To do this, the converter/inverter must be switched on twice
2) With P103 = 0.0%, the magnetizing current is calculated (compare r119). 7) The tachometer test can also be selected with P115 = 7.
3) 8)
Is re-calculated if P107 or P108 is altered (not in the case of download). Automatic parameterization is also carried out if measurement at a standstill is selected.
4) 9)
All torque signals and displays relate to P354/ P113. With P115 = 6, the parameters determined are not adopted.
5) With P114 = 0, a standard setting is made.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Calculation of motor model fp_vc_550_e.vsd Function diagram
- 550 -
Motor parameters 10.12.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.75 = 0

KIB/FLR Reg Dyn

0 ... 200 %
KIB/FLR Start P519.M (25)
65 ... 115 % KIB Selection
P518.M (76) 0 ... 3
P517.M (0)
<3> <4> <5> Kp Tn

Vd,rated VdKIB on 1 f(KIB/VdmaxReg)

<1> + K0270
– [400], [401], [402]
Vd(min)Reg act. 0
0,2,3 <2> at P100 = 0, 1, 2
B0295

PID controller
K0240 I(KIB/VdmaxReg)
(KP=P520,
DC link voltage Tn=P521, Tv=P522) K0271 [390], [391]
(Vdact) <2> at P100 = 3, 4, 5
to status word 1
[200.2]

<1> Vd,rated = 1.315 x P071 (AC unit)

= P071 (DC unit

<2> K0270, K0271 are also used for the functions Vdmax
control [610] and flexible response [605]!

<3> The KIB switch-off threshold VdKIB Off is 5% above

the VdKIB On starting point.

<4> The fault message F008 "DC link undervoltage"

comes at Vd<61% Vd,rated with released KIB.

<5> For P518 values >90% are only practical, if an Active

Front End (AFE) is used as rectifier/regenerative unit.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Functions fp_vc_600_e.vsd Function diagram
- 600 -
Kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdmin control) 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.76 = 0

KIB/FLR Reg Dyn

0 ... 200 %
FLR Start P519.M (25)
65 ... 115 % FLR Selection
P518.M (76) 0 ... 3
P517.M (0)
<3> <4> <5> Kp Tn

Vd,rated VdFLR on 2 f(FLR Reg)

<1> + – K0270 [400], [401], [402]
0
Vd(min)Reg act. 0,1,3 <2> at P100 = 0, 1, 2
B0295
PID controller
K0240
DC link (KP=P520,
voltage (Vdact) Tn=P521, Tv=P522)
[280] to status word 1
[200.2]

<1> Vd,rated = 1.315 x P071 (AC unit)

= P071 (DC unit)

<2> K0270 is also used for the functions kinetic

buffering [600] and Vdmax control [610] .

<3> The FLR switch-off threshold VdFLR off is 5%

above the starting point of VdFLR on.

<4> The threshold for F008 "DC link undervoltage" can be FLN Ud(min)
reduced via P523 FLR Vdmin. It should be at least 50 ... 76%
10% below the FLR starting point. P523.M (76%)

<5> For P518 values >90% are only practical if an

Active Front End (AFE) is used as a rectifier/
regenerative unit.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Functions fp_vc_605_e.vsd Function diagram
- 605 -
Flexible response (FLR) 26.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.77 = 0

DC bus Volts Dyn

0 ... 200 %
P516.M (25)
Vdmax controller selection
0 ... 1
P515.M (0) f(Vdmax Reg)
Kp Tn
K0270 [400], [401], [402]
Vdmax on 1 <2> at P100 = 0, 1, 2

<1> + –
Vd(max)Reg act. 0
0
B0296 I(Vdmax Reg)
K0271 [390], [391]
PID controller <2> at P100 = 3, 4, 5
K0240
DC link bus voltage (KP=P520,
(Vdact) Tn=P521, Tv=P522)
[280.5]

<1> Vdmax on = 119% x P071 x 1.315 (AC unit)

= 1.19 x P071 (DC unit)

<2> K0270 and K0271 are also used for the functions
kinetic buffering [600] and flexible response [610].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Functions fp_vc_610_e.vsd Function diagram
- 610 -
Vdmax control 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.78 = 3

OutputAmps(rms)
<1> from actual-value evaluation
K0242
DC Braking Amps DC Braking Time DC Braking Freq [286.5]
0.0 ... 6553.5 A 0.1 ... 99.9 s 0.1 ... 600.0 Hz
P396.M (~) P397.M (5,0) P398.M (100,0)
DC Braking
0 ... 2
<3> P395.M (0)
Src Start DC Braking to gating pulse inhibit Imax Reg Gain Imax Reg Time
P394.B (0) fset to sequence control 0.005 ... 0.499 4 ... 32001 ms
P331.M (0,05) P332.M (100)
B 2 "OFF1" or "OFF3" <4>
with OFF3 Alarm A045
1 P398 Gating pulse inhibit "DC braking activated"
Imax Reg(Out)
disabled Imax(set) Kp Tn
0 K0209
t |Iset| r129
–
|Iset| P603 MIN
to
from I2t control I(max,perm) V/f characteristic
<2> P396 [490.5] K0175 [405.1]
De-MagnetizeTime |Iact|
0.00 ... 10.00
P603.M (~) t DC Braking active
P397 B0294

<1> The DC braking current is calculated during automatic parameterization <3> The "DC braking" function can be started via binector selection only
(P115=1, 2, 3). It can be set at a maximum of 4 times the rated motor from drive statuses (r001) "Operation", "OFF1" and "OFF3".
current.
If the "DC braking" function is deselected again during DC braking time
(P397) via binector selection, the "Flying restart" function is
automatically activated!
<2> The de-excitation time is calculated during automatic parameterization
(P115=1, 2, 3).

<4> The alarm A045 appears if "DC braking" has been activated and
the motor frequency is higher than the frequency at which DC
braking starts.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Functions fp_vc_615_e.vsd Function diagram
- 615 -
DC braking 31.01.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n957.79 = 4

<1> <1> <1> <1>

Fly Search Amps Fly Search Speed Fly Stand Gain
0.0 ... 6553.5 A 0.0 ... 100.0 Hz/s 0.0 ... 500.0 % Fly StandMeas
P525.M (~) P526.M (1,0) P527.1 ... 3 (100,0 %) r524.1 ... 3

ON/OFF
command ON

Flying-restart enable
from control word 2 [190.5]
OFF t

Current
<1>
curve
Search current Current setpoint

t
De-magnetize Standstill Excitation
Search
time test time
<1> <3> <1>

Frequency
curve

n/f(act) n/f (max)

[316.6] Speed setpoint
r218
n/f(act) <2>
[350.8], [352.8]
t

P603.M (~) P602.M (~)

0.00 ... 10.00 s 0.00 ... 10.00 s
De-magnetize Time Excitation Time

<1> Only in the case of flying restart without encoder signal (search).
<2> Only in the case of flying restart with encoder signal (indepent of control mode).
<3> No standstill test when P527.1 = 0,0 %.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Functions fp_vc_620_e.vsd Function diagram
- 620 -
Flying restart 11.12.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 n959.98 = 3

r004

Output Amps
K0022
I(Oupt. Tech)
from actual values
K0902
[285.7], [286.7]

r129

I(max,perm)
K0175
I(max,permTech)
from [370], [400 ... 402.2]
K0904
[20.4]
Isq(act) Ref Amps
K0184 4 x Mot Rtd Amps (n) Isq(act, Tech)
from actual values [550.2] K0905
[285.4]

Isq(set,active)
K0168
Isq(smth,Tech)
from current controller K0906
[390.2]

r003

Output Volts
K0021 [20.4]
V(set, Tech)
from actual values Reference voltage
K0901
[285.3], [286.3] 4 x mot. voltage(n)

r006

DC Bus Volts
K0025 [20.4]
DCBus(act, Tech)
from actual values Reference voltage
K0903
[285.3], [286.3] 4 x supply voltage(n)
[550.2]
r007
[20.4]
Motor Torque Ref Torque
K0024
4 x Mot Rtd Torq (n) T(act, Tech)
from actual values
[550.2] K0900
[285.7]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology CU2/ CUVC fp_vc_699_e.vsd Function diagram
- 699 -
Process signals during control normalization 22.09.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Notes: - A free block is only processed if it is specifically assigned to a sampling time via the allocated U95x
parameter; see sheet [702]!
- Parameterization of the sampling sequence is also described on sheet [702].
- The approximate calculating time per block is indicated in {µs} for each type of block.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_700_e.vsd Function diagram
- 700 -
Cover sheet 30.06.06 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Sampling time Sampling sequence
2 ... 20 2 ... 20
U950 ... U953 U960 ... U963 Setting and monitoring the sampling
times and sampling sequence
Function Parameter for Parameter for
Function block setting the sampling time setting the sampling sequence
number Parameter No. (factory setting) Parameter No. (factory setting) Example of the sampling time and sampling
001 U950.01 (20) U960.01 (20) sequence of a function block:
Processing of input terminals and 002 U950.02 (20) U960.02 (20)
receive data from serial interfaces ... ... ... ... ... This function block has the function block number 314
019 U950.19 (20) U960.19 (20)
It is deactivated in the factory setting (U953.14 = 20).
020 U950.20 (20) U960.20 (20)
Processing of output terminals and
... ... ... ... ...
transmit data to serial interfaces
029 U950.29 (20) U960.29 (20)
031 U950.31 (20) U960.31 (20) U953.14 = __ (20)
Uxxx (0)
032 U950.32 (20) U960.32 (20) K Kxxxx
... ... ... ... ...
099 U950.99 (20) U960.99 (20)
Free function blocks
101 U951.01 (20) U961.01 (20)
102 U951.02 (20) U961.02 (20)
... ... ...
330 U953.30 (20) U963.30 (20) Via U953.14 = 4 the function block can be allocated to the sampling time
331 U953.31 (20) U963.31 (20) T4 (= 4 x T0 = 4.8 ms).
Angle synchronism and positioning ... ... ... ... ...
350 U953.50 (20) U963.50 (20)
351 U953.51 (20) U963.51 (20) The function block is processed in the factory setting at the 3140th
Internal sequence control and
... ... ... ... ...
setpoint calculation
370 U953.70 (20) U963.70 (20)
position. By setting U963.14 to a value not equal to 3140,
the block can be allocated to a different position in the
371 U953.71 (20) U963.71 (20)
Reserve ... ... ... ... ...
sampling sequence.
399 U953.99 (20) U963.99 (20)

Parameter for setting the sampling time Parameter for setting the sampling sequence:
Value range: 2 ... 20 Value range: 0 ... 9999
Monitoring of calculating time
Factory setting: 20 (block is not calculated) Factory setting: Function block number x 10
B0090
Parameter value Sampling time 1) Sampling time at i.e. in the factory setting the blocks
T0 = P357 P357 = 1.2 ms are processed in the sequence "Calculating time" alarm A001
of the block numbers
Exception: Function block number B0091
2 T2 = 1 x T0 1.2 ms
3 T3 = 2 x T0 2.4 ms 10, 14, 15, 20 - 25, 371 Time monitoring "Calculating time" fault F042
4 T4 = 4 x T0 4.8 ms
5 T5 = 8 x T0 9.6 ms
6 T6 = 16 x T0 19.2 ms Computer workload
7 T7 = 32 x T0 38.4 ms r829
8 T8 = 64 x T0 76.8 ms
9 T9 = 128 x T0 153.6 ms
10 T10 = 256 x T0 307.2 ms
11 ... 19 Reserved for future applications 1) WE: 1.2 ms
20 Block is not calculated

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_702_e.vsd Function diagram
- 702 -
Setting and monitoring the sampling times and sampling sequence 21.08.00 MASTERDRIVES VC
9 fixed setpoints (1-word) {2 µs} 8 fixed setpoints (2-word) {2 µs} 8 fixed control bits {2 µs} 3 connector displays {1 µs} U952.76 = __ (10)

U001.F (0.00) U950.31 = __ (10) U011.F (0.000) U950.40 = __ (10) U021.F (0) U950.48 = __ (10) U033 (0)
n034
-200.00...200.00 % -200.000.. 0...1 U952.75 = __ (10) K
-200.0...200.0 %
..200.000 %
U031 (0)
K0401 KK0411 B0401 n032 U952.77 = __ (10)
K
-200.0...200.0 %
U002.F (0.00) U950.32 = __ (10) U012.F (0.000) U950.41 = __ (10) U022.F (0) U950.49 = __ (10) U035 (0)
n036
-200.00...200.00 % -200.000.. 0...1 K
-200.0...200.0 %
..200.000 %
K0402 KK0412 B0402
4 double connector displays {3 µs}
U003.F (0.00) U950.33 = __ (10) U013.F (0.000) U950.42 = __ (10) U023.F (0) U950.50 = __ (10)
U952.78 = __ (10) U952.80 = __ (10)
-200.00...200.00 % -200.000.. 0...1
..200.000 % U037 (0) n038 U041 (0) n042
K0403 KK0413 B0403 KK -200.000.. KK -2 147 483 647..
..200.000 % ..2 147 483 647
U004.F (0.00) U950.34 = __ (10) U014.F (0.000) U950.43 = __ (10) U024.F (0) U950.51 = __ (10) U952.79 = __ (10) U952.81 = __ (10)
-200.00...200.00 % -200.000.. 0...1
..200.000 % U039 (0) n040 U043 (0) n044
K0404 KK0414 B0404 KK -200.000.. KK -2 147 483 647..
..200.000 % ..2 147 483 647
U005.F (0.00) U950.35 = __ (10) U025.F (0) U950.52 = __ (10)
-200.00...200.00 % U015.F (0) U950.44 = __ (10) 0...1 4 binector displays {1 µs}
-2 147 483 647.. U952.82 = __ (10) U952.84 = __ (10)
<2>
K0405 ..2 147 483 647 B0405
KK0415 U045 (0) U049 (0)
U006.F (0.00) U950.36 = __ (10) U026.F (0) U950.53 = __ (10) n046 n050
B B
-200.00...200.00 % 0...1 0...1 0...1
U016.F (0) U950.45 = __ (10)
-2 147 483 647.. U952.83 = __ (10) U952.85 = __ (10)
<2>
K0406 ..2 147 483 647 B0406
U047 (0) U051 (0)
KK0416 n048 n052
U007.F (0.00) U950.37 = __ (10) U027.F (0) U950.54 = __ (10) B B
0...1 0...1
-200.00...200.00 % U017.F (0) U950.46 = __ (10) 0...1
-2 147 483 647..
K0407 ..2 147 483 647
<2>
B0407 1 connector display with smoothing {5 µs}
KK0417 τ ≈ 300 ms U952.86 = __ (10)
U008.F (0.00) U950.38 = __ (10) U028.F (0) U950.55 = __ (10)
-200.00...200.00 % U018.F (0) U950.47 = __ (10) 0...1 U053 (0) n054
-2 147 483 647.. K -200.00..
<2>
K0408 ..2 147 483 647 B0408 ..200.00 %
KK0418

U009.F (0) U950.39 = __ (10) 1 double connector display with smoothing {8 µs}
<2> corresponds to -200 ... 200 %
0...65535 <1> U952.87 = __ (10)
τ ≈ 300 ms

K0409 U055 (0) n056

KK -200.000..
<1> corresponds to -200 ... 200 % ..200.000 %

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_705_e.vsd Function diagram
- 705 -
Fixed setpoints, fixed control bits, connector/binector displays 15.04.99 MASTERDRIVES VC
 4 fault message trigger signals {2 µs} 4 alarm message trigger signals {2 µs} 3 connector/double connector converters {9 µs}
U952.59 = __ (20) U952.63 = __ (20)
U061 (0) U065 (0)
B 1 = "Fault F148" B 1 = "Alarm A061"

U952.60 = __ (20) U952.64 = __ (20) U950.56 = __ (20)

U062 (0) U066 (0) U070 (0)
B 1 = "Fault F149" B 1 = "Alarm A062" K .01 Hi Word KK0420
K .02 Lo Word
K .03 Hi Word KK0421
K .04 Lo Word
U952.61 = __ (20) U952.65 = __ (20) .05 Hi Word
U063 (0) U067 (0) K KK0422
B 1 = "Fault F150" B 1 = "Alarm A063" K .06 Lo Word

U952.62 = __ (20) U952.66 = __ (20)

U064 (0) U068 (0)
B 1 = "Fault F151" B 1 = "Alarm A064"

Voltage monitoring of electronics power supply 3 double connector/connector converters {11 µs}

[470.3]
[760.4]
[760.7]
[775.1]
[775.3] U952.88 = __ (20)
U071 (0)
100 ms POWER ON [775.7] .01 Hi Word
KK K0423
POWER ON [834] Lo Word K0424
B0400
KK .02 Hi Word K0425
10 ms
Lo Word K0426
POWER OFF POWER OFF
KK .03 Hi Word K0427
Lo Word K0428

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_710_e.vsd Function diagram
- 710 -
Fault/alarm trigger signals, connector <==> double connector converter 15.04.99 MASTERDRIVES VC
 3 connector/binector converters {11 µs}
U072.01 (0) Bit field 1
K Connector/binector converter 1 n073
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B0410
U950.57 = __ (20)
B0411
B0412
7-segment display B0413
of the bit field to n073 B0414
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 B0415
B0416
B0417
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B0418
B0419
B0420
B0421
B0422
B0423
B0424
B0425

U072.02 (0) Bit field 2 U072.03 (0) Bit field 3

K Connector/binector converter 2 n074 K Connector/binector converter 3 n075
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B0430 B0450
U950.58 = __ (20) U950.59 = __ (20)
B0431 B0451
B0432 B0452
7-segment display B0433 7-segment display B0453
of the bit field to n074 B0434 of the bit field to n075 B0454
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 B0435 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 B0455
B0436 B0456
B0437 B0457
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B0438 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B0458
B0439 B0459
B0440 B0460
B0441 B0461
B0442 B0462
B0443 B0463
B0444 B0464
B0445 B0465

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_715_e.vsd Function diagram
- 715 -
Connector/binector converters 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 4 binector/connector converters {12 µs}
U076 (0) U952.89 = __ (20) U078 (0) U952.90 = __ (20)
.01 .01
B B
.02 .02
B B
.03 .03
B B
.04 .04
B B
.05 .05
B B
.06 .06
B B
.07 7-segment display .07 7-segment display
B B
.08 of the bit field to n077 .08 of the bit field to n079
B B
.09 .09
B 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 B 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
.10 .10
B B
.11 .11
B B
.12 .12
B B
.13 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 .13 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B B
.14 .14
B B
.15 .15
B n077 B n079
.16 0...FFFFh .16 0...FFFFh
B B

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit field 4 K0431 Bit field 5 K0432
Binector/connector converter 1 Binector/connector converter 2

U080 (0) U952.91 = __ (20) U057 (0) U952.56 = __ (20)

.01 .01
B B
.02 .02
B B
.03 .03
B B
.04 .04
B B
.05 .05
B B
.06 .06
B B
.07 7-segment display .07 7-segment display
B B
.08 of the bit field to n081 .08 of the bit field to n058
B B
.09 .09
B 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 B 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
.10 .10
B B
.11 .11
B B
.12 .12
B B
.13 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 .13 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B B
.14 .14
B B
.15 .15
B n081 B n058
.16 0...FFFFh .16 0...FFFFh
B B

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit field 6 K0433 Bit field 7 K0490
Binector/connector converter 3 Binector/connector converter 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_720_e.vsd Function diagram
- 720 -
Binector connector converters 12.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 4 adders with 2 inputs (1-word) {3 µs} 3 sign inverters (1-word) {2 µs} 1 modulo 2^16 adder/subtracter {2 µs}
U950.83 = __ (20) U951.42 = __ (20) U950.84 = __ (20) U096 (0) U951.72 = __ (20)
U082 (0) U084 (0) U098 (0) x y K .01
.01 + 200% .01 + 200%
K
K .02 K0442
K
K .02 K0444 K -1 K0458 K .02
.03
K0456
+ -200% + -200% K <1>
y = -x <1> Arithmetic two's complement without evaluation
U951.01 = __ (20) U952.20 = __ (20) of carry and borrow:
U951.17 = __ (20) No limitation in the case of overflows and
U083 (0) U085 (0) underflows outside of the number range of 16 bit
K .01 + 200%
K .01 + 200%
U099 (0) (Example: 65535+40000=39999 at modulo 2^16 addition).
K0443 K0445 x y
K .02
+ -200%
K .02
+ -200%
K -1 K0459

y = -x 1 modulo 2^32 adder/subtracter {2 µs}

4 adders with 2 inputs (2-word) {6 µs}
U952.36 = __ (20) U097 (0) U951.91 = __ (20)
U951.15 = __ (20) U952.05 = __ (20) U100 (0) KK .01
x y
U090 (0)
KK .01 + 200%
U092 (0)
KK .01 + 200% K -1 K0460 KK .02
.03
KK0457
.02 KK0450 .02 KK0452 KK
KK KK y = -x
+ -200% + -200% <1> Arithmetic two's complement without evaluation
of carry and borrow:
U951.29 = __ (20) U952.21 = __ (20) No limitation in the case of overflows and
underflows outside of the number range of 32 bit
U091 (0)
.01 + 200%
U093 (0)
.01 + 200% 2 sign inverters (2-word) {4 µs} (Example: (232-1)+40000=39999 at modulo 2^32 addition).
KK KK
.02 KK0451 .02 KK0453
KK KK
+ -200% + -200% U951.03 = __ (20) 1 switchable sign inverter
U101 (0) x y
3 subtracters (1-word) {3 µs} KK -1 KK0461 (1-word) {2 µs}
U951.02 = __ (20) U952.06 = __ (20) y = -x U103 (0) U951.30 = __ (20)
U087 (0) U089 (0) B
K .01 + 200%
K .01 + 200% U952.22 = __ (20)
.02 K0447 .02 K0449 U104 (0)
K K U102 (0) x y 0
– – K
-200% -200% KK -1 KK0462 x y K0463
U951.58 = __ (20)
y = -x
-1 1
U088 (0)
K .01 + 200% y = -x
.02 K0448
K
– -200% 1 adder with 4 inputs (1-word) {7 µs}
U951.57 = __ (20) 1 switchable sign inverter
2 subtracters (2-word) {6 µs} U086 (0)
K .01
200%
(2-word) {4 µs}
K .02
U951.16 = __ (20) U952.35 = __ (20) .03 + K0446
U094 (0) U095 (0) K U105 (0) U951.90 = __ (20)
.04 -200%
KK .01 + 200%
KK .01 + 200% K B
.02 KK0454 .02 KK0455
KK KK U106 (0)
– -200% – -200% 0
KK
x y KK0465
-1 1
y = -x

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_725_e.vsd Function diagram
- 725 -
Adders, subtracters, sign inverters 21.08.00 MASTERDRIVES VC
 3 multipliers (1-word) {12 µs} 2 dividers (1-word) {15 µs} 3 high-resolution multipliers/dividers (1-word) {18 µs}

U951.04 = __ (20) U951.05 = __ (20) U951.06 = __ (20) Scaling

U107 (0) U111 (0) x4 y2
.01 x1 .01 x1 y2 = 100% KK0482
K y K y U114 (0)
.02 x2 K0467 K0471 .01 x1
K K .02 x2 K x4
.02 x2 y
x1⋅ x2 When divided by 0 (x2=0): ⋅
x1100%
K (32bit) K0481
.03 <1> (32bit)
100 % x1 > 0 : y = +199,99 % x2 K x1 ⋅ x 2
x1 = 0 : y = 0,00 % y= x4
When divided by 0 (x3=0): x3 (16bit) x3
x1 < 0 : y = -199,99 % x4 > 0 : y = +199,99 %
x4 = 0 : y = 0,00 % Value range of x4 corresponds to -400 % ...+400 %;
U951.59 = __ (20) x4 < 0 : y = -199,99 % it is restricted at KK0482 to the range -200 %...+200 %
U108 (0)
.01 x1 U952.23 = __ (20)
K y U112 (0)
.02 x2 K0468 .01 x1
K K y U951.32 = __ (20) Scaling
x1⋅ x2 .02 x2 K0472 x4 y2
K y2 = 100% KK0484
100 % U115 (0)
When divided by 0 (x2=0): ⋅
x1100% .01 x1
x1 > 0 : y = +199,99 % x2
K x4
.02 x2 y
x1 = 0 : y = 0,00 % K (32bit) K0483
x1 < 0 : y = -199,99 % .03 <1> (32bit)
U952.37 = __ (20) K x1 ⋅ x 2
U109 (0) When divided by 0 (x3=0): y = xx43
.01 x1 x3 (16bit)
K y x4 > 0 : y = +199,99 %
.02 x2 K0469 x4 = 0 : y = 0,00 % Value range of x4 corresponds to -400 % ...+400 %;
K
x4 < 0 : y = -199,99 % it is restricted at KK0484 to the range -200 %...+200 %
x1⋅ x2
100 %

U951.73 = __ (20) Scaling

x4 y2
y2 = 100% KK0486
1 multiplier (2-word) {33 µs} 1 divider (2-word) {70 µs} U116 (0)
.01 x1
K x4
.02 x2 y
K (32bit) K0485
.03 <1> (32bit)
K x1 ⋅ x 2
y= x4
When divided by 0 (x3=0): x3 (16bit) x3
U951.31 = __ (20) U951.43 = __ (20) x4 > 0 : y = +199,99 %
U110 (0) U113 (0) x4 = 0 : y = 0,00 % Value range of x4 corresponds to -400 % ...+400 %;
.01 x1 .01 x1 x4 < 0 : y = -199,99 % it is restricted at KK0486 to the range -200 %...+200 %
K y KK y
.02 x2 KK0470 .02 x2 KK0473
K KK
x1⋅ x2 When divided by 0 (x2=0): ⋅
x1100%
100 % x1 > 0 : y = +199,99 % x2
x1 = 0 : y = 0,00 %
x1 < 0 : y = -199,99 %

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_730_e.vsd Function diagram
- 730 -
Multipiliers, dividers 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 1 high-resolution multiplier/divider New Blocks (from V3.2 and higher)
(2-word) {25 µs}
4 shift multipliers/dividers (2-word)

Number of shift steps Number of shift steps

U405 (0) U951.12 = __ (20) -31 ... +31 -31 ... +31
(32bit) x
KK (48bit) U442.01 (0) U442.03 (0)
y
U406 (1) (16bit) KK0602
.01 a (32bit) n n
K
.02 b n = 0...-31 U953.36 = __ (20) n = 0...-31 U953.38 = __ (20)
K y=(x*a)/b
Sign 31 10 Sign 31 10
0 0
31
U443.01 (0) n = 0...+31 2 -1 U443.03 (0) n = 0...+31 231-1
x y x y
KK KK0618 KK KK0620

y = x * 2n -231-1 y = x * 2n -231-1
2 P-amplifiers/multipliers (2-word)

P amplification
-1000.00 ... 1000.00
U440.01 (1.00)
U953.39 = __ (10)

U441.01 (0) 231-1 Number of shift steps Number of shift steps

KK KK0616 -31 ... +31 -31 ... +31
U442.02 (0) U442.04 (0)
231-1
n n
n = 0...-31 U953.37 = __ (20) n = 0...-31 U952.03 = __ (20)

Sign 31 10 Sign 31 10
0 0
P amplification
-1000.00 ... 1000.00 U443.02 (0) n = 0...+31 231-1 U443.04 (0) n = 0...+31 231-1
x y x y
U440.02 (1.00) KK KK0619 KK KK0621
U951.54 = __ (10)
y = x * 2n -231-1 y = x * 2n -231-1
U441.02 (0) 231-1
KK KK0617
231-1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_732_e.vsd Function diagram
- 732 -
Multipliers/dividers, P-amplifiers, shift multipliers 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 New Blocks (from V3.2 and higher)
2 Delay elements for analog signals (2-word) {10 µs}
Deceleration cycles Deceleration cycles
0 ... 32 sampling times 0 ... 32 sampling times
U401 (0) U403 (0)
U950.63 = __ (20) U950.64 = __ (20)
T T
U400 (0) T T U402 (0) T T
KK KK0600 KK KK0601

1 differentiator (2-word) {16 µs} 2 settable smoothing elements, high-resoltuion (2-word) {16 µs}
Nominal acceleration time
(during this acc. time dx/dt would be 100 %) Smoothing time Smoothing time
0.01 ... 300.00 s 0 ... 10000 ms 0 ... 10000 ms
U421 (0.01) U415 (0) U418 (0)
U952.32 = __ (20) U952.31 = __ (20) U952.43 = __ (20)

U420 (0) x d U414 (0) x y U417 (0) x y

dx/dt
KK dt KK0607 KK KK0605 KK KK0606

D Portion U416 (0) U419 (0)

Set setting Set setting
B B
command y=x command y=x

2 integrators (2-word) {30...50 µs}

U409 (611) U951.53 = __ (20) U412 (612) U951.85 = __ (20)
K Integral time constant K Integral time constant
Integral time constant Integral time constant
0.000 ... 60.000 s (1000dec = 1 sec) 0.000 ... 60.000 s (1000dec = 1 sec)
K0611 Ti K0612 Ti
U433 (0.000) U434 (0.000)

U408 U411
.01 (0) .01 (0)
KK Input Output KK0603 KK Input Output KK0604

Ti Ti

.02 (0) .02 (0)

KK Upper limit Output to KK Upper limit Output to
.03 (0) B0577 .03 (0) B0579
KK Lower limit upper limit KK Lower limit upper limit
.04 (0) .04 (0)
KK Setting value KK Setting value

Output to Output to
U410 (0) B0578 U413 (0) B0580
lower limit lower limit
B Setting command B Setting command

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_734_e.vsd Function diagram
- 734 -
Delay elements, differentiator, integrator, smoothing elements 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 3 absolute-value generators with smoothing (1-word) {7 µs} 2 limiters (1-word) {5 µs}

U118 (0) Smoothing time const. U129.F

U950.75 = __ (20) 0...3 0...10000 ms (100.00)
U119 (0) U951.74 = __ (20)
B+ y x>B+ B0470
K0503 U130 B+
3 .01 (503)
U117 (0)
-1 K
x K .02 (0) x y K0501
2 x
K -1 K0491
K .03 (502)
1
0 K0502 B-
B- x<B- B0471
-1
U121 (0) Smoothing time const. U131.F
U952.47 = __ (20) 0...3 0...10000 ms (100.00)
U122 (0) U952.38 = __ (20)
B+ y x>B+ B0472
K0506 U132 B+
3 .01 (506)
U120 (0)
-1 K
x K .02 (0) x y K0504
2 x
K -1 K0492
K .03 (505)
1
0 K0505 B-
B- x<B- B0473
-1
U124 (0) Smoothing time const.
U952.67 = __ (20) 0...3 0...10000 ms
U125 (0)

3
U123 (0)
-1
2
K -1 K0493
1
0 1 limiter (2-word) {11 µs}

U133.F
1 absolute-value generators with smoothing (2-word) {10 µs} (100.00)
U952.48 = __ (20)
B+ y x>B+ B0474
U127 (0) Smoothing time const. KK0509 U134 B+
U952.07 = __ (20) 0...3 0...10000 ms .01 (509)
KK
U128 (0) .02 (0)
x KK x x y KK0507
KK .03 (508)
3
U126 (0)
-1 KK0508 B-
B- x<B- B0475
KK -1 2
KK0494 -1
1
0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_735_e.vsd Function diagram
- 735 -
Absolute-value generators with smoothing, limiters 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 1 limit-value monitor with smoothing (2-word) {24 µs}
Hysteresis
Smoothing time const. 0.00 ... 199.99 %
0...10000 ms U148 (0) U952.68 = __ (20)
U147 (0) KK0516
2 limit-value monitors with smoothing (1-word) {15 µs}
U148 U148
U146
.01 |A|<B U149 (0)
KK A 0 A
KK .02
Hysteresis B B
Smoothing time const. 0.00 ... 199.99 % (515)
0...10000 ms U148 0
U138 (0.00) U951.18 = __ (20)
U137 (0) K0512 A<B
U145 (0.00) KK0515 1 B0478
0 A
U138 U138 -200.00 ... 200.00 % 2
B
U136
.01 |A|<B U139 (0) U148
K A 0 A
K .02 B A=B
B B 0
(511)
U138 0 B U148 A
A<B
U135 (0.00) K0511 1 B0476
0 A
-200.00 ... 200.00 % B 2
U138

B A=B
0
B U138 A 1 limit-value monitor without smoothing (2-word) {18 µs}
Hysteresis
0.00 ... 199.99 %
U152 (0.00) U951.75 = __ (20)
Hysteresis
Smoothing time const. 0.00 ... 199.99 %
0...10000 ms U143 (0.00) U952.49 = __ (20)
K0514 U152 U152
U142 (0)
U151
.01 |A|<B U153 (0)
U143 U143 KK A 0 A
KK .02
U141 B B
.01 |A|<B U144 (0) (517)
K A 0 A U152 0
K .02
B B A<B
(513) U150 (0.00) KK0517 1 B0479
U143 0 0 A
A<B -200.00 ... 200.00 % B 2
U140 (0.00) K0513 1 B0477
0 A U152

-200.00 ... 200.00 % B 2 B

0 A=B
U143
B A
B A=B
U152
0
B U143 A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_740_e.vsd Function diagram
- 740 -
Limit-value monitors with and without smoothing 21.08.00 MASTERDRIVES VC
 2 cam-contactor groups each with 2 cams (2-word) {9 µs}

U950.60 = __ (20) ON position 1 OFF position 1 U950.61 = __ (20) ON position 1 OFF position 1
-2 147 483 647.. -2 147 483 647.. Hysteresis -2 147 483 647.. -2 147 483 647.. Hysteresis
..2 147 483 647 ..2 147 483 647 0..2 147 483 647 ..2 147 483 647 ..2 147 483 647 0..2 147 483 647
U154 (0) U160 (0)
U156.F (0) U157.F (0) U155.1 (0) U162.F (0) U163.F (0) U161.1 (0)
KK KK

Y1 Y1

Y1 Y1
B0480 B0482
U155 U155 X U161 U161 X

Y2 Y2
<1> <1>

Y2 Y2
B0481 B0483
U155 U155 X U161 U161 X

<1> <1>
In the case of a round shaft, In the case of a round shaft,
U158.F (0) U159.F (0) U164.F (0) U165.F (0)
a cam overscoring the zero point a cam overscoring the zero point
ON position 2 OFF position 2 ON position 2 OFF position 2
can be realized by ORing can be realized by ORing
-2 147 483 647.. -2 147 483 647.. -2 147 483 647.. -2 147 483 647..
the two cam outputs. the two cam outputs.
..2 147 483 647 ..2 147 483 647 ..2 147 483 647 ..2 147 483 647

U155.2 (0) U161.2 (0)

Axis cycle Axis cycle
0..2 147 483 647 0..2 147 483 647

<1> If the input variable is a rotary axis and a cam passes the axis <1> If the input variable is a rotary axis and a cam passes the axis
cycle jump of the rotary axis, the axis cycle of the rotary axis cycle jump of the rotary axis, the axis cycle of the rotary axis
has to be entered in parameter U155.2. has to be entered in parameter U161.2.
To ensure that cam 1 doesn't overlap itself, the hysteresis To ensure that cam 1 doesn*t overlap itself, the hysteresis
must only be half the value of the distance to go between size must only be half the value of the distance to go between size
of the cam and the axis cycle. If this requirement is not met, of the cam and the axis cycle. If this requirement is not met,
the output binector remains inactive. the output binector remains inactive.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_745_e.vsd Function diagram
- 745 -
Cam-contactor groups 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 1 extended cam-contactor group with 2 cams
U950.80 = __ (20)

U437 Hysteresis
U436 .01
Cam3 FSetp1 KK (0) 0..2 147 483 647
.02(0) .02 ON position 1
On position 1 KK0566 KK (566) U436.01 (0)
.03(0) .03 OFF position 1
Off position 1 KK0567 KK (567)
Cam3 FSetp2
Y1

Value range of
On/Off positions:
-2 147 483 647.. Y1
B0484
2 147 483 647 Hyst Hyst X

Y2
<1>

Y2
B0485
Hyst Hyst X

U436 Cam3 FSetp3 U437

.04(0) .04
On position 2 KK0568 KK (568)
.05(0) .05 ON position 2
Off position 2 KK0569 KK (569)
OFF position 2
Cam3 FSetp4

U436.6 (0)
<1> If the input variable is a rotary axis and a cam passes the axis Axis cycle
cycle jump of the rotary axis, the axis cycle of the rotary axis 0..2 147 483 647
has to be entered in parameter U436.6.
To ensure that the cam doesn't overlap itself, the hysteresis
must only be half the value of the distance to go between size
of the cam and the axis cycle. If this requirement is not met,
the output binector remains inactive.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_745a_e.vsd Function diagram
- 745a -
Cam-contactor groups 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 5 Analog signal switches (1-word) {2 µs} 1 Analog signal multiplexer with 8 channels (2-word) {6 µs}
U166 (0) U950.85 = __ (20) U172 (0) U951.60 = __ (20) U186 U951.78 = __ (20)
.01 (0)
B B B
.02 (0)
B
U167 (0) U173 (0) .03 (0)
.01 0 .01 0 B
K K .04 (1) Signal selector
.02 K0521 .02 K0524 B 0001
K K switch does not
1 1 Memory
ENABLE switch until
ENABLE = 1

U168 (0) U951.19 = __ (20) U174 (0) U951.76 = __ (20) 22 21 20

B B U187 (0) Signal select
.01
KK 0
U169 (0) U175 (0) .02
.01 0 .01 0 KK 1
K K .03
K0522 K0525 KK 2
.02 .02 .04
K K KK 3
1 1 .05 KK0539
KK 4
.06
KK 5
U170 (0) U951.21 = __ (20) .07
KK 6
B .08
KK 7 MUX
U171 (0)
.01 0
K
.02 K0523
K
1

5 Analog signal switches (2-word) {4 µs} 1 Analog signal demultiplexer with 8 channels (2-word) {8 µs}
U176 (0) U950.86 = __ (20) U182 (0) U951.77 = __ (20) U188 U950.62 = __ (20)
.01 (0)
B B B
.02 (0)
B
U177 (0) U183 (0) .03 (0)
.01 0 .01 0 B
KK KK .04 (1) Signal selector
.02 KK0526 .02 KK0529 B 0001
KK KK .05 (0) switch does not
1 1 B Memory
ENABLE switch until
ENABLE = 1

U178 (0) U950.87 = __ (20) U184 (0) U952.08 = __ (20) 22 21 20

B B Signal select
MODE
U189 (0) 0 KK0531
U179 (0) U185 (0)
.01 0 .01 0 KK
KK KK 1 KK0532
.02 KK0527 .02 KK0530 MODE = 0:
KK KK 2 KK0533
1 1 The 7 non-through-connec-
ted output connectors 3 KK0534
are each permanently
U180 (0) U951.20 = __ (20) assigned to the value '0'.
4 KK0535
B MODE = 1: 5 KK0536
The 7 non-through-connected
output connectors remain 6 KK0537
U181 (0) 'frozen' at the old value.
.01 0 DEMUX 7 KK0538
KK
.02 KK0528
KK
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_750_e.vsd Function diagram
- 750 -
Analog signal switches/multiplexers/demultiplexers 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 3 characteristic blocks with 10 support values (1-word) {15 µs}

Y values Y values Y values

U192.01 to .10 (0) U195.01 to .10 (0) U198.01 to .10 (0)
U951.07 = __ (20) U951.33 = __ (20) U952.09 = __ (20)
y 10 y 10 y 10
y10 y10 y10
9 9 9
8 8 8
U190 (0) -200% 7 U193 (0) -200% 7 U196 (0) -200% 7
x y x y x y
K x1 x K0541 K x1 x K0542 K x1 x K0543
The distance 5 x10 The distance 5 x10 The distance 5 x10
between 2 adjacent
6 between 2 adjacent
6 between 2 adjacent
6
X or Y values must 23 4 +200% X or Y values must 23 4 +200% X or Y values must 23 4 +200%
not be more than y1 not be more than y1 not be more than y1
199.99 %. 1 199.99 %. 1 199.99 %. 1

U191.01 to .10 (0) U194.01 to .10 (0) U197.01 to .10 (0)

X values X values X values

1 dead zone (1-word) {2 µs}

Dead zone z
U200 (0,00)
U950.88 = __ (20)

U199 (0) -z y
x
K K0544
z x

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_755_e.vsd Function diagram
- 755 -
Characteristic blocks, dead zone 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 1 Maximum selection (2-word) {8 µs} 2 tracking / storage elements (2-word) {6 µs}

U950.76 = __ (20) U952.69 = __ (20)

1 ⇒ y=x 1 ⇒ y=x
U203 (0) ⇒ freeze y U206 (0) ⇒ freeze y
B .01 B .01
Power On Mode Power On Mode
U201 (0) U952.24 = __ (20) .02 .02
B U205 (0) B U208 (0)
KK .01 x1 .03 .03
y B <1> B <1>
KK .02 x2 MAX KK0545 TRACK TRACK
KK .03 x3 U204 (0) U207 (0)
y = Maximum of x1, x2, x3 KK x y KK0551 KK x y KK0552
(e.g. -40 % greater than -50 %)

<1> <1>
U205 = 0: STORE U208 = 0: STORE
No 'non-volatile' No 'non-volatile'
Priority: Priority:
storage storage
U205 = 1:
1. RESET U208 = 1:
1. RESET
'Non-volatile' RESET (y=0) 2. TRACK 'Non-volatile' RESET (y=0) 2. TRACK
storage 3. STORE storage 3. STORE

1 Minimum selection (2-word) {8 µs} 2 analog signal storages (2-word) {4 µs}

U950.77 = __ (20) U952.50 = __ (20)

U210 (0) U212 (0)
SET SET
B B
(y=x) (y=x)
U202 (0) U952.25 = __ (20)
KK .01 x1 U209 (0) U211 (0)
.02 x2 y KK x y KK0553 KK x y KK0554
KK MIN KK0546
KK .03 x3
y = Minimum of x1, x2, x3 RESET RESET
(e.g. -50 % less than -40 %) POWER ON POWER ON
(y=0) (y=0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_760_e.vsd Function diagram
- 760 -
Minimum/maximum selection, tracking/storage elements 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 18 AND elements with 3 inputs each {3 µs} 12 OR elements with 3 inputs each {3 µs}
U950.78 = __ (20) U951.44 = __ (20) U952.26 = __ (20) U950.90 = __ (20) U951.93 = __ (20)
U221 (1) U227 (1) U233 (1) U239 (0) U245 (0)
.01 .01 .01 .01 .01
B B B B B
B
.02
.03 & B0601 B
.02
.03 & B0607 B
.02
.03 & B0613 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0619 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0625
B B B B B

U950.79 = __ (20) U951.61 = __ (20) U952.39 = __ (20) U950.91 = __ (20) U952.10 = __ (20)
U222 (1) U228 (1) U234 (1) U240 (0) U246 (0)
.01 .01 .01 .01 .01
B B B B B
B
.02
.03 & B0602 B
.02
.03 & B0608 B
.02
.03 & B0614 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0620 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0626
B B B B B

U950.89 = __ (20) U951.62 = __ (20) U952.51 = __ (20) U951.23 = __ (20) U952.11 = __ (20)
U223 (1) U229 (1) U235 (1) U241 (0) U247 (0)
.01 .01 .01 .01 .01
B B B B B
B
.02
.03 & B0603 B
.02
.03 & B0609 B
.02
.03 & B0615 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0621 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0627
B B B B B

U951.09 = __ (20) U951.79 = __ (20) U952.52 = __ (20) U951.45 = __ (20) U952.40 = __ (20)
U224 (1) U230 (1) U236 (1) U242 (0) U248 (0)
.01 .01 .01 .01 .01
B B B B B
B
.02
.03 & B0604 B
.02
.03 & B0610 B
.02
.03 & B0616 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0622 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0628
B B B B B

U951.22 = __ (20) U951.80 = __ (20) U952.54 = __ (20) U951.63 = __ (20) U952.70 = __ (20)
U225 (1) U231 (1) U237 (1) U243 (0) U249 (0)
.01 .01 .01 .01 .01
B B B B B
B
.02
.03 & B0605 B
.02
.03 & B0611 B
.02
.03 & B0617 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0623 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0629
B B B B B

U951.35 = __ (20) U951.92 = __ (20) U952.92 = __ (20) U951.81 = __ (20) U952.93 = __ (20)
U226 (1) U232 (1) U238 (1) U244 (0) U250 (0)
.01 .01 .01 .01 .01
B B B B B
B
.02
.03 & B0606 B
.02
.03 & B0612 B
.02
.03 & B0618 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0624 B
.02
.03 ≥1 B0630
B B B B B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_765_e.vsd Function diagram
- 765 -
AND/OR elements 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 10 inverters {2 µs} 8 NAND elements with 3 inputs each {2 µs} 3 EXCLUSIVE OR elements {2 µs}

U951.08 = __ (20) U951.64 = __ (20) U950.92 = __ (20) U952.12 = __ (20) U950.93 = __ (20)
U251 (0) U256 (0) U261 (0) U265 (0) U276 (0)
.01 .01 .01
B 1 B0641 B 1 B0646 B
.02
B
.02
B
=1 B0666
B
.03 & B0681 B
.03 & B0685 B .02
B B

U951.10 = __ (20) U951.94 = __ (20) U951.24 = __ (20) U952.27 = __ (20) U950.96 = __ (20)
U252 (0) U257 (0) U262 (0) U266 (0) U277 (0)
.01 .01 .01
B 1 B0642 B 1 B0647 B
.02
B
.02
B
=1 B0667
B
.03 & B0682 B
.03 & B0686 B .02
B B

U951.11 = __ (20) U952.41 = __ (20) U951.47 = __ (20) U952.42 = __ (20) U952.28 = __ (20)
U253 (0) U258 (0) U263 (0) U267 (0) U278 (0)
.01 .01 .01
B 1 B0643 B 1 B0648 B
.02
B
.02
B
=1 B0668
B
.03 & B0683 B
.03 & B0687 B .02
B B

U951.37 = __ (20) U952.53 = __ (20) U951.95 = __ (20) U952.94 = __ (20)

U254 (0) U259 (0) U264 (0) U268 (0)
.01 .01
B 1 B0644 B 1 B0649 B
.02
B
.02
B
.03 & B0684 B
.03 & B0688
B B

U951.46 = __ (20) U952.55 = __ (20)

U255 (0) U260 (0)
B 1 B0645 B 1 B0650

5 digital signal switches {2 µs}

U950.94 = __ (20) U950.97 = __ (20) U951.48 = __ (20) U951.65 = __ (20) U951.96 = __ (20)
U271 (0) U272 (0) U273 (0) U274 (0) U275 (0)
.01 .01 .01 .01 .01
B B B B B
.02 0 .02 0 .02 0 .02 0 .02 0
B B B B B
.03 B0661 .03 B0662 .03 B0663 .03 B0664 .03 B0665
B B B B B
1 1 1 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_770_e.vsd Function diagram
- 770 -
Inverters, NAND elements, EXCLUSIVE OR elements, digital signal switches 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 2 D flipflops {5 µs} 12 RS flipflops {3 µs}

U951.25 = __ (20) U951.34 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET U951.82 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET U952.14 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET

U281 (0) U285 (0) U289 (0)

.01 SET .01 SET .01 SET
U279 (0) SET (Q=1) B Q B0501 B Q B0509 B Q B0517
.01 .02 (Q=1) .02 (Q=1) .02 (Q=1)
B B B B
B .02 D Q B0525
B .03 RESET RESET RESET
.04 ≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0502 ≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0510 ≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0518
B POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON
STORE
Priority:
1. RESET Q B0526 U951.36 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET U951.97 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET U952.29 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET
2. SET
3. STORE RESET (Q=0) U282 (0) U286 (0) U290 (0)
.01 SET .01 SET .01 SET
B Q B0503 B Q B0511 B Q B0519
.02 (Q=1) .02 (Q=1) .02 (Q=1)
B B B
≥1
POWER ON RESET RESET RESET
≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0504 ≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0512 ≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0520
POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON

U951.49 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET U951.98 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET U952.30 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET

U283 (0) U287 (0) U291 (0)

.01 SET .01 SET .01 SET
B Q B0505 B Q B0513 B Q B0521
U952.15 = __ (20) .02 (Q=1) .02 (Q=1) .02 (Q=1)
B B B

RESET RESET RESET

U280 (0) SET (Q=1) ≥1 (Q=0)
Q B0506 ≥1 (Q=0)
Q B0514 ≥1 (Q=0)
Q B0522
B .01 POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON
B .02 D Q B0527
B .03
B .04 U951.66 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET U952.13 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET U952.71 = __ (20) Priority: 1. RESET, 2. SET
STORE U284 (0) U288 (0) U292 (0)
Priority: .01 SET .01 SET .01 SET
1. RESET Q B0528 B Q B0507 B Q B0515 B Q B0523
.02 (Q=1) .02 (Q=1) .02 (Q=1)
2. SET B B B
3. STORE RESET (Q=0)
RESET RESET RESET
≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0508 ≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0516 ≥1 (Q=0) Q
B0524
POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON
≥1
POWER ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_775_e.vsd Function diagram
- 775 -
D and RS flipflops 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 4 timers 0...60.000 s {11 µs} 2 timers 0...600.00 s {11 µs} 1 timer 0...60.000 s with adaption {21 µs}
U294.F (0.000) Mode U306.F (0.00) Mode
0.000...60.000 s U295 (0) 0.00...600.00 s U307 (0)
U950.95 = __ (20) U951.83 = __ (20)
T T
ON delay ON delay
T 0 0 T 0 0

OFF delay OFF delay

0 T 1 0 T 1
U293 (0) U305 (0)
B B0530 B B0538
ON/OFF delay ON/OFF delay
2 2 U313.F (0,000)
T T T T 0,000...60,000 s

1 B0531 1 B0539 T
Pulse generator Pulse generator
3 3 U312 (0) 1 U951.50 = __ (20)
T T K

⋅
x1T1
Mode
100 % P314 (0)
U297.F (0.000) Mode U309.F (0.00) Mode
T
0.000...60.000 s U298 (0) 0.00...600.00 s U310 (0)
U951.67 = __ (20) U952.16 = __ (20)
T T ON delay
ON delay ON delay T 0 0
T 0 0 T 0 0

OFF delay
OFF delay OFF delay 0 T 1
0 T 1 0 T 1 U311 (0)
U296 (0) U308 (0)
B B0542
B B0532 B B0540 ON/OFF delay
ON/OFF delay ON/OFF delay
2 2 T T 2
T T T T
1 B0543
Pulse generator 1 B0533 Pulse generator 1 B0541 Pulse generator
T 3 T 3 T 3

<1> Example: T1 = 40.000 s, x1 = 150 %

U300.F (0.000) Mode U303.F (0.000) Mode -> effective time T = 60 s
0.000...60.000 s U301 (0) 0.000...60.000 s U304 (0) T is limited to the value range 0...60.000 s.
U951.84 = __ (20) U951.99 = __ (20)
T T
ON delay ON delay
T 0 0 T 0 0

OFF delay OFF delay

0 T 1 0 T 1
U299 (0) U302 (0)
B B0534 B B0536
ON/OFF delay ON/OFF delay
T T 2 T T 2

Pulse generator 1 B0535 Pulse generator 1 B0537

T 3 T 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_780_e.vsd Function diagram
- 780 -
Timers 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 New Blocks (from V3.2 and higher)
1 Pulse generator (flash encoder) {5 µs / 15 µs if Tp is changed} 6 sampling time changers for control signals {1 µs}

U950.66 = __ (20) U950.69 = __ (20)

U404.01 (0) U404.04 (0)
B 1 B0570 B 1 B0573
U407 (613) U950.65 = __ (20)
K
Period Tp
0 ... 60000 ms K0613
U435 (0) U950.67 = __ (20) U950.70 = __ (20)
Sampling ratio 1:1 Tp
Max. output frequency B0576
U404.02 (0) U404.05 (0)
1/(2 x sampling time) B 1 B0571 B 1 B0574

Note: The implemented period Tp is always an integral U950.68 = __ (20) U950.71 = __ (20)
multiple of (2 x sampling time). U404.03 (0) U404.06 (0)
Example: Tab = 3.2 ms B 1 B0572 B 1 B0575
Tp = 10 ms
Implemented period = 6.4 ms
The block does not have any logic function.
It only transfers a digital signal consistently from
a faster sampling time to a slower one.
The block ensures that the signal has the same
value in the slow sampling time for all
"consumers" (signal sinks).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_782_e.vsd Function diagram
- 782 -
Pulse generator, sampling time changers 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Sampling interval slower time slot Sampling interval slower time slot Sampling interval slower time slot
2 ... 10 2 ... 10 2 ... 10
Sampling interval U060 (2) Sampling interval U270 (2) Sampling interval U349 (2)
faster time slot faster time slot faster time slot
U951.68 = ___(20) U951.69 = ___(20) U951.70 = ___(20)

Tx Ty Tx Ty Tx Ty

Q. SH1 KK Q. SH2 KK Q. SH3 KK

U019 S&H U029 S&H U346 S&H
KK .01 KK0640 KK .01 KK0652 KK .01 KK0664
KK .02 KK0641 KK .02 KK0653 KK .02 KK0665
KK .03 KK0642 KK .03 KK0654 KK .03 KK0666
KK .04 KK0643 KK .04 KK0655 KK .04 KK0667

Q. SH1 K Q. SH2 K Q. SH3 K

U020 U030 U347
K .01 K0644 K .01 K0656 K .01 K0668
K .02 K0645 K .02 K0657 K .02 K0669
K .03 K0646 K .03 K0658 K .03 K0670
K .04 K0647 K .04 K0659 K .04 K0671
K .05 K0648 K .05 K0660 K .05 K0672
K .06 K0649 K .06 K0661 K .06 K0673
K .07 K .07 K0662 K .07 K0674
K .08 K .08 K0663 K .08 K0675

Q. SH1 B Q. SH2 B Q. SH3 B

U059 U269 U348
B .01 B0631 B .01 B0651 B .01 B0669
B .02 B0632 B .02 B0652 B .02 B0670
B .03 B0633 B .03 B0653 B .03 B0671
B .04 B0634 B .04 B0654 B .04 B0672
B .05 B0635 B .05 B0655 B .05 B0673
B .06 B0636 B .06 B0656 B .06 B0674
B .07 B0637 B .07 B0657 B .07 B0675
B .08 B0638 B .08 B0658 B .08 B0676

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_783_e.vsd Function diagram
- 783 -
Sample & Hold 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Tension setpoint
U717.3 U951.86 = ___(20)
Diameter in %
Winding pressure Tension setpoint
KK0556
K0550 Tension torque Additional torque setpoint
U717.4
+

Diameter in LU Acceleration torque

U717.5=557 Machine acceleration

Winding characteristic
Acceleration precontrol factor
KK0559
J.total in %
U953.49 = ___(20) KK0558

P232=555
Moment of inertia calculation
KP adaption
FP327 U718.3=556 FD360
Machine speed FD318 P262
FP328
V Speed setpoint
Local + + +
setpoints P438=588 – –
P440=555
Diameter in % Diameter factor
Dancer control KK0556 KK0555
Technology controller
FD791 FD792 U953.47 = ___(20)
+ Winding speed
– U178.2=91
M
Machine speed v n Diameter in LU
D
U718.1 K0557

Diameter calculator

Dancer position

FD81 / FD83
P640=550 D U
A P
Setting
dancer power

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_784a_e.vsd Function diagram
- 784a -
Overview of axial winder with dancer control 30.06.06 MASTERDRIVES VC
 SymmetryD FilterRawD D.minNormD
0 ... 1000ms 0 ... 60000ms 1 ... 65535 U953.47 = ___(20)
U716.2 (0) U716.1 (100) U714.1 (100)
0 D.FactorD
SrcAxialWinderKK
U718 KK0555
v web D KK (0) .1 Plausibility check -1 1 Multiplicator for
PlausPosD
Web speed setpoint channel
B0553 SrcAxialWinderB
Tol FactorD U719.3 (0)
n web D KK (091) .2
1 ... 65535 PlausNegD .3
Winding shaft speed B
U714.9 (5) B0554 D.maxLimD
WindBottomD
MatThickD 1 ... 65535
0.000 ... 65.534 U714.4 (1000)
U712 (0.000) ∆D/∆T D.actD[LU]
n NormD MaxLimitD n706
y
0 ... 65535 rpm Diameter B0557 D.actDLU
v n U707 (0) memory x K0557
D
n minD B0558 Diameter in LU
0.000 ... 200.000% MinLimitD
n < n.min
U715.2 (1.000)
D.actD%
v minD D.minLimD KK0556
0.000 ... 200.000%
U715.1 (1.000)
v < v.min ≥1 hold
1 ... 65535
U714.3 (100)
Diameter in %

SrcAxialWinderB D.maxNormD
U719 (0) .1 1 ... 65535
D.holdD B U714.2 (1000)

D.setD B .2 set Diameter calculator

SrcAxialWinderK {112 µs} without plausibility check
U717 {146 µs} with plausibility check
D.SetValD LU K (0) .6 Setting value

D.minNormJ JCoreJ
Moment of inertia {71 µs} 1 ... 65535 0.000 ... 200.000% U953.49 = ___(20) Winding pressure {35 µs} U951.86 = ___(20)
U714.7 (100) U715.3 (0.000) D.minTP CharacteristicTP D.maxTP
SrcAxialWinderK 1 ... 65535 0 ... 1 1 ... 65535
MatWidthJ MatWidthJ U717 U714.5 (100) U711 (1) U714.6 (1000)
0.00 ... 200.00% K0540 K (540) .1
U713.1 (100.00) MatConstJ
.2 J.TotalJ
K0560 K (560) J.Total KK0558 SrcAxialWinderK <2>
SrcAxialWinderKK 0 Acc.FactorJ U717
U718 TensionSetp TP % K (0) .3
.3 <1> KK0559 .4 Tension
ThicknessJ D.actJ KK (556) -1 WindPressTP % K (0)
1
D.actTP LU K (557) .5 setpoint TP
0.00 ... 200.00%
K0550
U713.2 (100.00) D.maxNormJ JFixedJ
ScalingJ
1 ... 65535 0.000 ... 200.000% SrcAxialWinderB
0.00 ... 200.00% <2>
U714.8 (1000) U715.4 (0.000)
U713.3 (0.00) U719 (0) Characteristic = 0
WindBottomJ B .4
Characteristic = 1
  D.minNormJ  
4
<1> J.totalJ = D.actJ4 −  ∗ 100%   ∗ MatWidthJ ∗ ThicknessJ * ScalingJ + J.CoreJ + J.FixedJ
  D.maxNormJ  


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_784b_e.vsd Function diagram
- 784b -
Axial winder 08.09.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 U951.38 = ___(20)
Software counter 16 bit (maximum counting frequency: 1/sampling time) {8 µs}
<3>

Counter output
U317 0...65535
.01 (0) Count up n318
B
Priority: & UP
OUT K0565
1. Enable counter
2. Set counter .02 (0) Count down
3. Stop counter B
4. Count up/down .03 (0) Stop counter & DOWN
B 1
.04 (0) Set counter (Binary code)
B
.05 (1) Enable counter
B 1

Counter minimum value U316 Set counter to

.01 (561) Minimum value minimum
0 ... 65535 K0561 K Overflow B0490
U315.1 (0) value

Counter maximum value

.02 (562) Maximum value
0 ... 65535 K0562 K Underflow B0491
U315.2 (65535)
Counter setting value Set counter to
.03 (563) Setting value <2>
0 ... 65535 K0563 K setting value
U315.3 (0)
Counter starting value
.04 (564) Starting value <2> Set counter to
0 ... 65535 K0564 K
U315.4 (0) starting value

Example: Minimum value = 2, Maximum value = 7

POWER ON <1>
[X4.4] 7 7 7 7
6 6 6 6
Counter output 5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
<1>After POWER ON the counter is set to the starting value. Count up

<2>Starting value and setting value are limited to the range (minimum value... maximum value). Count down
2 2
<3>Example: The counter is operating in the 3.2 ms time slot -> max. counting frequency 310 Hz. Overflow
Attention: The sampling time and sampling sequence of the upstream signal processing has to be taking into account! 7 7
Underflow

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_785_e.vsd Function diagram
- 785 -
Software counter 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Acceleration time Unit for accel. time Deceleration time Unit for decel. time Initial rounding Final rounding
U951.51 = ___(20)
0.0...999.9 0=s, 1=min, 2=h 0.0...999.9 0=s, 1=min, 2=h 0.00...10.00 s 0.00...10.00 s
U330.F (10.0) U331.F (0) U332.F (10.0) U333.F (0) U334.F (0.00) U335.F (0.00) {70 µs}
Adaption of acceleration/deceleration time
U329 (1) <4> 0s 0s Without rounding and adaption
K 0.2 %
0 1 0 1 {130 µs}
With rounding and adaption
Bypass ramp-function generator (y:=x) 0s 0s
U328 (0) 0 1 0 1 Quick stop time
<1> <6>
B 0.0...999.9 s
U337.F (10.0)
0.0...+200.0 %
Quick stop comfort RGen U342 (100.0)
U343 (573)
U338 (0) 0 1 B+
<6> K0573 K
Ramp-function generator input B
U320 (0) 0...3599640.0 s Output limitation
KK
n339.01 n339.02 U344 (574)
0 n326 B-
0
-1 K0574 K
[790.8] (RGen output)
KK0571 KK0570 Tup Tdn AR ER
1
y Tup Tdn
0% 1 B+
U321 (0) (Freeze y)
100 % Comfort ramp-function generator n340
x
B y
Stop RGen KK0571
U322 (0) Bring RGen to a standstill RGen output
B <5>
t B-
U323 (0) <3>
Ramp-function generator setting value
KK Track RGen
Rated acceleration time (with this acceleration time
U324 (0) Set RGen (y = setting value) 0.01 ... 300.00 s dy/dt = 100 %)
B -100 % U336 (0.01)
y AR ER AR ER AR ER AR ER n341

dy/dt
U327 (0) Operating mode for rounding KK0572
0: Final rounding does not act upon sudden reduction t
of the input value during acceleration y=0
Tup_eff <2> B0550 Ramp-function generator output = 0
1: Rounding always acts (except when output limitation y=x
has responded). If there is a sudden reduction of the B0551 Acceleration finished
Rounding Mode Tdn_eff <2> y=0
input value, overshooting can occur.
<1>
1 = Enable ramp-function generator R Q B0552
U345 U325 (1) <6>
.01 0 = Set ramp-function generator to zero 0 = RGen initial runs
Selection of function data set B (92) B
for comfort ramp-function generator B (93) .02
POWER ON 1 S
<1> At U328 = 552 the RGen only acts once in each case after enabling (^ edge) [710.5] Priority: <6> Priority of control commands:
<2> Effective accel.time: Tup_eff = Tup * adaption factor + (AR/2 + ER/2)/adaption factor 1. S (SET) 1. Set RGen to zero
Effective decel.time: Tdn_eff = Tdn * adaption factor + (AR/2 + ER/2)/adaption factor 2. R (RESET) 2. Quick stop comfort RGen
(If adaption is used, the jerk remains the same) 3. Set ramp-function generator
<3> Ramp-function generator is tracked when a limitation responds (y:=RGen output) 4. Bypass RGen (y:=x)
<4> Rounding and adaption do not act with the 'min' or 'h' unit for accel./decel. time 5. Bring RGen to a standstill
<5> Rounding also acts during a zero passage 6. Stop ramp-function generator

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_790_e.vsd Function diagram
- 790 -
Comfort ramp-function generator 12.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 U951.87 = __ (20)

Simple ramp-function generator {12 µs}

Acceleration time Deceleration time
0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00
U383.01 (10.00) U383.02 (10.00)

U380 (0)
K x y K0577

Set simple ramp-function generator

U381 (0)
B
Setting value of simple RGen
U382 (0)
K

If you wish to use the simple ramp-function generator as a setpoint ramp function generator
for the technology controller, the following signal connection can be recommended:
- Output of simple ramp-function generator ==> Setpoint input of technology controller (U352 = 577) [792.1]
- Technology controller disabled ==> Set simple ramp-function generator (U381 = 556) [792.3]
- Actual-value technology controller ==> Setting value of simple ramp-function generator (U382 = value of U335) [792.1]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_791_e.vsd Function diagram
- 791 -
Simple ramp-function generator 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Smoothing time constant U952.01 = ___(20)
0.00 ... 60.00 s
U353 (0.00)
<4> Basic gain Effective gain Integral time {50 µs}
0.00 ... 125.00 (-250.00...+250.00) 0.00 ... 100.00
TeCntr Setp U364.F (3.00) n365 U366.F (3.00) Precontrol signal
U352 (0) x y Gain adaption
<1> U386 (0)
K n354 U363 (1) K
Droop K
U362 (0)
Controller type K P-Component
0 ... 1
KP Tn K0583
U351 (1) 0 1
0 = normal PID controller I-Component <3>
1 = PI controller with D-component <2> Technology controller K0584
in actual-value channel Smoothing time constant Controller output
0.00 ... 60.00 s Output technology controller
K0585
U358 (0.00) n372
y
n356 n357 n359 B+
TeCntr ActV –
U355 (0) + + +
x x y
K IN OUT K0588
– + + +
D-Component B-
d D-Component
B0555
K0580 dt K0582 K0581

Set I-component
<1> <5> U360 (556) Message "Technology
controller to output limitation"
Derivation time B0556 B
0.00 ... 60.00 s
U367.F (0.00) SetV I-Comp
U361 (0)
If output limitation responds, track the
K
I-component in such a manner that |x| ≥ |y|

Technology controller disabled

Enable technology controller <3>
1 Enable limitation
U350 (0)
At "0" signal: OUT = 0 ramp-function generator
B

<1>Tv = 0 ==> D-component disabled

Tn = 0 ==> I-component disabled (acts as Tn = ∞) Normally the output limitation is set via U369
<2>Open signal path = 0 % and acts instantaneously and symmetrically
<3>Priority of the control signals for setting the controller output K0585: (same limit values for positive and
1. "Enable technology controller" = 0 negative variables)
2. "Set I-component" = 1 U370
0.0 ... 200.0 % .01 (586) If parameterized correspondingly, the 2
(However: Setting the I-component also acts on K0585 when K0586 K limitation ramp-function generators enable
U369 (100.0 %) .02 (587)
controller is disabled) K0587 K smooth approach or the output limits after
<4>Use the simple ramp-function generator on sheet 791, the technology controller has been enabled.
if you wish to avoid an abrupt switch-in -1
of the "TeCntr setpoint".
<5>With U360 = 556, the "Setting value I-component" is adopted Accel/Decel time
when "Enable technology controller" is activated. 0.00 ... 100.00 s
U371 (0.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_792_e.vsd Function diagram
- 792 -
Technology controller 02.11.98 MASTERDRIVES VC
 U952.02 = ___(20)
(Time portion of the rising edge)
Wobble amplitude Wobble frequency Phase displacement P skip negative P skip positive Duty factor
0.00 ... 20.00 % 0.1 ... 120.0 1/min 0 ... 360 °el 0.00 ... 100.00 % 0.00 ... 100.00 % 0 ... 100 %
U393.F (0.00) U394.F (60.0) U395.F (360) U396.F (0.00) U397.F (0.00) U398.F (50) Wobble generator {83 µs}
<1>

Wobble - synchronizing input

Synchronizing signal from master

U391 (0)
B
Wobble enable
U395 U395 Wobbling always commences with a
positive zero passage and always
ends with the next zero passage
U392 (0)
Wobble - delta generator B
U398
OUT
U393
U396
n399

Setpoint, unwobbled 0% 0 Wobble signal

U390 (0) K0590
OUT
K IN
1

+ Setpoint, wobbled
K0591
U397 +
-U393
U394

Wobble - synchronizing output

Synchronizing signal to slave

B0560

<1>at U395 = 360:

0.5 x Tw Synchronizing signal from master is not taken
notice of (freewheeling wobbling).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_795_e.vsd Function diagram
- 795 -
Wobble generator 03.07.00 MASTERDRIVES VC
 U953.70 = ___(20)
Only the values 20 and 02 are permitted.
To avoid overlaps, the usual trace must
be switched off with U953.72 = 20.

PRBS shift div.

To be set by means of the 0..10
DriveMonitor mask U476.1/2 (0)
Diagnostics/trace: Trace
settings. Start noise and
trace with the
Start button !
Mean value Averaging of cycles by addition
first period
Src.Trace input – +
U480.01 (0) + +
KK >> Channel 1 (System output)
A032 Export trace file in ASCII
format to DriveMonitor. Data
Src.Trace input
U480.02 (0) +
Alarm
Overflow
Trace memory DriveMonitor
analysis is the user's respon-
+ sibility.
KK >> Channel 2 (System input / PRBS)
–
+
Mean value
first period

TraceStatusStart
0..2 Start measuring, number of channels
U488.1/2 (0) Noise output
-1 K0630
Trace double word
0..1 Trace words or double words
U481.1 (0)
PRBS cycles CntD
n479
Number of cycles

U477 (1.00 %) U478 (20)

0.00 ... 100.00 % 0 ... 200
PRBS ampl PRBS cycles

PILOT VERSION 3.4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_796_e.vsd Function diagram
- 796 -
PRBS (Pseudo Random Binary Sequence) - Signal with Trace 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Trace: cyclical output channel 1 to 8

Record Trace U952.72 = __ (20) U952.96 = __ (20)

Trigger Thresh Trigger BitNr. Trigger Cond Pre Trigger TriggerStatusStart TraceTriggerOut TraceTriggerOut
-231 ... (231-1) 0 ... 16 0 ... 6 0 ... 100 % 0 ... 2 B0561 B0565
U484.01...08 (0) U485.01...08 (16) U486.01...08 (0) U487.01...08 (0) U488.01...08 (0)
Trace memory Trace memory
Src Trigger In Channel 1 TraceValOut Channel 5 TraceValOut
U483 KK0592 KK0596
.01
KK
.02
KK
.03
KK
.04
KK
.05
KK U952.73 = __ (20) U952.97 = __ (20)
.06
KK
.07
KK
.08
KK TraceTriggerOut TraceTriggerOut
B0562 B0566
Src B Trigger In
U489 Trace memory Trace memory
.01 Channel 2 TraceValOut Channel 6 TraceValOut
B
.02 KK0593 KK0597
B
.03
B
.04 Channel 1 to 8
B
B
.05 Trace memory
.06
B
.07 U952.74 = __ (20) U952.98 = __ (20)
B
.08
B

Src Trace In TraceTriggerOut TraceTriggerOut

U480 B0563 B0567
.01
KK Trace memory Trace memory
.02
KK
.03
Channel 3 TraceValOut Channel 7 TraceValOut
KK KK0594 KK0598
.04
KK
.05
KK
.06
KK
.07
KK
.08
KK U952.95 = __ (20) U952.99 = __ (20)

U953.72 = 2
Only parameter value = 2 or 20 TraceDoubleWord TraceSamplingTime TraceTriggerOut TraceTriggerOut
is permissible 0 ... 1 1 ... 200 B0564 B0568
U481.01...08 (0) U482.01...08 (1) Trace memory Trace memory
The trace memory has a total size of 8192 words. Channel 4 TraceValOut Channel 8 TraceValOut
Memory depth per channel = 8192 words / number of activated channels. KK0595 KK0599
Binector trigger input U489 from V3.3
Trace function detachable (U953.72) from V3.4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_797_e.vsd Function diagram
- 797 -
Trace: Record Trace / cyclical output 21.07.04 MASTERDRIVES VC
 5 Connector-to-parameter/ parameter-to-connector converters n959.76 = 6

Only parameters of the CU (Pxxx, rxxx, Uxxx, nxxx) can be Block is not calculated in T6!
converted. Parameters of the technology boards Time of processing of block is not defined!
T100, T300, T400 (Hxxx, Lxxx) are not processed.
Parameter Connector
<5> SrcConnToParParNo Index 1 ConnToParValue
<5> ConnToPar ParNo U438.1..5 (479) Parameter value KK0474
Parameter
0 ... 2999 K0479 K
number
Index = Read Write
U445.1...5 (0) <1> Enable Enable Write Value EEPROM Index 2 KK0475
Select parameter SrcConnToParIndex
ConnToPar Index U439.1...5 (480) Index 3 KK0476
0 ... 255 K0480 K
U446.1...5 (0) <1> 1 Index 4 KK0477

SrcParToConnRead Index 5 KK0478

Direction of conversion: 0 = Connector-to-parameter conversion
Select direction of U449.1...5 (0)
1 = Parameter-to-connector conversion
conversion B

SrcConnToPParTrig
U447.1...5 (0) Carry out conversion <3>
Carry out conversion
B

SrcConnToParVal ConnToParChkb
U444.1...5 (0) Value to be entered in the selected parameter <2> Connector B0544 Index 1
Relevant in the case of KK
connector-to-parameter
SrcConnToParEEPROM B0545 Index 2
conversion
U448.1...5 (0) Type of memory: 0/1 = Storage im RAM / EEPROM <4>
B B0546 Index 3

<1> Internally, the parameter numbers or the indices of all five index places (1 to 5) are passed B0547 Index 4
on via the connector. Only the value of the first index is displayed via the connector. Important:
<2> Word parameter should be written via connectors, Parameters must be specified in Index 5
and double-word parameters via double connectors. B0548
decimal form (incl. decimal
<3> Consult the parameter list in the Compendium to find out the operating states places) and are signalled back in 1 = Parameter transfer OK
in which a parameter change can be made. decimal form as well (PKW 0 = Parameter transfer not OK
Value entered in parameter <2>: <4> In the case of dynamic signals, the RAM must be used for storage normalization).
(a parameter can only be written 100 000 times in the EPROM)
Double connector <5> U and n parameters are addressed with Uxxx = 2xxx and nxxx=2xxx .
KKxxxx K K
1 Example of connector-to-parameter conversion: 2 Another example of connector-to-parameter conversion: 3 Example of parameter-to-connector conversion:
HW LW The value of connector K0409 should be fed to The parameter "Source n/f (act)" is to be set to Parameter P103 is to be connected to connector
Double-word parameter: parameter U279.02. Alteration in the RAM ==> 94 (corresponds to SBP setpoint channel 1) ==> KK0477 ==>
- U445.1=2279 (parameter number) - U445.1 = 222 - U444.4 = 477
Word parameter HW - U446.1=2 (index) - U446.1 = 1 - U445.4=103 (parameter number)
- U449.1=0 (connector-parameter conversion) - U449.1 = 0 - U446.4=0 (non-indexed parameter)
Connector - U447.1=1 (permanent transfer) - U447.1 = 1 - U449.4=1 (parameter-connector conversion)
Kxxxx K 0 - U444.1=409 (source connector) - U444.1=409 (source connector) - U447.4=1 (permanent output)
- U448.1=0 (write into the RAM) - U448.1=0 (write into the RAM)
Double-word parameter: HW 0 For this purpose, set U009 = 148 (= 94 Hex, as source connector) !
Please note that the values of "source" parameters are always hexadecimal values. Thus in U009 the
Word parameter: HW converted decimal value has to be provided.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free blocks fp_vc_798_e.vsd Function diagram
- 798 -
Connector-to-parameter converter 12.05.03 MASTERDRIVES VC
 MASTERDRIVES VC function diagram - List of contents of the supplementary boards

Contents Sheet Contents Sheet Contents Sheet

Supplementary boards: List of contents X00 SCB expansions
- SCB1/2
TSY Board Peer-to-peer receiving Z01
- TSY Board X01 Peer-to-peer transmitting Z02
- Synchronizing status: - SCB2
Phase control and frequency measurement X02 USS receiving Z05
- Connection Examples X03 USS transmitting Z06
- SCB1 with SCI1
Terminal expansions Digital inputs slave 1 Z10
- EB1 No.1 Digital inputs slave 2 Z11
Analog inputs, combined digital inputs Y01 Digital outputs slave 1 Z15
Analog outputs Y02 Digital outputs slave 2 Z16
Digital inputs/outputs Y03 SCI1 - analog inputs slave 1 Z20
- EB1 No.2 SCI1 - analog inputs slave 2 Z21
Analog inputs, combined digital inputs Y04 SCI1 analog outputs slave 1 Z25
Analog outputs Y05 SCI1 analog outputs slave 2 Z26
Digital inputs/outputs Y06 - SCB1 with SCI2
- EB2 No.1 Digital inputs slave 1 Z30
Analog and digital inputs/outputs Y07 Digital inputs slave 2 Z31
- EB2 No.2 Digital outputs slave 1 Z35
Analog and digital inputs/outputs Y08 Digital outputs slave 2 Z36

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
List of contents fp_vc_X00_e.vsd Function diagram
- X00 -
Supplementary boards 21.08.00 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Analog input (differential input) U953.01 = ___
Offset
-100.00 ... +100.00 % P659.1 (0) P661.1 (1)
P657.1 (0.00) B B
Signal type 10 V = 100 %
(0/1 = 10 V / 20 mA) Normalization Time constant
20 mA = 100 %
P655.1 (0) 0.00 ... 100.00 P658.1 (0) 0 ... 1000 ms r662.1
P656.1 (1.00) P660.1 (0)

50 200 µs 13 Bit + sign

-1 3 0% 0
A 0 K5101
x y [%] = y 2
u -1
i
D
x [%] * P656.1 1 -1 1 1
± 10 V ± 20 mA 0 Enable analog
Hardware Sign inversion Smoothing input
51 1 2 3
X488 smoothing
B5101
20 mA 10 V Wire break (i ≤ 2 mA)

Analog inputs (single-ended)

Offset
Can also be used as digital inputs U953.02 = ___
-100.00 ... +100.00 % P659.2 (0) P661.2 (1)
P657.2 (0.00) B B
10 V = 100 % Normalization Time constant
0.00 ... 100.00 P658.2 (0) 0 ... 1000 ms r662.2
P656.2 (1.00) P660.2 (0)

200 µs 13 Bit + sign

-1 3 0% 0
52 A 0 K5102
x y [%] = y 2
± 10 V -1
D
x [%] * P656.2 1 -1 1 1
0 Enable analog
Hardware Sign inversion Smoothing input
smoothing
B5102
1 2 3 High at input (U_in > 8 V)
X486 Digital input
Offset
20 mA 10 V P659.3 (0) P661.3 (1)
-100.00 ... +100.00 %
P657.3 (0.00) B B
10 V = 100 % Normalization Time constant
0.00 ... 100.00 P658.3 (0) 0 ... 1000 ms r662.3
P656.3 (1.00) P660.3 (0)
53
200 µs 13 Bit + sign 0
3 0%
A
-1 0
x y K5103
y [%] = 2
± 10 V -1
D
x [%] * P656.3 1 -1 1 1
24 V 0 Enable analog
+ − Hardware Sign inversion Smoothing input
54 smoothing
B5103
1 2 3 High at input (U_in > 8 V)
X487 Digital input

10 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal expansion EB1 No. 1 fp_vc_Y01_e.vsd Function diagram
- Y01 -
Analog inputs, combined digital inputs 01.08.1998 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Analog outputs U953.03 = ___

Offset K5104
Uout [V] = * Normalization [V] + Offset [V]
-200.00 ... +200.00 V 100 %
Time constant
Normalization P667.1 (0.00)
P664.1 (0) 0 ... 10000 ms
P665.1 (0) -200.00 ... +200.00 V
P666.1 (10.00)
r668.1 11 bit + sign
3
P663.1 (0)
-1 D
2 x x y 47
K -1 y [V] =
100 %
* P666.1
1 A
0 Uout = -10 V ... + 10 V
Smoothing K5104

Offset
-200.00 ... +200.00 V
Time constant
Normalization P667.2 (0.00)
P664.2 (0) 0 ... 10000 ms
P665.2 (0) -200.00 ... +200.00 V
P666.2 (10.00)
r668.2 11 bit + sign
3
P663.2 (0)
-1 D
2 x x y 48
K -1 y [V] =
100 %
* P666.2
1 A
0
Smoothing Uout = -10 V ... + 10 V
K5105

49

K5105
Uout [V] = * Normalization [V] + Offset [V]
100 %

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal expansion EB1 No. 1 fp_vc_Y02_e.vsd Function diagram
- Y02 -
Analog outputs 12.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs U953.04 = ___

38
24 V Outputs
- + 39
Inputs
P669.1 (0)
B
out
43 1 B5104
out in 20 B5105
in
P669.2 (0)
B
out
out
44 1 B5106
21 out/in B5107
5V in Attention!
in
If one of the terminals 43 to 46 is to be used as an
24 V P669.3 (0) input, the corresponding output has to be set to the
B value "0" (transistor blocks) !
out
45 1 B5108
Example: Terminal 45 = input => P669.3=0!
22 B5109
in

P669.4 (0)
B
out
46 1 B5110
23 B5111
in

3 digital inputs U953.05 = ___

5V 1 B5112
40
B5113
24 24 V
M_external

5V 1 B5114
41
B5115
25 24 V
M_external

5V 1 B5116
42
B5117
Inputs 26 24 V
M_external Display of the terminal statuses via r670.1 on the PMU:

r670.1

K5106 42 41 40 46 45 44 43

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal expansion EB1 No. 1 fp_vc_Y03_e.vsd Function diagram
- Y03 -
Digital inputs/outputs 01.08.1998 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Analog input (differential input) U953.06 = ___
Offset
-100.00 ... +100.00 % P659.4 (0) P661.4 (1)
P657.4 (0.00) B B
Signaltyp 10 V = 100 %
(0/1 = 10 V / 20 mA) Normalization Time constant
20 mA = 100 % 0.00 ... 100.00 0 ... 1000 ms r662.4
P655.4 (0) P658.4 (0)
P656.4 (1.00) P660.4 (0)

50 200 µs 13 Bit + sign

3 0% 0
A
-1 0
x y K5201
y [%] = 2
u -1
i
D
x [%] * P656.4 1 -1 1 1
± 10 V ± 20 mA 0 Enable analog
Hardware Sign inversion Smoothing input
51 1 2 3
X488 smoothing
B5201
20 mA 10 V Wire break (i ≤ 2 mA)

Analog inputs (single-ended)

Offset
Can also be used as digital inputs U953.07 = ___
-100.00 ... +100.00 % P659.5 (0) P661.5 (1)
P657.5 (0.00) B B
10 V = 100 % Normalization Time constant
0.00 ... 100.00 P658.5 (0) 0 ... 1000 ms r662.5
P656.5 (1.00) P660.5 (0)

200 µs 13 Bit + sign 0

3 0%
52 A
-1 0
x y K5202
± 10 V y [%] = 2
-1
D
x [%] * P656.5 1 -1 1 1
0 Enable analog
Hardware Sign inversion Smoothing input
smoothing
B5202
1 2 3 High at input (U_in > 8 V)
X486 Digital input
Offset
20 mA 10 V P659.6 (0) P661.6 (1)
-100.00 ... +100.00 %
P657.6 (0.00) B B
10 V = 100 % Normalization Time constant
0.00 ... 100.00 P658.6 (0) 0 ... 1000 ms r662.6
P656.6 (1.00) P660.6 (0)
53
200 µs 13 Bit + sign 0
3 0%
A
-1 0
x y K5203
y [%] = 2
± 10 V -1
D
x [%] * P656.6 1 -1 1 1
24 V 0 Enable analog
+ − Hardware Sign inversion Smoothing input
54
smoothing
B5203
1 2 3 High at input (U_in > 8 V)
X487 Digital input

10 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal expansion EB1 No. 2 fp_vc_Y04_e.vsd Function diagram
- Y04 -
Analog inputs, combined digital inputs 01.08.1998 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Analog outputs U953.08 = ___

K5204
Offset Uout [V] = * Normalization [V] + Offset [V]
-200.00 ... +200.00 V
100 %
Time constant
Normalization P667.3 (0.00)
P664.3 (0) 0 ... 10000 ms
P665.3 (0) -200.00 ... +200.00 V
P666.3 (10.00)
r668.3 11 bit + sign
3
P663.3 (0)
-1 D
2 x x y 47
K -1 y [V] =
100 %
* P666.3
1 A
0 Uout = -10 V ... + 10 V
Smoothing K5204

Offset
-200.00 ... +200.00 V
Time constant
Normalization P667.4 (0.00)
P664.4 (0) 0 ... 10000 ms
P665.4 (0) -200.00 ... +200.00 V
P666.4 (10.00)
r668.4 11 bit + sign
3
P663.4 (0)
-1 D
2 x x y 48
K -1 y [V] =
100 %
* P666.4
1 A
0
Smoothing Uout = -10 V ... + 10 V
K5205

49

K5205
Uout [V] = * Normalization [V] + Offset [V]
100 %

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal expansion EB1 No. 2 fp_vc_Y05_e.vsd Function diagram
- Y05 -
Analog outputs 12.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs U953.09 = ___

38
24 V Outputs
- + 39
Inputs
P669.5 (0)
B
out
43 1 B5204
out in 20 B5205
in
P669.6 (0)
B
out
out
44 1 B5206
21 out/in B5207
5V in Attention!
in
If one of the terminals 43 to 46 is to be used as an
24 V P669.7 (0) input, the corresponding output has to be set to the
B value "0" (transistor blocks) !
out
45 1 B5208
Example: Terminal 45 = input => P669.7=0!
22 B5209
in

P669.8 (0)
B
out
46 1 B5210
23 B5211
in

3 digital inputs U953.10 = ___

5V 1 B5212
40
B5213
24 24 V
M_external

5V 1 B5214
41
B5215
25 24 V
M_external

5V 1 B5216
42
B5217
Inputs 26 24 V
M_external Display of the terminal statuses via r670.2 on the PMU:

r670.2

K5206 42 41 40 46 45 44 43

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal expansion EB1 No. 2 fp_vc_Y06_e.vsd Function diagram
- Y06 -
Digital inputs/outputs 01.08.1998 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Analog input (differential input) U953.11 = ___
Offset P681.1 (1)
-100.00 ... +100.00 % P679.1 (0)
B
P677.1 (0.00) B
Signal type 10 V = 100 %
(0/1 = 10 V / 20 mA) Normalization Time constant
20 mA = 100 % 0.00 ... 100.00 r682.1
P675.1 (0) P678.1 (0) 0 ... 1000 ms
P676.1 (1.00) P680.1 (0)

49 200 µs 11 Bit + sign 3 0% 0

A
-1 0
x y K5111
y [%] = 2
u -1
i
D
x [%] * P676.1 1 -1 1 1
± 10 V ± 20 mA 0 Enable analog
50 1 Hardware Sign inversion Smoothing input
2 3
smoothing
X498
B5121
20 mA 10 V Wire break (i ≤ 2 mA)

Analog output U953.12 = ___ Offset

-200.00 ... +200.00 V
Time constant
Normalization P687.1 (0.00)
P684.1 (0) 0 ... 10000 ms
P685.1 (0) -200.00 ... +200.00 V K5112
P686.1 (10.00) Uout [V] = * Normalization [V] + Offset [V]
100 %
r688.1 9 Bit + sign
3
-1
P683.1 (0)
x x y + D Uout = -10 V ... + 10 V X499
2 3
K -1 y [V] = * P686.1
47
1 100 % 2
+ A
U
0
1
Smoothing K5112 Iout =
I
-20 mA...+ 20 mA

48

51 2 digital inputs U953.13 = ___ 4 digital relay outputs U953.14 = ___

Mextern
− P674 (0) 38
24 V .01 22
+ B 39
52 .02
P24aux 1 B5122 B
B .03 40
5V .04 23
53 B 41
B5123
20 24 V 42
Mexternal 24
1 B5124 Display of the terminal 43
statuses via r673.1 on the PMU:
5V 44
54 K5113 25
B5125 45
21 24 V
Mexternal r673.1
46
45 43 41 39 54 53

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal expansion EB2 No. 1 fp_vc_Y07_e.vsd Function diagram
- Y07 -
analog and digital inputs/outputs 12.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 Analog input (differential input) U953.15 = ___
Offset P681.2 (1)
-100.00 ... +100.00 % P679.2 (0)
B
P677.2 (0.00) B
Signal type 10 V = 100 %
(0/1 = 10 V / 20 mA) Normalization Time constant
20 mA = 100 % 0.00 ... 100.00 0 ... 1000 ms r682.2
P675.2 (0) P678.2 (0)
P676.2 (1.00) P680.2 (0)

49 200 µs 11 Bit + sign

3 0% 0
A
-1 0
x y K5211
y [%] = 2
u -1
i
D
x [%] * P676.2 1 -1 1 1
± 10 V ± 20 mA 0 Enable analog
50 1 Hardware Sign inversion Smoothing input
2 3
smoothing
X498
B5221
20 mA 10 V Wire break (i ≤ 2 mA)

Analog output U953.16 = ___ Offset

-200.00 ... +200.00 V
Time constant
Normalization P687.2 (0.00)
P684.2 (0) 0 ... 10000 ms
P685.2 (0) -200.00 ... +200.00 V K5212
P686.2 (10.00) Uout [V] = * Normalization [V] + Offset [V]
100 %
r688.2 9 Bit + sign
3
-1
P683.2 (0)
x x y + D Uout = -10 V ... + 10 V X499
2 3
K -1 y [V] = * P686.2
47
1 100 % 2
+ A
U
0
Smoothing 1
K5212 Iout =
I
-20 mA...+ 20 mA

48

51 2 digital inputs U953.17 = ___ 4 digital relay outputs U953.18 = ___

Mextern
− P674 (0) 38
24 V .05 22
+ B 39
52 .06
P24aux 1 B5222 B
B .07 40
5V .08 23
53 B 41
B5223
20 24 V 42
Mexternal 1 B5224 Display of the terminal 24
43
statuses via r673.2 on the PMU:
5V 44
54 K5213 25
B5225
21 45
24 V
Mexternal r673.2
46
45 43 41 39 54 53

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal expansion EB2 No. 2 fp_vc_Y08_e.vsd Function diagram
- Y08 -
analog and digital inputs/outputs 12.10.01 MASTERDRIVES VC
 10
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES SW3.4
6SE70 Vector Control

Faults and Alarms

06.2006

Faults and Alarms

Faults General information regarding faults

For each fault, the following information is available:
Parameter r947 Fault number
r949 Fault value
r951 Fault list
P952 Number of faults
r782 Fault time
If a fault message is not reset before the electronic supply voltage is
switched off, then the fault message will be present again when the
electronic supply is switched on again. The unit cannot be operated
without resetting the fault message. (Exception: Automatic restart has
been selected, see P373).

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F001 If a main contactor checkback is configured, P591 Src Contactor Msg
no checkback occurs within the time set in
Main contactor P600 after the power-up command. In the Parameter value must be in conformance with
checkback case of externally excited synchronous motors the connection of the main contactor
(P095 = 12), there is no checkback for the checkback.
excitation current unit.
Check the checkback loop of the main
contactor (or the checkback of the excitation
current unit in the case of synchronous
motors).
F002 When pre-charging, the minimum DC link Check the supply voltage,
voltage (P071 Line Volts x 1.34) of 80 % has
Pre-charging not been reached. Compare witth P071 Line Volts (Compare
P071 with the DC link voltage on DC units).
The maximum pre-charging time of 3 seconds
has been exceeded. Check the rectifier/regenerative unit on DC
units. The rectifier/regenerative unit must be
switched on before the inverter is switched on.
F006 Shutdown has occurred due to excessive DC Check the supply voltage or input DC voltage.
link voltage.
DC link overvoltage Converter is operating in regenerative mode
Line voltage I DC voltage range I Shutdown without feedback possibility.
value
------------------------------------------------------------- If the converter supply voltage is at the upper
200 V - 230 V I 270 V - 310 V I appr. 410 V tolerance limit and it is operating at full load,
380 V - 480 V I 510 V - 650 V I appr. 820 V F006 can also be caused by a line phase
500 V - 600 V I 675 V - 810 V I appr. 1020 V failure.
660 V - 690 V I 890 V - 930 V I appr. 1220 V
Possibly
For parallel-connected converters (BF M,N)
r949 = 1: Overvoltage in the DC link of the - Increaase P464 Decel Time,
master
r949 = 2: Overvoltage in the DC link of the - Activate P515 DC Bus Volts Reg (check
slave. P071 beforehand)

- Reduce P526 Fly Search Speed.

- Reduce P259 Max Regen Power (only for

P100 = 3, 4 or 5)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 1
 06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F008 The lower limit value of 76 % of the DC link Check
voltage (P071 Line Volts), or of 61 % when
DC link undervoltage kinetic buffering has been enabled, has been - Input DC voltage
fallen short of.
- DC link
Undervoltage in the DC link in 'normal'
operation (i.e. no SIMULATION).

Undervoltage in the DC link with active kinetic

buffering and speed less than 10 % of the
rated motor speed.

It was a 'brief power failure' which was not

detected until system recovery (auto restart
flag).
F010 Due to excessive DC link voltage, shutdown Check the supply voltage
has taken place: Check the braking resistor
DC link overvoltage Line voltage DC link range Shutdown Converter operates regeneratively without a
value feedback possibility. Braking unit must be set
380 V - 480 V 510 V - 650 V 740 V to the lower response threshold (673 V)

Note:
Only at U800 = 1 and f(Pulse) > f(derating)

Lower threshold value than F006 !

F011 Overcurrent shutdown has occurred. - Check the converter output for short-circuit or
The shutdown threshold has been exceeded. earth fault
Overcurrent
- Check the load for an overload condition

- Check whether motor and converter are

correctly matched

- Check whether the dynamic requirements

are too high
F012 During excitation of the induction motor, the Only for closed loop n/f/T control (P100 = 3, 4
current did not rise above 12.5 % of the or 5)
I too low setpoint magnetizing current for no-load
operation. If no motor is connected, go into the simulation
mode P372.

Check current detection, check power section.

F014 During excitation of the motor, the current Check the output contactor
component is less than 25 % of the motor no- Check the motor cable
I too low load current.

Note:
Only for U800 = 1
Irrespective of the type of control
(Difference to F012)

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

2 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F015 Motor has stalled or is locked: - Reduce load

Motor stall - if the static load is too high - Release brake

- if the acceleration or deceleration time is too - Increase current limits

fast, or if load change is too fast and too great,
- Increase P805 PullOut/BlckTime
- due to incorrect parameterization of the pulse
encoder pulse number P151 or of the analog - Increase P792 response threshold for
tachometer scaling P138 set/actual deviation

- due to disturbed speed signals (tachometer Only for f/n/T control (P100 = 3, 4, 5)
shield not connected)
- Increase torque limits or torque setpoint
The fault is only generated after the time set in
P805. Only n/T control or v/f control with speed
controller: (P100 = 0, 4, 5)
The binector B0156 is set in the status word 2
r553 Bit 28. - Check tachometer cable break

To detect whether the drive is blocked, see - Check pulse encoder pulse number
P792 (Perm Deviation) and P794. With n/f
control, this fault is tripped if the torque limits - Check analog tachometer scaling
have been reached (B0234).
- Connect shield of tachometer cable on motor
With speed control (P100 = 4) and master side and converter side
drive (see P587), the fault can also point to an
interruption in the encoder cable. This case - Reduce smoothing of speed pre-control P216
has the same significance as if the drive is (only n/T control)
locked. only frequency control:(P100 = 3)

With v/f control, the I(max) controller has to be - Slow down acceleration time (see also P467
activated (P331). The monitor does not ProtRampGen Gain)
operate with v/f textile applications (P100 = 2). - Increase current in the lower frequency range
Motor has stalled or is locked: (P278, P279, P280)

In the case of synchronous motors (P095 = - Switch in speed controller pre-control

12, 13): by reaching the maximum frequency (P471>0)
- Set EMF controller more dynamically (315) to
In the case of externally excited synchronous max. approx. 2
motors (P095 = 12): as a result of missing or
excessively high excitation current (flux is too - Increase changeover frequency for the EMF
small or too great). model (P313)
- Replace by speed control with pulse encoder
When the maximum frequency (including in the case of overmodulated n/f controller
control reserves) (B0254) has been reached
on synchronous motors, the fault is generated - Track speed setpoint with the speed actual
immediately. If the deviations in the rotor flux value so that the set/actual deviation is always
are too great, first of all, the converter current less than that set in P792.
is switched to zero, the excitation current is
reduced and, after some time, the fault Only for synchronous motor: (P095 = 12)
message is tripped at the level of the double
damping time constant (2*r124.1). During this - Check current limits of the excitation unit.
wait time, the status word bit B0156 (r553.28)
is set already. - Check excitation current setpoint and actual
value (incl. wiring)

- Check voltage limits of the excitation unit

during dynamic current changes.

- Check drive system for resonance

oscillations.
F017 SAFE STOP operating or failure of the 24 V Jumper applied for SAFE STOP?
power supply during operation (only for SAFE STOP checkback connected?
SAFE STOP Compact PLUS units) On Compact PLUS units: check 24 V supply

Compact PLUS only

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 3
 06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F018 The found set frequency could not be - Check additional setpoint 2
implemented. Reasons: - Release negative directions of rotation with
F set fly - Additional setpoint 2 too high low maximum speed.
- Speed actual-value at standstill negative
(signal ripple) and negative direction of
rotation locked.
F019 During flying restart without tachometer: Power up after coasting.
Search in both directions of rotation not Possibly increase P525 Fly Search Amps.
Motor not found possible (one direction blocked) and motor has Enable both directions of rotation (P571,
not been found. P572)
F020 The motor temperature limit value has been Check the motor (load, ventilation, etc.). The
exceeded. current motor temperature can be read in r009
Motor temperature Motor Temperature.
r949 = 1 limit value of motor temperature
exceeded Check P381 Mot Tmp

r949 = 2 short-circuit in the cable to the motor Fault - check the KTY84 input at connector
temperature sensor or sensor defective -X103:29,30, or X104:29,30 (Compact PLUS)
for short-circuit.
r949 = 4 wire break in the cable to the motor
temperature sensor or sensor defective

r949 = 5 wire break and limit value exceeded

F021 Parameterized limit value of the I2t monitoring Check: P383 Mot Tmp T1
for the motor has been exceeded.
Motor I2t
F023 The limit value of the inverter temperature has - Measure the air intake and ambient
been exceeded. temperature
Inverter temperature (Observe minimum and maximum ambient
Alarm: (r949): temperature!)
Bit0 Inverter overtemperature
- Observe the derating curves at theta >45°C
Bit1 Wire break of cable to (Compact PLUS type) or 40°C.
temperature sensor
- On Compact PLUS units: ≥ 22 kW
Bit4 Number of the temperature sensor acknowledgement is only possible after
Bit5 1 minute
Bit6
Check:
Bit8 Multiparallel circuit: Slave number
Bit9 - whether the fan -E1 is connected and is
Bit10 rotating in the correct direction

Examples: - that the air entry and discharge openings are

r949 = 1: Limit value of inverter temperature not restricted
has been exceeded.
- temperature sensor at -X30
r949 = 2: Sensor 1: wire break of sensor cable
or sensor defective

r949 = 18: Sensor 2: wire break of sensor

cable or sensor defective

r949 = 34: Sensor 3: wire break of sensor

cable or sensor defective

r949 = 50: Sensor 4: wire break of sensor

cable or sensor defective.
F025 UCE upper switch (Compact PLUS) / or UCE Check:
has tripped in phase L1
UCE upper switch/ - phase L1 for short-circuit or ground fault
UCE Ph. L1 (-X2:U2 - including motor)

- that CU is correctly inserted

- that the switch for "SAFE STOP" (X9/5-6) is

open (only for units with order No. ...-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61).

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

4 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F026 UCE lower switch (Compact PLUS) / or UCE Check:
has tripped in phase L2
UCE lower switch / - phase L2 for short-circuit or ground fault
UCE Ph. L2 (-X2:V2 - including motor)

- that CU is correctly inserted

- that the switch for 'SAFE STOP' (X9/5-6) is

open (only for units with order Nos....-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61)
F027 Fault pulse resistor (Compact PLUS) / or UCE Check:
has tripped in phase L3
Fault pulse resistor / - phase L3 for short-circuit or ground fault
UCE Ph. L3 (-X2:W2 - including motor)

- that CU is correctly inserted

- that the switch for 'SAFE STOP' (X9/5-6) is

open (only for units with order Nos....-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61)
F028 The frequency and the amplitude of the DC Check the supply voltage.
link ripple indicate a single-phase power
Supply phase failure.
F029 A fault has occurred in the measured value Causes in phase L1 and L2:
sensing system: - Fault in measured value sensing system
Meas. value sensing - Fault in power section (valve cannot block)
The measured variable at which a fault - Fault on CU
occurred during offset adjustment is bit-coded
and stored in r949 : Causes on all other measured variables:
Bit 0: Current phase L1 - Fault on CU (SIMA) -> replace CU
Bit 1: Current phase L2
Bit 2: DC link voltage
Bit 3: Inverter temperature
Bit 4: Motor temperature
Bit 5: Analog input 1
Bit 6: Analog input 2

Examples:
- (r949 = 1) Offset adjustment in phase L1 not
possible

- (r949 = 2) Offset adjustment in phase L3 not

possible.

- (r949 = 3) Offset adjustment in phases L1

and L3 not possible.
F035 Parameterizable external fault input 1 has Check:
been activated
Ext. Fault 1 - whether there is an external fault

- whether the cable to the appropriate digital

input has been interrupted

- P575 Src No ExtFault1

F036 Parameterizable external fault input 2 has Check:
been activated
Ext. Fault 2 - whether there is an external fault

- whether the cable to the appropriate digital

input has been interrupted

- P585 Src No ExtFault2

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 5
 06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F037 An analog input is taking place in operating Check the connection to
mode 4..20 mA and a wire break has
Analog input occurred. The number of the analog input - Analog input 1 -X102:15, 16,
concerned is shown in fault value (r949). or -X101:9,10 (Compact PLUS).

- Analog input 2 -X102: 17, 18.

Check parameters

- P632 CU AnaIn Conf

- P634 CU AnaIn Smooth
- P631 CU AnaIn Offset
F038 During a parameter task, a voltage failure has Re-enter the parameter. The number of the
occurred on the board. parameter concerned can be seen in fault
Voltage OFF during value r949.
parameter storage
F040 Incorrect operating status Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
AS internal
F041 A fault has occurred when storing the values in Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
the EEPROM. (Compact PLUS)
EEPROM fault
F042 Calculating time problems Reduce the calculating time load:

Calculating time At least 10 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or - Increase P357 Sampling Time
T5 (see also parameters r829.2 to r829.5)
- Calculate individual blocks in a slower
sampling time

Observe r829 CalcTimeHdroom.

F044 A fault has occurred during the softwiring of Fault value r949:
binectors and connectors. >1000 : Fault during softwiring of connectors
BICO manager fault >2000 : Fault during softwiring of binectors

- Voltage OFF and ON

- Factory setting and new parameterization
- Replace the board
F045 A hardware fault has occurred when accessing - Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
an option board (Compact PLUS)
Opt. Board HW
- Check connection of the board subrack to the
option boards and replace if necessary.
F046 A fault has occurred during the transfer of Power the unit down and up again.
parameters to the gating unit processor.
Par. Task Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
F047 The calculating time in the gating unit Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
computer is not sufficient (Compact PLUS)
Gating Calc Time
In case of synchronous motors (P095 = 12):
Pulse frequency set too high (P340>2kHz).
F048 The pulse frequency set in P340 is not Change P340 Pulse Frequency.
permissible.
Gating Pulse Freq
F049 The firmware versions on the CU have Use uniform firmware
different firmware release.
SW version
F050 Error when initializing the TSY board Check:

TSY Init. - Whether the TSY is correctly inserted

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

6 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F051 Digital tachometer or analog tachometer Check the parameters:
sensing are faulty
Speed encoder - P130 Src SpdActV

- P151 Pulse #

- P138 AnalogTachScale

- P109 Motor #PolePairs

The product of P109 and P138 must be

smaller than 19200. Check or replace
tachometer. Check connection to tachometer.

- Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit

(Compact PLUS type)
F052 Control track input (-X103/27, or -X104/27 Unselect tachometer with control track (P130
Compact PLUS) is not high: select motor encoder)
n-Cntr.Input - Tachometer line broken
- Tachometer fault Check control track connection (-X103/27, or
X104/27 Compact PLUS)
The fault input on the TSY was activated.
Exchange TSY
F053 The permissible change value of the speed Check tachometer cables for interruptions.
encoder signal P215 dn(act,perm) has been Check earthing of tachometer shield.
Tachometer dn/dt doubly exceeded.
- The shield must be connected both at the
motor and the converter side.

- The encoder cable must not be interrupted.

- The encoder cable must not be laid together

with the power cables.

- Only recommended encoders should be

used.

- In the case of a signal fault, the DT1 board

may have to be used. If necessary, change
P215

- With P806
(observe parameter description) it is possible
during operation to switch over to encoder-free
operation.
F054 A fault has occurred during initialization of the Fault value r949
encoder board.
Sensor board 1. Board code incorrect
initialization fault 2. TSY not compatible
3. SBP not compatible
7. Board double

20: TSY board double

60: Internal error

F056 Communication on the SIMOLINK ring is - Check the fiber-optic cable ring
disturbed.
SIMOLINK telegram - Check whether an SLB in the ring is without
failure voltage

- Check whether an SLB in the ring is faulty

- Check P741 (SLB TlgOFF)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 7
 06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F057 The brake has not opened, the output current Check brake
of the converter has exceeded the Check I(max) brake (U840). The set threshold
Brake does not open parameterized current threshold (U840) for must be at least 10% above the maximum
longer than one second (with the rotor locked) possible acceleration current.

Note:
Only with U800 = 1
F058 A fault has occurred during the processing of a No remedy
parameter task.
Parameter fault
Parameter task
F059 A fault has occurred in the initialization phase The number of the inconsistent parameter is
during the calculation of a parameter. indicated in fault value r949. Correct this
Parameter fault after parameter (ALL indices) and switch voltage off
factory setting/init. and on again. Several parameters may be
affected, i.e. repeat process.
F060 This is set if the MLFB = 0 after exiting After acknowledgement, in INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZATION (0.0 kW). MLFB = order enter a suitable MLFB in parameter P070
MLFB is missing number. MLFB (6SE70..). (Only possible with the
corresponding access stages to both access
parameters).
F061 A parameter entered during drive setting (e.g. Acknowledge the fault and change the
P107 Mot Rtd Freq, P108 Mot Rtd Speed, corresponding parameter value. The missing
Incorrect P340 Pulse Frequency) is not in a permissible parameter is indicated in r949 as a fault value.
parameterization range (depending on control type)

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

8 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F062 Fault in connection with the multi-parallel r949 = 10:
circuit or board ImP1 has been detected. Communications card does not reply. When
Multi-parallel circuit writing the control word, BUSY is not active if
CSOUT is inactive. Communications card is
probably not inserted.

R949 = 11,12:
Timeout during BUSY during initialization.
BUSY does not become active within 1 sec.

R949 = 15:
Timeout during BUSY during normal
communication. BUSY does not become
active within 1 sec.

R949 = 18:
Timeout when reading out the fault information
from the ImPIs. Within one second after
activation of FAULT no fault cause can be
supplied by the IMP1.

R949 = 20+i:
HW conflict. This is set if bit HWCONF is set in
status word of slave i. (Fault in the
configuration of the multi-parallel circuit)

r949 = 30+i:
HW version of ImPI isnot compatible. The
relevant slave number is contained in i.

R949 = 40:
Number of slaves does not tally with the
setpoint number of slaves of the unit.

R949 = 50+i
Inconsistency in the number of slaves. The
number of slaves notified by the ImPI is not in
conformance with the number of status words
or with the setpoint number of slaves of the
MLFB.

Counter-measure:
- Check ImPI or communications card and
replace, if necessary.
- Check configuration of multi-parallel circuit.
- Check parameterization.
- Replace CU.
- Replace ImPI.
F065 No telegram was received at an Scom Fault value r949:
interface (Scom/USS protocol) within the
Scom Telegram telegram failure time. 1 = interface 1 (SCom1)
2 = interface 2 (SCom2)
- Check the connection CU -X100:1 to 5 and
check the connection PMU -X300.

- Check the connection CU -X103, or

X100/ 35,36 (Compact PLUS type)
- Check "SCom/SCB TLG OFF" P704.01
(SCom1) and P704.02 (SCom2)
- Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 9
 06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F070 A fault has occurred during initialization of the Fault value r949:
SCB board.
SCB initialization fault 1: Board code incorrect
2: SCB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
(Check parameterization)
6: Initialization timeout
7: SCB board double
10: Channel error
F072 A fault has occurred during initialization of the Fault value r949:
EB board. 2: 1st EB1 not compatible
EB initialization fault 3: 2nd EB1 not compatible
4: 1st EB2 not compatible
5: 2nd EB2 not compatible
21: Three EB1 boards
22: Three EB2 boards

110: Fault on 1st EB1 (Analog input)

120: Fault on 2nd EB1 (Analog input)
210: Fault on 1st EB2 (Analog input)
220: Fault on 2nd EB2 (Analog input)
F073 4 mA at analog input 1, slave 1 fallen short of Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 4, 5.
AnInp1SL1
F074 4 mA at analog input 2, slave 1 fallen short of Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 7, 8.
AnInp2 SL1
F075 4 mA at analog input 3, slave 1 fallen short of Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 10, 11.
AnInp3 SL1
F076 4 mA at analog input 1, slave 2 fallen short of Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 4, 5.
AnInp1 SL2
F077 4 mA at analog input 2, slave 2 fallen short of Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 7, 8.
AnInp2 SL2
F078 4 mA at analog input 3, slave 2 fallen short of Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 10, 11.
AnInp3 SL2
F079 No telegram has been received by the SCB - Check the connections of the SCB1(2).
(USS, peer-to-peer, SCI) within the telegram
SCB telegram failure failure time. - Check P704.03"SCom/SCB Tlg OFF"

- Replce SCB1(2)

- Replace CU (-A10)
F080 Fault during initialization of the board at the Fault value r949:
DPR interface 1: Board code incorrect
TB/CB initialization 2: TB/CB board not compatible
fault 3: CB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
6: Initialization timeout
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error

Check the T300/CB board for correct

contacting, check the PSU power supply,
check the CU / CB / T boards and check the
CB initialization parameters:
- P918.01 CB Bus Address,
- P711.01 to P721.01 CB parameters 1 to 11

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

10 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F081 Heartbeat-counter of the optional board is no Fault value r949:
longer being processed 0: TB/CB heatbeat-counter
OptBrdHeartbeat- 1: SCB heartbeat-counter
Counter 2: Additional CB heartbeat-counter

- Acknowledge the fault (whereby automatic

reset is carried out)
- If the fault re-occurs, replace the board
concerned (see fault value)
- Replace ADB
- Check the connection between the subrack
and the optional boards (LBA) and replace, if
necessary
F082 No new process data have been received by Fault value r949:
the TB or the CB within the telegram failure 1 = TB/CB
TB/CB telegram failure time. 2 = additional CB

- Check the connection to TB/CB

- Check P722 (CB/TB TlgOFF)

- Replace CB or TB
F085 A fault has occurred during initialization of the Fault value r949:
CB board. 1: Board code incorrect
Add. CB initialization 2: TB/CB board not compatible
fault 3: CB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
6: Initialization timeout
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error

Check the T300 / CB board for correct

contacting and check the CB initialization
parameters:
- P918.02 CB Bus Address,
- P711.02 to P721.02 CB Parameters 1 to 11
F087 A fault has occurred during initialization of the - Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
SLB board. (Compact PLUS type)
SIMOLINK initialization
fault - Replace SLB
F090 An error occurred when attempting to change Power down and power up again. If it
a parameter from the standstill measurement reoccurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace the
Mld Param. or the rotating measurement (Mot ID). unit (Compact PLUS type)
F091 The rotating measurement takes longer than Eliminate the cause and re-start the
programmed in a measured status. The measurement (power up the converter again).
Mld Time relevant measuring interval is encrypted in If it re-occurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace
parameter r949. Possible causes: the unit (Compact PLUS type).
Load torque too high
Load torque not uniform
Ramp-function generator disabled
F095 Due to entries for There must be a 10 % frequency range which
- Permissible phase sequence lies above 1.1 times the changeover frequency
Mld n(set) - Maximum frequency, and below 0.9 times the start of field-
- Minimum speed, weakening frequency.
- Changeover frequency between V and I
model, Possible counter-measures
- Start of field-weakening frequency,
- Frequency suppression bandwidth - Permit both phase sequences
it was not possible to determine a permissible
frequency range for the rotating measurement. - Increase maximum frequency

- Reduce minimum speed,

- Reduce changeover frequency between the

V and I model.

- Reduce or remove the frequency

suppression bandwidth.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 11
 06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F096 The rotating measurement was aborted due to The fault value in r949 defines the type of
the inadmissible external intervention. intervention:
Mld abort
4 Setpoint inhibit

5 Changeover, setpoint channel

8 Unexpected change in the converter status

12 Motor data set changeover (for function

selection "Compl. Mot ID")

13 Changeover to slave drive

14 Motor data set changeover to data set with

v/f_charac

15 Controller inhibit is set

16 Ramp-function generator is disabled

17 Selection "Tacho test" for F controller

18 Ramp-function generator stopped

Eliminate cause

22 Inverter inhibit:
Check inverter release (P561)
F097 The measured values for the nominal ramp-up If necessary, increase the torque limit values
time when optimizing the controller deviate too to 100 percent
Mld meausred value greatly.
Cause: very unsteady load torque
F098 The rotating measurement has detected a fault The fault value in r949 defines the type of
in the speed actual value signal. The fault intervention
Mld Tachof value defines the type of fault. 4 No speed signal present
The fault measurement may have been 5 Sign of the signal is incorrect
erroneously generated if the drive speed is 6 A track signal is missing
externally forced (e.g. completely locked drive 7 Incorrect gain
generates the "no signal" message) 8 Incorrect pulse number

Checking the measurement cables.

Checking the parameters

- P130 Src Speed ActV
- P1151 Encoder Pulse #
F100 During the ground fault test, a current not The cause of the fault can be read out from
equal to zero has been measured, or an UCE r376 "GrdFltTestResult".
GRND Init or overcurrent monitoring has responded,
although no value has yet been triggered. Check the converter output for short-circuit or
ground fault

(-X2:U2, V2, W2 - including motor).

Check that the CU is inserted correctly.

Sizes 1 and 2:
- Check the transistor modules on the PEU
board -A23 for short-circuit.

Size 3 and 4:

- Check the transistor modules -A100, -A200,

-A300 for short-circuit

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

12 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F101 During the ground fault test, the UCE Check valves in the power section for short-
monitoring has responded in a phase in which circuit, and on converters with fiber-optic
GRND UCE no valve has been triggered. gating, check the gating unit wiring and the
UCE checkbacks for correct assignment.

R376 can be interrogated to indicate which

UCE monitoring has responded.
F102 During the ground fault test, a current flows in The fault value can be read out from r949. The
a phase in which no valve has been triggered digit of the xth position indicates the valve
GRND Phase or the UCE monitoring has responded in the where the fault occurred at power-up.
phase in which the valve has been triggered.
X O O O x = 1 = V+ x = 2 = V- x = 3 = U+
x = 4 = U- x = 5 = W+ x = 6 = W-

The figure of the xth digit indicates the phase

in which I is 0 and thus a valve must be
defective (always conductive).

O O O X x = 1 Phase 1 (U)
x = 3 = Phase 3 (W)
x = 4 = Phase 1 (U) or 3 (W)

Examine phase for defective valves (always

conductive).
F103 There is a ground fault or a fault in the power Read out fault value from r949. The digit of the
section. xth position indicates the valve where the fault
Ground fault occurred at power-up.
During the ground fault test, a current flows
from the phase in which a valve has been XOOO x = 1 = V+ x = 2 = V- x = 3 =U+
triggered, the overcurrent comparator has XOOO x = 4 = U- x = 5 = W+ x = 6 = W-
responded, or a UCE monitoring has
responded in a phase in which a valve has Check the motor including the feeder cable for
been triggered. short-circuit. If no ground fault is present,
check the power section for defective valves
(always conductive).

The digit of the xth position indicates the

phase in which I is 0 and therefore a valve
must be defective (always conductive).

OOOX 1 = Current in phase 1 (U)

2 = UCE in phase 2 (V)
3 = Current in phase 3 (W)
4 = Only overcurrent occurred

The speed of the motor shaft during the

ground-fault test should be less than 10 % of
the rated speed!

1) In phase V there is a ground fault or a

defective valve or the "SAFE STOP" switch
(X9/5-6) is open (only for units with Order No.
...-11, ...-21, ...-31).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 13
 06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F107 A fault has occurred during the test pulse Read out fault value from r949. The figures of
measurement the grey shaded areas indicate which fault has
MLd = 0 occurred.

OOXX xx = 01: Both current actual values

remain 0
xx = 02: Motor-converter cable
phase U interrupted
xx = 03: Motor converter phase V
interrupted
xx = 04: Motor-converter phase W
interrupted
xx = 05: Current actual value I1
remains 0
xx = 06: Current actual value I3
remains 0
xx = 07: Valve U+ does not trigger
xx = 08: Valve U- does not trigger
xx = 09: Valve V+ does not trigger
xx = 10: Valve V- does not trigger
xx = 11: Valve W+ does not trigger
xx = 12: Valve W- does not trigger
xx = 13: Sign I1 incorrect
xx = 14: Sign I3 incorrect
xx = 15: Sign I1 and I3 incorrect
xx = 16: Sign I1 confused with I3
xx = 17: I1 confused with I3 and
both currents have an
incorrect sign

The digit of the xth digit indicates where the

fault has occurred.

XOOO x = 0 = Single converter

x = 1 = Inverter 1
x = 2 = Inverter 2
x = 3 = Inverters 1 and 2

Check that all 3 motor feeder cables and the

motor windings do not have any interruption.
Check the connection between the current
converter and the electronics and check the
current converter itself. Check the correct input
of the rating plate data for the motor data set
valid during the measurement.
F108 During the DC measurement, the Read out fault value from r949. The digit of the
measurement results for the individual phases xth position indicates;
Mld Unsym differ significantly. The fault value indicates
which quantity(ies) is(are) concerned and in OOOX Transverse voltage too high
which phase the greatest deviation occurred. x = 1 = phase R
x = 2 = phase S
x = 3 = phase T

OOXO Dev. stator resistance

(1, 2, 3 as above)

XOOO Dev. dead-time compensation

(1, 2, 3 as above)

X O O O O Dev. valve voltage

(1, 2, 3 as above)

The motor, power section or actual-value

sensing are significantly non-symmetrical.
F109 The rotor resistance determined during DC - Incorrect input of rated speed or rated
measurement deviates too significantly from frequency
Mld R(L) the value which was calculated by the
automatic parameterization from the rated slip. - Pole pair number incorrect

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

14 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F110 During test pulse measurement, the current - There may be a short-circuit between two
has increased significantly faster than was converter outputs.
Mld di/dt expected. Thus for the 1st test pulse, an
overcurrent condition occurred within the first - The motor rating plate data have not been
half of the minimum switch-on time correctly parameterized.

- The motor leakage is too low.

F111 A fault has occurred while calculating the
equalization function.
Fault e_Func
F112 The individual leakage test results deviate too
significantly.
Unsym I_sigma
F114 The converter has automatically stopped the Re-start with P115 function selection = 2
automatic measurement due to the time limit "Motor identification at standstill". The ON
MId OFF up to power-up having been exceeded or due command must be given within 20 sec. after
to an OFF command during the measurement, the alarm message A078 = standstill
and has reset the function selection in P115. measurement has appeared.

Cancel the OFF command and re-start

measurement.
F115 A fault has occurred during calculations in the Power-down the converter and electronics and
context of the MotID. power-up again.
KF internal
F116 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F117 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F118 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F119 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F120 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F121 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F122 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F123 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F124 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F125 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F126 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F127 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F128 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F129 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 15
 06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F130 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F131 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F132 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F133 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F134 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F135 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F136 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F137 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F138 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F139 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F140 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F141 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F142 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F143 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F144 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F145 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F146 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F147 See TB documentation See TB documentation

Technology board fault

F148 An active signal is present at binector U061 Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
(1). 710
Fault 1
Function blocks
F149 An active signal is present at binector U062 Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
(1). 710
Fault 2
Function blocks
F150 An active signal is present at binector U063 Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
(1). 710
Fault 3
Function blocks

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

16 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F151 An active signal is present at binector U064 Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
(1). 710
Fault 4
Function blocks
F153 Within the monitoring time of the tool interface Cyclically execute write tasks from the tool
no valid sign-of-life has been received from the interface within the monitoring time whereby
No valid sign-of-life tool tool interface. the sign-of-life has to be increased by 1 for
interface every write task.
F243 Fault in internal linking. One of the two linked Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
partners does not reply. (Compact PLUS).
Link int.
F244 Fault in the internal parameter linking Release comparison of gating unit software
and operating software regarding the transfer
ParaLink int. parameters.

Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit

(Compact PLUS type).
F255 A fault has occurred in the EEPROM. Switch off the unit and switch it on again. If the
fault re-occurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace
Fault in EEPROM the unit (Compact PLUS).
Table 1 Fault numbers, causes and their counter-measures

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 17
 06.2006

Alarms The alarm message is periodically displayed on the PMU by A = alarm/

alarm message and a 3-digit number. An alarm cannot be
acknowledged. It is automatically deleted once the cause has been
eliminated. Several alarms can be present. The alarms are then
displayed one after the other.
When the converter is operated with the OP1S operator control panel,
the alarm is indicated in the lowest operating display line. The red LED
additionally flashes (refer to the OP1S operating instructions).

Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A001 The calculating time utilization is too high - Observe r829 CalcTimeHdroom
- Increase P357 Sampling Time or
Calculating time a) At least 3 failures of time slots T6 or T7 (see - Reduce P340 Pulse Frequency
also parameter r829.6 or r829.6)

b) At least 3 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or

T5 (see also parameter r829.2 to r829.5)
A002 Start of the SIMOLINK ring is not functioning. - Check the fiber-optic cable ring for
interruptions
SIMOLINK start alarm
- Check whether there is an SLB without
voltage in the ring

- Check whether there is a faulty SLB in the

ring
A014 The DC link voltage is not equal to 0 when the - Set P372 to 0.
simulation mode is selected (P372 = 1).
Simulation active alarm - Reduce DC link voltage (disconnect the
converter from the supply)
A015 Parameterizable external alarm input 1 has Check
been activated.
External alarm 1 - whether the cable to the corresponding
digital input has been interrupted.

- parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn1

A016 Parameterizable external alarm input 2 has Check
been activated.
External alarm 2 - whether the cable to the corresponding
digital input has been interrupted.

- parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn2

A017 The switch for blocking the inverter pulses (X9 Close switch X9 5-6 and thus release the
terminal 5-6) has been opened (only for units inverter pulses.
Safe Stop alarm active with Order No. ...-11, ...-21, ...-31, ...61)
A020 An overcurrent condition has occurred. Check the driven load for an overload
condition.
Overcurrent
- Are the motor and the converter matched?

- Have the dynamic performance requirements

been exceeded.
A021 An overvoltage condition has occurred. Check the supply voltage. The converter
regenerates without regeneration possibility.
Overvoltage

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

18 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A022 The threshold for initiating an alarm has been - Measure intake air or ambient temperature.
exceeded.
Inverter temperature - Observe the derating curves at theta >45°C
(Compact PLUS) or 40°C.

Check

- Whether the fan -E1 is connected and is

rotating in the correct direction.

-The air intake and discharge openings for

blockage.

- The temperature sensor at -X30.

- r833 indicates the maximum converter

temperature of all existing measuring points
(Compact/chassis type unit).

- r833.01 indicates the actual converter

temperature (Compact PLUS type).
A023 The parameterizable threshold for initiating an Check the motor (load, ventilation, etc.). The
alarm has been exceeded. current temperature can be read in r009 Motor
Motor temperature Tmp.
Check the KTY84 input at connector
-X103:29,30, or -X104:29,30 (Compact PLUS
type) for short-circuit.
A024 The motor has moved during motor data Lock the motor.
identification.
Motor movement
A025 If the instantaneous load condition is Check:
maintained, then the inverter will be thermally - P72 Rtd Drive Amps
I2t Inverter overloaded. - MLFB P70
- P128 Imax
- r010 Drive Utilizat
A026 Ud is above the continuously permissible DC
link voltage for more than 30sec in a time
Ud too high interval of 90sec
A029 The parameterized limit value for the I2t Motor load cycle is exceeded!
monitoring of the motor has been exceeded.
I2t motor Check the parameters:

P382 Motor Cooling

P383 Mot Tmp T1
P384 Mot Load Limits
A033 Bit 3 in r553 status word 2 of the septoint P804 Overspeed Hys plus
channel. The speed actual value has
Overspeed exceeded the value of maximum speed plus P452 n/f(max, FWD Spd) or
the set hysteresis.
P453 n/f(max, REV Spd) has been exceeded

Increase the parameter for the maximum

frequencies or reduce the regenerative load.
A034 Bit 8 in r552 status word 1 of the setpoint Check
channel. The difference between freqeuncy
Setpoint/actual value setpoint/actual value is greater than the - whether an excessive torque requirement is
deviation parameterized value and the control present
monitoring time has elapsed.
- whether the motor has been dimensioned too
small.

Increase values P792 Perm Deviation Frq/

set/actual DevSpeed and P794 Deviation Time
A035 The clockwise and/or the counter-clockwise Check whether cable(s) to the corresponding
rotating field is not enabled, or a wire digital input(s) P572 Src FWD Spd / P571 Src
Wire break breakage is present in the terminal wiring REV Spd is (are) interrupted or released
(both control word bits are zero).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 19
 06.2006

Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A036 The brake checkback indicates the "Brake still Check brake checkback (see FD 470)
closed" state.
Brake checkback
"Brake still closed"
A037 The brake checkback indicates the "Brake still Check brake checkback (see FD 470)
open" state.
Brake checkback
"Brake still open"
A041 The line voltage is too high or the drive line Check
voltage (P071) is incorrectly parameterized.
Vdmax controller inhibit The Vdmax controller is disabled despite - the line voltage
parameter access (P515), as otherwise the - P071 Line Volts
motor would accelerate immediately in
operation to the maximum frequency.
A042 Motor is stalled or blocked. Check

Motor stall/lock The alarm cannot be influenced by P805 - whether the drive is locked
"PullOut/BlckTime", but by P794 "Deviation - whether the encoder cable is interruped
Time" during speed control and whether the shield is
connected.
- Whether the drive has stalled
- For synchronous motors (P095=12):
excitation current injection
A043 The permissible change value of the speed Check the tachometer cables for interruptions.
encoder signal (P215) has been exceeded.
n-act jump Check the earthing of the tachometer shield.
Additionally for synchronous motors - The shield must be connected both on the
(P095=12): motor and on the converter side.
The motor rotates with more than 2% of the
rated speed at the time of inverter release. - The encoder cable must not be interrupted.
The inverter status "Ready for operation" is not
exited. - The encoder cable must not be laid with the
power cables.
- Only the recommended encoders should be
used.
- If there is a signal fault, use the DTI board if
necessary. If required, change P215.
- Additionally for synchronous motors
(P095=12):
Do not grant inverter release until the motor is
at standstill
A044 Only for synchronous motors (P095=12) in Only for synchronous motors P095=12)
operation: Check:
I too low The difference smoothed with P159 between
excitation current setpoint and actual value - whether the current limitation of the excitation
(r160 - r156) deviates from zero by more than current control is too small,
25 % of the rated magnetizing current. - whether the dynamic performance of the
excitation current injection is too low,
- whether the excitation current injection
function is operating,
- whether the wiring of excitation current
actual-value P155 is correct,
- whether the wiring of excitation current
setpoint r160 is correct,
- whether there is a wire break between
MASTERDRIVES and the excitation device,
- whether the voltage limitation is too low for
dynamic excitation current control,
- whether the analog output for r160 takes
place without isolating amplifiers (despite
cable length > 4 m)

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

20 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A045 The DC braking function has been activated - Increase frequency at which DC braking
and the motor frequency is still above the begins
DC braking activated frequency at which DC braking begins (P398).
A049 At serial I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no slave is P690 SSCI AnaIn Conf
connected or fiber-optic cable is interrupted or
No slave slaves are without voltage. - Check slave.

- Check cable.
A050 At ser. I/O the slaves required according to a Check parameter P693 (analog outputs), P698
parameterized configuration are not present (digital outputs). Check connectors
Slave incorrect (slave number or slave type): Analog inputs or K4101...K4103, K4201...K4203 (analog inputs)
outputs or digital inputs or outputs have been and binectors B4100...B4115, B4120...B4135,
parameterized which are not physically B4200...B4215, B4220...B4235 (digital inputs)
present. for connecting.
A051 In a peer-to-peer connection a baud rate has Adjust the baud rate in conjunction with the
been selected which is too high or too SCB boards P701 SCom/SCB Baud Rate
Peer baud rate different.
A052 In a peer-to-peer connection, a PcD length has Reduce number of words P703 SCom/SCB
been set which is too high (>5). PcD #
Peer PcD L
A053 In a peer-to-peer connection, the pcD length of Adjust the word length for transmitter and
transmitter and receiver do not match. receiver
Peer Lng f. P703 SCom/SCB PcD #
A057 Occurs when a TB is logged on and present, Replace TB configuration (software)
but parameter tasks from the PMU, SCom1 or
TB Param SCom2 have not been answered by the TB
within 6 seconds.
A061 An active signal is present at binector U065 Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
(1).
Alarm 1
Function blocks
A062 An active signal is present at binector U066 Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
(1).
Alarm 2
Function blocks
A063 An active signal is present at binector U067 Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
(1).
Alarm 3
Function blocks
A064 An active signal is present at binector U068 Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
(1).
Alarm 4
Function blocks
A065 The auto restart option (P373) restarts the Caution!
drive. A possibly parameterized power-up
Auto restart active delay time (P374) expires if flying restart is not Personnel could be in danger when the drive
selected. During pre-charging of the DC link, automatically restarts. Check whether the auto
there is no time monitoring i.e. with an external restart function is really required!
electronics power supply, it is also switched-in
again.
A066 The measured target frequency of the external Check:
converter (or supply) is greater than the
fsyn > fmax parameterized maximum frequency of the - P452 n/f(max, FWD Spd)/ P453 n/f(max,REV
synchronizing converter. Spd) are correct and

- correct motor data set P578 Src MotDSet

Bit0 are selected
A067 The measured target frequency of the external Check:
converter (or supply) is less than the minimum
fsyn < fmin frequency required for synchronizing. - r533 Sync Target Freq

- Synchronizing cable.
A068 The setpoint frequency of the synchronizing Adjust total setpoint (main and additional
converter deviates too significantly from the setpoints) to the target frequency displayed in
fsyn<>fsoll measured target frequency of the external visualization parameter r533.
converter (or supply). The permissible
deviation can be set in P529.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 21
 06.2006

Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A069 Synchronizing is not started as long as the Wait until acceleration has been completed.
ramp-function generator in the synchronizing
RGen active converter setpoint channel is active. This Check whether
alarm is only output if synchronizing is
selected. - P462 Accel Time

- P463 Accel Time Unit have been correctly

set.
A070 This alarm is output if the phase difference The alarm can only be deleted after
goes outside the synchronizing window (P531) synchronization has been exited.
Sync error after successful synchronization.
A071 An attempt has been made to start Insert the TSY board in the subrack
synchronization with either the synchronizing
tSY missing board not inserted or not parameterized.
A075 The measured values of the leakage Usually the leakage reactance P122 is the
measurement or of rotor resistance deviate average value resulting from the measured
Ls, Rr Dev. significantly. values in r546.1...12, and the rotor resistance
r126 from the values in r542.1..3.

If individual measured values significantly

deviate from the average values, they are
automatically not taken into account for the
calculation (for RI) or the value of the
automatic parameterization remains (for Ls).
It is only necessary to check the results for
their plausibility in the case of drives with high
requirements on torque or speed accuracy.
A076 The determined compensation time was Converter output and motor output are too
limited to the value range of 0.5 µs - 1.5 µs. different.
t-comp lim
Check motor data input P095 to P109.
A077 The measured resistance has been limited to Converter output and motor output are too
the maximum value of 49 %. different.
r-g limit
Check motor data input P095 to P109.
A078 The standstill measurement is executed when If the standstill measurement can be executed
the converter is powered up. The motor can without any danger:
Stands. Meas align itself several times in a certain direction
with this measurement. - Power up the converter.
A079 The rotating measurement has been aborted P561 Src InvRelese - Release the inverter
or cannot commence because an inverter stop
Mld Inv Stop command is present. If necessary, re-start the measurement by
powering-up the converter.
A080 When the converter is powered up, the If the rotating measurement can be executed
rotating measurement automatically without any danger:
MotId:Dr.M accelerates the drive. The drive can then only
be externally controlled in a restricted fashion. - Power up the converter.
A081 The following description refers to the 1st New configuration necessary
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see operating
CB alarm instructions for CB board.

The ID byte combinations which are being

sent from the DP master in the configuration
telegram are not in conformance with the
permissible ID byte combinations. (See also
Compendium, Chapter 8, Table 8.2-12).
Consequence:
No connection is made with the PROFIBUS
master.
A082 The following description refers to the 1st New configuration necessary.
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
CB alarm operating instructions for the CB board.

No valid PPO type can be identified from the

configuration telegram of the DP master.
Consequence:
No connection is made with the PROFIBUS
master.

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

22 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A083 The following description refers to the 1st See operating instructions of the CB board
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
CB alarm operating instructions for the CB board.

No net data or invalid net data (e.g. complete

control word STW1=0) are being received
from the DP master.
Consequence:
The process data are not passed on to the
dual port RAM. If P722 (P695) is not equal to
zero, this will cause the fault message F082 to
be tripped.
A084 The following description refers to the 1st See operating instructions of the CB board
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
CB alarm operating instructions for the CB board.

The telegram traffic between the DP master

and the CBP has been interrupted (e.g. cable
break, bus cable pulled out or DP master
powered down).
Consequence:
If P722 (P695) is not equal to zero, this will
cause the fault message F082 to be tripped.
A085 The following description refers to the 1st See operating instructions of the CB board
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
CB alarm operating instructions for the CB board.

The CBP does not generate this alarm!

A086 The following description refers to the 1st See operating instructions of the CB board
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
CB alarm operating instructions for the CB board.

Failure of the heartbeat counter on the basic

unit. The heartbeat counter on the basic unit is
no longer being incremented. The
communication between the CBP and the
basic board is disturbed.
A087 The following description refers to the 1st See operating instructions of the CB board
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
CB alarm operating instructions for the CB board.

Fault in the DPS manager software of the

CBP.
A088 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board

CB alarm
A089 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
CB alarm A81 of the 1st CB board
A090 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
CB alarm A82 of the 1st CB board
A091 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
CB alarm A83 of the 1st CB board
A092 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
CB alarm A84 of the 1st CB board
A093 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
CB alarm A85 of the 1st CB board
A094 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
CB alarm A86 of the 1st CB board
A095 Alarm of the 2nd CB board. Corresponds to See user manual for CB board
A87 of the 1st CB board
CB alarm
See operating instructions for CB board

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 23
 06.2006

Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A096 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
CB alarm A88 of the 1st CB board
A097 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A098 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A099 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A100 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A101 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A102 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A103 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A104 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A105 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A106 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A107 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A108 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A109 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A110 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A111 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A112 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 1
A113 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A114 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A115 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A116 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A117 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

24 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
06.2006

Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A118 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A119 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A120 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A121 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A122 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A123 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A124 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A125 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A126 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A127 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
A128 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board

TB alarm 2
Table 2 Alarm numbers, causes and their counter-measures

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI)

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Compendium Vector Control 25
 06.2006

Fatal errors (FF) Fatal errors are serious hardware or software errors which no longer
permit normal operation of the unit. They only appear on the PMU in
the form "FF<No>". The software is re-booted by actuating any key on
the PMU.

Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

FF01 A time slot overflow which cannot be corrected - Increase sampling time (P357 or reduce
has been detected in the higher-priority time pulse frequency (P340)
Time slot overflow slots.
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
FF03 Serious faults have occurred while accessing - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
external option boards (CB, TB, SCB, TSY ..). PLUS type)
Access fault
Optional board - Replace the LBA

- Replace the option board

FF04 A fault has occurred during the test of the - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
RAM. PLUS type)
RAM
FF05 A fault has occurred during the test of the - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
EPROM. PLUS type)
EPROM fault
FF06 Stack has overflowed For VC: Increase sampling time (P357)
For MC: Reduce pulse frequency (P340)
Stack overflow
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
FF07 Stack underflow - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Stack Underflow
- Replace firmware
FF08 Invalid processor command should be - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
processed PLUS type)
Undefined Opcode
- Replace firmware
FF09 Invalid format in a protected processor - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
command PLUS type)
Protection Fault
- Replace firmware
FF10 Word access to uneven address - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Illegal Word Operand
Address - Replace firmware
FF11 Jump command to uneven address - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Illegal Instruction
Access - Replace firmware
FF13 A version conflict between the firmware and - Replace firmware
the hardware has occurred. - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
Wrong firmware PLUS type)
version
FF14 Unexpected fatal error Replace the board

FF processing (During processing of the fatal errors, a fault

number has occurred which is unknown to
date).
FF15 Stack overflow (C-Compiler Stack) Replace the board

CSTACK_OVERFLOW
FF16 NMI - Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
NMI error PLUS type)
Table 3 Fatal errors

6SE7087-6QX60 (Version AI) Siemens AG

26 Compendium Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES